BeneView T5/ BeneView T8 Patient Monitor Operator’s Manual

I

© Copyright 2006-2012 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

For this Operator’s Manual, the issue date is 2012-08.

WARNING

Federal Law (USA) restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

II

Intellectual Property Statement SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray) owns the intellectual property

rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or patents

and does not convey any license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others.

Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure of the information in this

manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaption and translation of this manual in any manner

whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.

, , and are the registered trademarks or trademarks owned

by Mindray in China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial

purposes without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their respective owners.

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.

All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for errors contained herein

nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.

Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product, only if:

all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product are conducted by

Mindray authorized personnel;

the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and local requirements;

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

WARNING

This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.

It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a reasonable

service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or personal injury.

III

Warranty THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Exemptions

Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other charges or liability for

direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the

use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.

This warranty shall not extend to

Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.

Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.

Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.

Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or unauthorized service people.

Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.

Others not caused by instrument or part itself.

Company Contact

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech industrial park, Nanshan,Shenzhen

518057,P.R.China

Website: www.mindray.com

E-mail Address: service@mindray.com

Tel: +86 755 81888998

Fax: +86 755 26582680

EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)

Address: Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany

Tel: 0049-40-2513175

Fax: 0049-40-255726

IV

Preface Manual Purpose

This manual contains the instructions necessary to operate the product safely and in accordance with its function and

intended use. Observance of this manual is a prerequisite for proper product performance and correct operation and

ensures patient and operator safety.

This manual is based on the maximum configuration and therefore some contents may not apply to your product. If you

have any question, please contact us.

This manual is an integral part of the product. It should always be kept close to the equipment so that it can be obtained

conveniently when needed.

Intended Audience

This manual is geared for clinical professionals who are expected to have a working knowledge of medical procedures,

practices and terminology as required for monitoring of critically ill patients.

Illustrations

All illustrations in this manual serve as examples only. They may not necessarily reflect the setup or data displayed on

your patient monitor.

Conventions

Italic text is used in this manual to quote the referenced chapters or sections.

[ ] is used to enclose screen texts.

is used to indicate operational procedures.→

1

Contents

1 Safety ································································································································································· 1-1 1.1 Safety Information................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1.1 Dangers...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 Warnings.................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 Cautions..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.4 Notes........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

1.2 Equipment Symbols.............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-3

2 The Basics··························································································································································· 2-1 2.1 Monitor Description.............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1.1 Intended Use............................................................................................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Main Unit................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.2.1 Front View ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.2.2 Side View ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-3 2.2.3 Rear View ................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.4 Bottom View（BeneView T8）.......................................................................................................................................... 2-6

2.3 Satellite Module Rack ........................................................................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.4 Modules..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-7

2.4.1 Multi-Parameter Module ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.4.2 BeneView T1............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-9

2.5 Display Screen.......................................................................................................................................................................................2-10 2.6 QuickKeys ...............................................................................................................................................................................................2-12

3 Basic Operations ··············································································································································· 3-1 3.1 Installation................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1.1 Unpacking and Checking.................................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 Environmental Requirements............................................................................................................................................ 3-2

3.2 Getting Started ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 Turning Power On................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.2 Starting Monitoring............................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.3 Disconnecting from Power................................................................................................................................................................. 3-3 3.4 Using a Mouse......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.5 Using Keys ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3-4 3.6 Using Keyboards .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.7 Using the Touchscreen......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.8 Setting the Screen ................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-5 3.9 Using the Main Menu ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.10 Setting Parameters.............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-6

3.10.1 Switching the Parameters On/Off.................................................................................................................................. 3-6 3.10.2 Accessing the Parameters Menu .................................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.10.3 Removing a Module Conflict ........................................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.10.4 Removing a Label Conflict................................................................................................................................................ 3-8

2

3.11 Using a CF Storage Card....................................................................................................................................................................3-8 3.12 Changing General Settings..............................................................................................................................................................3-9

3.12.1 Setting up a Monitor...........................................................................................................................................................3-9 3.12.2 Changing Language ...........................................................................................................................................................3-9 3.12.3 Adjusting the Screen Brightness ....................................................................................................................................3-9 3.12.4 Showing/Hiding the Help .................................................................................................................................................3-9 3.12.5 Setting the Date and Time............................................................................................................................................. 3-10 3.12.6 Adjusting Volume ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-10

4 Managing Patients·············································································································································4-1 4.1 Admitting a Patient ...............................................................................................................................................................................4-1 4.2 Quick Admitting a Patient...................................................................................................................................................................4-1 4.3 Querying and Obtaining Patient Information .............................................................................................................................4-2 4.4 Associating Patient Information .......................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.5 Editing Patient Information................................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.6 Discharging a Patient............................................................................................................................................................................4-3 4.7 Transferring a Patient............................................................................................................................................................................4-3

4.7.1 Transferring Patient Data via MPM/T1 ............................................................................................................................4-4 4.7.2 Transferring Patient Data via Storage Medium............................................................................................................4-5

4.8 Connecting to a Central Monitoring System ...............................................................................................................................4-6

5 Managing Configurations ·································································································································5-1 5.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................................................5-1 5.2 Entering the [Manage Configuration] Menu................................................................................................................................5-2 5.3 Changing Department.........................................................................................................................................................................5-2 5.4 Setting Default Configuration...........................................................................................................................................................5-3 5.5 Saving Current Settings .......................................................................................................................................................................5-3 5.6 Editing Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................5-4 5.7 Deleting a Configuration.....................................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.8 Transferring a Configuration ..............................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.9 Loading a Configuration......................................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.10 Restoring the Latest Configuration Automatically..................................................................................................................5-6 5.11 Modifying Password ...........................................................................................................................................................................5-6

6 User Screens ·······················································································································································6-1 6.1 Tailoring Your Screens...........................................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Setting the Waveform Sweep Mode................................................................................................................................6-1 6.1.2 Changing the Wave Line Size .............................................................................................................................................6-1 6.1.3 Changing Measurement Colors ........................................................................................................................................6-1 6.1.4 Changing Screen Layout......................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.2 Viewing Minitrends ...............................................................................................................................................................................6-2 6.2.1 Having a Split-Screen View of Minitrends .....................................................................................................................6-2 6.2.2 Setting Minitrends .................................................................................................................................................................6-2

6.3 Viewing OxyCRG.....................................................................................................................................................................................6-3 6.4 Viewing Other Patients ........................................................................................................................................................................6-4

6.4.1 Care Group................................................................................................................................................................................6-4

3

6.4.2 Viewing the Care Group Overview Bar ........................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.4.3 Understanding the View Other Patient Window ........................................................................................................ 6-5

6.5 Understanding the Big Numerics Screen...................................................................................................................................... 6-6

7 Alarms ································································································································································ 7-1 7.1 Alarm Categories.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Alarm Levels............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-2 7.3 Alarm Indicators ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.3.1 Alarm Lamp .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-2 7.3.2 Alarm Message........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-3 7.3.3 Flashing Numeric.................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.3.4 Audible Alarm Tones ............................................................................................................................................................. 7-3 7.3.5 Alarm Status Symbols........................................................................................................................................................... 7-4

7.4 Alarm Tone Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................. 7-4 7.4.1 Setting the Minimum Alarm Volume .............................................................................................................................. 7-4 7.4.2 Changing the Alarm Volume.............................................................................................................................................. 7-4 7.4.3 Setting the Interval between Alarm Sounds................................................................................................................ 7-5 7.4.4 Changing the Alarm Tone Pattern.................................................................................................................................... 7-5 7.4.5 Setting the Reminder Tones ............................................................................................................................................... 7-6

7.5 Understanding the Alarm Setup Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.5.1 Setting Alarm Properties for All Parameters................................................................................................................. 7-7 7.5.2 Adjusting Alarm Limits Automatically ............................................................................................................................ 7-7 7.5.3 Setting Alarm Delay Time..................................................................................................................................................7-11 7.5.4 Setting Recording Length .................................................................................................................................................7-11 7.5.5 Entering CPB Mode..............................................................................................................................................................7-11

7.6 Pausing Alarms .....................................................................................................................................................................................7-12 7.7 Swiching Off All Alarms .....................................................................................................................................................................7-13 7.8 Silencing the Alarm Sound...............................................................................................................................................................7-13 7.9 Latching Alarms....................................................................................................................................................................................7-14 7.10 Silencing Technical Alarms.............................................................................................................................................................7-14 7.11 Testing Alarms ....................................................................................................................................................................................7-15 7.12 When an Alarm Occurs ....................................................................................................................................................................7-15 7.13 Using Care Group Alarms ...............................................................................................................................................................7-15

7.13.1 Care Group Auto Alarms .................................................................................................................................................7-15 7.13.2 Setting Care Group Alert Tone ......................................................................................................................................7-16 7.13.3 Silencing Care Group Alarms.........................................................................................................................................7-16

8 Monitoring ECG ················································································································································· 8-1 8.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-1 8.2 Safety.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.3 Preparing to Monitor ECG................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2

8.3.1 Preparing the Patient and Placing the Electrodes...................................................................................................... 8-2 8.3.2 Choosing AHA or IEC Lead Placement............................................................................................................................ 8-2 8.3.3 ECG Lead Placements ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-2 8.3.4 Checking Paced Status ......................................................................................................................................................... 8-4

8.4 Understanding the ECG Display ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-5

4

8.5 Changing ECG Settings........................................................................................................................................................................8-6 8.5.1 Accessing ECG Menus...........................................................................................................................................................8-6 8.5.2 Setting Pacemaker Rate (For Mortara only) ..................................................................................................................8-6 8.5.3 Choosing the Alarm Source................................................................................................................................................8-6 8.5.4 Setting the ECG Lead Set .....................................................................................................................................................8-6 8.5.5 Choosing an ECG Display Screen......................................................................................................................................8-6 8.5.6 Changing the ECG Filter Settings .....................................................................................................................................8-7 8.5.7 Setting the Notch Filter ........................................................................................................................................................8-7 8.5.8 Changing the Pacer Reject Settings ................................................................................................................................8-7 8.5.9 About the Defibrillator Synchronization........................................................................................................................8-8 8.5.10 Changing ECG Wave Settings ..........................................................................................................................................8-8 8.5.11 Enabling Smart Lead Off ...................................................................................................................................................8-8 8.5.12 Setting the Alarm Level for ECG Lead Off Alarms.....................................................................................................8-8 8.5.13 Adjusting QRS Volume .......................................................................................................................................................8-9

8.6 About ST Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................................8-9 8.6.1 Switching ST On and Off......................................................................................................................................................8-9 8.6.2 Changing ST Filter Settings.................................................................................................................................................8-9 8.6.3 Understanding the ST Display ........................................................................................................................................ 8-10 8.6.4 Saving the Current ST Segment as Reference........................................................................................................... 8-10 8.6.5 Changing the Reference Segment ................................................................................................................................ 8-11 8.6.6 Deleting a Reference Segment....................................................................................................................................... 8-11 8.6.7 Recording the ST Segment .............................................................................................................................................. 8-11 8.6.8 Changing the ST Alarm Limits ........................................................................................................................................ 8-11 8.6.9 Setting the ST Alarm Delay Time ................................................................................................................................... 8-11 8.6.10 Adjusting ST Measurement Points.............................................................................................................................. 8-11

8.7 About Arrhythmia Monitoring ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-12 8.7.1 Understanding the Arrhythmia Events........................................................................................................................ 8-12 8.7.2 Changing Arrhythmia Alarm Settings.......................................................................................................................... 8-14 8.7.3 Changing Arrhythmia Threshold Settings.................................................................................................................. 8-14 8.7.4 Setting the Extended Arrh. (For Mindray Algorithm Only) .................................................................................. 8-15 8.7.5 Reviewing Arrhythmia Events......................................................................................................................................... 8-15

8.8 ECG Relearning .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-16 8.8.1 Initiating an ECG Relearning Manually ........................................................................................................................ 8-16 8.8.2 Automatic ECG Relearning............................................................................................................................................... 8-16

8.9 12-Lead ECG Monitoring .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-17 8.9.1 Entering the 12-lead ECG Monitoring Screen ........................................................................................................... 8-17 8.9.2 Interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG .......................................................................................................................... 8-18 8.9.3 Reviewing Interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG Results..................................................................................... 8-19

9 Monitoring Respiration (Resp) ·························································································································9-1 9.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................................................9-1 9.2 Safety Information.................................................................................................................................................................................9-1 9.3 Understanding the Resp Display......................................................................................................................................................9-1 9.4 Placing Resp Electrodes.......................................................................................................................................................................9-2

9.4.1 Optimizing Lead Placement for Resp..............................................................................................................................9-2 9.4.2 Cardiac Overlay .......................................................................................................................................................................9-2

5

9.4.3 Abdominal Breathing ........................................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.4.4 Lateral Chest Expansion....................................................................................................................................................... 9-3

9.5 Choosing the Respiration Lead......................................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.6 Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay ................................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.7 Changing Resp Detection Mode...................................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.8 Changing Resp Wave Settings .......................................................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.9 Setting RR Source................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4 9.10 Setting alarm properties................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5

10 Monitoring PR ··············································································································································· 10-1 10.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................................10-1 10.2 Setting the PR Source ......................................................................................................................................................................10-1 10.3 Selecting the Active Alarm Source..............................................................................................................................................10-2 10.4 QRS Tone...............................................................................................................................................................................................10-2

11 Monitoring SpO2 ··········································································································································· 11-1 11.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................................11-1 11.2 Safety .....................................................................................................................................................................................................11-2 11.3 Identifying SpO2 Connectors.........................................................................................................................................................11-2 11.4 Applying the Sensor.........................................................................................................................................................................11-2 11.5 Changing SpO2 Settings..................................................................................................................................................................11-3

11.5.1 Accessing SpO2 Menus.....................................................................................................................................................11-3 11.5.2 Adjusting the Desat Alarm .............................................................................................................................................11-3 11.5.3 Setting SpO2 Sensitivity...................................................................................................................................................11-3 11.5.4 Changing Averaging Time..............................................................................................................................................11-3 11.5.5 Monitoring SpO2 and NIBP Simultaneously.............................................................................................................11-3 11.5.6 Sat-Seconds Alarm Management ................................................................................................................................11-4 11.5.7 Changing the Speed of the Pleth/Plethb Wave ......................................................................................................11-5 11.5.8 Setting the Alarm Level for SpO2 Sensor Off Alarm...............................................................................................11-5 11.5.9 Setting the SpO2 Tone Mode .........................................................................................................................................11-5

11.6 Measurement Limitations ..............................................................................................................................................................11-5 11.7 Masimo Information.........................................................................................................................................................................11-6 11.8 Nellcor Information ..........................................................................................................................................................................11-6

12 Monitoring NIBP ··········································································································································· 12-1 12.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................................12-1 12.2 Safety .....................................................................................................................................................................................................12-2 12.3 Measurement Limitations ..............................................................................................................................................................12-2 12.4 Measurement Methods...................................................................................................................................................................12-2 12.5 Setting Up the NIBP Measurement .............................................................................................................................................12-3

12.5.1 Preparing to Measure NIBP ............................................................................................................................................12-3 12.5.2 Starting and Stopping Measurements.......................................................................................................................12-3 12.5.3 Correcting the Measurement if Limb is not at Heart Level.................................................................................12-3 12.5.4 Enabling NIBP Auto Cycling and Setting the Interval...........................................................................................12-3 12.5.5 Starting a STAT Measurement .......................................................................................................................................12-4

12.6 Understanding the NIBP Numerics.............................................................................................................................................12-4

6

12.7 Changing NIBP Settings ................................................................................................................................................................. 12-4 12.7.1 Setting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure.................................................................................................................. 12-4 12.7.2 Setting NIBP Alarm Properties ..................................................................................................................................... 12-5 12.7.3 Switching On NIBP End Tone ........................................................................................................................................ 12-5 12.7.4 Displaying NIBP List.......................................................................................................................................................... 12-5 12.7.5 Setting the Pressure Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 12-5

12.8 Assisting Venous Puncture............................................................................................................................................................ 12-5

13 Monitoring Temp ···········································································································································13-1 13.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................................................ 13-1 13.2 Safety .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1 13.3 Making a Temp Measurement ..................................................................................................................................................... 13-1 13.4 Understanding the Temp Display............................................................................................................................................... 13-1 13.5 Setting the Temperature Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 13-2

14 Monitoring IBP···············································································································································14-1 14.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................................................ 14-1 14.2 Safety .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1 14.3 Setting Up the Pressure Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 14-2 14.4 Understanding the IBP Display.................................................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.5 Changing IBP Settings .................................................................................................................................................................... 14-3

14.5.1 Changing a Pressure for Monitoring.......................................................................................................................... 14-3 14.5.2 Setting Alarm Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 14-4 14.5.3 Changing Averaging Time ............................................................................................................................................. 14-4 14.5.4 Setting the Pressure Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 14-4 14.5.5 Setting Up the IBP Wave................................................................................................................................................. 14-4

14.6 Measuring PAWP............................................................................................................................................................................... 14-5 14.6.1 Preparing to Measure PAWP.......................................................................................................................................... 14-5 14.6.2 Setting Up the PAWP Measurement........................................................................................................................... 14-6 14.6.3 Understanding the PAWP Setup Menu ..................................................................................................................... 14-6

14.7 Zeroing the Transducer .................................................................................................................................................................. 14-7

15 Monitoring Cardiac Output ··························································································································15-1 15.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-1 15.2 Understanding the C.O. Display .................................................................................................................................................. 15-2 15.3 Influencing Factors........................................................................................................................................................................... 15-2 15.4 Setting Up the C.O. Measurement.............................................................................................................................................. 15-3 15.5 Measuring the Blood Temperature ............................................................................................................................................ 15-6 15.6 Changing C.O. Settings................................................................................................................................................................... 15-6

15.6.1 Setting the Temperature Unit....................................................................................................................................... 15-6 15.6.2 Setting Alarm Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 15-6

16 Monitoring CCO/SvO2 ····································································································································16-1 16.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-1 16.2 Safety .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1 16.3 Automatic Communication Detection ..................................................................................................................................... 16-2

7

16.4 Connecting the Device....................................................................................................................................................................16-2 16.4.1 Connecting the Vigilance II® Monitor .........................................................................................................................16-2 16.4.2 Connecting the VigileoTM Monitor ...............................................................................................................................16-3

16.5 Understanding CCO Parameters ..................................................................................................................................................16-5 16.6 Understanding the CCO Display ..................................................................................................................................................16-6 16.7 Changing CCO Settings...................................................................................................................................................................16-6

16.7.1 Selecting Vascular Resistance Unit ..............................................................................................................................16-6 16.7.2 Selecting the Displayed Parameters ...........................................................................................................................16-6 16.7.3 Checking the C.O. Measurements................................................................................................................................16-6 16.7.4 Setting Signal Output.......................................................................................................................................................16-7 16.7.5 Selecting Alarm Properties.............................................................................................................................................16-7

16.8 Understanding SvO2 Parameters .................................................................................................................................................16-7 16.9 Understanding the SvO2 Display .................................................................................................................................................16-8 16.10 Changing SvO2 Settings ...............................................................................................................................................................16-8

16.10.1 Setting Signal Output ....................................................................................................................................................16-8 16.10.2 Selecting Alarm Properties ..........................................................................................................................................16-8

17 Monitoring PiCCO ········································································································································· 17-1 17.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................................17-1 17.2 Safety Information ............................................................................................................................................................................17-1 17.3 Zeroing the Transducer ...................................................................................................................................................................17-2 17.4 Setting up the PiCCO Measurements.........................................................................................................................................17-3 17.5 Preparation for PiCCO Measurements .......................................................................................................................................17-3 17.6 Performing PiCCO Measurements and CCO Calibration .....................................................................................................17-6 17.7 Understanding the Displayed PiCCO Parameters..................................................................................................................17-8

17.7.1 Understanding the CCO Display...................................................................................................................................17-8 17.7.2 Understanding the pArt Display ..................................................................................................................................17-8 17.7.3 Understanding the pCVP Display ................................................................................................................................17-9

17.8 Understanding PiCCO Parameters ..............................................................................................................................................17-9 17.8.1 Spider Vision ........................................................................................................................................................................17-9 17.8.2 Hemodynamic Parameters.......................................................................................................................................... 17-11 17.8.3 Normal Range Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 17-12

17.9 Changing PiCCO Settings ............................................................................................................................................................ 17-12 17.9.1 Selecting the Displayed Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 17-12 17.9.2 Selecting Alarm Properties.......................................................................................................................................... 17-12

18 Monitoring ScvO2·········································································································································· 18-1 18.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................................18-1 18.2 Safety Information ............................................................................................................................................................................18-1 18.3 Performing ScvO2 Measurements ...............................................................................................................................................18-2 18.4 ScvO2 Calibration...............................................................................................................................................................................18-3 18.5 Understanding the ScvO2 Display ...............................................................................................................................................18-4 18.6 Understanding ScvO2 Parameters...............................................................................................................................................18-4 18.7 Changing ScvO2 Settings................................................................................................................................................................18-4

18.7.1 Selecting Hb/Hct................................................................................................................................................................18-4 18.7.2 Selecting Alarm Properties.............................................................................................................................................18-4

8

19 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide··························································································································19-1 19.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................................................ 19-1 19.2 Identifying CO2 Modules................................................................................................................................................................ 19-2 19.3 Preparing to Measure CO2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 19-2

19.3.1 Using a Sidestream CO2 Module.................................................................................................................................. 19-2 19.3.2 Using a Microstream CO2 Module............................................................................................................................... 19-3 19.3.3 Using a Mainstream CO2 Module ................................................................................................................................ 19-4

19.4 Changing CO2 Settings ................................................................................................................................................................... 19-4 19.4.1 Accessing CO2 Menus ...................................................................................................................................................... 19-4 19.4.2 Entering the Standby Mode.......................................................................................................................................... 19-4 19.4.3 Setting the CO2 Unit......................................................................................................................................................... 19-5 19.4.4 Setting up Gas Compensations ................................................................................................................................... 19-5 19.4.5 Setting up Humidity Compensation.......................................................................................................................... 19-6 19.4.6 Setting the Apnea Alarm Delay ................................................................................................................................... 19-6 19.4.7 Choosing a Time Interval for Peak-Picking .............................................................................................................. 19-6 19.4.8 Setting the Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................................... 19-6 19.4.9 Setting up the CO2 Wave ................................................................................................................................................ 19-7

19.5 Setting RR Source ............................................................................................................................................................................. 19-7 19.6 Setting Barometric Pressure Compensation........................................................................................................................... 19-7 19.7 Measurement Limitations ............................................................................................................................................................. 19-8 19.8 Leakage test........................................................................................................................................................................................ 19-8 19.9 Troubleshooting the Sidestream CO2 Sampling System.................................................................................................... 19-8 19.10 Removing Exhaust Gases from the System .......................................................................................................................... 19-8 19.11 Zeroing the Sensor ........................................................................................................................................................................ 19-9

19.11.1 For Sidestream and Microstream CO2 Modules................................................................................................... 19-9 19.11.2 For Mainstream CO2 Modules .................................................................................................................................... 19-9

19.12 Calibrating the Sensor.................................................................................................................................................................. 19-9 19.13 Oridion Information ....................................................................................................................................................................19-10

20 Monitoring tcGas···········································································································································20-1 20.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................................................ 20-1 20.2 Safety .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-1 20.3 Connecting a TCM monitor........................................................................................................................................................... 20-2 20.4 tcGas Parameters .............................................................................................................................................................................. 20-2 20.5 Displaying tcGas Parameters........................................................................................................................................................ 20-3 20.6 Enter the tcGas Setup menu......................................................................................................................................................... 20-3 20.7 Setting tcpCO2/tcpO2 Unit............................................................................................................................................................. 20-4 20.8 tcGas Display...................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-4

21 Monitoring AG ···············································································································································21-1 21.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................................................ 21-1 21.2 Identifying AG Modules ................................................................................................................................................................. 21-1 21.3 Understanding the AG Display .................................................................................................................................................... 21-2 21.4 MAC Values ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-2 21.5 Preparing to Measure AG............................................................................................................................................................... 21-3 21.6 Changing AG Settings..................................................................................................................................................................... 21-4

9

21.6.1 Setting Gas Unit..................................................................................................................................................................21-4 21.6.2 Setting the Apnea Alarm Delay ....................................................................................................................................21-4 21.6.3 Changing the Sample Flow Rate..................................................................................................................................21-4 21.6.4 Setting up the O2 Compensation.................................................................................................................................21-5 21.6.5 Entering the Standby Mode...........................................................................................................................................21-5 21.6.6 Setting up the AG Wave...................................................................................................................................................21-5 21.6.7 Setting RR Source ..............................................................................................................................................................21-5

21.7 Changing the Anesthetic Agent ..................................................................................................................................................21-6 21.8 Measurement Limitations ..............................................................................................................................................................21-6 21.9 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................................................21-6

21.9.1 When the Gas Inlet is Blocked .......................................................................................................................................21-6 21.9.2 When an Internal Occlusion Occurs ............................................................................................................................21-6

21.10 Removing Exhaust Gases from the System ...........................................................................................................................21-7

22 Monitoring ICG·············································································································································· 22-1 22.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................................22-1 22.2 Safety .....................................................................................................................................................................................................22-1 22.3 Understanding ICG Parameters....................................................................................................................................................22-2

22.3.1 Measured Parameters.......................................................................................................................................................22-2 22.3.2 Calculated Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................22-2

22.4 Understanding the ICG Display....................................................................................................................................................22-3 22.5 ICG Limitations ...................................................................................................................................................................................22-3 22.6 Preparing to Monitor ICG................................................................................................................................................................22-3

22.6.1 Preparing the Patient........................................................................................................................................................22-4 22.6.2 Placing ICG Sensors...........................................................................................................................................................22-4 22.6.3 Setting up the Patient Information .............................................................................................................................22-4

22.7 Changing ICG Settings.....................................................................................................................................................................22-5 22.7.1 ICG Averaging .....................................................................................................................................................................22-5 22.7.2 Selecting Secondary Parameters .................................................................................................................................22-5 22.7.3 Checking Sensors...............................................................................................................................................................22-5 22.7.4 Changing the ICG Wave Speed .....................................................................................................................................22-5

23 Monitoring BIS ·············································································································································· 23-1 23.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................................23-1 23.2 Safety Information ............................................................................................................................................................................23-2 23.3 Understanding the BIS Display.....................................................................................................................................................23-2

23.3.1 BIS Parameter Area............................................................................................................................................................23-2 23.3.2 BIS Waveform Area ............................................................................................................................................................23-5 23.3.3 BIS Expand View .................................................................................................................................................................23-5

23.4 Setting up the BIS Measurement.................................................................................................................................................23-7 23.5 Auto Impedance Check...................................................................................................................................................................23-7 23.6 Sensor Check.......................................................................................................................................................................................23-8 23.7 BIS Sensor Check Window..............................................................................................................................................................23-8 23.8 Choosing the BIS Smoothing Rate..............................................................................................................................................23-9 23.9 Changing the Secondary Parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 23-10 23.10 Changing the EEG Wave Size ................................................................................................................................................... 23-10

10

23.11 Changing the Speed of the EEG Wave..................................................................................................................................23-10 23.12 Setting the Trend Length ..........................................................................................................................................................23-10 23.13 Switching the Filter On or Off ..................................................................................................................................................23-10

24 Monitoring NMT ············································································································································24-1 24.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................................................ 24-1 24.2 Safty....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 24-1 24.3 Connecting a TOF-Watch® SX monitor...................................................................................................................................... 24-1 24.4 NMT Parameters................................................................................................................................................................................ 24-2 24.5 Accessing the NMT Setup menu................................................................................................................................................. 24-2 24.6 NMT Display........................................................................................................................................................................................ 24-3

25 Monitoring RM···············································································································································25-1 25.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................................................ 25-1 25.2 Safety Information............................................................................................................................................................................ 25-2 25.3 Preparing to Monitor RM ............................................................................................................................................................... 25-3 25.4 Understanding the RM Display.................................................................................................................................................... 25-4 25.5 Changing RM Settings .................................................................................................................................................................... 25-4

25.5.1 Accessing RM Menus ....................................................................................................................................................... 25-4 25.5.2 Setting the Apnea Alarm Delay ................................................................................................................................... 25-4 25.5.3 Selecting TV or MV for Display ..................................................................................................................................... 25-5 25.5.4 Selecting Flow or Vol Waveform for Display............................................................................................................ 25-5 25.5.5 Changing the Wave Sweep Speed.............................................................................................................................. 25-5 25.5.6 Changing the Wave Scale............................................................................................................................................... 25-5 25.5.7 Setting RR Source.............................................................................................................................................................. 25-5

25.6 Understanding the Respiratory Loops...................................................................................................................................... 25-6 25.7 Zeroing the RM Module ................................................................................................................................................................. 25-7 25.8 Calibrating the Flow Sensor.......................................................................................................................................................... 25-7

26 Device Integration·········································································································································26-1 26.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................................................ 26-1 26.2 Safety Information............................................................................................................................................................................ 26-1 26.3 Supported Devices........................................................................................................................................................................... 26-2 26.4 Differences in Displayed Values................................................................................................................................................... 26-2 26.5 Connecting an External Device ................................................................................................................................................... 26-3 26.6 Devices Integrated Window.......................................................................................................................................................... 26-5 26.7 System Functions of Patient Monitor ........................................................................................................................................ 26-6

26.7.1 Alarms ................................................................................................................................................................................... 26-6 26.7.2 Data Storage ....................................................................................................................................................................... 26-6 26.7.3 Recording and Printing................................................................................................................................................... 26-6

26.8 Integrating the Anesthesia Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 26-7 26.8.1 Wato 20/30/55/65 ............................................................................................................................................................. 26-7 26.8.2 Maquet Flow-i ..................................................................................................................................................................26-14 26.8.3 Draeger Fabius GS/Fabius Trio/Fabius Plus............................................................................................................26-17 26.8.4 Draeger Primus ................................................................................................................................................................26-21 26.8.5 GE Datex-Ohmeda Aestiva 7900/Aestiva 7100 ....................................................................................................26-27

11

26.8.6 GE Datex-Ohmeda Avance/Aisys .............................................................................................................................. 26-30 26.9 Integrating Ventilator.................................................................................................................................................................... 26-37

26.9.1 Newport E360 .................................................................................................................................................................. 26-37 26.9.2 Puritan Bennett 840 ....................................................................................................................................................... 26-41 26.9.3 Maquet Servo-i/Servo-s................................................................................................................................................ 26-44 26.9.4 Draeger Evita 2................................................................................................................................................................. 26-47 26.9.5 Draeger Evita 4/ Evita2 dura /Evita XL..................................................................................................................... 26-50 26.9.6 Hamilton G5...................................................................................................................................................................... 26-54 26.9.7 Hamilton C2 /Galileo ..................................................................................................................................................... 26-60

27 Freezing Waveforms ····································································································································· 27-1 27.1 Freezing Waveforms .........................................................................................................................................................................27-1 27.2 Viewing Frozen Waveforms............................................................................................................................................................27-1 27.3 Unfreezing Waveforms ....................................................................................................................................................................27-2 27.4 Recording Frozen Waveforms .......................................................................................................................................................27-2

28 Review···························································································································································· 28-1 28.1 Accessing Respective Review Windows....................................................................................................................................28-1 28.2 Reviewing Graphic Trends..............................................................................................................................................................28-1 28.3 Reviewing Tabular Trends...............................................................................................................................................................28-2 28.4 Reviewing Events ..............................................................................................................................................................................28-3 28.5 Reviewing Waveforms .....................................................................................................................................................................28-5

29 Calculations··················································································································································· 29-1 29.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................................................29-1 29.2 Dose Calculations..............................................................................................................................................................................29-2

29.2.1 Performing Calculations..................................................................................................................................................29-2 29.2.2 Selecting the Proper Drug Unit ....................................................................................................................................29-2 29.2.3 Titration Table......................................................................................................................................................................29-3

29.3 Oxygenation Calculations ..............................................................................................................................................................29-3 29.3.1 Performing Calculations..................................................................................................................................................29-3 29.3.2 Entered Parameters...........................................................................................................................................................29-4 29.3.3 Calculated Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................29-4

29.4 Ventilation Calculations ..................................................................................................................................................................29-5 29.4.1 Performing Calculations..................................................................................................................................................29-5 29.4.2 Entered Parameters...........................................................................................................................................................29-5 29.4.3 Calculated Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................29-5

29.5 Hemodynamic Calculations...........................................................................................................................................................29-6 29.5.1 Performing Calculations..................................................................................................................................................29-6 29.5.2 Entered Parameters...........................................................................................................................................................29-6 29.5.3 Calculated Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................29-7

29.6 Renal Calculations .............................................................................................................................................................................29-7 29.6.1 Performing Calculations..................................................................................................................................................29-7 29.6.2 Entered Parameters...........................................................................................................................................................29-8 29.6.3 Calculated Parameters .....................................................................................................................................................29-8

29.7 Understanding the Review Window...........................................................................................................................................29-8

12

30 Recording ·······················································································································································30-1 30.1 Using a Recorder............................................................................................................................................................................... 30-1 30.2 Overview of Recording Types ...................................................................................................................................................... 30-1 30.3 Starting and Stopping Recordings............................................................................................................................................. 30-2 30.4 Setting up the Recorder ................................................................................................................................................................. 30-3

30.4.1 Accessing the Record Setup Menu............................................................................................................................. 30-3 30.4.2 Selecting Waveforms for Recording........................................................................................................................... 30-3 30.4.3 Setting the Realtime Recording Length ................................................................................................................... 30-3 30.4.4 Setting the Interval between Timed Recordings................................................................................................... 30-3 30.4.5 Changing the Recording Speed .................................................................................................................................. 30-3 30.4.6 Clearing Recording Tasks ............................................................................................................................................... 30-3

30.5 Loading Paper.................................................................................................................................................................................... 30-4 30.6 Removing Paper Jam....................................................................................................................................................................... 30-4 30.7 Cleaning the Recorder Printhead ............................................................................................................................................... 30-5

31 Printing···························································································································································31-1 31.1 Printer ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 31-1 31.2 Connecting a printer ....................................................................................................................................................................... 31-1 31.3 Setting Up the Printer ..................................................................................................................................................................... 31-2 31.4 Starting Report Printouts............................................................................................................................................................... 31-2 31.5 Stopping Reports Printouts .......................................................................................................................................................... 31-2 31.6 Setting Up Reports........................................................................................................................................................................... 31-3

31.6.1 Setting Up ECG Reports.................................................................................................................................................. 31-3 31.6.2 Setting Up Tabular Trends Reports ............................................................................................................................. 31-3 31.6.3 Setting Up Graphic Trends Reports ............................................................................................................................ 31-3 31.6.4 Setting Up Realtime Reports ........................................................................................................................................ 31-4

31.7 End Case Reports.............................................................................................................................................................................. 31-4 31.8 Printer Statuses.................................................................................................................................................................................. 31-4

31.8.1 Printer Out of Paper.......................................................................................................................................................... 31-4 31.8.2 Printer Status Messages.................................................................................................................................................. 31-4

32 Other Functions ·············································································································································32-1 32.1 Marking Events.................................................................................................................................................................................. 32-1 32.2 Privacy Mode...................................................................................................................................................................................... 32-1 32.3 Night Mode......................................................................................................................................................................................... 32-2 32.4 Analog Output................................................................................................................................................................................... 32-2 32.5 Transferring Data .............................................................................................................................................................................. 32-3

32.5.1 Data Export System.......................................................................................................................................................... 32-3 32.5.2 Transferring Data by Different Means........................................................................................................................ 32-3

32.6 Nurse Call............................................................................................................................................................................................. 32-4 32.7 Remote Display ................................................................................................................................................................................. 32-5 32.8 Built-in PC (only applicable to BeneView T8 patient monitor)......................................................................................... 32-5

32.8.1 Configuring Application Program ShortCuts ......................................................................................................... 32-5 32.8.2 Using PC Software ............................................................................................................................................................ 32-7 32.8.3 Switching over Users ....................................................................................................................................................... 32-7 32.8.4 Remote Login ..................................................................................................................................................................... 32-7

13

32.8.5 Using McAfee Solidifier....................................................................................................................................................32-8 32.9 Wireless Network ...............................................................................................................................................................................32-8 32.10 Using DVI-VGA Adapter Box........................................................................................................................................................32-9

33 Batteries ························································································································································ 33-1 33.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................................................33-1 33.2 Installing or Replacing a Battery ..................................................................................................................................................33-2 33.3 Conditioning a Battery ....................................................................................................................................................................33-3 33.4 Checking a Battery............................................................................................................................................................................33-4 33.5 Recycling a Battery ...........................................................................................................................................................................33-4

34 Care and Cleaning········································································································································· 34-1 34.1 General Points.....................................................................................................................................................................................34-1 34.2 Cleaning................................................................................................................................................................................................34-2 34.3 Disinfecting .........................................................................................................................................................................................34-2

35 Maintenance·················································································································································· 35-1 35.1 Safety Checks ......................................................................................................................................................................................35-1 35.2 Maintenance and Testing Schedule............................................................................................................................................35-2 35.3 Checking Monitor and Module Information ...........................................................................................................................35-4 35.4 Calibrating ECG ..................................................................................................................................................................................35-4 35.5 NIBP Leakage Test..............................................................................................................................................................................35-4 35.6 NIBP Accuracy Test ............................................................................................................................................................................35-5 35.7 Calibrating NIBP .................................................................................................................................................................................35-6 35.8 Calibrating CO2 ...................................................................................................................................................................................35-6 35.9 Calibrating AG.....................................................................................................................................................................................35-8 35.10 Calibrating the Touchscreen .......................................................................................................................................................35-9 35.11 Electrical Safty Tests .......................................................................................................................................................................35-9 35.12 Setting up IP Address ....................................................................................................................................................................35-9 35.13 Entering/Exiting Demo Mode ................................................................................................................................................. 35-10

36 Accessories ···················································································································································· 36-1 36.1 ECG Accessories .................................................................................................................................................................................36-1 36.2 SpO2 Accessories................................................................................................................................................................................36-3 36.3 NIBP Accessories ................................................................................................................................................................................36-4 36.4 Temp Accessories ..............................................................................................................................................................................36-5 36.5 IBP/ICP Accessories ...........................................................................................................................................................................36-6 36.6 C.O. Accessories..................................................................................................................................................................................36-7 36.7 CCO/SvO2 Accessories......................................................................................................................................................................36-7 36.8 CO2 Accessories ..................................................................................................................................................................................36-7 36.9 AG Accessories....................................................................................................................................................................................36-8 36.10 ICG Accessories ................................................................................................................................................................................36-9 36.11 BIS Accessories.................................................................................................................................................................................36-9 36.12 RM Accessories.................................................................................................................................................................................36-9 36.13 PiCCO Accessories...........................................................................................................................................................................36-9 36.14 ScvO2 Accessories............................................................................................................................................................................36-9

14

36.15 BeneLink Accessories..................................................................................................................................................................36-10 36.16 Others...............................................................................................................................................................................................36-10

A Product Specifications ····································································································································· A-1 A.1 Monitor Safety Specifications .......................................................................................................................................................... A-1 A.2 Physical Specifications........................................................................................................................................................................ A-3 A.3 Hardware Specifications .................................................................................................................................................................... A-4 A.4 Data Storage........................................................................................................................................................................................... A-7 A.5 Wireless Network .................................................................................................................................................................................. A-7 A.6 Measurement Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................ A-8

B EMC···································································································································································· B-1

C Default Configurations ·····································································································································C-1 C.1 Parameters Configuration ..................................................................................................................................................................C-1 C.2 Routine Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................... C-16 C.3 User Maintenance Items .................................................................................................................................................................. C-20

D Alarm Messages ··············································································································································· D-1 D.1 Physiological Alarm Messages......................................................................................................................................................... D-1 D.2 Technical Alarm Messages................................................................................................................................................................. D-2

E Electrical Safety Inspection·······························································································································E-1 E.1 Power Cord Plug .....................................................................................................................................................................................E-1 E.2 Device Enclosure and Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................E-2 E.3 Device Labelling .....................................................................................................................................................................................E-2 E.4 Protective Earth Resistance ................................................................................................................................................................E-2 E.5 Earth Leakage Test .................................................................................................................................................................................E-3 E.6 Patient Leakage Current ......................................................................................................................................................................E-3 E.7 Mains on Applied Part Leakage ........................................................................................................................................................E-4 E.8 Patient Auxiliary Current .....................................................................................................................................................................E-4

F Symbols and Abbreviations······························································································································F-1 F.1 Symbols...................................................................................................................................................................................................... F-1 F.2 Abbreviations........................................................................................................................................................................................... F-2

1-1

1 Safety

1.1 Safety Information

DANGER

Indicates an imminent hazard that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

Indicates a potential hazard or unsafe practice that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Indicates a potential hazard or unsafe practice that, if not avoided, could result in minor personal injury or

product/property damage.

NOTE

Provides application tips or other useful information to ensure that you get the most from your product.

1.1.1 Dangers There are no dangers that refer to the product in general. Specific “Danger” statements may be given in the respective

sections of this manual.

1-2

1.1.2 Warnings

WARNINGS

Before putting the system into operation, the operator must verify that the equipment, connecting cables

and accessories are in correct working order and operating condition.

The equipment must be connected to a properly installed power outlet with protective earth contacts only.

If the installation does not provide for a protective earth conductor, disconnect it from the power line and

operate it on battery power, if possible.

To avoid explosion hazard, do not use the equipment in the presence of oxygen-rich atmospheres,

flammable anesthetics, or other flammable agents (such as gasoline).

Do not open the equipment housings. All servicing and future upgrades must be carried out by the

personnel trained and authorized by our company only.

Do not come into contact with patients during defibrillation. Otherwise serious injury or death could

result.

Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for patient monitoring. Adjustment of alarm volume to

a low level or off may result in a hazard to the patient. Remember that alarm settings should be customized

according to different patient situations and always keeping the patient under close surveillance is the

most reliable way for safe patient monitoring.

The physiological data and alarm messages displayed on the equipment are for reference only and cannot

be directly used for diagnostic interpretation.

To avoid inadvertent disconnection, route all cables in a way to prevent a stumbling hazard. Wrap and

secure excess cabling to reduce risk of entanglement or strangulation by patients or personnel.

Dispose of the package material, observing the applicable waste control regulations and keeping it out of

children’s reach.

1.1.3 Cautions

CAUTIONS

To ensure patient safety, use only parts and accessories specified in this manual.

At the end of its service life, the equipment, as well as its accessories, must be disposed of in compliance

with the guidelines regulating the disposal of such products. If you have any questions concerning

disposal of the equipment, please contact us.

Magnetic and electrical fields are capable of interfering with the proper performance of the equipment.

For this reason make sure that all external devices operated in the vicinity of the equipment comply with

the relevant EMC requirements. Mobile phone, X-ray equipment or MRI devices are a possible source of

interference as they may emit higher levels of electromagnetic radiation.

Before connecting the equipment to the power line, check that the voltage and frequency ratings of the

power line are the same as those indicated on the equipment’s label or in this manual.

Always install or carry the equipment properly to avoid damage caused by drop, impact, strong vibration

or other mechanical force.

1-3

1.1.4 Notes NOTES

Put the equipment in a location where you can easily see the screen and access the operating controls.

Keep this manual in the vicinity of the equipment so that it can be obtained conveniently when needed.

The software was developed in compliance with IEC60601-1-4. The possibility of hazards arising from

software errors is minimized.

This manual describes all features and options. Your equipment may not have all of them.

1.2 Equipment Symbols

NOTE

Some symbols may not appear on your equipment.

Attention: Consult accompanying documents (this manual).

Power ON/OFF (for a part of the

equipment) Battery indicator

Alternating current (AC)

Alarms paused

Alarm silenced

Record

Freeze/unfreeze waveforms

Main menu

NIBP start/stop key

Connector for satellite module rack

Equipotential grounding

Video output

USB connector

Network connector

CIS connector

Auxiliary output

Defibrillator Zero key

Check sensor Calibrate key

Measure/standby Inserted direction

Gas outlet

Serial number

1-4

CIS connector

Manufacture date

The product bears CE mark indicating its conformity with the provisions of the Council Directive

93/42/EEC concerning medical devices and fulfils the essential requirements of Annex I of this

directive.

European community representative

ESD warning symbol for electrostatic sensitive devices.

Type CF applied part. Defibrillator-proof protection against electric shock.

Type BF applied part. Defibrillator-proof protection against electric shock.

The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU member states only.

This symbol indicates that this product should not be treated as household waste. By ensuring that

this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent bringing potential negative

consequences to the environment and human health. For more detailed information with regard to

returning and recycling this product, please consult the distributor from whom you purchased it.

* For system products, this label may be attached to the main unit only.

2-1

2 The Basics

2.1 Monitor Description

2.1.1 Intended Use This patient monitor is intended to be used for monitoring, displaying, reviewing, storing and transferring of multiple

physiological parameters including ECG, heart rate (HR), respiration (Resp), temperature (Temp), SpO2, pulse rate (PR),

non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP), invasive blood pressure (IBP), cardiac output (C.O.), carbon dioxide (CO2), oxygen (O2),

anesthetic gas (AG), impedance cardiograph (ICG), bispectral index (BIS), respiration mechanics (RM), continuous cardiac

output(PiCCO), and central venous oxygen saturation(ScvO2).

This monitor is to be used in healthcare facilities by clinical professionals or under their direction. It is not intended for

helicopter transport, hospital ambulance, or home use.

WARNING

This patient monitor is intended for use only by clinical professionals or under their guidance. It must only

be used by persons who have received adequate training in its use. Anyone unauthorized or untrained

must not perform any operation on it.

2.2 Main Unit

2.2.1 Front View

1

2

3

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

2-2

1. Alarm lamp

When a physiological alarm or technical alarm occurs, this lamp will flash as defined below.

High level alarms: the lamp quickly flashes red.

Medium level alarms: the lamp slowly flashes yellow.

Low level physiological alarms: the lamp lights yellow without flashing.

Low level technical alarms: the lamp does not light.

2. Technical alarm lamp

This lamp will light blue when a technical alarm occurs.

3. Display Screen

4. Power On/Off Switch

Press this switch to turn the patient monitor on. Press it again and hold for 2 seconds to turn the patient monitor off.

An indicator is built in this switch. It turns on when the patient monitor is on and turns off when the patient monitor

is off.

5. AC power LED

It turns on when AC power is connected.

6. Battery LED

On: when at least a battery is installed to BeneView T5 monitor and the AC source is connected;

when two batteries are installed to BeneView T8 monitor and the AC source is connected.

Off: when no battery is installed, only one battery is installed to the BeneView T8 monitor, the

installed battery is malfunction, or no AC source is connected when the patient monitor is power off.

Flash: when the patient monitor operates on battery power.

7. Press to silence all alarm sounds.

8. Press to pause or restore alarms.

9. Press to freeze or unfreeze waveforms.

10. Press to start or stop recordings.

11. Press to start or stop NIBP measurements.

12.

If no menu is displayed on the screen, pressing it will enter the main menu. If there is a menu displayed on the

screen, pressing it will close that menu.

13. Knob

Rotate the Knob clockwise or anti-clockwise. With each click, the highlight jumps to the neighboring item. When

you reach your desired item, press the Knob to select it.

2-3

2.2.2 Side View BeneView T5

1. Integral Module Racks 2. Contact 3. Compartment for CF storage card slot

4. Recorder 5. Battery compartment

BeneView T8

1. Integral Module Racks 2. Compartment for CF storage card slot

3. Recorder 4. Contact

NOTE

To ensure a good contact, clean the contacts regularly, as dust and dirt may collect on them. When

cleaning the contacts, wipe them with cotton, dampened with alcohol. (using forceps is recommended)

1

3

41

52

1

2

3

14

2-4

2.2.3 Rear View BeneView T5

1. AC Power Input

2. Micro-D Connector: It outputs ECG, IBP and defibrillator synchronization signals simultaneously, among which the

ECG signals supports pace pulses to be enhanced .

3. Nurse Call Connector: It connects the patient monitor to the hospital’s nurse call system. Alarms indications are

alerted to nurses through the nurse call system, if configured to do so.

4. Network Connector: It is a standard RJ45 connector that connects the patient monitor to the CMS.

5. USB Connectors: They connect such devices as the USB mice, USB keyboard, etc.

6. SMR Connector: It connects the satellite module rack (SMR).

7. Digital Video Interface (DVI): It connects a secondary display, which extends the display capability of your monitor.

The contents displayed on the secondary display screen accords with those displayed on the monitor screen.

8. CIS Connector: It connects the patient monitor to the hospital’s clinical information system (CIS) through an

external CIS box.

9. Equipotential Grounding Terminal: When the patient monitor and other devices are to be used together, their

equipotential grounding terminals should be connected together, eliminating the potential difference between

them.

9

2

Radiator

1

3

4 5 5

8

7

6

2-5

BeneView T8

1. Equipotential Grounding Terminal: When the patient monitor and other devices are to be used together, their

equipotential grounding terminals should be connected together, eliminating the potential difference between

them.

2. USB Connectors: They are used for CIS maintenance.

3. SMR Connector: It connects the satellite module rack (SMR).

4. Digital Video Interface (DVI): It connects a secondary display, which extends the display capability of your monitor.

The secondary display can be independently operated and controlled, and also display the contents different from

the monitor screen.

5. USB Connectors: They connect the controlling devices (USB mouse and USB keyboard) of the secondary display.

6. CIS Connector: It is a standard RJ45 connector that connects the patient monitor to the hospital’s clinical

information system (CIS).

7. Network Connector: It is a standard RJ45 connector that connects the patient monitor to the CMS.

8. Micro-D Connector: It outputs ECG, IBP and defibrillator synchronization signals simultaneously, among which the

ECG signals supports pace pulses to be enhanced.

9. Nurse Call Connector: It connects the patient monitor to the hospital’s nurse call system. Alarms indications are

alerted to nurses through the nurse call system, if configured to do so.

10. USB Connectors: They connect such devices as the USB mouse, USB keyboard, etc.

11. AC Power Input

Radiator

11

2

8 97

10

3

4

65

1

2-6

2.2.4 Bottom View（BeneView T8）

2.3 Satellite Module Rack

The Satellite Module Rack (SMR) provides 8 slots for mounting measurement modules. The number of modules mounted

in the SMR depends, as different modules may need different slots.

As shown in the figure above, there is an indicator telling the status of the SMR:

On: when the SMR works normally.

Off: when the SMR disconnects from the patient monitor, there is a problem with the power, or the patient

monitor shuts down.

The SMR can be connected to the patient monitor through their SMR connectors via a SMR cable.

NOTE

To ensure a good contact, clean the contacts regularly, as dust and dirt may collect on them. When

cleaning the contacts, wipe them with cotton, dampened with alcohol. (using forceps is recommended)

Slot Handle SMR connector

Indicator Contact

Battery compartment

2-7

2.4 Modules

As shown below, the patient monitor supports the following modules:

SpO2 module: Pulse oxygen saturation module.

MPM: Multi-parameter module. It can simultaneously monitor ECG, respiration, SpO2,

temperature, NIBP and IBP.

IBP module: Invasive blood pressure module.

C.O. module: Cardiac output module.

CCO/SvO2 module: CCO/SvO2 interface module, used to interface with Edwards Vigilance II® or VigileoTM

monitor.

CO2 module: Carbon dioxide module (including sidestream, microstream and mainstream).

AG module: Anaesthesia gas module. The functions of the O2 and BIS modules can be incorporated

into it.

BIS module: Bispectral index module.

RM module: Respiration mechanics module.

ICG module: Impedance cardiography module.

PiCCO module : PiCCO module, used to measure cardiac output continuously.

ScvO2 module: Central venous oxygen saturation module.

BeneLink module: BeneLink module is used for transmitting information from a connected external

device to the BeneView patient monitor.

BeneView T1: Used as a multi-measurement module for monitoring ECG, respiration, SpO2,

temperature, NIBP and IBP.

Under the maximum configuration, the patient monitor has one two-slot module rack, one three-slot module rack and

one satellite module rack. The number of modules mounted in the patient monitor depends, as different modules may

need different slots.

You can plug and unplug modules during patient monitoring. To plug a module, insert the module until the lever on the

module clicks into place and then push the lock key at the bottom in position to lock the module. To remove a module,

release the lock key, press the lever upwards and pull the module out.

Make sure that the indicator on the module lights on after the module is plugged in. Otherwise, re-plug the module

until the indicator lights on.

2-8

2.4.1 Multi-Parameter Module The multi-parameter module (MPM) incorporates multiple measurement modules. As shown below, the module name is

located at the upper left corner, all hardkeys on the upper part, and all measurement connectors on the lower part.

Other measurement modules look similar to the MPM.

1. Module name

2. Setup key: press to enter the [MPM Setup] menu.

3. Zero key: press to enter the [Zero IBP] menu.

4. NIBP start/stop key: press to start or stop NIBP measurements.

5. Indicator

On: when the patient monitor works correctly.

Flash: when the module is being initialized.

Off: when the module is either unconnected or broken.

6. Connector for IBP cable

7. Connector for ECG cable

8. Connector for Temp probe 1

9. Connector for Temp probe 2

10. Connector for NIBP Cuff

11. Connector for SpO2 cable

1

3 4

6

7

2

5

8

11

9

10

2-9

2.4.2 BeneView T1 BeneView T1 can be connected to a BeneView patient monitor as a multi-measurement module.

1. Connector for Temp probe 1

2. Connector for Temp probe 2

3. Connector for IBP cable

4. Multifunctional connector, connecting external parameter module and outputting analog and defib

synchronization signal.

5. Connector for NIBP cuff

6. Connector for ECG cable

7. Connector for SpO2 cable

8. Speaker

When the T1 is disconnected from BeneView T5 or T8, it can continue to monitor a patient as a stand-alone monitor

running on battery power or external DC power supply. For details of using T1 as a stand-alone monitor, refer to

BeneView T1 Operating Manual.

NOTE

Micro-D connector is disabled when the multifunctional connector of T1 is in use.

Please do not charge more than one BeneView T1 simultaneously with the module rack.

1 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2-10

2.5 Display Screen

This patient monitor adopts a high-resolution TFT LCD to display patient parameters and waveforms. A typical display

screen is shown below.

1. Patient Information Area

This area shows the patient information such as department, bed number, patient name, patient category and

paced status.

: indicates that no patient is admitted or the patient information is incomplete.

: indicates that the patient has a pacer.

: indicates that the patient does not has a pacer or the patient’s paced status is not selected.

If no patient is admitted, selecting this area will enter the [Patient Setup] menu. If a patient has been admitted,

selecting this area will enter the [Patient Demographics] menu.

2. Alarm Symbols

indicates alarms are paused.

indicates alarm sounds are paused.

indicates alarm sounds are turned off.

1 2 3 4

5

6

8

9

7

2-11

indicates the system is in alarm off status.

3. Technical Alarm Area

This area shows technical alarm messages and prompt messages. When multiple messages come, they will be

displayed circularly. Select this area and the technical alarm list will be displayed.

4. Physiological Alarm Area

This area shows physiological alarm messages. When multiple alarms occur, they will be displayed circularly. Select

this area and the physiological alarm list will be displayed.

5. Waveform Area

This area shows measurement waveforms. The waveform name is displayed at the left upper corner of the

waveform. Select this area and the corresponding measurement setup menu will be displayed.

6. Parameter Area A

This area shows measurement parameters. Each monitored parameter has a parameter window and the parameter

name is displayed at the upper left corner. The corresponding waveform of each parameter is displayed in the same

row in the waveform area. Select this area and the corresponding measurement setup menu will be displayed.

7. Parameter Area B

For the parameters displayed in this area, their corresponding waveform are not displayed.

8. Prompt Message Area

This area shows the prompt messages, network status icons, battery status icons, date and time, etc. For details

about battery status symbols, refer to the chapter 32

Batteries.

indicates patient monitor is connected to a wire network successfully.

indicates the patient monitor has failed to connect a wire network.

indicates the wireless function is working.

indicates the wireless function is not working.

indicates a CF storage card is inserted.

indicates a USB disk is inserted.

indicates a secondary display or remote display is connected.

[Screen Setup] button

9. QuickKeys Area

This area contains QuickKeys that give you fast access to functions.

2-12

2.6 QuickKeys

A QuickKey is a configurable graphical key, located at the bottom of the main screen. They give you fast access to

functions. Their availability and the order in which they appear on your screen, depend on how your patient monitor is

configured.

The following QuickKeys can be displayed on the screen:

Scroll left to display more QuickKeys. Scroll right to display more QuickKeys.

Enter the main menu Enter standby mode

Change alarm settings Review the patient’s data

Enter the NIBP measurement menu Stop all NIBP measurement

Zero IBP Silence all alarm sounds

Pause or restore alarms Change screen

Enter the patient setup menu Trigger a manual event

Start the realtime print Print Setup

Have a split-screen view of

minitrends Enter the volume setup menu

Load configurations Have the CIS view

Start cardiac output procedure (not

available in USA) View respiratory loops

Perform calculations

Have a split-screen view of another patient’s

conditions

Enter the full-screen 7-lead ECG

screen Have a split-screen view of oxyCRG trends

Enter the [Parameters] menu

Enter the interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG

screen (not available in USA)

Start NIBP STAT measurement Enter the [Unit Setup] menu

Enter the PAWP measurement

screen Enter the CPB mode

Enter the privacy mode Enter the night mode

2-13

You can also select your desired QuickKeys to display on the screen.

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance >>] [→ Manage Configuration >>] enter the required →

password [→ Ok].

2. In the [Manage Configuration] menu, select [Edit Config.>>].

3. In the pop-up menu, select the desired configuration and then select [Edit].

4. In the pop-up menu, select [Screen Setup >>].

5. In the [Select QuickKeys] screen, select your desired QuickKeys and the order of them.

2-14

FOR YOUR NOTES

3-1

3 Basic Operations

3.1 Installation

WARNING

The equipment shall be installed by personnel authorized by us.

The software copyright of the equipment is solely owned by us. No organization or individual shall resort

to juggling, copying, or exchanging it or to any other infringement on it in any form or by any means

without due permission.

Devices connected to the equipment must meet the requirements of the applicable IEC standards (e.g. IEC

60950 safety standards for information technology equipment and IEC 60601-1 safety standards for

medical electrical equipment). The system configuration must meet the requirements of the IEC 60601-1-1

medical electrical systems standard. Any personnel who connect devices to the equipment’s signal

input/output port is responsible for providing evidence that the safety certification of the devices has been

performed in accordance to the IEC 60601-1-1. If you have any question, please contact us.

If it is not evident from the equipment specifications whether a particular combination with other devices

is hazardous, for example, due to summation of leakage currents, please consult the manufacturers or else

an expert in the field, to ensure the necessary safety of patients and all devices concerned will not be

impaired by the proposed combination.

Not using screw and bracket specified by Mindray may cause the screw to touch the internal battery and

lead to monitor damage.

3.1.1 Unpacking and Checking Before unpacking, examine the packing case carefully for signs of damage. If any damage is detected, contact the carrier

or us.

If the packing case is intact, open the package and remove the equipment and accessories carefully. Check all materials

against the packing list and check for any mechanical damage. Contact us in case of any problem.

NOTE

Save the packing case and packaging material as they can be used if the equipment must be reshipped.

WARNING

When disposing of the packaging material, be sure to observe the applicable waste control regulations

and keep it out of children’s reach.

The equipment might be contaminated during storage and transport. Before use, please verify whether

the packages are intact, especially the packages of single use accessories. In case of any damage, do not

apply it to patients.

3-2

3.1.2 Environmental Requirements The operating environment of the equipment must meet the requirements specified in this manual.

The environment where the equipment is used shall be reasonably free from noises, vibration, dust, corrosive,

flammable and explosive substances. If the equipment is installed in a cabinet, sufficient space in front and behind shall

be left for convenient operation, maintenance and repair. Moreover, to maintain good ventilation, the equipment shall

be at least 2 inches (5cm) away from around the cabinet.

When the equipment is moved from one place to another, condensation may occur as a result of temperature or

humidity difference. In this case, never start the system before the condensation disappears.

WARNING

Make sure that the operating environment of the equipment meets the specific requirements. Otherwise

unexpected consequences, e.g. damage to the equipment, could result.

3.2 Getting Started

3.2.1 Turning Power On Once the patient monitor is installed, you can get ready for monitoring:

1. Before you start to make measurements, check the patient monitor, SMR and plug-in modules for any mechanical

damage and make sure that all external cables, plug-ins and accessories are properly connected.

2. Plug the power cord into the AC power source. If you run the patient monitor on battery power, ensure that the

battery is sufficiently charged.

3. Press the power on/off switch on the monitor’s front. The start-up screens are displayed, and the technical alarm

lamp and alarm lamp are lit in blue and yellow respectively. Then, the alarm lamp turns into red, and turns off

together with the technical alarm lamp after the system gives a beep.

4. The monitor enters the main screen.

WARNING

Do not use the patient monitor for any monitoring procedure on a patient if you suspect it is not working

properly, or if it is mechanically damaged. Contact your service personnel or us.

3.2.2 Starting Monitoring

1. Decide which measurements you want to make.

2. Connect the required modules, patient cables and sensors.

3. Check that the patient cables and sensors are correctly connected.

4. Check that the patient settings such as [Patient Cat.], [Paced], etc, are appropriate for your patient.

5. Refer to the appropriate measurement section for details of how to perform the measurements you require.

3-3

3.3 Disconnecting from Power

To disconnect the patient monitor from the AC power source, follow this procedure:

1. Confirm that the patient monitoring is finished.

2. Disconnect patient cables and sensors from the patient.

3. Make sure to save or clear the patient monitoring data as required.

4. Press and hold the power on/off switch for above 2 seconds. The patient monitor shuts down and you can unplug

the power cable.

CAUTION

Although not recommended, you can press and hold the power on/off switch for 10 seconds to forcibly

shut down the monitor when it could not be shut down normally or under some special situations. This

may cause loss of data of the patient monitor.

3.4 Using a Mouse

You can use the USB mouse supplied with the equipment as a monitor input device. The USB mouse can be plugged and

unplugged with the monitor on.

When you are using a mouse:

By default, the left mouse-button is the primary button and the right one the secondary button.

Clicking the primary button equals to pressing the knob or selecting the touchscreen.

The secondary button is disabled.

You can also define the right mouse-button as the primary button by following this procedure:

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance >>] [→ User Maintenance >>] enter the required pass→ word.

2. Select [Others >>] to enter the [Others] menu.

3. Select [Primary Button] and then select [Right] from the popup list.

3-4

3.5 Using Keys

The monitor has three types of keys:

Softkey: A softkey is a graphic key on the screen, giving you fast access to certain menus or functions. The monitor

has three types of softkeys:

Parameter keys: Each parameter area or waveform area can be seen as a softkey. You can enter a parameter

setup menu by selecting its corresponding parameter area or waveform area.

QuickKeys: QuickKeys are configurable graphical keys, located at the bottom of the main screen. For details,

refer to the section QuickKeys.

Hardkeys: A hardkey is a physical key on a monitoring device, such as the main menu hardkey on the monitor’s

front.

Pop-Up Keys: Pop-up keys are task-related keys that appear automatically on the monitor screen when required.

For example, the confirm pop-up key appears only when you need to confirm a change.

3.6 Using Keyboards

The on-screen keyboard enables you to enter information.

Use the key to delete the previously entered character.

Use the key to toggle between uppercase and lowercase letters.

Select to confirm what you have entered and close the on-screen keyboard.

Press the switch button to print the special letter in the keyboards for Dutch, French, Spanish, and Portuguese. A

special letter is composed of a normal letter and a symbol, for example, in French ‘â’ is a special letter composed

of letter ‘a’ and symbol ‘^’. To print ‘â’, you should first press the switch button, and then the target special letter

‘â’. The following table defines the switch buttons and the special letters corresponding with the keyboards for

each language:

Language Switch Button Special Letter

Dutch ‘ á, é, ú, í, ó, ý, ç, Á, É, Ú, Í, Ó, Ý, Ç

^ â, ê, û, î, ô French

¨ Ä, Ë , Ü, Ï , Ö

` à, è, ù, ì, ò, À, È, Ù, Ì, Ò Spanish

´ á, é, ú, í, ó, Á, É, Ú, Í, Ó

´ á, é, ú, í, ó, ý, Á, É, Ú, Í, Ó, Ý Portuguese

~ ã, õ, ñ, Ã, Õ, Ñ

3-5

3.7 Using the Touchscreen

Select screen items by pressing them directly on the patient monitor’s screen. You can enable or disable touchscreen

operation by pressing and holding the [Main Menu] QuickKey for 3 seconds. A padlock symbol is displayed if

touchscreen operation is disabled.

3.8 Setting the Screen

You can enter the [Screen Setup] window as shown below by selecting the [Screen Setup] button in the

prompt message area. In this window, you can allocate the positions of the parameters and waveforms. The parameters

or waveforms whose positions are not allocated will not be displayed.

The ECG parameter and the first ECG waveform always display in the first row. The configurable areas can be classified as

Area A, Area B, and Area C.

In Area A, you can choose to display the parameters (having waveforms) and their waveforms. Each parameter

and the associated waveform are displayed in the same row.

In Area B, you can choose to display the parameters and their waveforms. When there is no parameter displayed

in area C, both the parameters and their waveforms will be displayed in area B. Otherwise, only the parameters

will be displayed.

In Area C, you can choose to display all the parameters whose associated waveforms will not be displayed.

The screen can automatically adjust to ensure the best view based on your screen setup.

If no corresponding parameter or waveform is displayed after the module is inserted, you should perform the following

inspections:

Check the connection between the module and lead, cable, sensor, or external device.

Check whether there are the [The display setup for XX is disabled] message and the flashing [Screen

Setup] button in the prompt message area. If yes, select this button to enter the [Screen Setup]

window for the desired display configuration.

Area C Area B

Area A

3-6

WARNING

The parameters whose positions are not allocated in the [Screen Setup] window will not be displayed.

However, the monitor can still give alarms of these parameters.

3.9 Using the Main Menu

To enter the main menu, select the on-screen QuickKey or the hardkey on the monitor’s front. Most of monitor

operations and settings can be performed through the main menu.

Other menus are similar to the main menu and contain the following parts:

1. Heading: gives a sum-up for the current menu.

2. Main body: displays options, buttons, prompt messages, etc. The menu button with “>>’’ enlarges a secondary

window to reveal more options or information.

3. Online help area: displays help information for the highlighted menu item.

4. : select to exit the current menu.

3.10 Setting Parameters

3.10.1 Switching the Parameters On/Off To switch the parameters on or off, select [Main Menu] [→ Screen Setup >>] [→ Screen Layout

>>] [→ Parameters Switch], or [Screen Layout] QuickKey [→ Parameters Switch]. When a parameter is

switched off, its corresponding parameter module stops working, and its parameter value and waveform are not shown

on the monitor display.

NOTE

ECG is always selected, and you can not switch it off.

1

2

3

4

3-7

3.10.2 Accessing the Parameters Menu Select [Parameters >>] from the main menu or select the [Parameters] QuickKey at the bottom of the screen to

enter the [Parameters] menu where you can get the access of each parameter’s setup menu. You can further select

[Module Status >>] to enter the menu as shown below. Your display may be configured to look slightly different

depending on the modules mounted.

This menu displays the measurement modules mounted in the two-slot module rack, three-slot module rack and

satellite module rack from top to bottom. Beside each measurement connector is the measurement label. The color in

which a measurement connector appears matches the status as follows:

(colored) indicates that the module is turned on.

(grey) indicates that the module is turned off.

indicates a module name conflict.

indicates a module error.

3.10.3 Removing a Module Conflict Besides three independent IBP modules and the IBP module on the MPM, the patient monitor supports only one more

measurement module simultaneously. Otherwise, the message of module conflict will de prompted.

For example, if a CO2 module (module A) is already loaded and then another CO2 module (module B) is inserted, your

patient monitor will then display module conflict. To use module A, just pull out module B. To use module B, pull both

modules A and B out and then re-insert module B.

3-8

3.10.4 Removing a Label Conflict Every label is unique and is assigned only once. The measurement label is stored inside the module. The system will

prompt module name conflict when two measurement modules with the same name are used.

For example, an IBP module (module A) is already loaded and the Art label is used for module A. Then another IBP

module (module B) is inserted and the Art label is also used for module B. In this case, your patient monitor will prompt

the message of label conflict and display the [Label] menu.

To use module A for Art measurement, just modify the label of module B on this channel in the [Label] menu. If

the [Label] menu already exits inadvertently, you need to plug out and then plug in module B.

To use module B for Art measurement, first exit the [Label] menu. Then select the Art parameter area on the

screen and modify the label of module A on this channel in the popup menu. Finally, plug out and then plug in

module B.

3.11 Using a CF Storage Card

A CF storage card is used to prevent data loss in case of a sudden power failure. The patient data such as trend data,

waveform data, etc., will be automatically saved into the CF storage card during patient monitoring. In case of a sudden

power failure, the patient data can be retrieved from the CF storage card after the patient monitor restarts.

To insert a CF storage card, open the compartment and then insert the card until the button flips out.

To remove the CF storage card, follow this procedure:

1. In the main menu, select [Unload CF Storage Card], or [Patient Data]→[Unload CF Storage Card]. You

can also click icon in the lower right corner of the screen.

2. Select [Ok] from the popup menu to unload the CF storage card. A status message shown in the prompt message

area will report completion of the unloading.

3. Press the button until the CF storage card flips out.

To browse the data saved in the CF storage card, follow this procedure:

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Patient Data >>]→[History Data >>].

2. Select a patient whose data you want to view from the [Patient Data List] and then select [Review].

3. Select [Data Review].

As reviewing the history patient’s data is just like reviewing the current patient’s data, you can refer to the chapter 28

Review for details.

NOTE

Data may be unable to be saved into the CF storage card when the patient monitor is just turned on.

If no CF stroage card is used, all the data you have saved will get lost in case of monitor shut-down or

sudden power interrupt.

3-9

CAUTION

Unload the CF storage card before removing it from the patient monitor. Otherwise it may cause damage

to the data in the card.

Use only the CF storage card specified by Mindray.

Please take measures against the static electricity such as Disposable Wrist Strap when you fetch the CF

card.

3.12 Changing General Settings

This chapter covers only general settings such as language, brightness, date and time, etc. Measurement settings and

other settings can be referred to in respective sections.

3.12.1 Setting up a Monitor In situations where you install a patient monitor or change the patient monitor’s application site, you need to setup the

patient monitor as follows:

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance >>] [→ User Maintenance >>] enter the required password.→

2. In the [User Maintenance] menu, select, in turn, [Monitor Name], [Department] and [Bed No.], and then

change their settings.

3.12.2 Changing Language

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance >>] [→ User Maintenance >>] enter the→ required password.

2. In the [User Maintenance] menu, select [Language] and then select the desired language.

3. Restart the patient monitor.

3.12.3 Adjusting the Screen Brightness

1. Select the [Main Menu] [→ Screen Setup >>] [→ Brightness].

2. Select the appropriate setting for the screen brightness. 10 is the brightest, and 1 is the least bright.

If the patient monitor operates on battery power, you can set a less bright screen to prolong the operating time of the

battery. When the patient monitor enters standby mode, the screen will change to the least brightness automatically.

3.12.4 Showing/Hiding the Help The patient monitor provides online help information. The user can display or hide the help as required.

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>].

2. Select [Help] and toggle between [On] and [Off].

3-10

3.12.5 Setting the Date and Time

1. Select [Main Menu] →[Maintenance >>]→[System Time >>].

2. Set the date and time.

3. Select [Date Format] and toggle between [yyyy-mm-dd], [mm-dd-yyyy] and [dd-mm-yyyy].

4. Select [Time Format] and toggle between [24h] and [12h].

If your patient monitor is connected to a central monitoring system (CMS), the date and time are automatically taken

from that CMS. In that case, you cannot change the date and time settings on your patient monitor.

CAUTION

Changing date and time affects the storage of trends and events and may cause data missing.

3.12.6 Adjusting Volume Alarm Volume

1. Select the [Volume Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Alarm Setup >>]→[Others].

2. Select [Alm Volume] and then select the appropriate volume: X-10, in which X is the minimum volume,

depending on the set minimum alarm volume (refer to the chapter Alarm), and 10 the maximum volume.

Key Volume

1. Select the [Volume Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu] [→ Screen Setup >>].

2. Select [Key Volume] and then select the appropriate volume. 0 means off, and 10 the maximum volume.

QRS Volume

The QRS tone is derived from either the HR or PR, depending on which is currently selected as the alarm source in [ECG

Setup] or [SpO2 Setup]. When monitoring SpO2, there is a variable pitch tone which changes as the patient’s

saturation level changes. The pitch of the tone rises as the saturation level increases and falls as the saturation level

decreases. The volume of this tone is user adjustable.

1. Select the [Volume Setup] QuickKey, or the ECG parameter window→[Others >>], or the SpO2 parameter

window.

2. Select [QRS Volume] or [Beat Vol] and then select the appropriate volume. 0 means off, and 10 the maximum

volume.

4-1

4 Managing Patients

4.1 Admitting a Patient

The patient monitor displays physiological data and stores them in the trends as soon as a patient is connected. This

allows you to monitor a patient that is not admitted yet. However, it is recommended that you fully admit a patient so

that you can clearly identify your patient, on recordings, reports and networking devices. To admit a patient:

1. Select the [Patient Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Patient Setup >>].

2. Select [Discharge Patient] to clear any previous patient data. If you do not erase data from the previous patient,

the new patient’s data will be saved into the data of the previous patient. The monitor makes no distinction

between the old and the new patient data.

3. If [Discharge Patient] button appears dimmed, directly select [Admit Patient] and then select:

[Yes] to apply the data saved in the patient monitor to the new patient, or

[No] to clear the data saved in the patient monitor.

4. In the [Patient Demographics] menu, enter the demographic details, of which:

[Patient Cat.] determines the way your patient monitor processes and calculates some measurements,

and what safety and alarm limits are applied for your patient.

[Paced] determines whether to show pace pulse marks on the ECG waveform. When the [Paced] is set to

[No], pace pulse marks are not shown in the ECG waveform.

5. Select [Ok].

WARNING

[Patient Cat.] and [Paced] will always contain a value, regardless of whether the patient is fully admitted

or not. If you do not specify settings for these fields, the patient monitor uses the default settings from the

current configuration, which might not be correct for your patient.

For paced patients, you must set [Paced] to [Yes]. If it is incorrectly set to [No], the patient monitor could

mistake a pace pulse for a QRS and fail to alarm when the ECG signal is too weak.

For non-paced patients, you must set [Paced] to [No].

4.2 Quick Admitting a Patient

Use [Quick Admit] only if you do not have the time or information to fully admit a patient. Complete the rest of the

patient demographic details later. Otherwise, the symbol will always be displayed in the patient information area.

1. Select the [Patient Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Patient Setup >>].

2. Select [Quick Admit]. If a patient has been admitted at present, select [OK] to discharge the current patient.

If .no patient is admitted, you can choose either:

[Yes] to apply the data in your patient monitor to the new patient, or

[No] to clear any previous patient data.

3. Enter the patient category and paced status for the new patient, and then select [Ok].

4-2

4.3 Querying and Obtaining Patient Information

The monitor can obtain patient information from HIS through eGateway. To query or obtain patient information from

HIS,

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password→

[Gateway Communication Setting >>], and set[IP Address] and [Port]. Set [ADT Query] to [On].

2. Click patient information area to enter the [Patient Demographics] menu.

3. Select [Obtain Patient Info. >>] to enter the [Obtain Patient Information] menu.

4. Input query condition and then select [Query]. The monitor will display the obtained patient information.

5. Select a patient and then click [Import]. Then the monitor will update the information of corresponding patient.

6. Select to exit the [Obtain Patient Information] menu.

NOTE

The option [Obtain Patient Information] is available in the [Patient Setup] menu only when [ADT

Query] is set to [On].

When obtaining patient information from HIS, the monitor only update patient inforamtion. The patient’s

monitoring data is not changed and the patient is not discharged.

4.4 Associating Patient Information

After associating patient information with HIS, the monitor will automatically update patient information if

corresponding information in HIS has been is changed. The monitor can associate patient’s MRN, first name, last name,

date of birth, and gender with HIS.

NOTE

A keyword takes effect only when being defined in eGateway. Refer to eGateway Integration Manager

Installation Guide for details.

The monitor displays corresponding patient information only when all the keywords have been inputted.

4.5 Editing Patient Information

To edit the patient information after a patient has been admitted, or when the patient information is incomplete, or

when you want to change the patient information:

1. Select the [Patient Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Patient Setup >>].

2. Select [Patient Demographics] and then make the required changes.

3. Select [Ok].

4-3

4.6 Discharging a Patient

To discharge a patient:

1. Select the [Patient Setup] QuickKey, or [Main Menu] [→ Patient Setup >>].

2. Select [Discharge Patient]. In the popup menu, you can either:

Directly select [Ok] to discharge the current patient, or

Select [Standby] then [Ok]. The patient monitor enters the standby mode after discharging the current

patient, or

Select [Cancel] to exit without discharging the patient.

NOTE

Discharging a patient clears all history data in the monitor.

4.7 Transferring a Patient

You can transfer a patient with an MPM or BeneView T1 (referred to as T1 hereafter) to a new location without

re-entering the patient demographic information or changing the settings. Transferring of patient data enables you to

understand the patient’s history condition. The patient data that can be transferred includes: patient demographics,

trend data, alarm events and parameters alarm limits.

Select [Others >>] from [User Maintenance] menu. In the popup menu, you can set [Transferred Data Length].

The default is [4 h]. You can also set [Data Transfer Method]. The default is [Off].

WARNING

Do not discharge a patient before the patient is successfully transferred.

After a patient is successfully transferred, check if the patient settings (especially patient category, paced

status and alarm limits settings, etc) on the monitor are appropriate for this patient.

Only when you open MPM transfer function and select [Continue Module], the IBP labels can be

transferred along with the MPM.

NOTE

The system automatically switches on the HR alarm and lethal arrhythmia alarm after transferring the

patient data.

4-4

4.7.1 Transferring Patient Data via MPM/T1 Familiarizing yourself with the data respectively stored in the patient monitor, T1 or MPM helps you understand the

effects incurred by transferring patients with an MPM/T1.

Contents stored In the patient

monitor In the MPM In the T1

Patient demographics

(Name, Bed No., Gender, etc.) Yes Yes Yes

Trend data Yes Yes Yes

Calculation data

(Dose calculations, oxygenation calculations,

etc.)

Yes No No Data

Event data

(Marked events, alarm events, etc.) Yes No Yes

Monitor settings

(Alarm pause, alarm volume, etc.) Yes No No

Settings Parameter settings

(Alarm limits, etc.) Yes Yes Yes

Before transferring a patient with an MPM/T1, set the destination monitor as follows:

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance] [→ User Maintenance >>] enter the required password.→

2. Select [Others >>].

3. Set [Data Transfer Method] to [Module].

4. Set [Apply Module Settings] to [On]. If your patient monitor does not have this option, the system applies the

MPM/T1’s settings by default.

Then, follow this procedure to transfer the patient:

1. Disconnect MPM/T1 from the original monitor.

2. Connect MPM/T1 to the destination monitor.

3. If there is a mismatch between the MPM/T1 and monitor, the system will automatically display the [Select

Patient] menu, from which you can choose the data set you want to continue using for this patient, either:

[Continue Monitor]:continue with the patient data and settings in the monitor, deleting all patient data

and setting in MPM/T1 and copying all data in the monitor to MPM/T1.

[Continue Module]:continue with the patient data and settings in MPM/T1. Discharge the patient in the

monitor. The monitor then automatically admits the patient and copies all data from MPM/T1.

[New Patient]: select this button if none of the information is correct. This deletes all data in the monitor

and MPM/T1 and lets you admit a new patient on the monitor. In this case, you need to re-enter the patient

demographics. The monitor will restore the settings according to the patient category.

[Same Patient]:select this button if the patient demographics are different, but it is the same patient. This

merges the patient’s trend data in the monitor and MPM/T1 and copies the settings in MPM/T1 to the

monitor as well.

4. Select [Yes].

4-5

Operations Examples of applications

Continue

Monitor

1. Replace MPM/T1 during patient monitoring.

2. After the patient is admitted, connect the MPM/T1.

Continue

Module

A patient is monitored using MPM/T1. You need to transfer the patient, e.g. from a ward (original

monitor) to the operating room (destination monitor).

New Patient Connect the MPM/T1 before admitting a new patient. However, the monitor and/or MPM/T1 store the

previous patient’s data and settings.

Same Patient A patient is admitted by a monitor, to which MPM/T1 used in another monitor for monitoring this

patient is connected.

4.7.2 Transferring Patient Data via Storage Medium 4.7.2.1 Transferring Data from the Monitor to Storage Medium

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Patient Setup >>].

2. Select [Transfer to Storage Medium]. In the popup menu, you can:

Select [Ok] to transfer the patient data, or

Select [Cancel] to exit the menu.

3. Wait until the following message appears:[Transfer to storage medium successful. Please remove the

CF storage card.] or [Transfer to storage medium successful. Please remove the USB drive.].

4. Remove the CF storage card or USB drive from patient monitor.

4.7.2.2 Transferring Data from the Storage Medium to the Monitor

1. Connect the storage medium to the destination monitor.

2. In the popup menu, you can:

Select [Transfer] to transfer the patient data to the monitor, or

Select [Cancel Transfer] to cancel the operation of transferring patient data.

Select [Unload CF Storage Card] or [Unload USB Drive] to not transfer the patient data and to

unload the card or USB drive.

3. After you select [Transfer], in the popup menu you can further select the patient data contents that need to be

transferred. [Patient Demographics] must be selected. After [Ok] is selected, the monitor compares the

patient information stored in both the storage medium and monitor and deals with the patient data based on the

following.

Different

Patients:

The monitor erases all the current patient data, transfers the patient data from the storage

medium, and loads the configuration according to the patient category.

Same Patient: In the popup dialog box, you can:

Select [Yes] to merge the patient data in the monitor and storage medium.

Select [No] to erase all the current patient data in the monitor and to transfer the

patient data from the storage medium.

Wait until the following message appears:[Transfer from storage medium successful.].

4-6

WARNING

The USB drive you use may have write-protect function. In this case, please make sure the USB drive for

data transfer is in read/write mode.

Do not remove the storage medium during data transfer process. Otherwise, data files may be damaged.

4.8 Connecting to a Central Monitoring System

If your patient monitor is connected to a central monitoring system (CMS):

All patient information, measurement data and settings on the patient monitor can be transferred to the CMS.

All patient information, measurement data and settings can be displayed simultaneously on the patient monitor

and CMS. For some functions such as editing patient information, admitting a patient, discharging a patient,

starting/stopping NIBP measurements, etc., bi-directional control can be achieved between your patient monitor

and the CMS.

For details, refer to the CMS’s instructions for use.

5-1

5 Managing Configurations

5.1 Introduction

When performing continuous monitoring on a patient, the clinical professional often needs to adjust the monitor’s

settings according to the patient’s condition. The collection of all these settings is called a configuration. Allowing you to

configure the monitor more efficiently, the monitor offers different sets of configuration to suit different patient

categories and departments. You can change some settings from a certain set of configuration and then save the

changed configuration as a user configuration.

The default configurations provided for your monitor are department-oriented. You can choose either from:

General

OR

ICU

NICU

CCU

Each department has three different sets of configurations tailored for adult, pediatric and neonatal patients.

WARNING

The configuration management function is password protected. The configuration management tasks

must be performed by clinical professionals.

The system configuration items can be classified as:

Parameter configuration items

These items relates to parameters, e.g., waveform gain, alarm switch, alarm limits..

Conventional configuration items

These items define how the monitor works, e.g., screen layout, record, print and alarm settings.

User maintenance items

These items relates to user maintenance settings, e.g., unit setup, time format and data format.

For the important configuration items and their default values and user maintenance items, see appendix Configuration

Default Information.

5-2

5.2 Entering the [Manage Configuration] Menu

1. Press the hardkey on the monitor’s front to enter the main menu.

2. Select [Maintenance >>] [→ Manage Configuration >>]. Enter the required password and then select [Ok].

5.3 Changing Department

If the current department configuration is not the one you want to view, you can select [Change Department >>] in

the [Manage Configuration] menu and then choose the one you want for viewing as shown below.

NOTE

Changing the department will delete all current user configurations. Please act with caution.

5-3

5.4 Setting Default Configuration

The monitor will load the pre-set default configuration in the following cases.

The patient monitor restarts after quitting over 120 seconds.

A patient is admitted.

A patient is discharged.

Patient data is cleared.

Patient category is changed.

To set default configuration:

1. Select [Select Default Config. >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.

2. In the [Select Default Config.] menu, select [Load the Latest Config.] or [Load Specified Config.].

When you select [Load Specified Config.], the configuration (adult, pediatric or neonate) to be restored is subject to

the patient category. This configuration can be either factory configuration or saved user configuration. Take adult as an

example, select [Default Adu Config.] and toggle between [Defaults] or user configuration(s).

NOTE

To know what configuration is restored when the patient monitor starts, enter the main screen to check

the prompt information at the lower part of the screen (displayed for about 10 seconds).

5.5 Saving Current Settings

Current settings can be saved as user configuration. Up to 10 user configurations can be saved.

To save current settings:

1. Select [Save Current Settings As >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.

2. In the popup dialog box, enter the configuration name and then select [Ok].

5-4

5.6 Editing Configuration

1. Select [Edit Config. >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu. The following menu appears.

2. The popup menu shows the existing configurations on the monitor. Selecting [Config. on USB drive >>] will

show the existing configurations on the USB drive. Select the desired configuration and then select the [Edit]

button. The following menu appears.

3. Select [Alarm Setup >>], [Screen Setup >>] or [Parameter >>] to enter the corresponding menu in which

settings can be changed. The changed items of alarm setup will be marked in red.

4. You can select [Save] or [Save as] to save the changed configuration. Select [Save] to overwrite the original

configuration. Select [Save as] to save the changed configuration in another name.

5-5

5.7 Deleting a Configuration

1. Select [Delete Config. >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.

2. The popup menu shows the existing user configurations on the monitor. Selecting [Config. on USB drive >>]

will show the existing user configurations on the USB drive. Select the user configurations you want to delete and

then select [Delete].

3. Select [Yes] in the popup.

5.8 Transferring a Configuration

When installing several monitors with identical user configuration it is not necessary to set each unit separately. An USB

drive may be used to transfer the configuration from monitor to monitor.

To export the current monitor’s configuration:

1. Connect the USB drive to the monitor’s USB port.

2. Select [Export Config. >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.

3. In the [Export Config.] menu, select the configurations and [User Maintenance Settings] to export. Then

select the [Export] button. A status message will report completion of the transfer.

To import the configuration on the USB drive to the monitor:

1. Connect the USB drive to the monitor’s USB port.

2. Select [Import Config. >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.

3. In the [Import Config.] menu, select the configurations and [User Maintenance Settings] to import. Then

select the [Import] button. A status message will report completion of the transfer.

5.9 Loading a Configuration

You may make changes to some settings during operation. However, these changes or the pre-selected configuration

may not be appropriate for the newly admitted patient. Therefore, the monitor allows you to load a desired

configuration so as to ensure that all the settings are appropriate for your patient.

To load a configuration,

1. Select [Load Configuration >>] from the main menu.

2. The popup menu shows the existing configurations on the monitor. Selecting [Config. on USB drive >>] will

show the existing configurations on the USB drive.

3. Select a desired configuration.

4. Select [View] to view the configuration details. In the popup menu, you can select [Alarm Setup >>], [Screen

Setup >>] or [Parameter >>] to view the corresponding contents. The alarm setup items which are different

than those currently used are marked in red.

5. Select [Load] to load this configuration.

5-6

NOTE

The monitor may configure some settings by default when you load a configuration of different version

with current configuration.

5.10 Restoring the Latest Configuration Automatically

During operation, you may make changes to some settings. However, these changes may not be saved as user

configuration. To prevent the changes from losing in case of a sudden power failure, the patient monitor stores the

configuration in real time. The saved configuration is the latest configuration.

The monitor restore the latest configuration if restarts within 60 seconds after the power failure. And it will restore the

default configuration rather than the latest configuration if restarts 120 seconds later after the power failure. The

monitor may load either the latest configuration or the default configuration if restarts from 60-120 seconds after the

power failure.

5.11 Modifying Password

To modify the password for accessing the [Manage Configuration] menu,

1. Select [Modify Password >>] in the [Manage Configuration] menu.

2. Input a new password in the popup menu.

3. Select [Ok].

6-1

6 User Screens

6.1 Tailoring Your Screens

You can tailor your patient monitor’s screens by setting:

Waveform sweep mode

Wave line size

The color in which each measurement’s numerics and waveform are displayed

The parameter to be monitored.

Changing some settings may be hazardous. Therefore, those setting are password-protected and can be modified by

authorized personnel only. Once change is made, those who use the patient monitor should be notified.

6.1.1 Setting the Waveform Sweep Mode

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Screen Setup >>].

2. Select [Sweep Mode] and toggle between [Refresh] and [Scroll].

[Refresh]: The waveforms keep stationary, being refreshed from left to right by a moving “erase bar”.

[Scroll]: The waveforms move from the right to the left with time passing by.

6.1.2 Changing the Wave Line Size

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.

2. Select [Others >>].

3. Select [Wave Line] and toggle between [Thick], [Mediate] and [Thin].

6.1.3 Changing Measurement Colors

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>]→[Measurement Color Setup >>].

2. Select the color box next to your desired measurement and then select a color from the popup menu.

6.1.4 Changing Screen Layout Select the [Screens] QuickKey, or [Main Menu] [→ Screen Setup >>] [→ Screen Layout >>] to enter the

[Screens] menu.

You can choose the desired screen type in the [Choose Screen] window.

You can select the parameters and waveforms you want to view in the [Screen Setup] window. For details,

please refer to the section Setting the Screen.

You can select the parameters you want to view on big numerics screen in the [Big Numerics Screen Setup]

window.

You can switch on or off the connected parameter modules in the [Parameters Switch] window. If a parameter

module is switched off, parameter values and waveforms will not display on the screen.

6-2

6.2 Viewing Minitrends

6.2.1 Having a Split-Screen View of Minitrends You can split the normal screen so that one part of the screen, on the left hand side, continuously shows graphic

minitrends beside waveforms as shown in the figure below.

To have a split-screen view of minitrends, you can:

Select [Minitrends] QuickKey, or

Select [Screens] QuickKey [→ Minitrends Screen]→ , or

Select [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>] [→ Screen Layout >>] [→ Minitrends Screen]→ .

The split-screen view provides minitrends for multiple parameters. In each field, the label, scale and time are respectively

displayed at the top, left, and bottom as shown below.

6.2.2 Setting Minitrends Select the minitrends area. From the pop-up [Minitrend Setup] menu, you can:

Select the parameters to be displayed, or

Select [Minitrend Length] and then select the appropriate setting.

Minitrend View

6-3

6.3 Viewing OxyCRG

To have a split screen view of OxyCRG, you can:

Select [OxyCRG] QuickKey, or

Select [Screens] QuickKey→[OxyCRG Screen]→ , or.

Select [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>] [→ Screen Layout >>] [→ OxyCRG Screen]→ .

The split-screen view covers the lower part of the waveform area and shows HR trend, SpO2 trend, SpO2b trend, RR trend

and a compressed wave (CO2 wave or Resp wave). At the bottom, there are controls:

1. OxyCRG Event

You can enter the [Review] menu by selecting the [OxyCRG Event] button.

2. Trend length list box

In the trend length list box, you can select [1 min], [2 min], [4 min], or [8 min].

3. Setup

Select [Setup] button to enter [Setup] menu, in which you can select the parameters for display, the time length to

be saved before and after an event, and the scale of the graphic trends and waveform.

4. Auto Scale

Select [Auto Scale] button, and the system automatically adjusts the scaling.

5. Print

Select [Print] to print out the realtime OxyCRG.

6. Record

Through this button, you can print out the currently displayed OxyCRG trends by the recorder.

2 1 3 4 5 6

6-4

6.4 Viewing Other Patients

6.4.1 Care Group You can select other patient monitors (including telemetry) connected to the same LAN into a Care Group. This lets you:

View information on the monitor screen from another bed in the same Care Group.

Be notified of physiological and technical alarm conditions at the other beds in the same Care Group.

You can select up to 10 patient monitors for BeneView T5 and 16 for BeneView T8 in a Care Group. To have a Care Group:

1. Open the [View Other Patient] window by:

Selecting [Others] QuickKey, or

Selecting [Screens] QuickKey [→ View Others Screen]→ , or

Selecting [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>] [→ Screen Layout >>] [→ View Others Screen]→ .

2. Select [Setup] in the [View Other Patient] window.

3. Select the desired patient monitors from the [Connected Monitor List], and then select the button. The

selected patient monitors constitute a Care Group.

6.4.2 Viewing the Care Group Overview Bar

The Care Group overview bar locates at the bottom of the [View Other Patient] window. In the overview bar, the

department and bed label for any Care Group beds are displayed. For telemetry, # is displayed before the department

label. The color in which a Care Group bed appears matches its status:

Red: indicates the bed is giving high-level physiological alarms or the telemetry is giving alarm, such as nurse call

or event.

Yellow: indicates the bed is giving medium- or low-level physiological alarms, or medium-level technical alarms.

Blue: indicates the bed is giving low-level technical alarms.

Grey: indicates the bed fails to be networked or stays in the standby mode.

You can view a Care Group bed’s alarms by selecting it from the care group, and as well you can select the [View This

Patient] button to view this bed in the [View Other Patient] window.

For more details about Care Group alarms, refer to the Alarms chapter.

6-5

6.4.3 Understanding the View Other Patient Window When you first open the [View Other Patient] window, the patient monitor automatically selects a monitor from the

network to display in the [View Other Patient] window.

The [View Other Patient] window covers the lower part of the waveform area and consists of:

1. Information Area: shows the patient information (including department, bed number, patient name, etc.), and

network status symbol.

2. View Area: shows physiological waveforms and parameters. You can switch a waveform area to a parameter area by

selecting your desired waveform area and then selecting [Switch to Parameter Area], or switch a parameter

area to a waveform area by selecting your desired parameter area and then selecting [Switch to Waveform

Area].

3. Care Group Overview Bar.

4. Message Area: shows physiological, technical and prompt messages from the currently viewed patient monitor. It

also shows the alarm given by the telemetry such as nurse call or event. By selecting this area, you can enter the

[Alarm Information List] to view all physiological, technical and prompt messages coming from the currently

viewed patient.

Additionally, you can change a waveform or parameter for viewing

To change a waveform for viewing, select the waveform segment where you want a new waveform to appear and

then select the waveform you want from the popup menu.

To change a parameter for viewing, select the parameter window where you want a new parameter to appear and

then select the parameter you want from the popup menu.

WARNING

The data presented in the [View Other Patient] window have delay. Do not rely on this window for

realtime data.

1

2

3

4

6-6

6.5 Understanding the Big Numerics Screen

To enter the big numerics screen:

1. Select the [Screens] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Screen Setup >>] [→ Screen Layout >>].

2. Select [Big Numerics]→ .

You can select your desired parameters to display in this screen: select the [Screens] QuickKey [→ Big Numerics

Screen Setup] and then select the parameters you want. For parameters having a waveform, the waveform will also

be displayed.

7-1

7 Alarms

Alarms, triggered by a vital sign that appears abnormal or by technical problems of the patient monitor, are indicated to

the user by visual and audible alarm indications.

WARNING

A potential hazard can exist if different alarm presets are used for the same or similar equipment in any

single area, e.g. an intensive care unit or cardiac operating room.

If your patient monitor is connected to a CMS, remote suspension, inhibition, silence and reset of monitor

alarms via the CMS may cause a potential hazard.

7.1 Alarm Categories

By nature, the patient monitor’s alarms can be classified into three categories: physiological alarms, technical alarms and

prompt messages.

1. Physiological alarms

Physiological alarms, also called patient status alarms, are triggered by a monitored parameter value that violates

set alarm limits or an abnormal patient condition. Physiological alarm messages are displayed in the physiological

alarm area.

2. Technical alarms

Technical alarms, also called system status alarms, are triggered by a device malfunction or a patient data distortion

due to improper operation or mechanical problems. Technical alarm messages are displayed in the technical alarm

area.

Apart from the physiological and technical alarm messages, the patient monitor shows some messages telling the

system status or patient status. Messages of this kind are included into the prompt message category and usually

displayed in the prompt information area. Some prompt messages that indicate the arrhythmia events are

displayed in the physiological alarm area. For some measurements, their related prompt messages are displayed in

their respective parameter windows.

7-2

7.2 Alarm Levels

By severity, the patient monitor’s alarms can be classified into three categories: high level, medium level and low level..

Physiological alarms Technical alarms

High level

Indicate that your patient is in a life

threatening situation, such as Asystole,

Vfib/Vtac and so forth, and an

emergency treatment is demanded.

Indicate a severe device malfunction or an improper operation,

which could make it possible that the monitor cannot detect

critical patient status and thus threaten the patient’s life, such as

low battery.

Medium

level

Indicate that your patient’s vital signs

appear abnormal and an immediate

treatment is required.

Indicate a device malfunction or an improper operation, which

may not threaten the patient’s life but may compromise the

monitoring of vital physiological parameters.

Low level

Indicate that you patient’s vital signs

appear abnormal and an immediate

treatment may be required.

Indicate a device malfunction or an improper operation, which

may compromise a certain monitoring function but will not

threaten the patient’s life.

7.3 Alarm Indicators

When an alarm occurs, the patient monitor will indicate it to the user through visual or audible alarm indications.

Alarm lamp

Alarm message

Flashing numeric

Audible alarm tones

7.3.1 Alarm Lamp If a technical alarm occurs, the technical alarm lamp will turn blue. If a technical alarm or physiological alarm occurs, the

alarm lamp will flash. The flashing color and frequency match the alarm level as follows:

High level alarms: the lamp quickly flashes red.

Medium level alarms: the lamp slowly flashes yellow.

Low level physiological alarms: the lamp turns yellow without flashing.

Low level technical alarms: the lamp does not light.

7-3

7.3.2 Alarm Message When an alarm occurs, an alarm message will appear in the technical or physiological alarm area. For physiological

alarms, the asterisk symbols (*) before the alarm message match the alarm level as follows:

High level alarms: ***

Medium level alarms: **

Low level alarms: *

Additionally, the alarm message uses different background color to match the alarm level:

High level alarms: red

Medium level alarms: yellow

Low level physiological alarms: yellow

Low level technical alarms: blue

You can view the alarm messages by selecting the physiological or technical alarm area.

7.3.3 Flashing Numeric If an alarm triggered by an alarm limit violation occurs, the numeric of the measurement in alarm will flash every second,

and the corresponding alarm limit will also flash at the same frequency indicating the high or low alarm limit is violated.

7.3.4 Audible Alarm Tones This monitor has three choices of alarm tones and patterns: ISO, Mode 1 and Mode 2. For each pattern, the alarm tones

identify the alarm levels as follows:

ISO pattern:

High level alarms: triple+double+triple+double beep.

Medium level alarms: triple beep.

Low level alarms: single beep.

Mode 1:

High level alarms: high-pitched single beep.

Medium level alarms: double beep.

Low level alarms: low-pitched single beep.

Mode 2:

High level alarms: high-pitched triple beep.

Medium level alarms: double beep.

Low level alarms: low-pitched single beep.

NOTE

When multiple alarms of different levels occur simultaneously, the patient monitor will select the alarm of

the highest level and give visual and audible alarm indications accordingly.

7-4

7.3.5 Alarm Status Symbols Apart from the aforementioned alarm indicators, the patient monitor still uses the following symbols telling the alarm

status:

indicates alarms are paused.

indicates alarm sound is silenced.

indicates the alarm sound is turned off.

indicates individual measurement alarms are turned off or the system is in alarm off status.

7.4 Alarm Tone Configuration

7.4.1 Setting the Minimum Alarm Volume

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance >>] [→ User Maintenance >>] enter the required password.→

2. Select [Alarm Setup >>] to enter the [Alarm Setup] menu.

3. Select [Minimum Alarm Volume] and toggle between 0 and 10.

The minimum alarm volume refers to the minimum value you can set for the alarm volume, which is not affected by user

or factory default configurations. The setting of minimum alarm volume remains unchanged when the patient monitor

shuts down and restarts.

7.4.2 Changing the Alarm Volume

1. Select the [Volume Setup] QuickKey or the [Alarm Setup] QuickKey→[Others], or [Main Menu]→[Alarm

Setup >>]→[Others].

2. Select the appropriate volume from [Alm Volume]: X-10, in which X is the minimum volume, depending on the

set minimum alarm volume, and 10 the maximum volume.

3. Select [High Alarm Volume] to set the volume of the high priority alarm as [Alm Volume+0], [Alm

Volume+1] or [Alm Volume+2].

4. Select [Reminder Vol] to set the volume of the reminder tone as [High], [Med] or [Low].

When alarm volume is set to 0, the alarm sound is turned off and a symbol appears on the screen.

7-5

7.4.3 Setting the Interval between Alarm Sounds You cannot change the interval between alarm tones if you choose mode 1 or 2 as your desired alarm tone pattern. For

these two patterns, the interval between alarm tones identifies the alarm levels as follows:

Mode 1:

Interval between high level alarm tones: continuously.

Interval between medium level alarm tones: 5 s.

Interval between low level alarm tones: 20 s.

Mode 2:

Interval between high level alarm tones: 1 s.

Interval between medium level alarm tones: 5 s.

Interval between low level alarm tones: 20 s.

If you choose the ISO pattern, you can change the interval between alarm tones. To change the interval between alarm

tones:

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>] enter the required password→ .

2. Select [Alarm Setup >>] to enter the [Alarm Setup] menu.

3. Select [High Alarm Interval (s)], [Med Alarm Interval (s)] and [Low Alarm Interval (s)] in turn and

then select the appropriate settings.

WARNING

When the alarm sound is switched off, the patient monitor will give no audible alarm tones even if a new

alarm occurs. Therefore the user should be very careful about whether to switch off the alarm sound or

not.

Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for patient monitoring. Adjustment of alarm volume to

a low level may result in a hazard to the patient. Always keep the patient under close surveillance.

7.4.4 Changing the Alarm Tone Pattern To change the alarm tone pattern:

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>] enter the required password→ .

2. Select [Alarm Setup >>] to enter the [Alarm Setup] menu.

3. Select [Alarm Sound] and toggle between [ISO], [Mode 1]and [Mode 2].

User or factory default configurations exert no impact on the setup of alarm tone pattern. The alarm tone pattern

remains unchanged after the monitor restarts.

7-6

7.4.5 Setting the Reminder Tones When the alarm volume is set to zero, or the alarm tone is silenced or turned off, the patient monitor issues a periodical

reminder tone.

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.

2. Select [Alarm Setup >>] to enter the [Alarm Setup] menu.

To switch the reminder tones on or off, select [Reminder Tones] and toggle between [On] and [Off].

To set the interval between reminder tones, select [Reminder Interval] and toggle between []1min], [2min]

and [3min].

In addition, you can set the volume of alarm reminder tones. To set the volume of alarm reminder tones, select [Main

Menu] [→ Alarm Setup >>]→[Others] or the [Alarm Setup] QuickKey→[Others]. Then, select [Reminder Vol]

and toggle between [High], [Medium] and [Low].

7.5 Understanding the Alarm Setup Menu

Select the [Alarm Setup] QuickKey or [Main Menu] [→ Alarm Setup >>] to enter the [Alarm Setup], where you

can:

Set alarm properties for all parameters.

Change ST alarm settings.

Change arrhythmia alarm settings.

Set the threshold for some arrhythmia alarms.

Change other settings.

Please refer to the ECG section for how to change ST alarm settings, how to change arrhythmia alarm settings and how

to set the threshold for some arrhythmia alarms.

7-7

7.5.1 Setting Alarm Properties for All Parameters In the main menu, select [Alarm Setup >>]→[Parameters]. You can review and set alarm limits, alarm switches,

alarm level and alarm recordings for all parameters.

When a measurement alarm occurs, automatic recording of all the measurement numerics and related waveforms is

possible when the measurement’s [On/Off] and [Record] are set on.

WARNING

Make sure that the alarm limits settings are appropriate for your patient before monitoring.

Setting alarm limits to extreme values may cause the alarm system to become ineffective. For example,

High oxygen levels may predispose a premature infant to retrolental fibroplasia. If this is a consideration

do NOT set the high alarm limit to 100%, which is equivalent to switching the alarm off.

7.5.2 Adjusting Alarm Limits Automatically The monitor can automatically adjust alarm limits according to the measured vital signs, using the auto limits function.

When auto limits are selected, the monitor calculates safe auto limits based on the latest measured values.

To get accurate auto alarm limits, you need to collect a set of measured vital signs as a baseline. Then, in the main menu,

select [Alarm Setup >>] [→ Parameters] [→ Auto Limits] →[Ok]. The monitor will create new alarm limits based

on the measured values.

Before applying these automatically created alarm limits, confirm if they are appropriate for your patient in the mass

alarm setup menu. If not, you can adjust them manually. These alarm limits will remain unchanged until you select auto

limits again or adjust them manually.

The monitor calculates the auto limits based on the following rules.

Low alarm limit High alarm limit

Module Parameter Adult/

pediatric Neonate

Adult/

pediatric Neonate

Auto alarm limits range

ECG HR/PR

HR × 0.8 or 40bpm

(whichever is

greater)

(HR – 30) or

90bpm

(whichever

is greater)

HR × 1.25 or

240bpm

(whichever is

smalle)

(HR + 40) or

200bpm

(whichever is

smaller)

Adult/pediatric: 35 to 240

Neonate: 55 to 225

Resp RR

RR × 0.5 or 6 rpm

(whichever is

greater)

(RR – 10) or

30 rpm

(whichever

is greater)

RR × 1.5 or 30 rpm

(whichever is

smaller)

(RR + 25) or 85

rpm (whichever

is smaller)

Adult/pediatric: 6 to 55

Neonate: 10 to 90

SpO2 SpO2 Same as the

default alarm limit

Same as the

default

alarm limit

Same as the

default alarm limit

Same as the

default alarm

limit

Same as the measurement range

7-8

Low alarm limit High alarm limit

Module Parameter Adult/

pediatric Neonate

Adult/

pediatric Neonate

Auto alarm limits range

NIBP-S (SYS × 0.68 + 10)

mmHg

(SYS – 15) or

45mmHg

(whichever

is greater)

(SYS × 0.86 + 38)

mmHg

(SYS + 15) or

105mmHg

(whichever is

smaller)

Adult: 45 to 270

Pediatric: 45 to 185

Neonate: 35 to 115

NIBP-D (Dia × 0.68 + 6)

mmHg

(Dia – 15) or

20mmHg

(whichever

is greater)

(Dia × 0.86 + 32)

mmHg

(Dia + 15) or

80mmHg

(whichever is

smaller)

Adult: 25 to 225

Pediatric: 25 to 150

Neonate: 20 to 90

NIBP

NIBP-M (Mean × 0.68 + 8)

mmHg

(Mean – 15)

or 35mmHg

(whichever

is greater)

(Mean × 0.86 + 35)

mmHg

(Mean + 15) or

95mmHg

(whichever is

smaller)

Adult: 30 to 245

Pediatric: 30 to 180

Neonate: 25 to 105

T1 (T1 – 0.5)℃ (T1 – 0.5) ℃ (T1 + 0.5)℃ (T1 + 0.5)℃ 1 to 49 ℃

T2 (T2 – 0.5)℃ (T2 – 0.5) ℃ (T2 + 0.5)℃ (T2 + 0.5)℃ 1 to 49 ℃

Temp

TD Same as the

default alarm limit

Same as the

default

alarm limit

Same as the

default alarm limit

Same as the

default alarm

limit

Same as the measurement range

IBP-S (SYS × 0.68＋10)

mmHg

(SYS – 15) or

45mmHg

(whichever

is greater)

(SYS × 0.86＋38)

mmHg

(SYS + 15) or

105mmHg

(whichever is

smaller)

Adult: 45 to 270

Pediatric: 45 to 185

Neonate: 35 to 115

IBP-D (Dia × 0.68＋

6)mmHg

(Dia – 15) or

20mmHg

(whichever

is greater)

(Dia × 0.86＋

32)mmHg

(Dia + 15) or

80mmHg

(whichever is

smaller)

Adult: 25 to 225

Pediatric: 25 to 150

Neonate: 20 to 90

IBP：ART/

Ao/

UAP/

BAP/

FAP/

LV/

P1-P4

(Arterial

pressure) IBP-M (Mean × 0.68 +

8)mmHg

(Mean – 15)

or 35mmHg

(whichever

is greater)

(Mean × 0.86 +

35)mmHg

(Mean + 15) or

95mmHg

(whichever is

smaller)

Adult: 30 to 245

Pediatric: 30 to 180

Neonate: 25 to 105

IBP-S SYS × 0.75 SYS × 0.75 SYS × 1.25 SYS × 1.25

IBP-D Dia × 0.75 Dia × 0.75 Dia × 1.25 Dia × 1.25 PA

IBP-M Mean × 0.75 Mean × 0.75 Mean × 1.25 Mean × 1.25

3 to 120mmHg

7-9

Low alarm limit High alarm limit

Module Parameter Adult/

pediatric Neonate

Adult/

pediatric Neonate

Auto alarm limits range

IBP:

CVP/

ICP/

LAP/

RAP/

UVP/

P1-P4

(Venous

pressur

e)

IBP-M Mean × 0.75 Mean × 0.75 Mean × 1.25 Mean × 1.25 3 to 40mmHg

0 to 32mmHg:

remains the same

0 to

32mmHg:

remains the

same

0 to 32mmHg:

remains the same

0 to 32mmHg:

remains the

same

32 to 35mmHg:

29mmHg

32 to

35mmHg:

29mmHg

32 to 35mmHg:

41mmHg

32 to 35mmHg:

41mmHg

35 to 45mmHg:

(etCO2-6) mmHg

35 to

45mmHg:

(etCO2-6)

mmHg

35 to 45mmHg:

(etCO2+6) mmHg

35 to 45mmHg:

(etCO2+6)

mmHg

45 to 48mmHg:39

mmHg

45 to

48mmHg:39

mmHg

45 to 48mmHg:51

mmHg

45 to

48mmHg:51

mmHg

EtCO2

>48mmHg:

remains the same

>48mmHg:

remains the

same

>48mmHg:

remains the same

>48mmHg:

remains the

same

Same as the measurement range

FiCO2 N/A N/A Same as the

default alarm limit

Same as the

default alarm

limit

Same as the measurement range

CO2

awRR

awRR × 0.5 or 6

rpm (whichever is

greater)

(awRR – 10)

or 30 rpm

(whichever

is greater)

awRR × 1.5 or 30

rpm (whichever is

smaller)

(awRR+25) or

85 rpm

(whichever is

smaller)

Adult/pediatric: 6 to 55

Neonate: 10 to 90

EtCO2(AG) AG

FiCO2

(AG)

Same as CO2 module

7-10

Low alarm limit High alarm limit

Module Parameter Adult/

pediatric Neonate

Adult/

pediatric Neonate

Auto alarm limits range

awRR

awRR × 0.5 or 6

rpm (whichever is

greater)

awRR – 10 or

30 rpm

(whichever

is greater)

awRR × 1.5 or 30

rpm (whichever is

smaller)

awRR+25 or 85

rpm (whichever

is smaller)

Adult/pediatric: 6 to 55

Neonate: 10 to 90

FiAA/

EtAA

Same as the

default alarm limit

Same as the

default

alarm limit

Same as the

default alarm limit

Same as the

default alarm

limit

Same as the measurement range

FiO2/

EtCO2

Same as the

default alarm limit

Same as the

default

alarm limit

Same as the

default alarm limit

Same as the

default alarm

limit

Same as the measurement range

FiN2O/

EtN2O

Same as the

default alarm limit

Same as the

default

alarm limit

Same as the

default alarm limit

Same as the

default alarm

limit

Same as the measurement range

C.O. BT Adult：

(BT – 1)℃ N/A

Adult：

(BT – 1)℃ N/A Same as the measurement range

C.I. ICG

TFC N/A

RR(RM)

awRR × 0.5 or 6

rpm (whichever is

greater)

N/A

awRR × 1.5 or 30

rpm (whichever is

smaller)

N/A Adult/pediatric: 6 to 55

Neonate: 10 to 90

PEEP (PEEP – 5) cmH2O N/A (PEEP＋5) cmH2O N/A Same as the measurement range

PIP (PIP – 10) cmH2O N/A (PIP＋10) cmH2O N/A Same as the measurement range

RM

MVe (MVe – 2) L/min N/A (MVe＋2) L/min N/A Same as the measurement range

BIS BIS N/A

CCO

CCO/

CCI, EDV/

EDVI, SVR/

SVRI,

SV/SVI,

RVEF

N/A

SvO2 (SvO2 – 5)% N/A (SvO2 + 5)% N/A Same as the measurement rangeSvO2

ScvO2 (ScvO2 – 5)% N/A (ScvO2 + 5)% N/A Same as the measurement range

7-11

7.5.3 Setting Alarm Delay Time You can set the alarm delay time for over-limit alarms of continuously measured parameters. If the alarm-triggered

condition disappears within the delay time, the patient monitor will not give the alarm. You can set the [Alarm Delay],

in the [Others] window of [Alarm Setup] menu. Alarm delay is not applied to the following physiological alarms:

Appnea

ST alarms

Arrhythmia alarms

ECG Weak Signal

Resp Artifact

SpO2 Desat

No Pulse

Nellcor SpO2 over alarm limits

FiO2 Shortage

Measurements of noncontinuous parameters over alarm limits

HR over alarm limits

Anesthetic Mixture's MAC>3

You can set [Apnea Delay] and [ST Alarm Delay] separately in the [Others] window of [Alarm Setup] menu.

7.5.4 Setting Recording Length You can change the length of the recorded waveforms. In the [Others] window of the [Alarm Setup] menu, select

[Recording Length] and toggle between [8 s], [16 s] and [32 s]:

[8 s]: 4 seconds respectively before and after the alarm or manual event trigger moment.

[16 s]: 8 seconds respectively before and after the alarm or manual event trigger moment.

[32 s]: 16 seconds respectively before and after the alarm or manual event trigger moment.

7.5.5 Entering CPB Mode When performing Cardiopulmonary bypass (CPB), you can set the patient monitor to enter CPB mode in order to reduce

unnecessary alarms. The CPB mode is activated only if you select [OR]. To select [OR],

1. Press the hardkey on the monitor’s front panel to enter [Main Menu].

2. Select [Maintenance >>]→[Manage Configuration >>]. Enter the required password and then select [OK].

3. Select [Change Department >>]→[OR].

7-12

In the CPB mode, all the physiological alarms are switched off except for the following alarms.

BIS-related alarms

FiCO2/EtCO2 too high (for CO2 module and AG module)

FiO2/EtO2 too high or too low

FiAA/EtAA too high (AA represents the anaesthetic gas)

FiN2O/EtN2O too high

In CPB mode, [CPB Mode] is displayed in the physiological alarm area with red background color.

To enter CPB mode:

Select the [CPB Mode] Quickkey or select [Enter CPB Mode] in the [Others] window of the [Alarm Setup]

menu. Then select [Ok] in the popup dialog box.

7.6 Pausing Alarms

If you want to temporarily prevent alarms from sounding, you can pause alarms by pressing the hardkey on the

monitor’s front. When alarms are paused:

No alarm lamps flash and no alarms are sounded.

No numeric and alarm limit flash.

No alarm messages are shown.

The remaining pause time is displayed in the physiological alarm area.

The alarms paused symbol is displayed in the sound symbol area.

The patient monitor enters into the alarm paused status as soon as it is turned on. The alarm pause time is fixed to be 2

minutes.

When the alarm pause time expires, the alarm paused status is automatically cancelled and the alarm tone will sound.

You can also cancel the alarm paused status by pressing the hardkey.

You can set the alarm pause time as desired. The default alarm pause time is 2 minutes.

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password.

2. Select [Alarm Setup >>] [→ Alarm Pause Time] and then select the appropriate setting from the popup list.

7-13

7.7 Swiching Off All Alarms

If [Alarm Pause Time] is set to [Permanent], the patient monitor will enter into the alarm off status after the

hardkey is pressed. During the alarm off status,

As for physiological alarms, no alarm lamps flash and no alarms are sounded.

As for physiological alarms, no numeric and alarm limit flash.

No physiological alarm messages are shown.

[Alarm Off] is displayed in the physiological alarm area with red background.

As for technical alarms, no alarms are sounded.

The alarm off symbol is displayed in the sound symbol area.

You can cancel the alarm off status by pressing the hardkey.

WARNING

Pausing or switching off alarms may result in a hazard to the patient. Please be very careful.

7.8 Silencing the Alarm Sound

You can silence all alarm sounds by pressing the hardkey on the monitor’s front. In that case, the alarm lamp flashing

and alarm tones are cleared and appears in the sound symbol area. After the physiological alarm is silenced, √

appears before the alarm message and the numeric and alarm limit still flash. For the performance after the technical

alarm is silenced, please refer to the Silencing Technical Alarms section.

The alarm silenced status will be automatically cancelled if you switch the patient monitor to other alarm statues or

when a new physiological or technical alarm occurs.

7-14

7.9 Latching Alarms

The alarm latching setting for your patient monitor defines how the alarm indicators behave when you do not

acknowledge them. When alarms are set to non-latching, their alarm indications end when the alarm condition ends. If

you switch alarm latching on, all visual and audible alarm indications last until you acknowledge the alarms, except that

the measurement numeric and violated alarm limit stop flashing as soon as the initial alarm condition goes away.

To set alarms to latching or non-latching:

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>] enter the required password→ .

2. Select [Alarm Setup >>].

3. Select [Latching Alarms] and toggle between [High only], [Hi&Med], [All] and [Off]. If you select [High

only], only high priority alarm are latched; if you select [Hi&Med], both high priority alarms and mediate priority

alarms are latched; if you select [All], all alarms are latched; if you select [Off], the alarm latching is turned off.

NOTE

Changing of alarm priority may affect the latching status of corresponding alarm. Please determine if you

need to reset the latching status for the specific alarm when you have changed its alarm priority.

7.10 Silencing Technical Alarms

For some technical alarms, their alarm lamp flashing and alarm tones are cleared and the alarm messages change to

prompt messages after the hardkey is pressed. After the patient monitor restores the normal status, the patient

monitor can give alarm indications correctly when these alarms are triggered again.

For some technical alarms, all their alarm indications are cleared after the hardkey is pressed. After the patient

monitor restores the normal status, the patient monitor can give alarm indications correctly when these alarms are

triggered again.

For some other technical alarms, their alarm lamp flashing and alarm tones are cleared and √ appears before the alarm

message after the hardkey is pressed. After the patient monitor restores the normal status, the patient monitor can

give alarm indications correctly when these alarms are triggered again.

7-15

7.11 Testing Alarms

When the monitor starts up, a selftest is performed. In the meantime, the start-up screens are displayed, and the

technical alarm lamp and alarm lamp are lit in blue and yellow respectively. Then, the alarm lamp turns into red, and

turns off together with the technical alarm lamp after the system gives a beep. This indicates that the visible and audible

alarm indicators are functioning correctly.

For further testing of individual measurement alarms, perform the measurement on yourself (for example SpO2 or CO2)

or use a simulator. Adjust alarm limits and check that appropriate alarm behaviour is observed.

7.12 When an Alarm Occurs

When an alarm occurs, observe the following steps and take proper actions:

1. Check the patient’s condition.

2. Confirm the alarming parameter or alarm category.

3. Identify the source of the alarm.

4. Take proper action to eliminate the alarm condition.

5. Make sure the alarm condition is corrected.

For troubleshooting specific alarms, see appendix Alarm Messages.

7.13 Using Care Group Alarms

7.13.1 Care Group Auto Alarms When a Care Group is set up on your monitor, a flashing symbol will appear beside the QuickKeys area if any monitor in

your Care Group, which is not currently viewed by your monitor, is alarming. The alarm symbol is shown as below.

When a patient monitor in the Care Group is disconnected, the flashing symbol is shown as below.

The department and bed label of the alarming monitor appear on the symbols. You can enter the view other patient

window by pressing the symbol.

7-16

7.13.2 Setting Care Group Alert Tone When a monitor in the Care Group issue an alarm, your patient monitor prompts you by giving an alert tone. To set the

alert tone,

1. In the main menu, select [Screen Setup >>]→[Screen Layout >>].

2. In the [Choose Screen] window, select [View Others Screen].

2. In the view other patient window, select [Setup>>], and set [Alert Tone] to [Repeat], [Once] or [Off].

7.13.3 Silencing Care Group Alarms You can silence the alarm sound of the currently viewed bed in the view other patient window. This function can be set

in the [Alarm Setup] menu from the [User Maintenance] menu only.

When the alarm silence function for other patients is active and the currently viewed bed is in normal alarm status or

alarm sound off status, press the [Silence] button in the view other patient window. The currently viewed bed will then

enter into the alarm silenced status.

Note that this button is disabled when the currently viewed bed is in alarms off or paused status.

WARNING

Silencing care group alarms may cause a potential hazard. Please act with caution.

8-1

8 Monitoring ECG

8.1 Introduction

The electrocardiogram (ECG) measures the electrical activity of the heart and displays it on the patient monitor as a

waveform and a numeric. This patient monitor measures ECG using the MPM module or the BeneView T1. ECG

monitoring provides two algorithms:

1. Mindray algorithm

The Mindray algorithm enables 3-, 5- and 12-lead ECG monitoring, ST-segment analysis, arrhythmia analysis and

interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG.

2. Mortara algorithm

The Mortara algorithm enables 3-, 5- and 12-lead ECG monitoring, ST-segment analysis and arrhythmia analysis.

You can select either algorithm as required. For the patient monitor incorporating the Mortara algorithm, interpretation

of resting 12-lead ECG in the Mindray algorithm is optional. The MPM module or the BeneView T1 incorporating Mortara

algorithm is labelled with the logo of Mortara.

8.2 Safety

WARNING

Use only ECG electrodes and cables specified by the manufacturer.

When connecting electrodes and/or patient cables, make sure that the connectors never come into contact

with other conductive parts, or with earth. In particular, make sure that all of the ECG electrodes are

attached to the patient, to prevent them from contacting conductive parts or earth.

Periodically inspect the electrode application site to ensure skin quality. If the skin quality changes,

replace the electrodes or change the application site.

Use defibrillator-proof ECG cables during defibrillation.

Do not touch the patient, or table, or instruments during defibrillation.

NOTE

After defibrillation, the screen display recovers within 10 seconds if the correct electrodes are used and

applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for use.

Interference from a non-grounded instrument near the patient and electrosurgery interference can cause

problems with the waveform.

8-2

8.3 Preparing to Monitor ECG

8.3.1 Preparing the Patient and Placing the Electrodes

1. Prepare the patient’s skin. Proper skin preparation is necessary for good signal quality at the electrode, as the skin is

a poor conductor of electricity. To properly prepare the skin, choose flat areas and then follow this procedure:

Shave hair from skin at chosen sites.

Gently rub skin surface at sites to remove dead skin cells.

Thoroughly cleanse the site with a mild soap and water solution. We do not recommend using ether or pure

alcohol, because this dries the skin and increases the resistance.

Dry the skin completely before applying the electrodes.

2. Attach the clips or snaps to the electrodes before placing them.

3. Place the electrodes on the patient.

4. Attach the electrode cable to the patient cable and then plug the patient cable into the ECG connector on the MPM

or the BeneView T1.

8.3.2 Choosing AHA or IEC Lead Placement

1. Select the ECG parameter window or waveform area to enter the [ECG Setup] menu.

2. Select [Others >>]→[Lead Set] and then select [3-lead], [5-lead], [12-lead] or [Auto] according to the

applied electrodes.

3. Select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance >>] [→ User Maintenance >>] enter the required password→

4. Select [Others >>] [→ ECG Standard] and then select [AHA] or [IEC] according to the standard that is applied

for your hospital.

8.3.3 ECG Lead Placements The electrode placement illustrations in this chapter adopt the AHA standard.

3-Leadwire Electrode Placement

Following is an electrode configuration when using 3 leadwires:

RA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the right shoulder.

LA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the left shoulder.

LL placement: on the left lower abdomen.

8-3

5-Leadwire Electrode Placement

Following is an electrode configuration when using 5 leadwires:

RA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the right shoulder.

LA placement: directly below the clavicle and near the left shoulder.

RL placement: on the right lower abdomen.

LL placement: on the left lower abdomen.

V placement: on the chest.

The chest (V) electrode can be placed on one of the following positions:

V1 placement: on the fourth intercostal space at the right sternal border.

V2 placement: on the fourth intercostal space at the left sternal border.

V3 placement: midway between the V2 and V4 electrode positions.

V4 placement: on the fifth intercostal space at the left midclavicular line.

V5 placement: on the left anterior axillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position.

V6 placement: on the left midaxillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position.

V3R-V6R placement: on the right side of the chest in positions corresponding to those on the left.

VE placement: over the xiphoid process.

V7 placement: on posterior chest at the left posterior axillary line in the fifth intercostal space.

V7R placement: on posterior chest at the right posterior axillary line in the fifth intercostal space.

8-4

12-Leadwire Electrode Placement

12-lead ECG uses 10 electrodes, which are placed on the patient’s four limbs and chest.

The limb electrodes should be placed on the soft skin and the chest electrodes placed

according to the physician’s preference.

Lead Placement for Surgical Patients

The surgical site should be taken into consideration when placing electrodes on a

surgical patient. e.g. for open-chest surgery, the chest electrodes can be placed on the

lateral chest or back. To reduce artifacts and interference from electrosurgical units,

you can place the limb electrodes close to the shoulders and lower abdomen and the

chest electrodes on the left side of the mid-chest. Do not place the electrodes on the

upper arm. Otherwise, the ECG waveform will be very small.

WARNING

When using electrosurgical units (ESU), patient leads should be placed in a position that is equal distance

from the Electrosurgery electrotome and the grounding plate to avoid burns to the patient. Never

entangle the ESU cable and the ECG cable together.

When using electrosurgical units (ESU), never place ECG electrodes near to the grounding plate of the ESU,

as this can cause a lot of interference on the ECG signal.

8.3.4 Checking Paced Status

It is important to set the paced status correctly when you start monitoring ECG. The paced symbol is displayed

when the [Paced] status is set to [Yes]. The pace pulse markers “|” are shown on the ECG wave when the patient has a

paced signal. If [Paced] is set to [No] or the patient’s paced status is not selected, the symbol will be shown in the

patient information area.

To change the paced status, you can select either:

the patient information area, or

[Main Menu] [→ Patient Setup] [→ Patient Demographics], or,

the ECG parameter window or waveform area [→ Others >>],

and then, select [Paced] from the popup menu and toggle between [Yes] and [No].

If you do not set the paced status, the patient monitor issues a prompt tone when pace pulse is detected. At the same

time, the paced symbol flashes and the message “Please confirm the pace of patient” appears in the ECG waveform area.

Then, please check and set the paced status of the patient.

8-5

WARNING

For paced patients, you must set [Paced] to [Yes]. If it is incorrectly set to [No], the patient monitor could

mistake a pace pulse for a QRS and fail to alarm when the ECG signal is too weak. Do not rely entirely on

rate meter alarms when monitoring patients with pacemakers. Always keep these patients under close

surveillance.

For non-paced patients, you must set [Paced] to [No].

The auto pacer recognition fucntion is not applicable to neonatal patients.

8.4 Understanding the ECG Display

Your display may be configured to look slightly different.

1. Lead label of the displayed wave

2. ECG gain

3. ECG filter label

4. Notch filter status

Besides, when a paced signal has been detected, the pace pulse marks “|” are shown on the ECG wave if the [Paced] has

been set to [Yes].

1. Current heart rate alarm limits

2. Current heart rate

3. Heart beat symbol

For 12-lead ECG display screen, refer to the section 12-Lead ECG Monitoring.

1

1

3

2 3 4

2

8-6

8.5 Changing ECG Settings

8.5.1 Accessing ECG Menus By selecting the ECG parameter window or waveform area, you can access the [ECG Setup] menu.

8.5.2 Setting Pacemaker Rate (For Mortara only) Some pacemaker pulses can be difficult to reject. When this happens, the pulses are counted as a QRS complex and

could result in an incorrect HR and failure to detect some arrhythmias. You can set [Pacemaker Rate] to the

pacemaker’s rate in the [ECG Setup] menu. In this way, the patient monitor can calculate HR and detect arrhythmias

more accurately. When [Paced] is set to [No], the pacemaker rate cannot be set.

8.5.3 Choosing the Alarm Source In most cases the HR and PR numerics are identical. In order to avoid simultaneous alarms on HR and PR, the monitor

uses either HR or PR as its active alarm source. To change the alarm source, select [Alm Source] in the [ECG Setup]

menu and then select either:

[HR]: if you want the HR to be the alarm source for HR/PR.

[PR]: if you want the PR to be the alarm source for HR/PR.

[Auto]: If the [Alm Source] is set to [Auto], the patient monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG

measurements as the alarm source whenever a valid heart rate is available. If the heart rate becomes unavailable,

for example the ECG module is turned off or becomes disconnected, the patient monitor will automatically switch

to PR as the alarm source.

8.5.4 Setting the ECG Lead Set You can set the [Lead Set] by selecting [ECG Setup]→[Others>>]. You can set the [Lead Set] as [Auto] if the

auto lead detection function is available.

8.5.5 Choosing an ECG Display Screen When monitoring with a 5-lead or 12-lead set, you can select the [Screens] Quickkey. In the [Choose Screen]

window, choose the screen type as:

[Normal Screen]: The ECG waveform area shows 2 ECG waveforms.

[ECG 7-Lead Full-Screen]: The whole waveform area shows 7 ECG waveforms only.

[ECG 7-Lead Half-Screen]: The upper half part of the whole waveform area displays 7 ECG waveforms.

When monitoring with a 12-lead set, you can also choose the screen type as [ECG 12-Lead Full-Screen].

When the screen type is set to [Normal Screen] and [Sweep Mode] is set to [Refresh], cascaded ECG waveforms

can be displayed. To cascade ECG waveforms:

1. Select the [Screens] Quickkey→[Screen Setup].

2. Select [ECG1 Casc.] in the second row. A cascaded waveform is displayed in two waveform positions.

8-7

8.5.6 Changing the ECG Filter Settings The ECG filter setting defines how ECG waves are smoothed. To change the filter setting, select [Filter] from [ECG

Setup] and then select the appropriate setting.

[Monitor]: Use under normal measurement conditions.

[Diagnostic]: Use when diagnostic quality is required. The unfiltered ECG wave is displayed so that changes

such as R-wave notching or discrete elevation or depression of the ST segment are visible.

[Surgery]: Use when the signal is distorted by high frequency or low frequency interference. High frequency

interference usually results in large amplitude spikes making the ECG signal look irregular. Low frequency

interference usually leads to wandering or rough baseline. In the operating room, the surgery filter reduces

artifacts and interference from electrosurgical units. Under normal measurement conditions, selecting [Surgery]

may suppress the QRS complexes too much and then interfere with ECG analysis.

[ST]: Use when ST monitoring is applied.

WARNING

The [Diagnostic] filter is recommended when monitoring a patient in an environment with slight

interference only.

8.5.7 Setting the Notch Filter The notch filter removes the line frequency interference. Only when [Filter] is set to [Diagnostic], the [Notch Filter]

is adjustable.

1. Select the ECG parameter window or waveform area to enter its setup menu. Then select [Others >>].

2. Set [Notch Filter] to

[Strong] when there is strong interference (such as spikes) with the waveform.

[Weak] when there is weak interference with the waveform.

[Off] to turn the notch filter off.

3. When [Notch Filter] is set on, select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance

>>]→enter the required password.

4. Select [Others >>] [→ Notch Freq.] and then select [50Hz] or [60Hz] according to the power line frequency.

8.5.8 Changing the Pacer Reject Settings Select [ECG Setup]→[Others>>]→[Pacer Reject], and toggle between [On] and [Off].

When [Paced] is set to [Yes]:

When [Pacer Reject] is switched on, the pace pulses are not counted as extra QRS complexes.

The pace pulse marks “|” are shown on the ECG wave when pace pulses are detected.

When [Paced] is set to [No], the pace markers are not shown on the ECG wave, and the options of [Pacer Reject] are

invalid.

8-8

8.5.9 About the Defibrillator Synchronization If a defibrillator is connected, a defibrillator synchronization pulse (100 ms, +5V) is outputted through the Defib. Sync

Connector every time when the patient monitor detects an R-wave. The defibrillator synchronization function is always

enabled.

WARNING

Improper use of a defibrillator may cause injury to the patient. The user should determine whether to

perform defibrillation or not according to the patient’s condition.

Before defibrillation, the user must ensure both defibrillator and monitor has passed the system test and

can be safely used jointly.

Before defibrillation, make sure that the [Filter] is set to [Diagnostic].

After defibrillation is finished, select the filter mode as required.

8.5.10 Changing ECG Wave Settings In the [ECG Setup] menu:

You can select [ECG], [ECG1], or [ECG2] to select a lead to view. The waveform of selected lead should have the

following characteristics:

The QRS should be either completely above or below the baseline and it should not be biphasic.

The QRS should be tall and narrow.

The P-waves and T-waves should be less than 0.2mV.

If the wave is too small or clipped, you can change its size by selecting an appropriate [Gain] setting. If you select

[Auto] from [Gain], the patient monitor will automatically adjust the size of the ECG waves. In normal screen,

only the selected ECG wave’s size is adjusted. In other screens, all ECG waves’ size is adjusted simultaneously.

You can change the wave sweep speed by selecting [Sweep] and then selecting the appropriate setting.

8.5.11 Enabling Smart Lead Off When the smart lead off function is set on and there is a “lead off” in the lead that has an ECG waveform in filter mode

and notch status, if another lead is available, this available lead automatically becomes that lead. The system will

re-calculate HR and analyze and detect arrhythmia. When the “lead off” condition is corrected, the leads are

automatically switched back.

To switch on/off the smart lead off function, select [Others >>] from the [ECG Setup] menu; select [Smart Lead Off]

and toggle between [On] and [Off] from the popup menu.

8.5.12 Setting the Alarm Level for ECG Lead Off Alarms Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. You can set [ECGLeadOff Lev.] from the popup

menu.

8-9

8.5.13 Adjusting QRS Volume QRS sounds are produced based on the alarm source. To adjust the QRS volume, select [Others >>] from the [ECG

Setup] menu; select [QRS Volume] from the popup menu and select the appropriate setting. When valid SpO2

measured value is available, the system adjusts the pitch tone of QRS sound based on the SpO2 value.

8.6 About ST Monitoring

Mortara ST segment analysis is not intended for neonatal patients.

ST segment analysis calculates ST segment elevations and depressions for individual leads and then displays them

as numerics in the ST1 and ST2 areas.

A positive value indicates ST segment elevation; a negative value indicates ST segment depression.

Measurement unit of the ST segment: mV or mm. You can set the unit in the [Unit Setup] menu from the [User

Maintenance] menu.

Measurement range of the ST segment: -2.0 mV to +2.0 mV.

WARNING

The ST algorithm has been tested for accuracy of the ST segment data. The significance of the ST segment

changes need to be determined by a clinician.

8.6.1 Switching ST On and Off To switch ST monitoring on or off:

1. In the [ECG Setup] menu, select [ST Analysis >>].

2. Select [ST Analysis] to toggle between [On] and [Off].

Reliable ST monitoring can hardly be ensured if:

You are unable to get a lead that is not noisy.

Arrhythmias such as atrial fib/flutter cause irregular baseline.

The patient is continuously ventricularly paced.

The patient has left bundle branch block.

In these cases, you may consider switching ST monitoring off.

8.6.2 Changing ST Filter Settings ST-segment analysis can be carried out only when the filter mode is set to [Diagnostic] or [ST]. When ST-segment

analysis is switched on, [Filter] will automatically switch to [ST] if it is not [Diagnostic] or [ST]. When ST-segment

analysis is switched off, the filter mode automatically switches to previous manual setting.

However, if you switch [Filter] to [Monitor] or [Surgery], ST-segment analysis will turn off automatically. In case that

you change [Monitor] or [Surgery] to [Diagnostic] or [ST], ST-segment analysis keeps off, you can turn it on

manually.

8-10

8.6.3 Understanding the ST Display 8.6.3.1 ST Numerics

This example shows ST numerics with 5-lead ECG. Your monitor screen may look slightly different from the illustration.

8.6.3.2 ST Segment

ST segment shows a QRS complex segment for each measured ST lead. The current ST segment is drawn in the same

color as the ECG wave, usually green, superimposed over the stored reference segment, drawn in a different color. The

information is updated once every ten seconds.

To display the ST segment on normal screen:

1. Enter the [ST Analysis] menu. Set [ST Analysis] to [On].

2. Enter the [Screen Setup] window of [Screens] menu. Set [ST Segment] to be displayed.

Select the ST parameter window or ST segment area and you can enter the [ST Analysis] menu.

8.6.4 Saving the Current ST Segment as Reference Select [Save Ref.] in the [ST Analysis] menu to save the current segment as reference. Up to 20 reference segment

groups can be saved.

8-11

NOTE

If the memory is full and you do not delete a group before saving a new one, the oldest saved group is

deleted automatically.

8.6.5 Changing the Reference Segment Select the and arrow keys beside the [Change Ref.] to switch between different reference segment groups.

8.6.6 Deleting a Reference Segment To delete the current ST reference segment, select [Delete Ref.] in the [ST Analysis] menu and then select [Ok] in

the popup.

8.6.7 Recording the ST Segment To record the current ST segment and reference segment, select [Record] in the [ST Analysis] menu.

8.6.8 Changing the ST Alarm Limits High and low ST alarm limits can be set individually for each ECG lead. Alarm limits can also be set separately for

single-lead and multi-lead ST monitoring. You can select [ST Alarm Setup >>] from [ST Analysis] menu and then

change ST alarm settings for each lead.

8.6.9 Setting the ST Alarm Delay Time You can set the ST alarm delay time from the [Others] window of [Alarm Setup] menu.

8.6.10 Adjusting ST Measurement Points As shown in the figure below, the ST measured for each beat complex is the vertical difference between two

measurement points with the R-wave peak as the baseline for the measurement.

The ISO and ST points need to be adjusted when you start monitoring and if the patient’s heart rate or ECG morphology

changes significantly. Exceptional QRS complexes are not considered for ST-segment analysis.

WARNING

Always make sure that the positions of ST measurement points are appropriate for your patient.

R-wave peak

P T

Isoelectric point ST measurement point Difference=ST value J point

8-12

To adjust the ST measurement points:

1. In the [ST Analysis] menu, select [Adjust ST Point >>]. In the [Adjust ST Point] window, three vertical lines

represent the ISO, J and ST point positions respectively.

2. Select [View Leads] and use the Knob to select an ECG lead with obvious J point and R wave.

3. Select [ISO], [J] or [ST Point] and then use the Knob to adjust the position of each point.

The ISO-point (isoelectric) position is given relative to the R-wave peak. Position the ISO-point in the middle

of the flattest part of the baseline (between the P and Q waves of in front of the P wave).

The J-point position is given relative to the R-wave peak and helps locating the ST-point. Position the J-point

at the end of the QRS complex and the beginning of the ST segment.

The ST-point is positioned a fixed distance from the J-point. Move the J-point to position the ST-point at the

midpoint of the ST segment. Position the ST-point relative to the J-point at either [J+60/80ms],

[J+40ms], [J+60ms] or [J+80ms]. When [J+60/80ms] is selected, the ST-point will be positioned 80

ms (heart rate 120 bpm or less) or 60 ms (heart rate more than 120 bpm) from the J-point.

8.7 About Arrhythmia Monitoring

Arrhythmia analysis provides information about your patient’s condition, including heart rate, PVC rate, rhythm and

ectopics.

WARNING

Arrhythmia analysis program is intended to detect ventricular arrhythmias. It is not designed to detect

atrial or supraventricular arrhythmias. It may incorrectly identify the presence or absence of an

arrhythmia. Therefore, a physician must analyze the arrhythmia information with other clinical findings.

Mortara arrhythmia algorithm is not intended for neonatal patients.

8.7.1 Understanding the Arrhythmia Events Mindray algorithm

Arrhythmia message Description Category

Asystole No QRS detected within the set time threshold in absence of ventricular

fibrillation or chaotic signal.

Vfib/Vtac A fibrillatory wave for 6 consecutive seconds.

A dominant rhythm of adjacent Vs and a HR > the V-Tac HR limit.

Vtac The consecutive PVCs > Vtac PVCs limit, and the HR > the Vtac HR limit.

Vent. Brady The consecutive PVCs ≥ the Vbrd threshold and the ventricular HR < the

Vbrd Rate threshold.

Extreme Tachy The heart rate is greater than the extreme tachycardia limit.

Extreme Brady The heart rate is less than the extreme bradycardia limit.

Lethal

arrhythmia

PVCs PVCs/min exceeds high limit

PNP No pace pulse detected for 1.75 x average R-to-R intervals following a

QRS complex (for paced patients only).

Nonlethal

arrhythmia

8-13

Arrhythmia message Description Category

PNC No QRS complex detected for 300 milliseconds following a pace pulse

(for paced patients only).

PVC One PVC detected in normal heartbeats.

Couplet Paired PVCs detected in normal heartbeats.

VT > 2 More than 2 consecutive PVCs within the last minute.

Bigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V, N, V.

Trigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, N, V,N, N, V, N, N, V.

R on T R on T detected in normal heartbeats.

Missed Beats

No beat detected for 1.75 x average R-R interval for HR <120, or

No beat for 1 second with HR > 120 (for non-paced patients only), or

No beat detected for more than the set pause threshold.

Brady The average heart rate is less than the bradycardia limit.

Tachy The average heart rate is greater than the tachycardia limit.

Vent. Rhythm The consecutive PVCs > the Vbrd PVCs limit, and the HR is between Vbrd

Rate limit and the Vtac Rate limit.

Multif. PVC Multiform PVCs detected in Multif. PVC's Window (which is adjustable).

Nonsus. Vtac The consecutive PVCs < the Vtac PVCs limit but > 2, and HR > the Vtac

Rate limit.

Pause No QRS detected within the set time threshold of pause.

Irr. Rhythm Consistently irregular rhythm.

Mortara algorithm

Arrhythmia Message Description Category

Asystole No QRS complex detected within the set time threshold (in absence of ventricular

fibrillation or chaotic signals).

Vfib Ventricular fibrillation occurs and persists for 6 seconds.

Vtac Ventricular HR is greater or equal to the preset threshold and the number of

consecutive PVCs is greater than the preset threshold.

Lethal

arrhythmia

PVCs PVCs/min exceeds high limit

PNP No pace pulse detected for (60*1000/pace rate +90) milliseconds following a QRS

complex or a pacer pulse (for paced patients only).

PNC No QRS complex detected for 300 milliseconds following a pace pulse (for paced

patients only).

Multif. PVC More than 2 PVCs of different forms occur in the predefined search window

(3-31).

Couplet Paired PVCs are detected.

VT > 2 Ventricular HR is greater than or equal to the preset threshold and the number of

PVCs is greater than or equal to 3 but less than the preset threshold.

Vent. Rhythm Ventricular HR is less than the preset threshold and the number of PVCs is greater

than or equal to 3.

Bigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, V,N, V, N, V.

Trigeminy A dominant rhythm of N, N, V,N, N, V, N, N, V.

R on T R on T is detected.

Irr. Rhythm Consistently irregular rhythm

Nonlethal

arrhythmia

8-14

Arrhythmia Message Description Category

Missed Beats

No beat detected for 1.75x average R-R interval for HR <120, or

No beat for 1 second with HR >120 (for non-paced patients only), or

No beat detected for more than the set pause threshold.

Brady The HR is less than the set bradycardia low limit.

Tachy The HR is greater than the set tachycardia high limit.

8.7.2 Changing Arrhythmia Alarm Settings To change arrhythmia alarm settings, select the ECG parameter area or waveform area →[ECG Setup]→ [Arrh.

Analysis >>]. In the pop-up menu, you can set the [Alm Lev] to [High], [Med], [Low] or [Message], or switch on lethal

arrhythmia analysis alarms only or switch on/off all arrhythmia analysis alarms. In the [Alarm Setup] menu from the

[User Maintenance] menu, you can enable/disable turning off lethal arrhythmia analysis alarms.

WARNING

If you switch off all arrhythmia analysis alarms, the monitor cannot give any arrhythmia analysis alarm.

Always keep the patient under close surveillance.

8.7.3 Changing Arrhythmia Threshold Settings Select the ECG parameter window or waveform area [→ Arrh. Analysis >>] [→ Arrh. Threshold], and you can then

change threshold settings for some arrhythmia alarms. In case an arrhythmia violates its threshold, an alarm will be

triggered. The asystole delay time relates to ECG relearning. When HR is less than 30 bpm, it is recommended to set the

asystole delay time to 10 seconds.

Mindray algorithm

Arrh. event Range Default Step Unit

PVCs High 1 to 100 10 1 /min

Asys. Delay 3 to 10 5 1 s

Tachy High 60 to 300

Adult: 120

Pediatric: 160

Neonate: 180

5 bpm

Brady Low 15 to 120

Adult: 50

Pediatric: 75

Neonate: 90

5 bpm

Extreme Tachy 120 to 300

Adult: 160

Pediatric: 180

Neonate: 200

5 bpm

Extreme Brady 15 to 60

Adult: 35

Pediatric: 50

Neonate: 60

5 bpm

Multif. PVC's Window 3 to 31 15 1 /min

Vtac Rate 100 to 200 Adult, pediatric: 130

Neonate: 160 5 bpm

8-15

Arrh. event Range Default Step Unit

Vtac PVCs 3 to 99 6 1 /min

Pause Time 1.5, 2.0,2.5 2 / s

Vbrd PVCs 3 to 99 5 1 /min

Vbrd Rate 15 to 60 40 5 bpm

Mortara algorithm

Arrh. event Range Default Step Unit

PVCs High 1 to 100 10 1 /min

Asys. Delay 2 to 10 5 1 s

Vtac Rate 100 to 200 130 5 bpm

Vtac PVC 3 to 12 6 1 beats

Multif. PVC 3 to 31 15 1 beats

Tachy High Adult: 100 to 300

Pediatric: 160 to 300

Adult: 100

Pediatric: 160

5 bpm

Brady Low Adult: 15 to 60

Pediatric: 15 to 80

Adult: 60

Pediatric: 80

5 bpm

8.7.4 Setting the Extended Arrh. (For Mindray Algorithm Only) The following arrhythmia events are defined as extended arrhythmia:

Extreme Tachy

Extreme Brady

Vent. Brady

Nonsus. Vtac

Multif. PVC

Irr. Rhythm

Pause

You can select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance >>] [→ User Maintenance >>] enter the required →

password→select [Alarm Setup >>], and set [Extended Arrh.] to [Enable] or [Disable]. When [Extended

Arrh.] is set to [Disable], the patient monitor does not analysis the extended arrhythmia events and corresponding

alarms are not given.

CAUTION

Set [Extended Arrh.] to [Disable] when the patient monitor is connected to the Central Monitoring

System of version prior to 06.01.00. Failure to do so may cause the Central Monitoring System unable to

display extended arrhythmia related alarms normally when extended arrhythmia occurs.

8.7.5 Reviewing Arrhythmia Events Please refer to the Review chapter.

8-16

8.8 ECG Relearning

8.8.1 Initiating an ECG Relearning Manually During ECG monitoring, you may need to initiate an ECG relearning when the patient’s ECG template changes

dramatically. A change in the ECG template could result in:

incorrect arrhythmia alarms

loss of ST measurement, and/or

inaccurate heart rate

ECG relearning allows the monitor to learn the new ECG template so as to correct arrhythmia alarms and HR value, and

restore ST measurements. To initiate relearning manually, select the ECG parameter window or waveform

area [→ Relearn]. When the patient monitor is learning, the message [ECG Learning] is displayed in the technical

alarm area.

CAUTION

Take care to initiate ECG relearning only during periods of normal rhythm and when the ECG signal is

relatively noise-free. If ECG learning takes place during ventricular rhythm, the ectopics may be incorrectly

learned as the normal QRS complex. This may result in missed detection of subsequent events of V-Tach

and V-Fib.

8.8.2 Automatic ECG Relearning ECG relearning is initiated automatically whenever:

The ECG lead or lead label is changed

The ECG lead is re-connected

A new patient is admitted

After the calibration is completed, select [Stop Calibrating ECG]

A switch happens between the options of screen type during 5/12-lead ECG monitoring.

The paced status of the patient is changed.

8-17

8.9 12-Lead ECG Monitoring

8.9.1 Entering the 12-lead ECG Monitoring Screen

1. Refer to the section 8.3.3 ECG Lead Placements for placing the electrodes.

2. In the [ECG Setup] menu, select [Lead Set] [→ 12-Lead]. Select [Screens] Quickkey [→ ECG 12-Lead

Full-Screen].

There are totally 12 ECG waves and 1 rhythm wave displayed on the screen. The rhythm lead is ECGⅠbefore entering the

12-lead ECG monitoring screen. The ST numerics are displayed in three groups:

ST Ant (anterior): V1, V2, V3, V4

ST Inf (inferior): II, III, aVF, (aVR)

ST Lat (lateral): I, aVL, V5, V6

Although aVR is displayed in the ST Inf group, it is not an inferior lead.

Additionally, the 12-lead ECG monitoring has the following features:

The [Filter] mode is automatically switched to [Diagnostic] when the patient monitor accesses the 12-lead

full-screen; the [Filter] mode resumes to the configuration before accessing the 12-lead full screen when the

patient monitor exit the 12-lead full screen.

In the adult mode, the hardkey on the monitor’s front is disabled.

8-18

8.9.2 Interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG

WARNING

Interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG is restricted to adult patients only.

You can only start a interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG 11 seconds after entering the 12-lead ECG monitoring screen.

Otherwise, the prompt message [Not enough data. Cannot analyze.] will be displayed. To start a interpretation

of resting 12-lead ECG, select [Freeze] and then [Analyze]. The following screen will be displayed. In this screen, you

can:

Select [Record Result] to print out the interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG results by the recorder.

Select [Record Wave] to print out the interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG results and waves by the recorder.

Select [Print Report] to print out the interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG report by the printer.

Besides, after selecting [Freeze], you can:

Browse the frozen ECG waves by selecting [Scroll] and rotating the Knob, or selecting the or button

beside [Scroll].

Print out the currently frozen waves by selecting [Record].

8-19

8.9.3 Reviewing Interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG Results In the 12-lead ECG monitoring screen, you can review previous 12-lead ECG analyses by selecting [Review].

In this review window, you can:switch between details and results list by selecting [Details] or [Results List]. When

viewing the details, you can:

Select or beside [Result] to switch between results.

Adjust [Gain] and [Sweep].

Select [Record] to print out the currently displayed interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG results by the recorder.

Select [Print] to print out the currently displayed interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG results by the printer.

8-20

FOR YOUR NOTES

9-1

9 Monitoring Respiration (Resp)

9.1 Introduction

Impedance respiration is measured across the thorax. When the patient is breathing or ventilated, the volume of air

changes in the lungs, resulting in impedance changes between the electrodes. Respiration rate (RR) is calculated from

these impedance changes, and a respiration waveform appears on the patient monitor screen.

9.2 Safety Information

WARNING

When monitoring the patient’s respiration, do not use ESU-proof ECG cables.

If you do not set the detection level for the respiration correctly in manual detection mode, it may not be

possible for the monitor to detect apnea. If you set the detection level too low, the monitor is more likely

to detect cardiac activity, and to falsely interpret cardiac activity as respiratory activity in the case of

apnea.

The respiration measurement does not recognize the cause of apneas. It only indicates an alarm if no

breath is detected when a pre-adjusted time has elapsed since the last detected breath. Therefore, it

cannot be used for diagnostic purpose.

If operating under conditions according to the EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2 (Radiated Immunity 3V/m),

field strengths above 1V/m may cause erroneous measurements at various frequencies. Therefore it is

recommended to avoid the use of electrically radiating equipment in close proximity to the respiration

measurement unit.

9.3 Understanding the Resp Display

By selecting the waveform area or parameter area, you can enter the [Resp Waveform] menu. By selecting the Resp

parameter window, you can enter the [Resp Setup] menu.

NOTE

Respiration monitoring is not for use on the patients who are very active, as this will cause false alarms.

Resp lead label Respiration rate Gain RR source

9-2

9.4 Placing Resp Electrodes

As the skin is a poor conductor of electricity, preparing the skin is necessary for a good Respiration signal. You can refer

to the ECG section for how to prepare the skin.

As the Respiration measurement adopts the standard ECG electrode placement, you can use different ECG cables (3-lead,

5-lead or 12-lead). Since the respiration signal is measured between two ECG electrodes, if a standard ECG electrode

placement is applied, the two electrodes should be RA and LA of ECG Lead I, or RA and LL of ECG Lead II.

NOTE

To optimize the respiration waveform, place the RA and LA electrodes horizontally when monitoring

respiration with ECG Lead I; place the RA and LL electrodes diagonally when monitoring respiration with

ECG Lead II.

Lead I Lead II

9.4.1 Optimizing Lead Placement for Resp If you want to measure Resp and you are already measuring ECG, you may need to optimize the placement of the two

electrodes between which Resp will be measured. Repositioning ECG electrodes from standard positions results in

changes in the ECG waveform and may influence ST and arrhythmia interpretation.

9.4.2 Cardiac Overlay Cardiac activity that affects the Resp waveform is called cardiac overlay. It happens when the Resp electrodes pick up

impedance changes caused by the rhythmic blood flow. Correct electrodes placement can help to reduce cardiac

overlay: avoid the liver area and the ventricles of the heart in the line between the respiratory electrodes. This is

particularly important for neonates.

9-3

9.4.3 Abdominal Breathing Some patients with restricted movement breathe mainly abdominally. In these cases, you may need to place the left leg

electrode on the left abdomen at the point of maximum abdominal expansion to optimise the respiratory wave.

9.4.4 Lateral Chest Expansion In clinical applications, some patients (especially neonates) expand their chests laterally, causing a negative intrathoracic

pressure. In these cases, it is better to place the two respiration electrodes in the right midaxillary and the left lateral

chest areas at the patient’s maximum point of the breathing movement to optimise the respiratory waveform.

9.5 Choosing the Respiration Lead

In the [Resp Setup] menu, set [Resp Lead] to [I], [II] or [Auto].

9.6 Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay

The apnea alarm is a high-level alarm used to detect apneas. You can set the apnea alarm delay time after which the

patient monitor alarms if the patient stops breathing. In the [Resp Setup] menu, select [Apnea Delay] and then

select the appropriate setting. The [Apnea Delay] of Resp, CO2, AG, and RM module keeps consistent with each other.

9.7 Changing Resp Detection Mode

In the [Resp Setup] menu, select [Detection Mode] and toggle between [Auto] and [Manual].

In auto detection mode, the patient monitor adjusts the detection level automatically, depending on the wave

height and the presence of cardiac artifact. Note that in auto detection mode, the detection level (a dotted line) is

not displayed on the waveform.

Use auto detection mode for situations where:

The respiration rate is not close to the heart rate.

Breathing is spontaneous, with or without continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP).

Patients are ventilated, except patients with intermittent mandatory ventilation (IMV).

In manual detection mode, you adjust the dotted detection level line to the desired level by selecting [Upper

Line] or [Lower Line] and then selecting or beside them. Once set, the detection level will not adapt

automatically to different respiration depths. It is important to remember that if the depth of breathing changes,

you may need to change the detection level.

Use manual detection mode for situations where:

The respiration rate and the heart rate are close.

Patients have intermittent mandatory ventilation.

Respiration is weak. Try repositioning the electrodes to improve the signal.

9-4

In Auto Detection Mode, if you are monitoring Resp and ECG is switched off, the monitor cannot compare the ECG and

Resp rates to detect cardiac overlay. The respiration detection level is automatically set higher to prevent the detection

of cardiac overlay as respiration.

In Manual Detection Mode, cardiac overlay can in certain situations trigger the respiration counter. This may lead to a

false indication of a high respiration or an undetected apnea condition. If you suspect that cardiac overlay is being

registered as breathing activity, raise the detection level above the zone of cardiac overlay. If the Resp wave is so small

that raising the detection level is not possible, you may need to optimize the electrode placement as described in the

section "Lateral Chest Expansion".

9.8 Changing Resp Wave Settings

WARNING

When monitoring in manual detection mode, make sure to check the respiration detection level after you

have increased or decreased the size of the respiration wave.

In the [Resp Setup] menu, you can:

Select [Gain] and then select an appropriate setting. The bigger the gain is, the larger the wave amplitude is.

Select [Sweep] and then select an appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

9.9 Setting RR Source

To set RR source:

1. Enter the [Resp Setup] menu.

2. Select [RR Source] and then select a source or [Auto] from the dropdown list.

The dropdown list displays the currently available RR source. When you select [Auto], the system will automatically

select the RR source according to the priority. When the current RR source does not have valid measurement, the system

will automatically switch the [RR Source] to [Auto]. RR source switches back to impedance respiration if you press the

silence hardkey on the monitor’s front during an apnea alarm.

The priority of RR source is (from high to low): CO2 measurement, RM measurement and impedance respiration

measurement.

9-5

The [RR Source] settings of Resp, CO2, AG and RM module are linked.

The RR source options and description are shown in the table below.

Option Description

Auto RR source is automatically selected according to the priority.

CO2 RR source is from CO2 measurement.

RM RR source is from RM measurement.

ECG RR source is from impedance respiration measurement.

9.10 Setting alarm properties

Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [Resp Setup] menu. In the popup menu, you can set alarm properties for this

parameter.

9-6

FOR YOUR NOTES

10-1

10 Monitoring PR

10.1 Introduction

The pulse numeric counts the arterial pulsations that result from the mechanical activity of the heart. You can display a

pulse from any measured SpO2 or any arterial pressure (see the IBP section). The displayed pulse numeric is color-coded

to match its source.

1. PR: detected beats per minute.

2. PR Source

10.2 Setting the PR Source

The current pulse source is displayed in the PR parameter area. The pulse rate chosen as pulse source:

is monitored as system pulse and generates alarms when you select PR as the active alarm source;

is stored in the monitor’s database and reviewed in the graphic/tabular trends; in trend graphs, as the PR curve is

in the same color with the PR source , it is unlikely to distinguish the PR source ;

is sent via the network to the central monitoring system, if available.

To set which pulse rate as PR source:

1. Enter the [SpO2 Setup] menu.

2. Select [PR Source] and then select a label or [Auto] from the popup menu.

The popup menu displays the currently available PR sources from top to bottom by priority. When you select [Auto],

the system will automatically select the first option as the PR source from the popup menu. When the current PR source

is unavailable, the system will automatically switch [PR Source] to [Auto]. When you select [IBP], the system will

automatically select the first pressure label as the PR source from the popup menu.

1

2

10-2

10.3 Selecting the Active Alarm Source

In most cases the HR and pulse numerics are identical. In order to avoid simultaneous alarms on HR and Pulse, the

monitor uses either HR or Pulse as its active alarm source. To change the alarm source, select [Alm Source] in the [ECG

Setup] or [SpO2 Setup] menu and then select either:

[HR]: The monitor will use the HR as the alarm source for HR/pulse.

[PR]: The monitor will use the PR as the alarm source for HR/pulse.

[Auto]: If the [Alm Source] is set to [Auto], the monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG measurement as

the alarm source whenever the ECG measurement is switched on and a valid heart rate is available. If the heart

rate becomes unavailable, for example if leads becomes disconnected, and a pulse source is switch on and

available, the monitor will automatically switch to Pulse as the alarm source. When the Leads Off condition is

corrected, the monitor will automatically switch back to the heart rate as the alarm source.

10.4 QRS Tone

When PR is used as the alarm source, the PR source will be used as a source for the QRS tone. You can change the QRS

volume by adjusting [Beat Vol] in the [SpO2 Setup] menu. When a valid SpO2 value exists, the system will adjust the

pitch tone of QRS volume according to the SpO2 value.

11-1

11 Monitoring SpO2

11.1 Introduction

SpO2 monitoring is a non-invasive technique used to measure the amount of oxygenated haemoglobin and pulse rate

by measuring the absorption of selected wavelengths of light. The light generated in the probe passes through the

tissue and is converted into electrical signals by the photodetector in the probe. The SpO2 module processes the

electrical signal and displays a waveform and digital values for SpO2 and pulse rate.

This device is calibrated to display functional oxygen saturation. It provides four measurements:

1. Pleth waveform (Pleth/Plethb): visual indication of patient’s pulse. The waveform is not normalized.

2. Oxygen saturation of arterial blood (SpO2/SpO2b): percentage of oxygenated hemoglobin in relation to the sum of

oxyhemoglobin and deoxyhemoglobin. SpO2 measurement is obtained through the MPM module, and SpO2b

measurement is obtained through the SpO2 module.

3. Perfusion index (PI): gives the numerical value for the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by arterial

pulsation. PI is an indicator of the pulsatile strength. You can also use it to assess the quality of SpO2 measurement.

Above 1 is optimal, between 0.3 and 1 is acceptable. Below 0.3 indicates low perfusion; reposition the SpO2 sensor or find

a better site. If low perfusion persists, choose another method to measure oxygen saturation if possible.

PI is available for Mindray SpO2 module or Masimo SpO2 module.

4. Perfusion indicator: the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by arterial pulsation.

5. SpO2 difference (ΔSpO2): ΔSpO2=∣SpO2－SpO2b∣.

6. Pulse rate (derived from pleth wave): detected pulsations per minute.

In the case that you need to measure SpO2 and spO2b, select the same type of modules. Otherwise, the SpO2 module for

SpO2b is closed automatically. For example, if MPM module configuring Mindray SpO2 and Masimo SpO2 module are

applied simultaneously, Masimo SpO2 module is closed automatically.

21

1 2

6

3

3

4

4 5

11-2

11.2 Safety

WARNING

Use only SpO2 sensors specified in this manual. Follow the SpO2 sensor’s instructions for use and adhere to

all warnings and cautions.

When a trend toward patient deoxygenation is indicated, blood samples should be analyzed by a

laboratory co-oximeter to completely understand the patient’s condition.

Do not use SpO2 sensors during magnetic resonance imaging (MRI). Induced current could potentially

cause burns. The sensor may affect the MRI image, and the MRI unit may affect the accuracy of the

oximetry measurements.

Prolonged continuous monitoring may increase the risk of undesirable changes in skin characteristics,

such as irritation, reddening, blistering or burns. Inspect the sensor site every two hours and move the

sensor if the skin quality changes. Change the application site every four hours. For neonates, or patients

with poor peripheral blood circulation or sensitive skin, inspect the sensor site more frequently.

11.3 Identifying SpO2 Connectors

To identify which SpO2 connector is incorporated into your MPM, BeneView T1, or SpO2 module, see the company logo

located at the right upper corner. The color of the cable connector matches the company as shown below:

Mindray SpO2 connector: a blue connector without logo.

Masimo SpO2 connector: a purple connector with a logo of Masimo SET.

Nellcor SpO2 connector: a grey connector with a logo of Nellcor.

The connectors for these three SpO2 sensors are mutually exclusive.

11.4 Applying the Sensor

1. Select an appropriate sensor according to the module type, patient category and weight.

2. Remove colored nail polish from the application site.

3. Apply the sensor to the patient.

4. Select an appropriate adapter cable according to the connector type and plug this cable into the SpO2 connector.

5. Connect the sensor cable to the adapter cable.

11-3

11.5 Changing SpO2 Settings

11.5.1 Accessing SpO2 Menus By selecting the SpO2 parameter window or waveform area, you can access the [SpO2 Setup] or [SpO2b Setup]

menu.

11.5.2 Adjusting the Desat Alarm The desat alarm is a high level alarm notifying you of potentially life threatening drops in oxygen saturation. Select

[Alarm Setup >>] from the [SpO2 Setup] or [SpO2b Setup] menu. From the popup menu, you can set low alarm

limit, alarm switch, and alarm recording for [Desat] or [Desatb]. When the SpO2 value is below the desat alarm limit

and desat alarm switch is set on, the message [SpO2 Desat] or [SpO2b Desat] is displayed.

11.5.3 Setting SpO2 Sensitivity For Masimo SpO2 module, you can set [Sensitivity] to [Normal] or [Maximum] in the [SpO2 Setup] or [SpO2b

Setup] menu. When the [Sensitivity] is set to [Maximum], the patient monitor is more sensitive to minor signals.

When monitoring critically ill patients whose pulsations are very weak, it is strongly recommended that the sensitivity is

set to [Maximum]. When monitoring neonatal or non-critically ill patients who tend to move a lot, noise or invalid

signals may be caused. In this case, it is recommended that the sensitivity is set to [Normal] so that the interference

caused by motion can be filtered and therefore the measurement stability can be ensured. The settings of sensitivity in

the [SpO2 Setup] and [SpO2b Setup] menus are linked.

11.5.4 Changing Averaging Time The SpO2 value displayed on the monitor screen is the average of data collected within a specific time. The shorter the

averaging time is, the quicker the patient monitor responds to changes in the patient’s oxygen saturation level.

Contrarily, the longer the averaging time is, the slower the patient monitor responds to changes in the patient’s oxygen

saturation level, but the measurement accuracy will be improved. For critically ill patients, selecting shorter averaging

time will help understanding the patient’s state.

To set the averaging time:

For Mindray SpO2 module, select [Sensitivity] in the [SpO2 Setup] or [SpO2b Setup] menu and then toggle

between [High], [Med] and [Low], which respectively correspond to 7 s, 9 s and 11 s.

For Masimo SpO2 module, select [Averaging] in the [SpO2 Setup] or [SpO2b Setup] menu and then toggle

between [2-4 s], [4-6 s], [8 s], [10 s], [12 s], [14 s] and [16 s].

11.5.5 Monitoring SpO2 and NIBP Simultaneously When monitoring SpO2 and NIBP on the same limb simultaneously, you can switch [NIBP Simul] on in the [SpO2

Setup] or [SpO2b Setup] menu to lock the SpO2 alarm status until the NIBP measurement ends. If you switch [NIBP

Simul] off, low perfusion caused by NIBP measurement may lead to inaccurate SpO2 readings and therefore cause false

physiological alarms.

11-4

11.5.6 Sat-Seconds Alarm Management With traditional alarm management, high and low alarm limits are set for monitoring oxygen saturation. During

monitoring, as soon as an alarm limit is violated, an audible alarm immediately sounds. When the patient % SpO2

fluctuates near an alarm limit, the alarm sounds each time the limit is violated. Such frequent alarm can be distracting.

Nellcor’s Sat-Seconds alarm management technique is used to reduce these nuisance alarms.

The Sat-Seconds feature is available with the Nellcor SpO2 module to decrease the likelihood of false alarms caused by

motion artifacts. To set the Sat-Seconds limit, select [Sat-Seconds] in the [SpO2 Setup] menu and then select the

appropriate setting.

With Sat-Seconds alarm management, high and low alarm limits are set in the same way as traditional alarm

management. A Sat-Seconds limit is also set. The Sat-Seconds limit controls the amount of time that SpO2 saturation

may be outside the set limits before an alarm sounds. The method of calculation is as follows: the number of percentage

points that the SpO2 saturation falls outside the alarm limit is multiplied by the number of seconds that it remains

outside the limit. This can be stated as the equation:

Sat-Seconds= Points × Seconds

Only when the Sat-Seconds limit is reached, the monitor gives a Sat-Seconds alarm. For example, the figure below

demonstrates the alarm response time with a Sat-Seconds limit set at 50 and a low SpO2 limit set at 90%. In this example,

the patient % SpO2 drops to 88% (2 points) and remains there for 2 seconds. Then it drops to 86% (4 points) for 3 seconds,

and then to 84% (6 points) for 6 seconds. The resulting Sat-Seconds are:

% SpO2 Seconds Sat-Seconds

2× 2= 4

4× 3= 12

6× 6= 36

Total Sat-Seconds= 52

After approximately 10.9 seconds, a Sat-Second alarm would sound, because the limit of 50 Sat-Seconds would have

been exceeded.

Seconds

11-5

Saturation levels may fluctuate rather than remaining steady for a period of several seconds. Often, the patient % SpO2

may fluctuate above and below an alarm limit, re-entering the non-alarm range several times. During such fluctuation,

the monitor integrates the number of %SpO2 points, both positive and negative, until either the Sat-Seconds limit is

reached, or the patient%SpO2 re-enters the non-alarm range and remains there.

11.5.7 Changing the Speed of the Pleth/Plethb Wave In the [SpO2 Setup] or [SpO2b Setup] menu, select [Sweep] and then select the appropriate setting. The faster the

waveform sweeps, the wider the waveform is.

11.5.8 Setting the Alarm Level for SpO2 Sensor Off Alarm Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. You can set the [SpO2 SensorOff Lev.] in the

popup menu.

11.5.9 Setting the SpO2 Tone Mode Select [Others >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the popup menu, you can set [SpO2 Tone] as [Mode

1] or [Mode 2].

WARNING

The same SpO2 tone mode shall be used for the same patient monitors in a single area.

11.6 Measurement Limitations

If you doubt the measured SpO2, check patient vital signs first. Then check the patient monitor and SpO2 sensor. The

following factors may influence the accuracy of measurement:

Ambient light

Physical movement (patient and imposed motion)

Diagnostic testing

Low perfusion

Electromagnetic interference, such as MRI environment

Electrosurgical units

Dysfunctional haemoglobin, such as carboxyhemoglobin (COHb)and methemoglobin (MetHb)

Presence of certain dyes, such as methylene and indigo carmine

Inappropriate positioning of the SpO2 sensor, or use of incorrect SpO2

Drop of arterial blood flow to immeaurable level caused by shock, anemia, low temperature or vasoconstrictor.

11-6

11.7 Masimo Information

Masimo Patents

This device is covered under one or more the following U.S.A. patents: 5,758,644, 6,011,986, 6,699,194, 7,215,986,

7,254,433, 7,530,955 and other applicable patents listed at: www.masimo.com/patents.htm.

No Implied License

Possession or purchase of this device does not convey any express or implied license to use the device with

unauthorized sensors or cables which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the scope of one or

more of the patents relating to this device.

11.8 Nellcor Information

Nellcor Patents

This device may be covered by one or more of the following US patents and foreign equivalents: 5,485,847, 5,676,141,

5,743,263, 6,035,223, 6,226,539, 6,411,833, 6,463,310, 6,591,123, 6,708,049, 7,016,715, 7,039,538, 7,120,479, 7,120,480,

7,142,142, 7,162,288, 7,190,985, 7,194,293, 7,209,774, 7,212,847, 7,400,919.

No Implied License

Possession or purchase of this device does not convey any express or implied license to use the device with

unauthorized replacement parts which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the scope of one or

more of the patents relating to this device.

12-1

12 Monitoring NIBP

12.1 Introduction

The MPM and BeneView T1 uses the oscillometric method for measuring the non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP). This

measurement can be used for adults, pediatrics and neonates.

Automatic non-invasive blood pressure monitoring uses the oscillometric method of measurement. To understand how

this method works, we’ll compare it to the auscultative method. With auscultation, the clinician listens to the blood

pressure and determines the systolic and diastolic pressures. The mean pressure can then be calculated with reference to

these pressures as long as the arterial pressure curve is normal.

Since the monitor cannot hear the blood pressure, it measures cuff pressure oscillation amplitudes. Oscillations are

caused by blood pressure pulses against the cuff. The oscillation with the greatest amplitude is the mean pressure. This is

the most accurate parameter measured by the oscillometric method. Once the mean pressure is determined, the systolic

and diastolic pressures are calculated with reference to the mean.

Simply stated, auscultation measures systolic and diastolic pressures and the mean pressure is calculated. The

oscillometric method measures the mean pressure and determines the systolic and diastolic pressures.

As specified by IEC 60601-2-30/EN60601-2-30, NIBP measurement can be performed during electro-surgery and

discharge of defibrillator.

NIBP diagnostic significance must be decided by the doctor who performs the measurement.

NOTE

Blood pressure measurements determined with this device are equivalent to those obtained by a trained

observer using the cuff/stethoscope auscultatory method or an intra-arterial blood pressure measurement

device, within the limits prescribed by the American National Standard, Manual, electronic, or automated

sphygmomanometers.

12-2

12.2 Safety

WARNING

Be sure to select the correct patient category setting for your patient before measurement. Do not apply

the higher adult settings for pediatric or neonatal patients. Otherwise it may present a safety hazard.

Do not measure NIBP on patients with sickle-cell disease or any condition where skin damage has occurred

or is expected.

Use clinical judgement to determine whether to perform frequent unattended blood pressure

measurements on patients with severe blood clotting disorders because of the risk of hematoma in the

limb fitted with the cuff.

Do not use the NIBP cuff on a limb with an intravenous infusion or arterial catheter in place. This could

cause tissue damage around the catheter when the infusion is slowed or blocked during cuff inflation.

If you doubt the NIBP readings, determines the patient’s vital signs by alternative means and then verify

that the monitor is working correctly.

12.3 Measurement Limitations

Measurements are impossible with heart rate extremes of less than 40bpm or greater than 240bpm, or if the patient is

on a heart-lung machine.

The measurement may be inaccurate or impossible:

If a regular arterial pressure pulse is hard to detect

With excessive and continuous patient movement such as shivering or convulsions

With cardiac arrhythmias

Rapid blood pressure changes

Severe shock or hypothermia that reduces blood flow to the peripheries

Obesity, where a thick layer of fat surrounding a limb dampens the oscillations coming from the artery

12.4 Measurement Methods

There are three methods of measuring NIBP:

Manual: measurement on demand.

Auto: continually repeated measurements at set intervals.

STAT: continually rapid series of measurements over a five minute period, then return to the previous mode.

12-3

12.5 Setting Up the NIBP Measurement

12.5.1 Preparing to Measure NIBP

1. Power on the monitor.

2. Verify that the patient category is correct. Change it if necessary.

3. Plug the air tubing into the NIBP connector on the MPM module or BeneView T1.

4. Select a correct sized cuff and then apply it as follows:

Determine the patient’s limb circumference.

Select an appropriate cuff by referring to the limb circumference marked on the cuff. The width of the cuff

should be 40% (50% for neonates) of the limb circumference, or 2/3 of the upper arm’s length. The

inflatable part of the cuff should be long enough to encircle at least 50% to 80% of the limb.

Apply the cuff to an upper arm or leg of the patient and make sure the Φ marking on the cuff matches the

artery location. Do not wrap the cuff too tightly around the limb. It may cause discoloration, and ischemia of

the extremities. Make sure that the cuff edge falls within the marked range. If it does not, use a larger or

smaller cuff that will fit better.

5. Connect the cuff to the air tubing and make sure that the bladder inside the cover is not folded and twisted.

NOTE

The use of the equipment is restricted to one patient at a time;

12.5.2 Starting and Stopping Measurements Select the [NIBP Measure] QuickKey and you can start the desired measurement from the popup menu. You can

select [Stop All] QuickKey to stop all NIBP measurements. You can also start and stop measurements by using the

hardkey on either the monitor’s front panel or the MPM module.

12.5.3 Correcting the Measurement if Limb is not at Heart Level The cuff should be applied to a limb at the same level as the patient’s heart. If the limb is not at the heart level, to the

displayed value:

Add 0.75 mmHg (0.10 kPa) for each centimetre higher, or

Deduct 0.75 mmHg (0.10 kPa) for each centimeter lower.

12.5.4 Enabling NIBP Auto Cycling and Setting the Interval

1. Select the NIBP parameter window to enter the [NIBP Setup] menu.

2. Select [Interval] and then select a desired time interval. Selecting [Manual] switches to manual mode.

3. Start a measurement manually. The monitor will then automatically repeat NIBP measurements at the set time

interval.

12-4

12.5.5 Starting a STAT Measurement

1. Select the NIBP parameter window to enter the [NIBP Setup] menu.

2. Select [NIBP STAT]. The STAT mode initiates 5 minutes of continuous, sequential, automatic NIBP measurements.

WARNING

Continuous non-invasive blood pressure measurements may cause purpura, ischemia and neuropathy in

the limb with the cuff. Inspect the application site regularly to ensure skin quality and inspect the

extremity of the cuffed limb for normal color, warmth and sensitivity. If any abnormity occurs, move the

cuff to another site or stop the blood pressure measurements immediately.

12.6 Understanding the NIBP Numerics

The NIBP display shows numerics only as below. Your display may be configured to look slightly different.

1. Time of last measurement

2. Time remaining to next measurement

3. Measurement mode

4. Unit of pressure: mmHg or kPa

5. Prompt message area: shows NIBP-related prompt messages

6. Systolic pressure

7. Diastolic pressure

8. Mean pressure obtained after the measurement and cuff pressure obtained during the measurement

12.7 Changing NIBP Settings

By selecting the NIBP parameter window, you can enter the [NIBP Setup] menu.

12.7.1 Setting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure You can set the initial cuff inflation pressure manually. In the [NIBP Setup] menu, select [Initial Pressure] and then

select the appropriate setting.

3

4

6 7 8

1

5

2

12-5

12.7.2 Setting NIBP Alarm Properties Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [NIBP Setup] menu. You can set the alarm properties for this parameter in the

popup menu.

12.7.3 Switching On NIBP End Tone The monitor can issue a reminder tone at the completion of NIBP measurement. The NIBP end tone is off by default. You

can switch it on by accessing the [NIBP Setup] menu.

12.7.4 Displaying NIBP List Select [Screens] QuickKey→[Screen Setup]. You can set [NIBP List] to be displayed at the bottom area of the

screen. Then, multiple sets of most recent NIBP measurements will be displayed. And PR displayed is derived from NIBP.

You can not display NIBP list in some screens such as the big numerics screen and the interpretation of resting 12-lead

ECG screen.

12.7.5 Setting the Pressure Unit Select [Unit Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the popup menu, select [Press. Unit] and toggle

between [mmHg] and [kPa].

12.8 Assisting Venous Puncture

You can use the NIBP cuff to cause sub-diastolic pressure to block the venous blood vessel and therefore help venous

puncture.

1. Select [VeniPuncture >>] from the [NIBP Setup] menu. In the popup menu, verify that the [Cuff Press.]

value is appropriate. Change it if necessary.

2. Select [VeniPuncture].

3. Puncture vein and draw blood sample.

4. Select the hardkey on the monitor’s front, or the [Stop All] QuickKey to deflate the cuff. The cuff deflates

automatically after a set time if you do not deflate it.

During measurement, the NIBP display shows the inflation pressure of the cuff and the remaining time in venous

puncture mode.

12-6

FOR YOUR NOTES

13-1

13 Monitoring Temp

13.1 Introduction

You can simultaneously monitor two temperature sites using the MPM or the BeneView T1.

13.2 Safety

WARNING

Verify that the probe detection program works correctly before monitoring. Plug out the temperature

probe cable from the T1 or T2 connector, and the monitor can display the message [T1 Sensor Off] or [T2

Sensor Off] and give alarm tones correctly.

13.3 Making a Temp Measurement

1. Select an appropriate probe for your patient.

2. If you are using a disposable probe, connect the probe to the temperature cable.

3 Plug the probe or temperature cable to the temperature connector.

4. Attach the probe to the patient correctly.

5. Check that the alarm settings are appropriate for this patient.

13.4 Understanding the Temp Display

The temperature monitoring is displayed on the monitor as three numerics: T1, T2 and TD. By selecting this area, you can

enter the [Alarm Setup] menu.

13-2

13.5 Setting the Temperature Unit

Select [Unit Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the popup menu, select [Temp Unit] and toggle

between [ºC] and [ºF].

14-1

14 Monitoring IBP

14.1 Introduction

You can measure invasive blood pressure using the MPM, BeneView T1, or the pressure plug-in module. The monitor can

monitor up to 8 invasive blood pressures and displays the systolic, diastolic and mean pressures and a waveform for each

pressure.

1. Zero key 2. Connector for IBP cable

14.2 Safety

WARNING

Use only pressure transducers specified in this manual. Never reuse disposable pressure transducers.

Make sure that the applied parts never contact other conductive parts.

To reduce the hazard of burns during high-frequency surgical procedure, ensure that the monitor’s cables

and transducers never come into contact with the high-frequency surgical units.

When using accessories, their operating temperature should be taken into consideration. For details, refer

to instructions for use of accessories.

1

2

14-2

14.3 Setting Up the Pressure Measurement

1. Plug the pressure cable into the IBP connector.

2. Prepare the flush solution.

3. Flush the system to exhaust all air from the tubing. Ensure that the transducer and stopcocks are free of air bubbles.

WARNING

If air bubbles appear in the tubing system, flush the system with the infusion solution again. Air bubble

may lead to wrong pressure reading.

4. Connect the pressure line to the patient catheter.

5. Position the transducer so that it is level with the heart, approximately at the level of the midaxillary line.

6. Select the appropriate label.

7. Zero the transducer. After a successful zeroing, turn off the stopcock to the atmosphere and turn on the stopcock to

the patient.

WARNING

If measuring intracranial pressure (ICP) with a sitting patient, level the transducer with the top of the

patient’s ear. Incorrect leveling may give incorrect values.

Heparinized

fluid bag

Flushing set

Valve

Pressure

transducer

Stopcock

Adapter cable for using

disposable transducers Pressure line

Monitor

14-3

14.4 Understanding the IBP Display

The IBP measurement is displayed on the monitor as a waveform and numeric pressures. The figure below shows the

waveform and numerics for the Art pressure. For different pressures, this display may be slightly different.

1. Waveform

2. Pressure unit

3. Systolic pressure

4. Mean pressure

5. Diastolic pressure

For some pressures, the parameter window may show the mean pressure only. For different pressures, their defaults unit

may be different. If the Art and ICP pressures are measured simultaneously, the ICP parameter area will display numeric

CPP, which is obtained by subtracting ICP from the Art mean.

14.5 Changing IBP Settings

14.5.1 Changing a Pressure for Monitoring

1. Select the pressure you want to change to enter its setup menu. In the menu, there is a figure showing the current

IBP measurement connector.

1

3 54 2

14-4

2. Select [Label] and then select your desired label from the list. The already displayed labels cannot be selected.

Label Description Label Description

PA Pulmonary artery pressure CVP Central venous pressure

Ao Aortic pressure LAP Left atrial pressure

UAP Umbilical arterial pressure RAP Right atrial pressure

BAP Brachial arterial pressure ICP Intracranial pressure

FAP Femoral arterial pressure UVP Umbilical venous pressure

Art Arterial blood pressure LV Left ventricular pressure

P1 to P4 Non-specific pressure label

14.5.2 Setting Alarm Properties Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the parameter setup menu. You can set alarm properties for this parameter in the

popup menu.

14.5.3 Changing Averaging Time The IBP value displayed on the monitor screen is the average of data collected within a specific time. The shorter the

averaging time is, the quicker the patient monitor responds to changes in the patient’s blood pressure. Contrarily, the

longer the averaging time is, the slower the patient monitor responds to changes in the patient’s blood pressure, but the

measurement accuracy will be improved. For critically ill patients, selecting shorter averaging time will help

understanding the patient’s state.

To set the averaging time, in the parameter setup menu, select [Sensitivity] and toggle between [High], [Med] and

[Low], the corresponding averaging time is about 1 s, 8 s and 12 s respectively.

14.5.4 Setting the Pressure Unit Select [Unit Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the popup menu, select [Press. Unit] and toggle

between [mmHg] and [kPa]. Select [CVP Unit] and toggle between [mmHg], [cmH2O] and [kPa].

14.5.5 Setting Up the IBP Wave In the setup menu for the pressure, you can:

Select [Sweep] and then select the appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

Select [Scale] and then select the appropriate setting. If [Auto] is selected, the size of the pressure’s waveform

will be adjusted automatically.

Select [Filter] and then select the desired option.

14-5

14.6 Measuring PAWP

Pulmonary Artery Wedge Pressure (PAWP) values, used to assess cardiac function, are affected by fluid status, myocardial

contractility, and valve and pulmonary circulation integrity.

Obtain the measurement by introducing a balloon-tipped pulmonary artery flotation catheter into the pulmonary artery.

When the catheter is in one of the smaller pulmonary arteries, the inflated balloon occludes the artery allowing the

monitor to record changes in the intrathoracic pressures that occur throughout the respiration cycle.

The pulmonary wedge pressure is the left ventricular end diastolic pressure when the airway pressure and valve function

are normal. The most accurate PAWP values are obtained at the end of the respiration cycle when the intrathoracic

pressure is fairly constant and the artifact caused by respiration is minimal.

14.6.1 Preparing to Measure PAWP

1. Prepare the same accessories as in the C.O. measurement. Connect the parts such as catheter, syringe, etc.

following the C.O. measurement steps and use the balloon inflation port.

2. Connect the PAWP cable into the IBP connector on the monitor. Since PAWP is measured on PA, selecting [PA] as

the IBP label is recommended.

3. Select the PA parameter window or waveform area to enter its setup menu. Then, select [PAWP] to enter the

PAWP measurement window. You can also enter the PAWP measurement window from the P1-P4 parameter

window.

NOTE

After entering the PAWP measurement window, the monitor will turn off the PA alarm automatically.

14-6

14.6.2 Setting Up the PAWP Measurement

1. Wedge the flotation catheter into the pulmonary artery. Then inflate the balloon and pay attention to PA waveform

changes on the screen.

2. After obtaining a stable PAWP waveform, press the [Freeze] key to freeze the waveform and deflate the balloon.

3. You can adjust the PAWP scale to an appropriate position by adjusting or beside the [Adjust] button.

Press the [Confirm] key to save one PAWP measurement.

4. If you need to start a new measurement, select [Next Measure].

WARNING

Prolonged inflation can cause pulmonary hemorrhage, infarction or both. Inflate the balloon for the

minimum time necessary to get an accurate measurement.

If the PAWP is greater than the PA (systolic), deflate the balloon and report the incident in accordance with

hospital policy. Because the pulmonary artery could be accidentally ruptured, and the PAWP value derived

will not reflect the patient’s hemodynamic state, but will merely reflect the pressure in the catheter or

balloon.

14.6.3 Understanding the PAWP Setup Menu Select [Setup] to enter the [PAWP Setup] menu. In this menu, you can:

Select a ECG lead wave as the first reference wave.

Select a respiration wave as the second reference wave.

Select a sweep speed for the displayed waveform.

Change the size of the PA waveform by adjusting the scale height.

14-7

14.7 Zeroing the Transducer

To avoid inaccurate pressure readings, the monitor requires a valid zero. Zero the transducer in accordance with your

hospital policy (at least once per day). Zero whenever:

A new transducer or adapter cable is used.

You reconnect the transducer cable to the monitor.

The monitor restarts.

You doubt the readings.

1. Turn off the stopcock to the patient.

2. Vent the transducer to the atmospheric pressure by turning on the stopcock to the air.

3. Press the hardkey on the module, or, in the setup menu for the pressure (e.g. Art), select [Art Zero >>] [→ Zero]. During zero calibration, the [Zero] button appears dimmed. It recovers after the zero calibration is

completed. To zero all IBP channels, select [Zero IBP] hotkey, and then select [Zero All Channels] in the popup

menu.

4. After the zero calibration is completed, close the stopcock to the air and open the stopcock to the patient.

NOTE

Your hospital policy may recommend that the ICP transducer is zeroed less frequently than other

transducers.

3-way stopcock

Pressure transducer

Pressure adapter cable

Monitor

14-8

FOR YOUR NOTES

15-1

15 Monitoring Cardiac Output

15.1 Introduction

The cardiac output (C.O.) measurement invasively measures cardiac output and other hemodynamic parameters using

the right heart (atria) thermodilution method. A cold solution of known volume and temperature is injected into the

right atrium through the proximal port of a pulmonary artery (PA) catheter. The cold solution mixes with the blood in the

right ventricle and the change in blood temperature is measured with a thermistor at the distal end of the catheter in

the pulmonary artery. The temperature change is displayed as a curve in the C.O. split screen, and the monitor calculates

the C.O. value from this curve. The C.O. value is inversely proportional to the area under the curve. As cardiac output

varies continuously, a series of measurements must be carried out to achieve a reliable C.O. average value. Always use

the average of multiple thermodilution measurements for therapy decisions. The monitor is capable of storing 6

measurements.

NOTE

C.O. monitoring is restricted to adult patients only.

Setup key C.O. start key

Connector for C.O. cable

15-2

15.2 Understanding the C.O. Display

The C.O. measurement is displayed on the monitor as numeric C.O., C.I. and TB in the C.O. parameter window as shown

below. To enter the [C.O. Setup] menu, select the C.O. parameter window.

1. Cardiac output 2. Time at which the C.O. average is calculated

3. Cardiac index 4. Blood temperature

15.3 Influencing Factors

The factors that affect cardiac output are:

temperature of injectate solution,

volume of injectate solution,

patient’s baseline blood temperature,

patient’s inspiratory/expiratory cycle,

placement of catheter with relation to proximity of lung field,

the catheter itself,

the patient rhythm and hemodynamic status, and

any other rapid IV solutions which are infused while the C.O. measurement is being performed.

Followings are some technique suggestions to obtain accurate C.O.:

Injectate solution must be cooler than the patient’s blood.

Inject solution rapidly and smoothly.

Inject at end expiration.

1 3

4

2

15-3

15.4 Setting Up the C.O. Measurement

WARNING

Use only accessories specified in this manual. Make sure that the accessories never come into contact with

conductive parts.

1. Connect the C.O. cable to the C.O. connector.

2. Interconnect the C.O. module, catheter and syringe as shown below. Make sure that:

The module is securely inserted.

The PA catheter is in place in the patient.

The C.O. cable is properly connected to the module.

NOTE

The above picture is connecting illustration when TI sensor PN 6000-10-02079 is used. The connection may

be different if other TI sensors are used.

Stopcock

C.O. module

C.O. cable Injectate

Syringe PA catheter

Balloon inflation port Ice water

Hole

In-line probe

15-4

3. Select the C.O. parameter window to enter the [C.O. Setup] menu. Check if the height and weight are appropriate

for your patient. Change if necessary.

4. In the [C.O. Setup] menu:

Check that the correct computation constant is entered. Refer to the Instruction for Use of pulmonary artery

catheter to determine the [Comp. Const] according to the entered injectate volume and temperature. To

change the computation constant, select [Comp. Const] and then enter the correct value. When a new

catheter is used, the computation constant should be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions for use.

Set the [Auto TI] to [Manual] or [Auto]. If you select [Auto], the system automatically detects the

injectate temperature, and the [Manual TI] is disabled. If you select [Manual], you need to enter the

injectate temperature at [Manual TI] manually.

Set the [Measuring Mode] to [Auto] or [Manual]. In [Auto] mode, the monitor automatically takes

the C.O. measurement after establishing a baseline blood temperature. In this mode, it is not necessary to

select the [Start] button in the C.O. measurement window. In [Manual] mode, the monitor takes the C.O.

measurement after [Start] button is selected.

5. Select [Enter C.O. Screen] to enter the C.O. measurements window.

A. Currently measured numeric

B. Currently measured C.O. curve

C. Prompt message area

D. Buttons

E. Averaged values

F. Measurement windows

A

B

C

D

E

F

15-5

6. Proceed as follows.

In [Manual] measure mode, when you see the message [Ready for new set of measurement],

select the [Start] button and then inject the solution quickly. As shown in the figure above, during the

measurement, the currently measured thermodilution curve is displayed. At the end of the measurement,

the thermodilution curve is transferred to one of the 6 measurement windows and the monitor prompts

you to wait for a certain period of time before starting a new measurement.

In [Auto] measure mode, the C.O. measurements can be performed consecutively, without the need for

pressing the [Start] button between measurements. A new thermodilution measurement is possible as

soon as [Inject now!] is displayed on the screen. The patient monitor automatically detects further

thermodilution measurements.

7. Consecutively take 3 to 5 single measurements as instructed by Step 6.

A maximum of 6 measurements can be stored. If you perform more than six measurements without rejecting any, the

oldest will automatically be deleted when a seventh curve is stored. Select from the 6 measurement curves and the

system will automatically calculate and display the averaged C.O. and C.I. values. Then select the [Accept Average]

button to accept and store the averaged values.

When injecting, the stopcock to the PA catheter is open and the stopcock to the injectate solution is closed. After the

measurement is completed, turn off the stopcock to the PA catheter and turn on the stopcock to the injectate solution,

and then draw the injectate solution into the injectate syringe.

In the buttons area, you can:

Select [Start] to start a C.O. measurement.

Select [Stop] to stop the current measurement.

Select [Cancel] during a measurement to cancel the measurement.

Select [Record] to print out the curves selected for average calculation, numerics and averaged values by the

recorder.

Select [Setup >>] to access the [C.O. Setup] menu.

Select [Calc >>]→[Hemodynamic >>] to access the [Hemodynamic Calculation] menu.

The system can automatically adjust the X-axis scale range to 30 s or 60 s and Y-axis scale range to 0.5℃, 1.0℃, or 2.0℃.

15-6

NOTE

Starting measuring without blood temperature being stable yet may cause measuring failure.

During the cardiac output measurement, blood temperature alarms are inactive.

Please refer to the Instructions for Use of pulmonary artery catheter delivered with the patient monitor to

determine the [Comp. Const] and the volume of injectate.

15.5 Measuring the Blood Temperature

As shown below, the blood temperature is measured with a temperature sensor at the distal end of the catheter in the

pulmonary artery. During C.O. measurements, blood temperature alarms are suppressed to avoid false alarms. They will

automatically recover as soon as the C.O. measurements are completed.

15.6 Changing C.O. Settings

15.6.1 Setting the Temperature Unit Select [Unit Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the popup menu, select [Temp Unit] to toggle

between [℃] and [℉].

15.6.2 Setting Alarm Properties Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [C.O. Setup] menu. You can set alarm properties for this parameter in the popup

menu.

Balloon

Sensor

Pulmonary artery

Right atrium

Right ventricle

PA catheter

16-1

16 Monitoring CCO/SvO2

16.1 Introduction Edwards Vigilance II® monitor / VigileoTM monitor measures continuous cardiac output (CCO), mixed venous oxygen

saturation (SvO2), central venous oxygen saturation (ScvO2) etc. It also calculates hemodynamic and oxygenation

parameters. This patient monitor can be connected to the Vigilance II® monitor / VigileoTM monitor and can display, store,

and review the measured and calculated parameter values from the Vigilance II® monitor / VigileoTM monitor. This patient

monitor can also give alarms of these measured parameters. You must set alarm on/off, alarm limits, alarm level, and

alarm record separately on this monitor. The alarm is Off by default.

16.2 Safety

WARNING

The Vigilance II® monitor and VigileoTM monitor are manufactured by Edwards Lifesciences. This company

provides the technology of measuring and calculating the relevant parameters. We only provide the

connection between this patient monitor and Vigilance II® monitor/ VigileoTM monitor.

If you have any doubts about the operation and maintenance of the Vigilance II® monitor/ VigileoTM

monitor, please read the Vigilance II® monitor/ VigileoTM monitor Operator’s Manual or contact Edwards

Lifesciences (www.edwards.com) directly.

Fully observe the Vigilance II® monitor/ VigileoTM monitor Operator’s Manual to make settings and to

connect the monitor with the patient.

CCO setup menu Signal output setup menu

Indicator

CCO/SvO2 cable connector

16-2

16.3 Automatic Communication Detection

The relevant parameter window is not displayed on the screen if this patient monitor detects communication failure

between the CCO/SvO2 module and Vigilance II® monitor / VigileoTM monitor automatically.

16.4 Connecting the Device

16.4.1 Connecting the Vigilance II® Monitor The following figure shows how to connect this patient monitor to the Vigilance II® monitor through cables.

The following figure shows the rear housing of the Vigilance II® monitor.

To connect the Vigilance II® monitor,

1. Connect CN1 with the CCO/SvO2 connector on the patient monitor.

2. Insert the ECG signal end into the ECG signal input port marked on the rear housing of the Vigilance II®

monitor.

Serial ports ECG signal input port Analog signal input ports

16-3

3. Insert the MAP signal end into the analog signal input port 1 marked , the CVP signal end into port 2 marked

, and SPO2 signal end into port 3 marked respectively on the rear housing of the Vigilance II® monitor.

4. Insert UART into either of the serial ports (marked ) on the rear housing of the Vigilance II® monitor

5. Set the Vigilance II® monitor as follows:

Access the [Serial Port Setup] menu.

Set [Device] to [IFMout], [Baud Rate] to [19200], [Parity] to [None], [Stop Bits] to [1], [Data Bits]

to [8], and [Flow Control] to [2 s].

Access the [Analog Input Setup] menu.

For port 1, set [Parameter] to [MAP], [Voltage Range] to [0-5 v], [Full Scale Range] to 500

mmHg (66.7 kPa), [Simulated High Value] to 500 mmHg (66.7 kPa), and [Simulated Low Value]

to 0 mmHg (0.0 kPa).

For port 2, set [Parameter] to [CVP], [Voltage Range] to [0-5 v], [Full Scale Range] to 100

mmHg (13.3 kPa), [Simulated High Value] to 100 mmHg (13.3 kPa), and [Simulated Low Value]

to 0 mmHg (0.0 kPa).

For port 3, set [Parameter] to [SaO2], [Voltage Range] to [0-10 v], [Full Scale Range] to [100%],

[Simulated High Value] to [100%], and [Simulated Low Value] to [0%].

Refer to the Vigilance II® Operator’s Manual for the operation of the monitor.

WARNING

Calibrate the Vigilance II® monitor before monitoring. Refer to the Vigilance II® Operator’s Manual for the

calibration of the monitor.

Notes

For the Vigilance II® monitor, [Flow Control] must be set to 2 seconds.

16.4.2 Connecting the VigileoTM Monitor The following figure shows how to connect this patient monitor to the VigileoTM monitor through cables.

The following figure shows the rear housing of the VigileoTM monitor.

16-4

To connect the VigileoTM monitor,

1. Connect CN1 with the CCO/SvO2 connector on the patient monitor.

2. Insert the CVP signal end into the analog signal input port on the rear housing of the VigileoTM monitor.

3. Insert UART into the serial port on the rear housing of the VigileoTM monitor.

4. Set the VigileoTM monitor as follows:

Access the [Serial Port Setup] menu.

Set [Device] to [IFMout], [Baud Rate] to [19200], [Parity] to [None], [Stop Bits] to [1], [Data Bits]

to [8], and [Flow Control] to [2 seconds].

Access the [Analog Input Port Setup] menu.

Set [Parameter] to [CVP], [Voltage Range] to [0-5 v], [Full Scale Range] to 100 mmHg (13.3

kPa), [Simulated High Value] to 100 mmHg (13.3 kPa), and [Simulated Low Value] to 0 mmHg

(0.0 kPa).

Refer to the VigileoTM Operator’s Manual for the operation of the monitor.

WARNING

Calibrate the VigileoTM monitor before monitoring. Refer to the VigileoTM Operator’s Manual for the

calibration of the monitor.

Notes

For the VigileoTM monitor, [Flow Control] must be set to 2 seconds.

Patient Optical Module (OM)

Analog Input

Analog Output

Serial Port

16-5

16.5 Understanding CCO Parameters

When the patient monitor connects Vigilance II® monitor, by selecting the CCO parameter window→[Hemodynamic

Parameters >>], you can view the hemodynamic parameters for evaluation of the patient’s hemodynamic status.

Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

CCO L/min continuous cardiac output

CCI L/min/m2 continuous cardiac index

C.O. L/min cardiac output

C.I. L/min/m2 cardiac index

EDV ml end diastolic volume

EDVI ml/m2 end diastolic volume index

SV ml/b stroke volume

SVI ml/b/m2 stroke volume index

SVR DS/cm5 or kPa-s/l systemic vascular resistance

SVRI DS·m2/cm5 or kPa-s-m2/l systemic vascular resistance index

RVEF % right ventricular ejection fraction

BT ℃ or ℉ blood temperature

ESV ml end systolic volume

ESVI ml/m2 end systolic volume index

CVP cmH2O, kPa or mmHg central venous pressure

MAP mmHg or kPa mean arterial pressure

HR rpm heart rate

When the patient monitor connects VigileoTM monitor, by selecting the CCO parameter window→[Hemodynamic

Parameters >>], you can view the hemodynamic parameters for evaluation of the patient’s hemodynamic status.

Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

CCO L/min continuous cardiac output

CCI L/min/m2 continuous cardiac index

SV ml/b stroke volume

SVI ml/b/m2 stroke volume index

SVV % stroke volume variation

SVR DS/cm5 or kPa-s/l systemic vascular resistance

SVRI DS·m2/cm5 or kPa-s-m2/l systemic vascular resistance index

CVP cmH2O, kPa or mmHg central venous pressure

MAP mmHg or kPa mean arterial pressure

HR rpm heart rate

16-6

16.6 Understanding the CCO Display

When the patient monitor connects Vigilance II® monitor:

In the continuous measurement mode, the CCO parameter window displays the values of one primary parameter and up

to three secondary parameters. You can select the desired parameters to be displayed through the menu. The default

secondary parameters displayed are SVR, EDV and SV.

In the intermittent measurement mode, the CCO parameter window displays the values of two primary parameters and

two secondary parameters. You can also select the desired parameter to be displayed through the menu.

When the patient monitor connects VigileoTM monitor:

The CCO parameter window displays the values of one primary parameter and up to three secondary parameters. You

can select the desired parameters to be displayed through the menu. The default secondary parameters displayed are

SVR, SVV and SV.

16.7 Changing CCO Settings

16.7.1 Selecting Vascular Resistance Unit

1. Access the [CCO Setup] menu.

2. Select [SVR Unit] and toggle between [DS/cm5] and [kPa-s/l].

16.7.2 Selecting the Displayed Parameters

1. Access the [CCO Setup] menu.

2. Select [Select Parameters >>].

3. Select the parameters to be displayed from the pop-up menu.

16.7.3 Checking the C.O. Measurements When the patient monitor connects Vigilance II® monitor, you can check the C.O. measurements in the intermittent

measurement mode.

1. Access the [CCO Setup] menu.

2. Select [C.O. Measurements >>].

16-7

16.7.4 Setting Signal Output

When the patient monitor connects Vigilance II® monitor:

This patient monitor outputs analog signals for the Vigilance II® monitor. You can select [Signal Output Setup >>]

from the [CCO Setup] menu to set the source of MAP signals. You can also select [Simulated High Value] or

[Simulated Low Value] to provide simulated high value or low value signals for calibrating the Vigilance II® monitor.

Refer to the Vigilance II® Operator’s Manual for the calibration of the monitor.

When the patient monitor connects VigileoTM monitor:

Select [Signal Output Setup >>] from the [CCO Setup] menu. In the popup menu, you can select [Simulated

High Value] or [Simulated Low Value] to provide simulated high value or low value signals for calibrating the

VigileoTM monitor. Refer to the VigileoTM Operator’s Manual for the calibration of the monitor.

16.7.5 Selecting Alarm Properties You can select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [CCO Setup] menu to set the alarm properties for the relevant

parameters.

WARNING

Because the alarm limits of the relevant measured parameters can be set on this patient monitor, the

alarms of these parameters on this patient monitor may be different from those on the Vigilance II® /

VigileoTM monitor. Please pay special attention to the alarms on the Vigilance II® / VigileoTM monitor.

The alarm of the relevant measured parameters on this patient monitor is Off by default. Please pay special

attention to the alarms on the Vigilance II® / VigileoTM monitor.

16.8 Understanding SvO2 Parameters

When the patient monitor connects Vigilance II® monitor, by selecting the SvO2 parameter window→[SvO2 Setup]→

[Oxygenation Parameters >>], you can view all the oxygenation parameters.

Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

SvO2 % mixed venous oxygen saturation

ScvO2 % central venous oxygen saturation

SaO2 % arterial oxygen saturation

DO2 ml/min oxygen delivery

VO2 ml/min oxygen consumption

O2EI % oxygen extraction index

16-8

16.9 Understanding the SvO2 Display

The parameter window displays the primary parameter, secondary parameter and SQI bargraph.

16.10 Changing SvO2 Settings

16.10.1 Setting Signal Output This patient monitor outputs analog signals for the Vigilance II® monitor. You can select [Signal Output Setup >>]

from the [SvO2 Setup] menu to set the source of MAP signals. You can also select [Simulated High Value] or

[Simulated Low Value] to provide simulated high value or low value signals for the Vigilance II® monitor. Refer to the

Vigilance II® Operator’s Manual for the calibration of the monitor.

16.10.2 Selecting Alarm Properties When the patient monitor connects Vigilance II® monitor, you can select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [SvO2 Setup]

menu to set the alarm properties for the relevant parameters.

When the patient monitor connects VigileoTM monitor, select SvO2 or ScvO2 parameter area. You can set the alarm

properties for the relevant parameters in the popup menu.

17-1

Zero keySetup key

Connector for IBP

cable

Connector for

PiCCO cable

17 Monitoring PiCCO

17.1 Introduction

The PiCCO method combines transpulmonary thermodilution and pulse contour analysis on the blood pressure

waveform. A cold bolus (e.g. normal saline 0.9%) with a known volume and temperature is injected into the right atrium

through a central venous catheter. The cold bolus mixes with the blood in the heart and the change in blood

temperature is measured with a thermistor at the distal end of the arterial thermodilution catheter placed in one of the

bigger systemic arteries, for example, the femoral artery. The monitor uses the transpulmonary thermodilution method

to measure C.O., GEDV (Global End Diastolic Volume) and EVLW (Extra Vascular Lung Water). With the C.O. value

measured with the transpulmonary thermodilution method and the result of the pulse contour analysis, a

patient-specific calibration factor is calculated. The monitor uses this value to compute CCO and the other continuous

hemodynamic parameters.

17.2 Safety Information

WARNING

PiCCO monitoring is restricted to adult and pediatric patients.

Use only pressure transducers specified in this manual. Never reuse disposable pressure transducers.

Make sure that the applied parts never contact other conductive parts.

To reduce the hazard of burns during high-frequency surgical procedure, ensure that the monitor’s cables

and transducers never come into contact with the high-frequency surgical units.

When using accessories, their operating temperature should be taken into consideration. For details, refer

to instructions for use of accessories.

17-2

17.3 Zeroing the Transducer

To avoid inaccurate pressure readings, the monitor requires a valid zeroing. Zero the transducer in accordance with your

hospital policy (at least once per shift). Zero whenever:

A new transducer or adapter cable is used.

You reconnect the transducer cable to the monitor.

The monitor restarts.

You doubt the readings.

1. Turn off the stopcock to the patient.

2. Vent the transducer to the atmospheric pressure by turning on the stopcock to the air.

3. Press the hardkey on the module, or, in the setup menu for the pressure (e.g. pArt), select [pArt Zero >>]→[Zero]. During zero calibration, the [Zero] button appears dimmed. It recovers after the zero calibration is

completed. To zero all IBP channels, select [Zero IBP] hotkey, and then select [Zero All Channels] in the popup

menu.

4. After the zero calibration is completed, close the stopcock to the air and open the stopcock to the patient.

Pressure transducer

3-way stopcock

Pressure adapter cable

Monitor

17-3

17.4 Setting up the PiCCO Measurements

Please refer to the following figure and procedure to set up the PiCCO measurements:

1. Optical module

2. CeVOX fiberoptic probe

3. Central venous catheter

4. PiCCO cable

5. Injectate temperature sensor cable

6. Injectate temperature sensor

7. IBP cable

8. Arterial pressure transducer

9. CVP transducer

10. Arterial thermodilution catheter

11. Blood temperature sensor

17.5 Preparation for PiCCO Measurements

1. Place the arterial thermodilution catheter.

WARNING

The arterial thermodilution catheter must be placed in one of the bigger systemic arteries, for example, the

femoral, the brachial or the axillary artery.

You must use the approved catheters and puncture locations.

2. Place the central venous catheter.

3. Connect the injectate temperature sensor to the central venous catheter.

17-4

4. Plug the PiCCO cable into the CCO/C.O. connector on the PiCCO module, and connect the following devices to the

PiCCO cable:

Injectate temperature sensor probe

Blood temperature sensor connector.

5. Connect one end of the arterial pressure transducer to the arterial thermodilution catheter and the other end to the

IBP cable marked with pArt.

WARNING

If air bubbles appear in the tubing system, flush the system with the infusion solution again. Air bubble

may lead to wrong pressure reading.

6. Connect one end of the CVP transducer to the central venous catheter and the other end to the IBP cable marked

with pCVP (neglect this procedure if CVP measurement is not performed). Then plug the IBP cable to the pArt/pCVP

connector on the PiCCO module.

7. Access the [CCO Setup] menu by selecting [PiCCO Measurement] → [Setup>>] → [CCO Setup]. You can

also select [Main Menu]→[Parameters]→[CCO Setup>>] to access the [CCO Setup] menu.

8. Check that the correct arterial catheter constant is displayed at [Cat.Type] in [CCO Setup] menu. The monitor

can recognize the arterial catheter automatically when the PiCCO cable is connected to the CCO/C.O. connector.

NOTE

If the catheter constant is not recognized, enter the correct value for the catheter in the [Cat.Type] edit

box. The catheter constant is usually written either on the catheter or on the catheter packaging.

9. Set up the patient information in [CCO Setup] menu.

NOTE

Correct input of height, weight, category and gender is mandatory for the accuracy of the displayed

parameters as well as for the correct indexing of some parameters.

Input a proper pCVP value in the [CCO Setup] menu if CVP is not measured. The system adopts 5mmHg by

default if the pCVP value is neither measured nor input manually.

17-5

10. Enter the [CCO Setup] menu to select the injectate volume. If the injectate volume is not selected, the system sets

the volume by default, which is 15ml for adult and 10 ml for pediatric. The following table displays the

recommended injectate volume depending on body weight and ELWI (Extravascular Lung Water Index):

ELWI < 10 ELWI > 10 ELWI < 10

Patient Weight (kg) Iced Injectate Iced Injectate Room Temperature

Injectate

<3 2ml 2ml 3ml

<10 2ml 3ml 3ml

<25 3ml 5ml 5ml

<50 5ml 10ml 10ml

<100 10ml 15ml 15ml

≥100 15ml 20ml 20ml

11. Set up the C.O. measure mode by selecting [C.O. Measure] from the [CCO Setup] menu, and toggling between

[Auto] and [Manual].

If you select [Manual], you should start each measurement manually by pressing the [Start] key in the [PiCCO

Measurement].

If you select [Auto], the C.O. measurements can be performed consecutively, without the need for pressing the

[Start] key.

NOTE

Steps 8 to 10 can also be conducted with the [C.O. Measure (Transpulmonary) Setup Guide] menu, which

can be accessed by selecting [PiCCO Guide>>] in [CCO Setup] menu. In order to enssure correct PiCCO

calibration, please be sure the information you have entered is correct.

17-6

E

C

D

17.6 Performing PiCCO Measurements and CCO Calibration

Please perform the PiCCO measurements according to the following procedure:

Open the [PiCCO Measurement] menu.

A. Thermodilution curve

B. Prompt message area

C. Buttons

D. History window

E. Measurement quality: △T

2. Select the [Start] button and inject the bolus rapidly (<7sec) and smoothly as soon as the message [Inject xx ml!]

and prompt tone appear. As shown in the figure above, during the measurement, the currently measured

thermodilution curve is displayed. At the end of the measurement, the measured values are displayed in the history

window and the monitor prompts you to wait for a certain period of time before starting a new measurement. The

△T value should be greater than 0.15°C to ensure high accuracy. A low △T can be caused by a very high ELWI or

an extreme low CI. If △T is too low, you can try to increase it by

Injecting more volume (remember to reenter the injectate volume in [CCO Setup] menu before injecting).

Injecting colder bolus.

Injecting the bolus in a shorter time.

3. Perform 3 to 5 single measurements direct after each other within a maximum of 10 minutes as described in Step 2.

A new measurement is available when you see the blood temperature is steady in the [PiCCO Measurement]

window.

If you’ve selected [Manual] measure in the [CCO Setup] menu, you should repeat Step 2 manually.

If you’ve selected [Auto] measure in the [CCO Setup] menu, the C.O. measurements can be performed

consecutively, without the need for pressing the [Start] button between measurements. A new thermodilution

E

A

B

17-7

measurement is possible as soon as [Inject xx ml!] is displayed on the screen. The patient monitor

automatically detects further thermodilution measurements.

4. A maximum of 6 measurements can be stored. If you perform more than six measurements without rejecting any,

the oldest will be automatically deleted when a seventh curve is stored. Select the measurement values and the

system will automatically perform calibration and calculate the averaged CCO and CCI values.

In the buttons area, you can:

Select [Stop] during a measurement to stop the measurement.

Select [Record] to print out the curves selected for average calculation, numerics and averaged values by the

recorder.

Select [Setup >>] to access the [C.O. Setup] menu.

Select [Hemo Para.>>] to access the [Hemodynamic Parameters] menu.

CAUTION

Three to five single thermodilution measurements within 10 minutes are recommended. For a stable

patient it is recommended to perform a thermodilution measurement every 8 hours. For an unstable

patient it may be necessary to perform thermodilution measurements more frequently in order to

determine the patient´s volume status and to recalibrate the continuous determination of C.O..

As the pulse contour cardiac output of children has not been sufficiently validated thus far, the C.O. should

be checked by thermodilution before therapeutic interventions.

If the system can not get a reliable pArt value during a C.O. measure, the corresponding C.O. value is

invalid for PiCCO calibration.

Recalibration is recommended with significant changes in hemodynamic conditions, such as volume shifts

or changes to medication.

If the option of the continuous CVP measurement is not used, CVP should be updated as soon as a new

value is obtained to accurately calculate SVR and CCO.

If the displayed continuous parameters are not plausible, they should be checked by a thermodilution

measurement. The PiCCO measurement will be recalibrated automatically.

Faulty measurements can be caused by incorrectly placed catheters, interfering signal transmission e.g. of

arterial pressure, defective connections or sensors, or by electromagnetic interference (e.g. electric

blankets, electric coagulation).

Aortic aneurysms may cause the displayed blood volume (GEDV/ITBV) derived by thermodiution

measurement to be erroneously high if the arterial thermodilution catheter is placed in the femoral artery.

17-8

17.7 Understanding the Displayed PiCCO Parameters

17.7.1 Understanding the CCO Display

1. Prompt message: the time since previous TD measurement

2. Label and value for main parameter

3. Labels and values for secondary parameters

17.7.2 Understanding the pArt Display The artery pressure is displayed on the monitor as a waveform and numeric pressures. The figure below shows the pArt

waveform and numerics.

1. Waveform

2. Pressure unit

3. Systolic pressure

4. Diastolic pressure

5. Mean pressure

2

1

3

1 2 3 4 5

17-9

1 2 3

17.7.3 Understanding the pCVP Display The central venous pressure is displayed on the monitor as a waveform and numeric pressures. The figure below shows

the pCVP waveform and numerics.

1. Waveform

2. Pressure unit

3. Central venous pressure

17.8 Understanding PiCCO Parameters

You can enter the [Hemodynamic Parameters] menu either by:

Accessing the [CCO Setup] menu and selecting [Hemo Para.>>], or

Accessing the [PiCCO Measurement] menu and selecting [Hemo Para.>>].

17.8.1 Spider Vision 17.8.1.1 Spider Vision Diagram

The spider vision diagram shows all continuous parameters in dynamic conjunction.

Each spider leg is divided into 3 segments indicating different value ranges for the respective parameters. The segment

in the middle indicates the normal range for the respective parameter. The outer segment will be highlighted when

corresponding parameter value exceeds the upper limit. The inner segment will be highlighted when its corresponding

parameter value exceeds the lower limit.

The diagram is displayed GREEN when all

displayed parameters are within the

normal range.

17-10

The diagram is displayed YELLOW

immediately when one of the displayed

parameters goes outside the normal

range.

The diagram appears RED when two or

more displayed parameters are outside

the normal range.

The parameter whose default normal range is changed will be marked with the symbol .

17.8.1.2 Spider Configuration

The spider vision diagram can be configured individually. You can select [Setup>>] in the spider vision screen and set

the diagram by the following procedure:

1. Select the number of spider legs (3to7).

2. Select the parameter to be displayed.

17-11

17.8.2 Hemodynamic Parameters Select [Hemodynamic Parameters] tab from the [Hemodynamic Parameters] menu to view the patient’s

hemodynamic parameters. In the [Hemodynamic Parameters] menu, you can select [Range] to view the

referential normal range of each parameter. If a parameter value exceeds its normal range, the system will add a “ ” or ↑

“ ”↓ to the right of the parameter.

Abbreviation Full Spelling Unit Default Normal

Range

CCO Continuous Cardiac Output L/min /

CCI Continuous Cardiac Index L/min/m2 3.0-5.0

SV Stroke Volume ml/b /

SVI Stroke Volume Index ml/b/m2 40-60

Output

HR Heart Rate bpm 60-80

GEF Global Ejection Fraction % 25-35

CFI Cardiac Function Index 1/min 4.5-6.5 Contractility

dPmx Left Ventricular Contractility mmHg/s /

GEDV Global End Diastolic Volume ml /

GEDI Global End Diastolic Volume Index ml/m2 680-800

ITBV Intrathoracic Blood Volume ml /

ITBI Intrathoracic Blood Volume Index ml/m2 850-1000

SVV Stroke Volume Variation % 0-10

Preload Volume

PPV Pulse Pressure Variation % 0-10

SVR Systemic Vascular Resistance DS/cm5 or

kPa-s/l /

SVRI Systemic Vascular Resistance Index DS·m2/cm5 or

kPa-s-m2/l 1700-2400

pArt-M Mean Artery Pressure mmHg/kPa or

cmH2O 70-90

pArt-D Diastolic Artery Pressure mmHg/kPa or

cmH2O 60-80

Afterload

pArt-S Systolic Artery Pressure mmHg/kPa or

cmH2O 100-140

17-12

Abbreviation Full Spelling Unit Default Normal

Range

EVLW Extravascular Lung Water ml /

ELWI Extravascular Lung Water Index ml/kg 3.0-7.0

CPO Cardiac Power Output W /

CPI Cardiac Power Index W/ m2 0.5-0.7

PVPI Pulmonary Vascular Permeability

Index no unit 1.0-3.0

Organ Function

TB Blood Temperature ºC /

ScvO2 Central Venous Oxygen Saturation % 70-80

Hb Hemoglobin g/dl /

DO2 Oxygen Delivery ml/min /

DO2I Oxygen Delivery Index ml/min/m2 400-650

VO2 Oxygen Consumption ml/min /

VO2I Oxygen Consumption Index ml/min/m2 125-175

Oxygenation

Parameters

SaO2 Arterial Oxygen Saturation % 90-100

17.8.3 Normal Range Setup You can select [Normal Range Setup] tab from the [Hemodynamic Parameters] menu to set up the normal

ranges for 20 parameters. The system adopts the default normal ranges for the parameters if the ranges are not set up

manually. Please refer to the above table for the hemodynamic parameters to see the default normal ranges of the

hemodynamic parameters.

NOTE

The normal ranges are based upon clinical experience and can vary from patient to patient. The stated

values are therefore offered without guarantee. Indexed parameters are related to body surface area,

predicted body weight or predicted body surface area and can also be displayed as absolute values.

The values listed are not recommended for use on a specific patient. The treating physician is in any case

responsible for determining and utilizing the appropriate diagnostic and therapeutic measures for each

individual patient.

17.9 Changing PiCCO Settings

17.9.1 Selecting the Displayed Parameters Select [Select Parameter>>] from the [CCO Setup] menu. In the pop-up menu, select the parameters to be

displayed.

17.9.2 Selecting Alarm Properties Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [CCO Setup] menu to set the alarm properties for the relevant parameters.

18-1

18 Monitoring ScvO2

18.1 Introduction

Central venous oxygen saturation (ScvO2) is measured across spectrophotometry. Spectrophotometry involves the use

of light emitting diodes (LED) that produce light of various wavelengths in red and infrared spectra. The light is

transmitted to the blood through a fiberoptic in the probe, reflected off the red blood cells and transmitted back

through a separate fiberoptic to an optical module. The central venous oxygen saturation is calculated through the

analysis of the reflected spectra.

18.2 Safety Information

WARNING

ScvO2 monitoring is restricted to adult and pediatric patients.

Connector for CeVOX

cable

Setup key Calibration key

18-2

18.3 Performing ScvO2 Measurements

Please refer to the following procedure to perform the ScvO2 measurements:

1. Apply the central venous catheter.

2. Place one end of the fiberoptic probe into the central venous catheter through the distal lumina, and connect the

other end to the CeVOX optical module. Then plug the CeVOX cable into the ScvO2 module.

3. If you see the message [Calibration Required], calibrate the ScvO2 before performing the measurements. For

detailed information on ScvO2 calibration, please see 18.4 ScvO2 Calibration.

4. Check the reading in the ScvO2 parameter window.

WARNING

To avoid installation failure, ensure that proper fiberoptic probe is selected.

Incorrect placement of the fiberoptic probe can lead to vessel perforation. Therefore check the correct

position of the probe as indicated in the probe’s instructions for use.

18-3

18.4 ScvO2 Calibration

Regular in vivo calibration is required using blood gas analysis of a central venous blood sample to ensure accurate

measurement of continuous ScvO2. For optimal accuracy, it is recommended that an in vivo calibration be performed at

least every 24 hours or if hemoglobin is changing (for more details, check the notes below). Please refer to the following

procedure to perform calibration:

1. Check central venous catheter and CeVOX probe for proper placement.

2. Check the quality of the signal. The Signal Quality Indicator (SQI) is used for assessing the quality of fiberoptical

signals during probe placement, calibration and measurement. The signal quality is indicated by bars of different

height levels. Generally, the higher the level, the better the signal.

3. Withdraw a sufficient amount of central venous blood from the side port of the CeVOX probe to avoid intermixture

of infusion/injection with the withdrawn blood.

4. Slowly withdraw 2ml blood from the side port of the CeVOX probe. Do not pull too strongly in order to avoid a

hemolysis.

5. Immediately confirm by pressing the [Sample drawn] button.

6. If necessary put blood sample on ice and perform an analysis by a blood gas analysis device or a laboratory

oximeter.

7. Input lab values for Hb/Hct and ScvO2 and press [Calibrate] to confirm.

NOTE

The SQI signal can be affected by the presence of electrosurgical units. Keep electrocautery equipment and

cables away from the monitor and use separate power socket if possible.

To achieve optimal accuracy, it is recommended that the entered hemoglobin and hematocrit values are

updated when there is a change of 6 % or more in hematocrit, or of 1.8 g/dl (1.1 mmol/l) or more in

hemoglobin. A change in hemoglobin may also affect SQI.

Dye (e.g. Indocyanine Green) or other substances, containing dyes which usually modify the light

absorption capacities, can lead to faulty measurement values of the oxygen saturation.

18-4

SQI bargraph

ScvO2 value

Alarm off icon

18.5 Understanding the ScvO2 Display

18.6 Understanding ScvO2 Parameters

Apart from ScvO2, the patient monitor can also monitor DO2, VO2, DO2I, and VO2I. You can access the [ScvO2

Calibration] menu from the [ScvO2 Setup] menu and input a SaO2 value in [SaO2] edit box. The patient monitor will

calculate the values for oxygention parameters automatically, and displays these parameters at [Oxygention

Parameters] in the [ScvO2 Setup] menu. If a parameter value exceeds its normal range, the system will add a “ ” or ↑

“ ”↓ to the right of the parameter.

WARNING

The patient monitor may only be regarded as a device providing early warning. If there is an indication of a

trend towards de-oxygenation of the patient, blood samples must be taken and tested on a laboratory

oximeter in order to arrive at a decision concerning the condition of the patient.

18.7 Changing ScvO2 Settings

18.7.1 Selecting Hb/Hct

1. Open the [ScvO2 Setup] menu.

2. Select [Hb/Hct] and toggle between [Hb] and [Hct].

18.7.2 Selecting Alarm Properties Select [Alarm Setup >>] from the [ScvO2 Setup] menu to set the alarm properties for the relevant parameters.

19-1

19 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide

19.1 Introduction

CO2 monitoring is a continuous, non-invasive technique for determining the concentration of CO2 in the patient’ airway

by measuring the absorption of infrared (IR) light of specific wavelengths. The CO2 has its own absorption characteristic

and the amount of light passing the gas probe depends on the concentration of the measured CO2. When a specific band

of IR light is passed through respiratory gas samples, some of IR light will be absorbed by the CO2 molecules. The

amount of IR light transmitted after it has been passed through the respiratory gas sample is measured with a

photodetector. From the amount of IR light measured, the concentration of CO2 is calculated.

There are two methods for measuring CO2 in the patient’s airway:

1. Mainstream measurement uses a CO2 sensor attached to an airway adapter directly inserted into the patient’s

breathing system.

2. Sidestream/Microstream measurement samples expired patient gas at a constant sample flow from the patient’s

airway and analyzes it with a CO2 sensor built into the CO2 module.

The measurement provides:

1. A CO2 waveform

2. End tidal CO2 value (EtCO2): the CO2 value measured at the end of the expiration phase.

3. Fraction of inspired CO2 (FiCO2): the smallest CO2 value measured during inspiration.

4. Airway respiration rate (awRR): the number of breaths per minute, calculated from the CO2 waveform.

19-2

19.2 Identifying CO2 Modules

From left to right are sidestream CO2 module, microstream CO2 module and mainstream CO2.

1. Setup key to enter the CO2 setup menu

2. Measure/standby

3. Gas outlet

4. Slot for CO2 watertrap

5. Connector for sampling line

6. Connector for CO2 transducer

If you measure CO2 using the AG module, see the section Monitoring AG.

19.3 Preparing to Measure CO2

19.3.1 Using a Sidestream CO2 Module

1. Attach the watertrap to the module and then connect the CO2 components as shown below.

1

2

4

3

5 6

1 1

2 2

3

Watertrap

Watertrap fixer

Sampling line

19-3

2. By default, the sidestream CO2 module is in measure mode. The [CO2 Startup] message appears on the screen

when the CO2 module is plugged.

3. After start-up is finished, the CO2 module needs time to warm up to reach the operating temperature. The message

[CO2 Sensor Warmup] is displayed. If you perform CO2 measurements during warm-up, the measurement

accuracy may be compromised.

4. After warm-up is finished, you can perform CO2 measurements.

NOTE

Do not apply adult watertrap to the neonate patient. Otherwise, patient injury could result.

To extend the lifetime of the watertrap and module, disconnect the watertrap and set the operating mode

to standby mode when CO2 monitoring is not required.

CAUTION

The watertrap collects water drops condensed in the sampling line and therefore prevents them from

entering the module. If the collected water reaches a certain amount , you should drain it to avoid blocking

the airway.

The watertrap has a filter preventing bacterium, water and secretions from entering the module. After a

long-term use, dust or other substances may compromise the performance of the filter or even block the

airway. In this case, replace the watertrap. It is recommended to replace the watertrap once every two

months, or when the watertrap is found leaky, damaged or contaminated.

19.3.2 Using a Microstream CO2 Module

1. Connect the sampling line to the module and then connect the CO2 components as shown below.

2. By default, the microstream CO2 module is in measure mode. The message [CO2 Sensor Warmup] appears on

the screen when the CO2 module is plugged.

3. After warm-up, you can perform CO2 measurements.

Sampling line

Connector for

sampling line

19-4

19.3.3 Using a Mainstream CO2 Module

1. Connect the sensor to the module.

2. By default, the mainstream CO2 module is in measure mode. The message [CO2 Sensor Warmup] appears on

the screen when the CO2 module is plugged.

3. After warm-up is finished, connect the transducer to the airway adapter.

4. Perform a zero calibration per the Zeroing the Sensor section.

5. After the zero calibration is finished, connect the airway as shown below.

6. Make sure there are no leakages in the airway and then start a measurement.

NOTE

Always position the sensor with the adapter in an upright position to avoid collection of fluids on the

windows of the adapter. Large concentrations of fluids at this point will obstruct gas analysis.

19.4 Changing CO2 Settings

19.4.1 Accessing CO2 Menus By selecting the CO2 parameter window or waveform, you can access the [CO2 Setup] menu.

19.4.2 Entering the Standby Mode The standby mode of the CO2 module relates to the standby mode of the monitor as follows:

If the monitor enters the standby mode, the CO2 module will also enter the standby mode.

If the monitor exits the standby mode, the CO2 module will also exit the standby mode.

If the CO2 module enters or exits the standby mode, it will not affect the monitor.

To enter or exit the standby mode manually,

select the hardkey on the module, or

select [Operating Mode] in the [CO2 Setup] menu and then toggle between [Standby] and [Measure].

Airway adapter

Sensor

Connect to patient

Connect to monitor

19-5

When you set the sidestream CO2 module to the strandby mode, the CO2 gas sample intake pump automatically sets the

sample flow rate to zero. When exiting the standby mode, the CO2 module continues to work at the preset sample flow

rate with no need to warm up again. After nearly 1 minute, the module enters the full accuracy mode.

For the sidestream CO2 module, you can set the delay time. After the delay time the CO2 module enters the standby

mode if no breath is detected.

For the microstream CO2 module, you can also set a period of time after which the CO2 module enters the standby mode

if no breath is detected since the CO2 module is powered on or the CO2 module switches to the measuring mode or the

automatic standby time is re-set. To set the standby time, in the [CO2 Setup] menu, select [Auto Standby] and then

select the appropriate setting.

19.4.3 Setting the CO2 Unit Select [Unit Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the popup menu, select [CO2. Unit] and toggle

between [mmHg], [%] and [kPa].

19.4.4 Setting up Gas Compensations

WARNING

Make sure that the appropriate compensations are used. Inappropriate compensations may cause

inaccurate measurement values and result in misdiagnosis.

For the sidestream CO2 module:

1. Select [CO2 Setup].

2. According to the actual condition, set the concentration required for the following compensations:

[O2 Compen]

[N2O Compen]

[Des Compen]

For the microstream CO2 module, gas compensations are not required.

For the mainstream CO2 module, in the [CO2 Setup] menu, respectively select:

[Balance Gas] and toggle between [Room Air] and [N2O]. Select [Room Air] when air predominates in the

ventilation gas mixture and select [N2O] when N2O predominates in the ventilation gas mixture and select [He]

when He predominates in the ventilation gas mixture.

[O2 Compen] and then select [Off] or an appropriate setting according to the amount of O2 in the ventilation

gas mixture. When the amount of O2 is less than 30%, you’d better switch this compensation off.

[AG Compen] and enter the concentration of anesthetic gas present in the ventilation gas mixture. This could

compensate for the effect of AG on the readings.

19-6

19.4.5 Setting up Humidity Compensation Sidestream and microstream CO2 modules are configured to compensate CO2 readings for either Body Temperature and

Pressure, Saturated Gas (BTPS), to account for humidity in the patient’s breath, or Ambient Temperature and Pressure,

Dry Gas (ATPD).

1. ATPD: 100/%)()( 22 ambco PvolCOmmHgP ×=

2. BTPS: 100/)47(%)()( 22 −×= ambCO PvolCOmmHgP

Where, 2COP = partial pressure, %vol = CO2 concentration, ambP = ambient pressure, and unit is mmHg.

As the mainstream CO2 module has a built-in heating component to prevent water vapour from condensing, setting

humidity compensation is not needed. For the sidestream and microstream CO2 module, you can set the humidity

compensation on or off according to the actual condition. To set the humidity compensation:

1. In the [CO2 Setup] menu, select [BTPS Compen].

2. Select either [On] for BTPS or [Off] for ATPD, depending on which compensation applies.

19.4.6 Setting the Apnea Alarm Delay In the [CO2 Setup] menu, select [Apnea Delay] and then select the appropriate setting. The monitor will alarm if the

patient has stopped breathing for longer than the preset apnea time. The [Apnea Delay] of Resp, CO2, AG, and RM

module keeps consistent with each other.

WARNING

The respiration measurement does not recognize the cause of apneas. It only indicates an alarm if no

breath is detected when a pre-adjusted time has elapsed since the last detected breath. Therefore, it

cannot be used for diagnostic purpose.

19.4.7 Choosing a Time Interval for Peak-Picking For microstream and mainstream CO2 modules, you can select a time interval for picking the highest CO2 as the EtCO2

and the lowest as the FiCO2.

In the [CO2 Setup] menu, select [Max Hold] and toggle between [Single Breath], [10 s], [20 s] and [30 s].

[Single Breath]: EtCO2 and FiCO2 are calculated for every breath.

[10 s] or [20 s]: EtCO2 and FiCO2 are calculated using 10, 20 or 30 seconds of data.

19.4.8 Setting the Flow Rate For the sidestream CO2 module, you can change the sampling rate of respiratory gas in the patient’s airway by setting

the flow rate. To set the flow rate, enter the [CO2 Setup] menu and select an appropriate setting from [Flow Rate].

19-7

WARNING

Please consider the patient’s actual bearing capability and select the appropriate flow rate when setting

the flow rate.

19.4.9 Setting up the CO2 Wave In the [CO2 Setup] menu, you can:

Select [Wave Type] and toggle between [Draw] and [Fill]:

[Draw]: The CO2 wave is displayed as a curved line.

[Fill]: The CO2 wave is displayed as a filled area.

Select [Sweep] and then select the appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

Change the size of the CO2 waveform by adjusting the wave [Scale].

19.5 Setting RR Source

To set RR source:

1. Enter the [CO2 Setup] menu.

2. Select [RR Source] and then select a source or [Auto] from the dropdown list.

The [RR Source] settings of Resp, CO2, AG and RM module are linked. For details, please refer to the section Setting RR

Source of chapter Resp.

19.6 Setting Barometric Pressure Compensation

Both sidestream and microstream CO2 modules have the function of automatic barometric pressure compensation (the

system automatically measures the barometric pressure which the patient monitor is exposed to). However, the

mainstream CO2 module does not have such function. For the mainstream CO2 module, the default barometric pressure

is 760 mmHg. You must modify the barometric pressure based on the actual situation as follows:

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>] enter the required →

password [→ Maintain CO2 >>] [→ Calibrate CO2 >>].

2. Select [Barometric Pressure] and then enter the value of barometric pressure to which the patient monitor is

exposed to.

WARNING

Be sure to set the barometric pressure properly before using the mainstream CO2 module. Improper

settings will result in erroneous CO2 reading.

19-8

19.7 Measurement Limitations

The following factors may influence the accuracy of measurement:

Leaks or internal venting of sampled gas

Mechanical shock

Cyclic pressure up to 10 kPa (100 cmH2O)

Other sources of interference, if any

19.8 Leakage test

When the modules need maintenance, the monitor will prompt on the CO2 parameter window: [Need maintenance.

Enter CO2 setup menu.] Then, you can access [CO2 Setup]→ [Maintain CO2], and perform leakage test

according to the prompt messages on the menu.

19.9 Troubleshooting the Sidestream CO2 Sampling System

When the sampling system of the sidestream CO2 module works incorrectly, check if the sampling line is kinked. If not,

remove it from the watertrap. If the monitor gives a message indicating the airway still works incorrectly, it indicates that

the watertrap must have been blocked, and you should replace with a new one. Otherwise, you can determine that the

sampling line must have been blocked. Replace with a new sampling line.

19.10 Removing Exhaust Gases from the System

WARNING

Anesthetics: When using the Sidestream or Microstream CO2 measurement on patients who are receiving

or have recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging system, or to the anesthesia

machine/ventilator, to avoid exposing medical staff to anesthetics.

To remove the sample gas to a scavenging system, connect an exhaust tube to the gas outlet connector of the module.

19-9

19.11 Zeroing the Sensor

The zero calibration eliminates the effect of baseline drift during CO2 measurement exerted on the readings and

therefore maintains the accuracy of the CO2 measurements.

19.11.1 For Sidestream and Microstream CO2 Modules For sidestream and microstream CO2 modules, a zero calibration is carried out automatically when necessary. You can

also start a manual zero calibration if necessary. To manually start a zero calibration, select [Maintain CO2 >>] from

the [User Maintenance] menu. Then select [Calibrate CO2 >>] [→ Start Zero Cal.]. Disconnecting the patient

airway is not required when performing a zero calibration.

19.11.2 For Mainstream CO2 Modules For mainstream CO2 modules, zero the sensor whenever:

A new adapter is used;

You reconnect the sensor to the module;

You see the message [CO2 Zero Required]. In this case, check the airway adapter for any blockage, e.g. mucus,

etc. If a blockage is detected, clear or replace the adapter.

To zero the sensor, follow this procedure:

1. Connect the sensor to the module.

2. In the [CO2 Setup] menu, set the [Operating Mode] to [Measure]. The message [CO2 Sensor Warmup] is

displayed.

3. After warm-up is finished, connect the sensor to a clean, dry airway adapter. The adapter should be vented to the

air and isolated from CO2 sources, such as ventilator, the patient’s breathing, your own breathing, etc.

4. Select [Start Zero Cal.] in the [CO2 Setup] menu. The message [CO2 Zero Running] is displayed.

5. It takes about 15 to 20 seconds. The message disappears when the zero calibration is completed.

WARNING

When perform a zero calibration during the measurement, disconnect the transducer from the patient’s

airway first.

Please do not rely on the readings during zeroing.

19.12 Calibrating the Sensor

For sidestream or microstream CO2 modules, a calibration should be performed once every year or when the readings go

far beyond the range. For mainstream CO2 modules, no calibration is required. For details, refer to the chapter 0

Maintenance.

19-10

19.13 Oridion Information

This trademark is registered in Israel, Japan, German and America.

Oridion Patents

The capnography component of this product is covered by one or more of the following US patents: 6,428,483;

6,997,880; 6,437,316; 7,488,229; 7,726,954 and their foreign equivalents. Additional patent applications pending.

No Implied License

Possession or purchase of this device does not convey any express or implied license to use the device with

unauthorized CO2 sampling consumables which would, alone, or in combination with this device, fall within the scope of

one or more of the patents relating to this device and/or CO2 sampling consumable.

20-1

20 Monitoring tcGas

20.1 Introduction

This patient monitor can connect a Radiometer TCM monitor for continuous transcutaneous blood gas monitoring.

This patient monitor can display, store and review measurements from TCM monitor, as well as present related alarms.

On this patient monitor, you can separately set the level of tcGas related alarms and switch on or off alarm recording; you

can also view TCM monitor settings of alarm limits and alarm switch.

This patient monitor can integrate the following TCM monitors:

TCM CombiM

TCM TOSCA

20.2 Safety

WARNING

TCM CombiM monitor and TCM TOSCA monitor are manufacutred by Radiometer Medical ApS. This

company provides the technology for measuring tcGas parameters. We only provide the connection

between this patient monitor and TCM monitor.

If you have any doubts about the operation and maintenance of the TCM monitor, please refer to TCM

monitor operator’s manual or directly contact Radiometer Medical (www.radiometer.com).

Fully observe TCM monitor operator’s manual to make settings and to connect the monitor with a patient.

20-2

20.3 Connecting a TCM monitor

The TCM monitor connects with BeneLink module through an ID adapter, see the picture below.

Please refer to the following procedure to connect the TCM monitor:

1. Insert a BeneLink module into a BeneView patient monitor module rack.

2. Connect the ID adapter that matches the TCM monitor to the BeneLink module with an RJ45 connecting cable.

3. Connect the ID adapter to the serial port (COM port) of the TCM monitor with Mindray type C serial port adapting

cable (PN: 009-001769-00) and an interface cable provided with the TCM monitor.

4. Stick a label indicating device name to the RJ45 connecting cable at the end nearby the BeneLink module. When

the BeneLink module is connected to several external devices, you can tell the devices easily with these labels.

5. Turn on both monitors.

20.4 tcGas Parameters

TCM CombiM monitor provides the following measurements:

tcpCO2

tcpO2

Power

Tsensor

In which, tcpCO2 and tcpO2 are primary parameters, and the others are secondary parameters.

TCM TOSCA provides the following measurements:

tcpCO2

SpO2

PR

Power

Tsensor

In which, tcpCO2 is primary parameter, and the others are secondary parameters.

ID adapter BeneLink module RJ45 connecting cable TCM monitor

Type C serial port

adapting cable & TCM

interface cableLabel

20-3

20.5 Displaying tcGas Parameters

To display tcGas parameters on this patient monitor, select the [Screen Setup] button to enter the

[Screens] window, and then select [Screen Setup]. You can choose where to display the tcGas parameters on the

screen.

20.6 Enter the tcGas Setup menu

You can access the [+tcGas Setup] menu by selecting the tcGas area or selecting [Main Menu] →[Parameters

>>]→[+tcGas Setup>>].

In the [+tcGas Setup] menu, you can

Toggle [Alarm Sound] between [On] and [Off] to switch on or off tcGas alarms on this patient monitor.

Choose the secondary parameters to be displayed. The tcGas area can display maximum three secondary

parameters.

For TCM CombiM monitor, only two secondary parameters, Power and Tsensor, are measured, so in [+tcGas

Setup] menu the option [Change Secondary Parameters >>] is not available.

Set alarm level for tcGas parameters, switch on or off alarm record.

20-4

20.7 Setting tcpCO2/tcpO2 Unit

You can enter the [User Maintenance] menu to [Unit Setup >>] to set [tcpCO2/tcpO2 Unit] to [mmHg] or

[kPa].

20.8 tcGas Display

If TCM CombiM monitor is connected, the tcGas area is shown as follows:

If TCM TOSCA monitor is connected, the tcGas area is shown as follows:

21-1

21 Monitoring AG

21.1 Introduction

The anaesthetic gas (AG) module measures the patient’s anesthetic and respiratory gases, and incorporates the features

of the O2 module and BIS module as well.

The AG module determines the concentration of certain gases using the infrared (IR) light absorption measurement. The

gases that can be measured by the AG module absorb IR light. Each gas has its own absorption characteristic. The gas is

transported into a sample cell, and an optical IR filter selects a specific band of IR light to pass through the gas. For

multiple gas measurement, there are multiple IR filters. The higher the concentration of gas in a given volume the more

IR light is absorbed. This means that higher concentration of IR absorbing gas cause a lower transmission of IR light. The

amount of IR light transmitted after it has been passed though an IR absorbing gas is measured. From the amount of IR

light measured, the concentration of gas present can be calculated.

Oxygen does not absorb IR light as other breathing gases and is therefore measured relying on its paramagnetic

properties. Inside the O2 sensor are two nitrogen-filled glass spheres mounted on a strong rare metal taut-band

suspension. This assembly is suspended in a symmetrical non-uniform magnetic field. In the presence of paramagnetic

oxygen, the glass spheres are pushed further away from the strongest part of the magnetic field. The strength of the

torque acting on the suspension is proportional to the oxygen concentration. From the strength of the torque, the

concentration of oxygen is calculated.

21.2 Identifying AG Modules

AG module can identify two anesthetic gases in a mixture automatically and distinguish between them according to

their contributions to the MAC value for display as the primary and secondary anesthetis agent.

For details on BIS, refer to the chapter 23 Monitoring BIS.

NOTE

The AG module is configured with automatic barometric pressure compensation function.

Setup key

Gas outlet Connector for AG watertrap

Connector for BIS sensor

Measure/standbyy

Indicator

21-2

21.3 Understanding the AG Display

The AG module can send waves and numerics for all measured anesthetic gases for display on the monitor, including:

CO2, O2, N2O and AA waves

awRR: airway respiratory rate

MAC: minimum alveolar concentration

End tidal (Et) and fraction of inspired (Fi) numerics for CO2, O2, N2O and AA

Where AA represents Des (desflurane), Iso (isoflurane), Enf (enflurane), Sev (sevoflurane), or Hal (halothane).

The AA waveform area displays the primary anesthetic gas’s waveform. When O2 module does not exist, no O2 waveform

will be displayed. When O2 module exists, the O2 waveform will be displayed only when the O2 waveform is currently

switched on.

WARNING

To avoid explosion hazard, do not use flammable anesthetic agent such as ether and cyclopropane for this

equipment.

21.4 MAC Values

Minimum alveolar concentration (MAC) is the minimum concentration of the agent in the alveoli. It is a basic index to

indicate the depth of anesthesia. The standard ISO 21647 defines MAC as this: alveolar concentration of an inhaled

anesthetic agent that, in the absence of other anesthetic agents and at equilibrium, prevents 50% of patients from

moving in response to a standard surgical stimulus.

Minimum alveolar concentration (MAC) values are listed below:

Agent Des Iso Enf Sev Hal N2O

1 MAC 7.3%* 1.15% 1.7% 2.1% 0.77% 105%**

* The data is taken from a patient of 25 years old.

** indicates 1 MAC nitrous oxide can only be reached in hyperbaric chamber.

21-3

NOTE

The MAC values shown in the table above are those published by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration

for a healthy 40-year-old adult male patient.

In actual applications, the MAC value may be affected by age, weight and other factors.

The formula to calculate the MAC value is as follows:

∑−

=

=1

0

N

i i

i

AgentVolEtAgentMAC

Where N is the number of all agents (including N2O) that the AG module can measure, EtAgenti is the concentration of

each agent and AgentVoli is the concentration of each agent at 1 MAC.

For example, the AG module measures there are 4% of Des, 0.5% of Hal and 50% of N2O in the patient’s end-tidal gas:

4.0% 0.5% 50% 1.677.3% 0.77% 105%

MAC = + + =

NOTE

The formula mentioned above is intended for adult patients only.

21.5 Preparing to Measure AG

1. Select an appropriate watertrap according to patient category and attach it to the module.

2. Connect the gas sample line to the connector of the watertrap.

3. Connect the other end of the gas sampling line to the patient via the airway adapter.

4. Connect the gas outlet to a scavenging system using an exhaust tube.

5. Insert the AG module into the SMR or the patient monitor and the patient monitor will prompt [AG Startup].

Within 10 minutes after startup is finished, the AG module enters the iso accuracy mode. After that, the module

enters the full accuracy mode.

AG module

Exhaust tube

Gas sample line

Airway adapter

Connect to the patient

21-4

CAUTION

Position the airway adapter so that the part connecting to the gas sample line is pointing upwards. This

prevents condensed water from passing into the gas sample line and causing an occlusion.

The watertrap collects water drops condensed in the sampling line and therefore prevents them from

entering the module. If the collected water reaches to a certain amount, you should drain it to avoid

blocking the airway.

The watertrap has a filter preventing bacterium, water and secretions from entering the module. After a

long-term use, dust or other substances may compromise the performance of the filter or even block the

airway. In this case, replace the watertrap. Replacing the watertrap once a month is recommended.

WARNING

Make sure that the connections are tight. Any leak in the system can result in erroneous readings due to

ambient air mixing with patient gases.

Do not apply adult watertrap to the neonate patient. Otherwise, patient injury could result.

Using high-frequency electrosurgical units may increase the risk of skin burn. In this case, do not use

antistatic or conductive respiratory tubing.

21.6 Changing AG Settings

21.6.1 Setting Gas Unit For N2O and AA, the unit of the measured gas is fixed to “%”.

Select [Unit Setup >>] from the [User Maintenance] menu. In the popup menu, you can select [CO2 Unit] or [O2

Unit] and toggle between [mmHg], [%] and [kPa].

21.6.2 Setting the Apnea Alarm Delay In the [AG Setup] menu, select [Apnea Delay] and select the appropriate setting. The monitor will alarm if the

patient has stopped breathing for longer than the preset apnea time.

The [Apnea Delay] of Resp, CO2, AG, and RM module keeps consistent with each other.

WARNING

The respiration measurement does not recognize the cause of apneas. It only indicates an alarm if no

breath is detected when a pre-adjusted time has elapsed since the last detected breath. Therefore, it

cannot be used for diagnostic purpose.

21.6.3 Changing the Sample Flow Rate In the setup menu for any gas, select [Flow Rate] and then choose either:

[High]: 200 ml/min for adult and pediatric patients, and 120 ml/min for neonatal patients.

[Med]: 150 ml/min for adult and pediatric patients, and 90 ml/min for neonatal patients.

[Low]: 120 ml/min for adult and pediatric patients, and 70 ml/min for neonatal patients.

21-5

21.6.4 Setting up the O2 Compensation If the AG module does not incorporate the O2 module, you need to manually select [O2 Compen] and then select [Off]

or an appropriate setting according to the amount of O2 in the ventilation gas mixture. When the amount of O2 is less

than 30%, you’d better switch this compensation off.

If the AG module incorporates the O2 module, the system will directly use the O2 concentration detected by the O2

module to make compensation. At this time, the [O2 Compen] in the setup menu for any gas is fixed to [Off].

21.6.5 Entering the Standby Mode For the AG module, the default operating mode is measure. When you set the AG module to the standby mode, the AG

gas sample intake pump automatically sets the sample flow rate to zero. When exiting the standby mode, the AG

module continues to work at preset sample flow rate with no need to warm up again. After nearly 1 minute, the module

enters the full accuracy mode. The standby mode of the AG module relates to the standby mode of the monitor as

follows:

If the monitor enters the standby mode, the AG module will also enter the standby mode.

If the monitor exits the standby mode, the AG module will also exit the standby mode.

If the AG module enters or exits the standby mode, it will not affect the monitor.

To enter or exit the standby mode manually, in the agent’s setup menu, select [Operating Mode] and then toggle

between [Standby] and [Measure]. You can also set a period of time after which the AG module enters the standby

mode automatically if no breath is detected since the last detected breath. To set the standby time, in the agent’s setup

menu, select [Auto Standby (min)] and then select the appropriate setting.

21.6.6 Setting up the AG Wave In the [AG Setup] menu, you can:

Select [CO2 Wave Type] and toggle between [Draw] and [Fill]:

[Draw]: The CO2 wave is displayed as a curved line.

[Fill]: The CO2 wave is displayed as a filled area.

Select [Sweep] and then select the appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

Change the size of the waveform by adjusting the scale.

21.6.7 Setting RR Source To set RR source:

1. Enter the [AG Setup] menu.

2. Select [RR Source] and then select a source or [Auto] from the dropdown list.

The [RR Source] settings of Resp, CO2, AG and RM module are linked. For details, please refer to the section Setting RR

Source of chapter Resp.

21-6

21.7 Changing the Anesthetic Agent

When the anesthetic agent used on the patient is changed, the AG module can detect the mixed anesthetic gas during

the transition of two anesthetic agents. The time required for completing the replacement of anesthetic agent depends

on anesthesia type (low flow or high flow) and the characteristics of anesthetic agents (pharmacokinetics). During the

transition of two anesthetic agents, the patient monitor gives no prompt messages and the MAC value displayed may be

inaccurate.

The AG module can identify two anesthetic agents automatically. When the proportion of the primary and secondary

anesthetic agents in the mixture changes, the AG module can distinguish between them according to their

contributions to the MAC value. Then the primary and secondary anesthetic agents will be exchanged for display.

21.8 Measurement Limitations

The following factors may influence the accuracy of measurement:

Leaks or internal venting of sampled gas

Mechanical shock

Cyclic pressure up to 10 kPa (100 cmH2O)

Other sources of interference, if any

21.9 Troubleshooting

21.9.1 When the Gas Inlet is Blocked If the gas inlet (including watertrap, sampling line and airway adapter) is occluded by condensed water, the message

[AG Airway Occluded] will appear.

To remove the occlusion:

Check the airway adapter for an occlusion and replace if necessary.

Check the sampling line for an occlusion or kinking and replace if necessary.

Check the watertrap for a build up of water. Empty the watertrap. If the problem persists, replace the watertrap.

21.9.2 When an Internal Occlusion Occurs Condensed water may enter the module and cause contamination and/or internal occlusions. In this case, the message

[AG Airway Occluded] will be displayed.

To remove the occlusion:

Check for any occlusion in the gas inlet and/or outlet system.

If the problem persists, internal occlusions may exist. Contact your service personnel.

21-7

21.10 Removing Exhaust Gases from the System

WARNING

Anesthetics: When using the AG measurement on patients who are receiving or have recently received

anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging system, or to the anesthesia machine/ventilator, to avoid

exposing medical staff to anesthetics.

To remove the sample gas to a scavenging system, connect an exhaust tube to the gas outlet connector of the module.

21-8

FOR YOUR NOTES

22-1

22 Monitoring ICG

22.1 Introduction

Impedance cardiography (ICG) measures a patient’s hemodynamic status using a safe, non-invasive method based on

thoracic electrical bioimpedance (TEB) technology. ICG uses four pairs of sensors to transmit a small electrical signal

through the thorax. As velocity and volume of blood in the aorta change, the ICG measures the changes in impedance

from systole to diastole to calculate hemodynamic parameters.

22.2 Safety

WARNING

Apply ICG monitoring to adult patients in height of 122 to 229 cm, weight of 30 to 159 kg (67 to 341

pounds) only.

ICG monitoring should not be used concurrently on patients with minute ventilation pacemakers when the

MV sensor function is activated.

During ICG monitoring, make sure that the conductive paste on the ICG sensors never come into contact

with other conductive parts.

ICG sensors are for single patient use only.

Connector for ICG cable

Setup key

Indicator

Check sensor

22-2

22.3 Understanding ICG Parameters

By selecting the ICG parameter window [→ ICG Setup] [→ Hemodynamic Parameters >>], you can view the

hemodynamic parameters for evaluation of the patient’s hemodynamic status.

22.3.1 Measured Parameters Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

ACI /100s2 acceleration index

VI /1000s velocity index

PEP ms Pre-ejection period

LVET ms Left ventricular ejection time

TFI Ω Thoracic fluid index

TFC /kΩ thoracic fluid content

HR* bpm heart rate

*The HR value is directly derived from the ICG module.

22.3.2 Calculated Parameters Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

BSA m2 Body surface area

C.O. L/min Cardiac output

C.I. L/min/m2 Cardiac index

SV ml Stroke volume

SVI ml/m2 Stroke volume index

SVR DS/cm5 Systemic vascular resistance

SVRI DS·m2/cm5 Systemic vascular resistance index

PVR DS/cm5 Pulmonary vascular resistance

PVRI DS·m2/cm5 Pulmonary vascular resistance index

LCW kg·m Left cardiac work

LCWI kg·m/m2 Left cardiac work index

LVSW g·m Left ventricular stroke work

LVSWI g·m/m2 Left ventricular stroke work index

STR none Systolic time ratio

VEPT ml Volume of electrically participating tissue

22-3

22.4 Understanding the ICG Display

The ICG monitoring provides a continuous display of the impedance waveform and four numerics. Of four numerics, one

is the primary parameter C.I. and the other three are secondary parameters. The secondary parameters are

user-selectable, and C.O., SVR and TFC are the defaults.

By selecting the ICG waveform area or ICG parameter window, you can access the [ICG Setup] menu.

22.5 ICG Limitations

The measurement accuracy may be compromised when patients present with the following conditions or anomalies:

Septic shock.

Aortic valve regurgitation.

Severe hypertension (Art mean>130 mmHg).

The patient’s weight and height are out of range.

Connection to an intra-aortic balloon pump.

With excessive and continuous patient movements such as shivering.

Signal interference from cable connections and/or power cords.

Open-chest surgeries that could result in changes in the normal pattern of blood flow and/or the electrical current

through the chest cavity.

22.6 Preparing to Monitor ICG

1. Insert the ICG module into the monitor.

2. Connect the patient cable to the ICG module.

3. Prepare the patient’s skin and place ICG sensors on the patient.

4. Connect the ICG sensor connector end to the patient cable lead wires.

5. Enter the patient information.

ICG wave

Primary parameter Secondary parameters

22-4

22.6.1 Preparing the Patient Proper skin preparation is necessary for good signal quality at the sensor, as the skin is a poor conductor of electricity. To

properly prepare the skin, choose flat, non-muscular areas and then follow this procedure:

1. Shave hair from skin at chosen sites.

2. Gently rub skin surface with a gauze pad at sites to remove dead skin cells.

3. Thoroughly cleanse the site with a mild soap and water solution. Be sure to remove all oily residue, dead skin cells,

and abrasives. Leftover abrasion particles can be a source of noise.

4. Dry the skin completely before applying the sensor.

22.6.2 Placing ICG Sensors Appropriate sensor placement is important for good signal quality and accurate measurements. Attach ICG sensors to

the patient as shown below:

1. Two neck sensors placed on each side of the neck, with the rectangular shaped end of the sensor (2) placed at the

base (or root) of the neck and the circular shaped end of the sensor (1) placed directly superior and in line with the

earlobe.

2. Two thorax sensors placed on each side of the thorax, with the rectangular shaped end of the sensor (3) at the level

with the xyphoid process and the circular shaped end of the sensor (4) directly inferior and in line with the

midaxillary line. Each pair of sensors should be opposite directly to each other (180°) as shown in the figure above.

22.6.3 Setting up the Patient Information

1. Enter the [ICG Setup] menu.

2. Select [Patient Demographics >>].

3. Select [Height] and [Weight] and then select the appropriate settings. The patient’s height and weight are

important for ICG monitoring. The system will automatically check them when an ICG module is connected. If no

values are entered or the entered values do not meet the requirements, corresponding prompt messages will be

given in the ICG parameter window.

4. If the mean arterial blood pressure (Art mean) is not obtained automatically from either IBP or NIBP module, then

enter Art mean. Enter CVP and PAWP, obtained from invasive catheters or enter an assumed value. (Note: CVP and

PAWP are used only in the calculation of SVR, SVRI, LCW, LCWI, LVSW, and LVSWI and the value of CVP and PAWP do

not normally have a significant effect on the calculated parameters.)

22-5

22.7 Changing ICG Settings

22.7.1 ICG Averaging The ICG value is the average of multiple measurements. You can select an interval (heart beats) for averaging ICG,

ranging from 5-60 beats.

1. Enter the [ICG Setup] menu.

2. Select [Averaging] and then select the appropriate setting. The greater the averaging interval is, the less the ICG

value is affected by human interference and vice versa.

22.7.2 Selecting Secondary Parameters C.O., SVR and TFC are the default three secondary parameters. You can also select your desired secondary parameter for

display.

1. Enter the [ICG Setup] menu.

2. Select [Change Secondary Parameters >>].

3. Select three parameters from the popup menu.

22.7.3 Checking Sensors During ICG monitoring, the ICG sensors should be checked regularly to ensure that no sensor becomes disconnected.

During sensor checking, the ICG waveform is displayed as a straight line and the message [ICG Sensor Check] is

displayed. Once a disconnected sensor is detected, a prompt message in which the sensor’s application site is indicated

will be displayed.

To initiate a sensor check:

In the [ICG Setup] menu, select [Check Sensor].

Press the hardkey.

22.7.4 Changing the ICG Wave Speed

1. Enter the [ICG Setup] menu.

2. Select [Sweep] and then select the appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

22-6

FOR YOUR NOTES

23-1

23 Monitoring BIS

23.1 Introduction

Bispectral index (BIS) monitoring is for use on adult and pediatric patients within a hospital or medial facility providing

patient care to monitor the state of the brain by data acquisition of EEG signals.

The BIS, a processed EEG variable, may be used as an aid in monitoring the effects of certain anesthetic agents. Use of BIS

monitoring to help guide anesthetic administration may be associated with the reduction of the incidence of awareness

with recall during general anesthesia or sedation.

BISx is for brain’s single side BIS monitoring. BISx4 is for brain’s single side or both sides BIS monitoring. BISx4 can be

used for brain’s both sides BIS monitoring only when BIS Bilateral Sensor is connected.

The BISx or BISx4 equipment must be used under the direct supervision of a licensed healthcare practitioner or by

personnel trained in its proper use.

Connector for BIS cable

Setup key

Indicator

Check sensor

23-2

23.2 Safety Information

For patients with neurological disorders, patients taking psychoactive medication, and children below the age of 1 year,

BIS values should be interpreted cautiously.

WARNING

The conductive parts of sensors and connectors should not come into contact with other conductive parts,

including earth.

To reduce the hazard of burns in the high-frequency surgical neutral electrode connection, the BIS sensor

should not be located between the surgical site and the electro-surgical unit return electrode.

The BIS sensor must not be located between defibrillator pads when a defibrillator is used on a patient

connected to the patient monitor.

The BIS component using on our monitor is purchased from Aspect Medical System. It is important to

recognize this index is derived using solely that company's proprietary technology. Therefore, it is

recommended that clinicians have reviewed applicable information on its utility and/or risks in published

articles and literature/web site information from Aspect Medical Systems, Inc. or contact that company

itself at www.aspectmedical.com, if you have clinical-based BIS questions relating to this module portion

of the patient monitor. Failure to do so could potentially result in the incorrect administration of

anesthetic agents and/or other potential complications of anesthesia or sedation. We recommend that

clinicians also review the following practice advisory (that includes a section on BIS monitoring): The

American Society of Anesthesiologists, Practice Advisory for Intraoperative Awareness and Brain Function

Monitoring (Anesthesiology 2006;104:847-64). Clinicians are also recommended to maintain current

knowledge of FDA or other federal-based regulatory, practice or research information on BIS and related

topics.

The Bispectral Index is a complex technology, intended for use only as an adjunct to clinical judgment and

training.

The clinical utility, risk/benefit and application of the BIS component have not undergone full evaluation in

the pediatric population.

23.3 Understanding the BIS Display

23.3.1 BIS Parameter Area For brain’s single side BIS monitoring, the BIS parameter area displays the following parameters:

23-3

1. Bispectral Index (BIS)

The BIS numeric reflects the patient’s level of consciousness. It ranges from 100 for wide awake to 0 in the absence

of brain activity.

BIS numeric Description

100 The patient is widely awake.

70 The patient is underdosed but still unlikely to become aware.

60 The patient is under general anesthesia and loses consciousness.

40 The patient is overdosed and in deep hypnosis.

0 The EEG waveform is displayed as a flat line, and the patient has no electrical brain activity.

2. Electromyograph (EMG)

EMG bar graph reflects the electrical power of muscle activity and high frequency artifacts. The power range is

30-55 dB. When the EMG indicator is low, it indicates that EMG activity is low. BIS monitoring conditions are optimal

when the bar is empty.

1 bar represents power in the 31-35 range.

2 bars represent power in the 36-40 range.

3 bars represent power in the 41-45 range.

4 bars represent power in the 46-50 range.

5 bars represent power greater than 51.

EMG>55 dB: this is an unacceptable EMG.

EMG<55 dB: this is an acceptable EMG.

EMG≤30 dB: this is an optimal EMG.

3. Suppression Ratio (SR)

SR numeric is the percentage of time over the last 63-second period during which the EEG is considered to be in a

suppressed state.

4. Spectral Edge Frequency (SEF)

The SEF is a frequency below which 95% of the total power is measured.

5. Signal Quality Index (SQI)

The SQI numeric reflects signal quality and provides information about the reliability of the BIS, SEF, TP, and SR

numerics during the last minute. Signal quality is optimal when all five bars of the SQI icon are filled with color. SQI

ranges from 0-100%.

1 bar represents SQI in the 1%-20% range.

2 bars represent SQI in the 21%-40% range.

3 bars represent SQI in the 41%-60% range.

4 bars represent SQI in the 61%-80% range.

5 bars represent SQI in the 81%-100% range.

0 to 15%: the numerics cannot be derived.

15% to 50%: the numerics cannot be reliably derived.

50% to 100%: the numerics are reliable.

6. Total Power (TP)

23-4

TP numeric which only monitors the state of the brain indicates the power in the frequency band 0.5-30Hz. The

useful range is 40-100db.

7. Burst Count (BC)

A burst means a period (at least 0.5 second) of EEG activity followed and preceded by inactivity. The BC numeric

helps you quantify suppression by measuring the number of EEG bursts per minute. This parameter is intended for

the BIS module with the Extend Sensor or Bilateral Sensor only. BC numeric is valid only when SQI≥15% and SR≥

5%.

For brain’s both sides BIS monitoring, the BIS parameter area displays the following parameters (L: Left brain hemisphere;

R: Right brain hemisphere):

1. BIS L BIS R

2. EMG L EMG R

3. SR L SR R

4. SEF L SEF R

5. SQI L SQI R

6. TP L TP R

7. BC L BC R

8. sBIS L sBIS R

sBIS (BIS Variability Index)

This numeric represents the standard deviation of the BIS variable over the last three minutes.

9. sEMG L sEMG R

sEMG (EMG Variability Index)

This numeric represents the standard deviation of the EMG value over the last three minutes.

10. ASYM

Asymmetry (ASYM) is a processed variable indicating the percentage of EEG power present in left or right hemispheres

with respect to total (left and right) EEG power.

Designation ‘L’ of the asymmetry data indicates asymmetry to the left side.

Designation ‘R’ of the asymmetry data indicates asymmetry to the right side.

23-5

23.3.2 BIS Waveform Area The BIS waveform area allows you to view either EEG waveform or BIS trend. A secondary parameter’s trend line can also

be displayed together with BIS trend line.

1. Enter the [BIS Setup] menu.

2. Select [Display] and then select the desired option..

[EEG]

[BIS Trend]

The available options for BIS trend superimpose display include: [BIS+EMG Trend], [BIS+SQI Trend],

[BIS+SR Trend], [BIS L+R Trend], [BIS+BC Trend], [BIS+sBIS Trend] or [BIS+sEMG Trend],

depending on the sensor type.

23.3.3 BIS Expand View When BIS Bilateral Sensor is used for bilateral monitoring, BIS expand view can be displayed.

1. Enter the [BIS Setup] menu.

2. Select [BIS Expand View >>].

3. Select [Display] and then toggle between [EEG], [BIS Trend] and [DSA].

23.3.3.1 Displaying EEG Waveforms

You can select the EEG waveforms to be displayed. You can also select the desired scale and sweep speed.

23-6

23.3.3.2 Displaying BIS Trend

You can the desired trend lines to be displayed and set the time scale. The artifact mark is displayed at the bottom to

indicate SQI value. When SQI<15%, the artifact mark is yellow and the corresponding trend lines of BIS, SR, BC and sBIS

are not displayed. When 15%≤SQI<50%, the artifact mark is brown.

23.3.3.3 Displaying DSA

The Density Spectral Array (DSA) shows changes in the power spectrum distribution over a certain time period. The DSA

represents the power spectra ranging from 49-94 dB. The color bar to the right of the time scale shows the range of

colors used to indicate minimum and maximum power. The frequency scale is shown on the horizontal axis with a range

from 0-30 Hz.

A white Spectral Edge line is superimposed on the graph where 95% of the total power lies on one side of the line

(toward the inside of the graph) and 5% lies on the other. The Spectral Edge Frequency value (SEF) displays above the

graph.

The ASYM graph in the center of the screen shows the degree of asymmetry in EEG power between the left and right

hemispheres. The ASYM scale begins at 20% at the center line and runs left or right to 100%. Asymmetry data less than

20% are not displayed on the graph, but are available in the tabular trends.

Maximum

Power

Minimum

Power

23-7

23.4 Setting up the BIS Measurement

1. Connect the BISx or BISx4 model to the BIS module.

2. Use the attachment clip to secure the BISx or BISx4 model near, but not above the level of the patient’s head.

3. Connect the BISx or BISx4 model to the patient cable.

4. Attach the BIS sensor to the patient following the instructions supplied with sensor.

NOTE

Make sure the patient’s skin is dry. A wet sensor or a salt bridge could result in erroneous BIS and

impedance values.

5. Connect the BIS sensor to the patient interface cable.

CAUTION

Do not attach the BISx or BISx4 model to the patient’s skin for long time. Otherwise, the BISx or BISx4 heats

while on the patient and may cause discomfort.

23.5 Auto Impedance Check

By default, this check is switched on. It checks:

The combined impedance of the signal electrodes plus the reference electrode. This is done automatically and

continuously and does not affect the EEG wave. As long as the impedances are within the valid range, there is no

prompt message of this check or its results.

The impedance of the ground electrode. This is done every ten minutes and takes approximately four seconds. It

causes an artifact in the EEG wave, and the message [BIS Ground Checking] is displayed on the monitor

during the check. If the ground electrode does not pass this check, another check is initiated. This continues until

the ground electrode passes the check.

Patient cable

BIS module

BISx or BISx4

model

BIS sensor

23-8

If the auto impedance check interferes with other measurements, it can be switched off. To do this:

1. Select [Sensor Check] in the [BIS Setup] menu to open the sensor check window.

2. Set [Automatic Check] to [Off].

CAUTION

Switching the auto impedance check off will disable automatic prompt to the user of impedance value

changes, which may lead to incorrect BIS values. Therefore, this should only be done if the check interferes

with or disturbs other measurements.

23.6 Sensor Check

This measures the exact impedance of each individual electrode. It causes a disturbed EEG wave, and a prompt message

is displayed on the monitor

The sensor check is automatically initiated when a sensor is connected. To manually start a sensor check, you can

either:

Press the hardkey on the BIS module.

Select [Sensor Check] in the [BIS Setup] menu.

Select [Start Sensor Check] in the BIS sensor window.

The sensor check stops automatically if the impedances of all electrodes are within the valid range. To manually

stop a sensor check, you can either:

Press the hardkey on the BIS module.

Select [Stop Sensor Check] in the sensor check window.

23.7 BIS Sensor Check Window

To open the sensor check window, select [Sensor Check] in the [BIS Setup] menu. The graphic in the BIS sensor

check window automatically adapts to show the type of sensor you are using, show each electrode as required. Each

symbol in the graphic represents an electrode and illustrates the most recently-measured impedance status of the

electrodes.

1 2

23-9

1. Sensor Type 2. Expiration Time or Usable Times

Different colors indicate different statuses. The electrode status is displayed below each electrode:

Color Status Description Action

Red [Lead Off] Electrode falls off and has no skin contact

Reconnect electrode, or check the

sensor-to-skin contact. If necessary, clean and

dry skin.

Grey [Noise] The EEG signal is too noisy. Impedance

cannot be measured

Yellow [High] The impedance is above the limit

Check the sensor-to-skin contact. If necessary,

clean and dry skin.

Green [Pass] The impedance is within valid range No action necessary.

Although BIS may still be measured when the electrode status is [Noise] or [High], for best performance, all electrodes

should be in [Pass] status.

23.8 Choosing the BIS Smoothing Rate

To change the smoothing rate:

1. Select the BIS parameter window to enter the [BIS Setup] menu.

2. Select [Smoothing Rate] and then toggle between [10 s], [15 s] and [30 s]

The smoothing rate defines how the monitor averages the BIS value. With the smoothing rate becoming smaller, the

monitor provides increased response to changes in the patient’s state. Contrarily, the monitor provides a smoother BIS

trend with decreased variability and sensitivity to artifacts.

NOTE

When [Smoothing Rate] is set as [10 s] or [30 s], sBIS and sEMG are displayed as invalid values.

1 2

23-10

23.9 Changing the Secondary Parameters

You can choose the desired secondary parameters for display on the screen.

1. Enter the [BIS Setup] menu.

2. Select [Change Secondary Parameter>>] and then select at most 2 desired parameters from the popup

menu.

23.10 Changing the EEG Wave Size

1. Enter the [BIS Setup] menu.

2. Select [EEG] from [Display].

3. Select [Scale] and then select the appropriate setting.

23.11 Changing the Speed of the EEG Wave

1. Enter the [BIS Setup] menu.

2. Select [EEG] from [Display].

3. Select [Sweep] and then select the appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

23.12 Setting the Trend Length

1. Enter the [BIS Setup] menu.

2. Select a BIS trend option from [Display].

3. Select [Trend Length] and then select the appropriate BIS time length setting.

23.13 Switching the Filter On or Off

1. Enter the [BIS Setup] menu.

2. Select [Filter] and then toggle between [On] and [Off]. The default is [On].

The filter screens out undesirable interference from the raw EEG wave display. The notch filter includes filters for both 50

and 60 Hz. Filter settings do not affect processing of the trend variables (i.e., BIS, EMG, and SR).

24-1

24 Monitoring NMT

24.1 Introduction

This patient monitor can connect a Organon TOF-Watch® SX monitor for NMT(neuromuscular transmission) monitoring .

This patient monitor can display, store and review measurements from TOF-Watch® SX monitor, as well as present related

alarms. On this patient monitor, you can separately set the level of NMT related alarms and switch on or off alarm

recording; you can also view TOF-Watch® SX monitor settings of alarm limits and alarm switch.

24.2 Safty

WARNING

TOF-Watch® SX monitor is manufacutred by Organon. This company provides the technology for

measuring NMT parameters. We only provide the connection between this patient monitor and

TOF-Watch® SX monitor.

If you have any doubts about the operation and maintenance of the TOF-Watch® SX monitor, please refer

to TOF-Watch® SX monitor operator’s manual or directly contact Organon .

Fully observe TOF-Watch® SX monitor operator’s manual to make settings and to connect the monitor with

a patient.

24.3 Connecting a TOF-Watch® SX monitor

The TOF-Watch® SX monitor connects with BeneLink module through an ID adapter, see the picture below.

ID adapter BeneLink module RJ45 connecting cable

TOF-Watch® SX

monitor

Type C serial port adapting

cable & TOF-Watch® SX Label

24-2

Please refer to the following procedure to connect the TOF-Watch® SX monitor:

1. Insert a BeneLink module into a BeneView patient monitor module rack.

2. Connect the ID adapter that matches the TOF-Watch® SX monitor to the BeneLink module with an RJ45 connecting

cable.

3. Connect the ID adapter to the TOF-Watch® SX interface with Mindray type C serial port adapting cable (PN:

009-001769-00).

4. Connect the TOF-Watch® SX interface to the TOF-Watch® SX monitor.

5. Stick a label indicating device name to the RJ45 connecting cable at the end nearby the BeneLink module. When

the BeneLink module is connected to several external devices, you can tell the devices easily with these labels.

6. Turn on both monitors.

24.4 NMT Parameters

TOF-Watch® SX monitor provides the following measurements:

TOF-Ratio

TOF-Count

PTC

Single

Tskin

24.5 Accessing the NMT Setup menu

You can access the [+NMT Setup] menu by selecting the NMT area or selecting [Main Menu] →[Parameters

>>]→[+NMT Setup>>].

24-3

8 7 6

5 4 3

1

2

In the [+NMT Setup] menu, you can

Toggle [Alarm Sound] between [On] and [Off] to switch on or off NMT alarms on this patient monitor.

View the setup as follows:

Stimulation Current

Stimulation Charge

Pulse Width

TOFs Interval

Transducer Sensitivity

Set alarm level for TOF-Ratio and TOF-Count, switch on or off alarm record.

24.6 NMT Display

1. Parameter unit

2. Alarm status

3. Parameter label

4. Parameter measurement

5. Response amplitude of stimulation

6. Skin temperature

7. Measurement countdown

8. Time of last measurement

24-4

Measuring mode

In the case that you take a measurement in TET50Hz mode, TET100Hz mode, DBS3.3 mode or DBS3.2 mode, only mode

label is displayed in the NMT parameter area, which is shown as follows:

25-1

25 Monitoring RM

25.1 Introduction

WARNING

RM monitoring is not intended for neonatal patients.

In the respiratory mechanics measurement, the airway pressures are measured, from the part between the patient

circuit and intubation tube, using a flow sensor between the Y-piece of patient circuit and the patient connection. The

pressure is transferred to the monitor through the tube and measured by a pressure transducer in the RM module. The

pressure difference together with the gas concentration information is used to calculate flow. The volume information is

obtained by integrating the flow signal. From these three parameter, other parameter such as RR, I:E, Compl, etc. are

derived.

The RM monitoring enables clinicians to understand the ventilator operation and patient respiratory status.

RM monitoring displays the following waveforms and loops:

Flow waveform

Paw waveform

Vol waveform

FV (flow-volume) loop

PV (paw-volume) loop

Connector for RM sensor

Setup key

Indicator

Calibrate

25-2

RM monitoring provides values for 15 parameters. The 15 parameters can be classified into 4 categories:

1. Paw parameters

PIP: peak inspiratory pressure (unit: cmH2O)

Pplat: pressure (unit:cmH2O)

PEEP: positive end expiratory pressure (unit: cmH2O)

Pmean: mean pressure (unit: cmH2O)

2. Flow parameters

PIF: peak inspiratory flow (unit: L/min)

PEF: peak expiratory flow (unit: L/min)

3. Vol parameters

TVi: inspiratory tidal volume (unit: ml)

TVe: expiratory tidal volume (unit: ml)

MVi: inspirator minute volume (L)

MVe: expiratory minute volume (L)

4. Other parameters

RR: respiratory rate (unit: rpm)

I: E: ratio of the inspiratory and expiratory time

Compl: compliance (unit: ml/cmH2O)

FEV1.0: first second forced expiratory volume ratio (unit: %)

RSBI: rapid shallow breathing index (unit: rpm/L)

25.2 Safety Information

WARNING

Check for leaks in the breathing circuit system, as they may significantly affect respiratory mechanics

readings.

Match the airway adapter you select to the appropriate patient category. Improper sensor selection may

produce excessive ventilation resistance or introduce excessive airway deadspace, as well as inaccurate

scales and alarm limits.

Periodically check the flow sensor and tubing for excessive moisture or secretion build-up and purge if

necessary.

25-3

NOTE

To avoid the affects of excessive moisture in the measurement circuit, insert the flow sensor airway

adapter in the breathing circuit with the tubes upright.

Do not place the airway adapter between the endotracheal tube and an elbow as this may allow patient

secretions to block the adapter windows.

Measurement values provided by a ventilator may differ significantly from the values provided by the RM

module, due to different locations of the flow sensor.

25.3 Preparing to Monitor RM

1. Select an appropriate flow sensor in accordance with the patient category.

2. Connect the small tubes of the flow sensor to the RM connector of the module using a color-coded adapter.

3. Insert the flow sensor between the Y-piece of the patient circuit and the patient connection.

4. Calibrate the flow sensor: select the RM parameter window to open the [Calibrate RM] menu when you see the

prompt message [Calibration Required] appears on the RM parameter window. Then calibrate the flow sensor

according to the procedure described in 25.8 Calibrating the Flow Sensor.

5. Select [Sensor Type] in the [Calibrate RM] menu and then choose [Infant One-time], [Disposable] or

[Reusable] according to the selected sensor.

Flow sensor

Connect to the patient

Connect to the RM module

Connect to the RM module

Connect to the patient

Connect to ventilator

Connect to ventilator

25-4

25.4 Understanding the RM Display

The RM display shows either the Paw and Flow waveforms, or the Paw and Vol waveforms in the waveform area.

1. Paw waveform 2. Flow waveform 3. Paw parameter window

4. Flow parameter window 5. Vol parameter window

25.5 Changing RM Settings

25.5.1 Accessing RM Menus

By selecting the RM parameter window or waveform area, you can access the [RM Setup] menu.

By selecting the Paw wave, you can access the [Paw Waveform] menu.

By selecting the Flow wave, you can access the [Flow Waveform] menu.

By selecting the Vol wave, you can access the [Vol Waveform] menu.

25.5.2 Setting the Apnea Alarm Delay In the [RM Setup] menu, select [Apnea Delay] and then select the appropriate setting. The monitor will alarm if the

patient has stopped breathing for longer than the preset apnea time. The [Apnea Delay] of Resp, CO2, AG, and RM

module keeps consistent with each other.

WARNING

The respiration measurement does not recognize the cause of apneas. It only indicates an alarm if no

breath is detected when a pre-adjusted time has elapsed since the last detected breath. Therefore, it

cannot be used for diagnostic purpose.

2

3

1

4 5

25-5

25.5.3 Selecting TV or MV for Display To select tidal volume (TV) or minute volume (MV) for display in the Vol parameter window, in the [RM Setup] menu,

select [TV/MV] and toggle between [TV] and [MV]. By default, the Vol parameter window displays TV values.

25.5.4 Selecting Flow or Vol Waveform for Display To select Flow or Vol waveform for display:

1. Enter the [RM Setup] menu.

2. Select [Flow/Vol] and toggle between [Flow] and [Vol].

25.5.5 Changing the Wave Sweep Speed

1. Enter the [RM Setup] menu.

2. Select [Sweep] and select the appropriate setting. The faster the wave sweeps, the wider the wave is.

25.5.6 Changing the Wave Scale

1. Select [Wave Scale >>] from the [RM Setup] menu..

2. Select the appropriate settings in the popup menu.

25.5.7 Setting RR Source To set RR source:

1. Enter the [RM Setup] menu.

2. Select [RR Source] and then select a source or [Auto] from the dropdown list.

The [RR Source] settings of Resp, CO2, AG and RM module are linked. For details, please refer to the section Setting RR

Source of chapter Resp.

25-6

25.6 Understanding the Respiratory Loops

Select [Respiratory Loop] in the [RM Setup] menu. The following window will be displayed.

In this window, you can:

Select [Save] to save the respiratory loops in the current respiratory cycle as the reference loops. Up to 4 groups

of respiratory loops can be saved, and the saving time is displayed above the respiratory loops.

Change the respiratory loops displayed on the screen: select [Setup >>] [→ Display Loop] and then toggle

between [PV Loop] and [FV Loop].

Turn on/off reference loop: select [Setup >>] [→ Reference Loop], and then toggle between [On] and [Off].

Change the size of the PV and FV loops: select [Setup >>], and then adjust the [Paw Scale], [Vol Scale] or

[Flow Scale].

Select parameters for display: select [Setup >>] [→ Select RM Parameters >>], and then select [All RM

Parameters] or [Select Desired RM Parameters]. When you select [Select Desired RM Parameters],

6 parameters at maximum can be selected.

Print out all parameters for a reference loop by selecting your desired reference loop and then selecting

[Record].

Respiratory loop

Respiratory parameters

Select to recall a reference loop

25-7

25.7 Zeroing the RM Module

A zero calibration is carried out automatically every time when the patient monitor is switched on or the RM module

connected, and then a zero calibration will automatically be triggered at a specific interval. Then, a zero calibration is

triggered every 5 minutes. You can also start a manual zero calibration when there is a drift in the zero: in the [RM

Setup] menu, select [Zero RM].

25.8 Calibrating the Flow Sensor

A calibration must be performed every time when the RM module is connected to the patient monitor or the flow sensor

is connected.

1. When calibration is needed, the RM parameter window displays [Calibration Required]. Select the parameter

window to enter the [Calibrate RM] menu. You can also enter the [Calibrate RM] menu by selecting

[Calibrate RM >>] from the [RM Setup] menu.

2. Select [Sensor Type] and then choose [Infant One-time], [Disposable] or [Reusable] according to the

sensor used.

3. Enter the positive and negative factor provided on the flow sensor and select [Calibrate].

4. After the calibration is completed successfully, the last calibration time and the message [Calibration

Completed!] are displayed. Otherwise, the message [Calibration Failed!] is displayed.

25-8

FOR YOUR NOTES

26-1

26 Device Integration

26.1 Introduction

BeneLink module is intended for connecting external devices, such as ventilators and anesthesia machines, to the

BeneView patient monitor. It allows the information (patient data, alarms, etc.) from the external device to be displayed,

saved, recorded, printed, or calculated through a BeneView patient monitor. If the patient monitor is connected with the

CMS or gateway, information from the external device can also be transmitted to the CMS or gateway.

26.2 Safety Information

WARNING

Devices of the same category can not be connected to the BeneLink module simultaneously.

A patient moniotr supports one BeneLink module only.

The signal labels used on the BeneView patient monitor may be different from those given on the external

device. For details please see the description of parameters and alarms in corresponding sections of this

chapter.

The alarms from the external device may be advanced or delayed before transmission to the BeneView

patient monitor.

There can be differences between the alarm priorities displayed on your BeneView patient monitors and

the priorities displayed on the external devices interfaced through BeneLink. Please see the list of Output

Signals corresponding with each external device for the alarm priorities used by your patient monitor.

26-2

26.3 Supported Devices

Category Model

Mindray Wato 20/30/55/65

Maquet Flow-i

Draeger Fabius GS/Fabius Trio/Fabius Plus/Primus Anesthesia Machine

GE Datex-Ohmeda Aestiva 7900/Aestiva 7100/Avance/Aisys

Newport E360

Puritan Bennett 840

Maquet Servo-i/Servo-s

Draeger Evita 2

Draeger Evita 4/ Evita2 dura/Evita XL

Ventilator

Hamilton G5/C2 /Galileo

NOTE

BeneLink module may support more devices than those listed in the above table. Please connect us or our

service personnel for the most recent information on the supported devices.

26.4 Differences in Displayed Values

In certain cases, there may be differences between the numerics seen on the BeneView patient monitor and those seen

on the external device. The table below lists some situations and possible reasons.

Situation Possible Reasons

Some parameter values are displayed as invalid values

on the BeneView patient monitor.

The patient monitor and the external device may have different

parameter configuration or displaying range of values. If the patient

monitor displays a parameter that is not configured in the external

device or a parameter value from the external device exceeds the

displaying range of the patient monitor, the corresponding

parameter value is displayed on the patient monitor as an invalid

value.

The patient monitor and the external device may

display the parameter values with different numbers

of places of decimals.

The patient monitor displays the parameter values from the external

device based on its own display rules. Same parameter value is

displayed differently when the patient monitor and external device

adopt different numbers of places of decimals of the value for

display.

Non-continuously measured values and continuously

measured values have the same displaying mode in

the BeneView patient monitor.

Non-continuously measured values are displayed on the patient

monitor as latest measured values until a new measurement is

performed on the external device.

Differences between the parameter values displayed

on the BeneView patient monitor and those displayed

on the external device.

Some parameter values are converted to different units during

transmission to the patient monitor so that they can be used for

calculations. Sometimes, values from the external device may be

advanced or delayed before transmission to the BeneView patient

monitor.

26-3

NOTE

When the pressure units are converted among cmH2O, hPa and mbar, the parameter value remain

unchanged, for example, 1cmH2O=1hPa=1mbar, which may differ from some external devices.

26.5 Connecting an External Device

The external device connects with the BeneLink module through an ID adapter, which supports only its matching device.

Please refer to the following procedure to connect an external device:

1. Insert the BeneLink module into the module slot on the BeneView patient monitor.

2. Connect the ID adapter that matches the external device to the BeneLink module with an RJ45 connecting cable.

3. Plug the ID adapter into the RS232 port on the external device. Some external devices may have ports incompatible

with the ID adapter. In this case, a serial port adapting cable is required. Please see the following table for the

required adapting cable.

4. Stick a label indicating device name to the RJ45 connecting cable at the end nearby the BeneLink module. When

the BeneLink module is connected to several external devices, you can tell the devices apart easily with these

labels.

5. Switch the external device on.

After the external device is connected to the patient monitor, the indicating lights on both the ID adapter and the

BeneLink module illuminate to show that the patient monitor communicates with the external device successfully.

ID Adapter BeneLink Module

RJ45 Connecting

Cable

External Device

Serial Port

Adapting Cable

Label

26-4

The ID adapter has already been correctly configured before leaving the factory. If you want to re-configure the ID

adapter, please select [Main Menu] → [Maintenance>>] → [Factory Maintenance>>] →enter the

required password →[Upgrade ID module>>], and follow this procedure:

1. Set [Benelink Module Port] to select which port the RJ45 connecting cable is connected to. You must connect

the RJ45 connecting cable to the selected port when re-configuring the ID adapter. Otherwise, ID adapter

re-configuration will fail.

2. Set [ID] to configure a new ID to the ID adapter.

External Device ID for ID adapter Type of serial port adapting cable

Mindray Wato 20/30/55/65 4D52B2AE

No need to use the adapting cable:

the ID adapter can be plugged into

the serial port of the external device

directly.

Newport E360 4E50B1B0 Type B

Puritan Bennett 840

SNDF: 5042AFBE(recommanded)

SNDA: 5031AFCF(support less

parameters than protocol SNDF)

No need to use the adapting cable.

The ID adapter can be plugged into

the serial port of the external device

directly.

Maquet Flow-i 4D46B2BA Type B

Maquet Servo-i/Servo-s 4D53B2AD Type B

Draeger Evita 2 / Evita 2 dura / Evita 4/ Evita

XL 4434BBCC Type B

Hamilton G5 (protocol Block) 3542CABE Type B

Hamilton G5 (protocol Polling) 3550CAB0 Type B

Hamilton C2 3270CD90 Type B

Hamilton Galileo 4750B8B0 Type B

GE Datex-Ohmeda Avance/Aisys 4F41B0BF Type D

GE Datex-Ohmeda Aestiva 7100/7900 4F37B0C9 Type D

Drager Fabius GS/ Fabius Plus/ Fabius Trio 4446BBBA

Fabius GS: No need to use the

adapting cable.The ID adapter can

be plugged into the serial port of

the external device directly.

Fabius Plus: Type C

Fabius Trio: Type C

Drager Primus 4450BBB0 Type C

Extended model / Type A

Serial port adapting cable PN Remark

Type A 009-001767-00 Male to female

Type B 009-001768-00 Male to male

Type C 009-001769-00 Male to male

Type D 009-002943-00 9-pin to 15-pin

26-5

WARNING

First installation and debugging should be executed by our service personnel or authorized technician.

Please check the compatibility of the external device and the ID adapter before connection. Otherwise,

unpredictable system failure may be resulted.

Ports on the BeneLink module are not normal network connectors. They are intended for connecting with

the serial port of designated devices only. Do not connect them to public network interfaces.

26.6 Devices Integrated Window

You can view the information of the external device in the [Devices Integrated] window, which provides the

information of both individual devices and multi devices. In the individual device menu, you can select [Para.

Display>>], [Units>>] or [Alarms>>] to set the parameters to be displayed or the parameter units, or view the

alarm list.

The parameters in the [Devices Integrated] window are displayed in the order of priorities. In the case that the

window can not display all the selected parameters, only parameters with higher priorities are displayed. Please refer to

the following sections for parameter priorities.

For the parameter that is measured by the external device, the measurement displays directly after the parameter label.

For the parameter that is controlled by the external device, its setting is enclosed in a parenthesis after the parameter

label. For the parameter that can both be measured and controlled by the external device, both its measurement and

setting are displayed after the parameter label, and the setting is also enclosed in a parenthesis. For example, PEEP 18

(20), in which PEEP is parameter label, 18 is the measurement, and (20) is the setting.

In the [Devices Integrated] window, you can select [Multi Devices] tab to view the parameter information of all

the external devices interfaced currently. The displayed parameters are those selected in [Para. Display] menu of the

individual device window. In the case that the patient monitor can not display all the selected parameters, only

parameters of higher priorities are displayed.

26-6

26.7 System Functions of Patient Monitor

26.7.1 Alarms The patient monitor does not display the realtime alarms from the external device. However, you can view current alarm

list of the corresponding device by selecting [Alarms>>] in the individual device window. The alarm priority is defined

by “*” before each alarm message. An alarm list can display up to 100 alarm messages.

26.7.2 Data Storage The patient monitor can save and review the graphic trends, tabular trends, and alarm events of parameters from the

external device. In [Graphic Trends] menu and [Events] menu, parameter from the external device is displayed in

white. In [Review] menu, [Trend Group] menu, and [Print Setup] menu, a mark “+” is shown before each label of

parameters from the external device. Please refer to the parameter list to see which parameters can be saved.

NOTE

Parameters from the external device are saved and displayed according to the time of the patient monitor.

26.7.3 Recording and Printing Information from the external device can be recorded and printed both in realtime and in graphic and tabular trends

with BeneView patient monitor. Besides, the monitor can also record the frozen parameters of the external device.

26-7

26.8 Integrating the Anesthesia Machine

26.8.1 Wato 20/30/55/65 26.8.1.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

O2% Oxygen concentration % Yes

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

VT Tidal volume ml No

VTe Expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

MV Minute volume L/min Yes

ftot Total breath rate bpm Yes

f Breath rate bpm No

fSIMV Frequency of SIMV bpm No

FreqMIN Minimum breath frequency bpm No

I:E Inspiratory time:Expiratory time ratio / No

TIP:TI Percentage of inspiratory plateau time in

inspiratory time % No

Tslope Time for the pressure to rise to target pressure s No

Tinsp Time of inspiration s No

Trig Window Trigger Window % No

Plimit Pressure limit level

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Pinsp Pressure control level of inspiration

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Psupp Pressure support level

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

P-Trigger Inspiratory trigger level (pressure trigger)

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

26-8

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

F-Trigger Inspiratory trigger level (flow trigger) L/min No

Exp% Inspiration termination level % No

Compl Compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

RAW Airway resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

FiCO2 Fraction of inspired carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

FiO2 Fractional concentration of O2 in inspired gas

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

EtO2 End-tidal O2

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

FiN2O Fraction of inspired nitrous oxide % Yes

EtN2O End-tidal N2O % Yes

FiDes % Yes

FiSev % Yes

FiEnf % Yes

FiIso % Yes

FiHal

Inspired anesthetic agent

% Yes

EtDes % Yes

EtSev % Yes

EtEnf % Yes

EtIso % Yes

EtHal

End-tidal anesthetic agent

% Yes

MAC Minimum alveolar concentration / Yes

N2O Flow N2O flow L/min No

Air Flow Air flow L/min No

O2 Flow O2 flow L/min No

BIS Bispectral index / Yes

SQI Signal quality index / Yes

SR Suppression ratio / Yes

EMG Electromyograph dB Yes

SEF Spectral edge frequency Hz Yes

TP Total power dB Yes

BC Burst count /min Yes

26-9

26.8.1.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView Wato

Priority Label Label

High Apnea Apnea Alarm

High Volume Apnea > 2 min Volume Apnea>2min

High Paw Too High Paw Too High

High Paw Too Low Paw Too Low

High EtO2 Too High EtO2 Too High

High EtO2 Too Low EtO2 Too Low

High FiO2 Too High FiO2 Too High

High FiO2 Too Low FiO2 Too Low

High Drive Gas Pressure Low Drive Gas Pressure Low

High O2 Supply Failure O2 Supply Failure

Mediate FiO2 Too High FiO2 Too High

Mediate VTe Too High TVe Too High

Mediate VTe Too Low TVe Too Low

Mediate MV Too High MV Too High

Mediate MV Too Low MV Too Low

Mediate EtCO2 Too High EtCO2 Too High

Mediate EtCO2 Too Low EtCO2 Too Low

Mediate FiCO2 Too High FiCO2 Too High

Mediate FiCO2 Too Low FiCO2 Too Low

Mediate EtN2O Too High EtN2O Too High

Mediate EtN2O Too Low EtN2O Too Low

Mediate FiN2O Too High FiN2O Too High

Mediate FiN2O Too Low FiN2O Too Low

Mediate EtHal Too High EtHal Too High

Mediate EtHal Too Low EtHal Too Low

Mediate FiHal Too High FiHal Too High

Mediate FiHal Too Low FiHal Too Low

Mediate EtEnf Too High EtEnf Too High

Mediate EtEnf Too Low EtEnf Too Low

Mediate FiEnf Too High FiEnf Too High

Mediate FiEnf Too Low FiEnf Too Low

Mediate EtIso Too High EtIso Too High

Mediate EtIso Too Low EtIso Too Low

Mediate FiIso Too High FiIso Too High

Mediate FiIso Too Low FiIso Too Low

Mediate EtSev Too High EtSev Too High

Mediate EtSev Too Low EtSev Too Low

Mediate FiSev Too High FiSev Too High

Mediate FiSev Too Low FiSev Too Low

Mediate EtDes Too High EtDes Too High

Mediate EtDes Too Low EtDes Too Low

26-10

BeneView Wato

Priority Label Label

Mediate FiDes Too High FiDes Too High

Mediate FiDes Too Low FiDes Too Low

Mediate BIS Too High BIS Too High

Mediate BIS Too Low BIS Too Low

Mediate Patient Circuit Leak Patient Circuit Leak

Low RR Too High Rate Too High

Low RR Too Low Rate Too Low

Low Pressure Limiting Pressure Limiting

Low O2 Sensor Unconnected O2 Sensor Unconnected

Low Battery in Use Battery in Use

Mechanical Ventilation Failure

RT Clock Need Reset

RT Clock Not Exist

Keyboard Init Error

Power System Comm Error

Power System Comm Stop

Power Supply Voltage Error

Power Board High Temp

Low Battery Voltage!

System DOWN for battery depletion!

Breathing Circuit Not Mounted

Check Flow Sensors

Ventilator Comm Error

Ventilator Selftest Error

Ventilator Hardware Error

01/02/03/04/05/06/07/08/09/10/11/12

Auxi Ctrl Module Hardware Error 01/02/03/04/05

Auxi Ctrl Module Comm Error

Auxi Ctrl Module Comm Stop

Flowmeter Hardware Error 01/02/03/04/05/06/07

Flowmeter Cal. Data Error 01/02

O2-N2O Ratio Error

Flowmeter Comm Error

Flowmeter Comm Stop

Device Fault, Ventilate Manually

High High Technical Alarm

Paw < -10cmH2O

Key Error

IP Address Conflict

Battery Undetected

ACGO On

O2 Flush Failure

Mediate Mediate Technical Alarm

PEEP Valve Failure

26-11

BeneView Wato

Priority Label Label

Insp Valve Failure

PEEP Safety Valve Failure

Replace O2 sensor

Pressure Monitoring Channel Failure

Insp Reverse Flow

Exp Reverse Flow

TVe Below Control Range

Ventilator Comm Stop

Pressure Monitoring Channel Failure

Volume Monitoring Disabled

CO2 Canister Not Mounted

Heating Module Failure

3-way Valve Failure

Flow Sensor Failure

Calibrate Flow Sensor

Calibrate O2 Sensor

Calibrate PEEP Valve

TV Comp Disabled

TV Not Achieved

Flowmeter Zero Failed

N2O Flow Too High

O2 Flow Too High

Air Flow Too High

Pinsp Not Achieved

TVe > TVi

TV Delivery Too High

Sensor Zero Failed

Low Low Technical Alarm

Ventilator Init Error

CO2 Comm Stop

CO2 Comm Error

CO2 Sensor High Temp

CO2 Sensor Low Temp

CO2 High Airway Press.

CO2 Low Airway Press.

CO2 High Barometric

CO2 Low Barometric

CO2 Hardware Error

CO2 Sampleline Occluded

CO2 System Error

CO2 No Watertrap

EtCO2 Overrange

Mediate CO2 Module abnormal

FiCO2 Overrange

26-12

BeneView Wato

Priority Label Label

CO2 Zero Failed

CO2 Cal. Failed

CO2 Factory Cal. Invalid

CO2 Check Airway

CO2 No Sampleline

CO2 Main Board Error

CO2 Check Sensor or Main Board

CO2 Replace Scrubber&Pump

CO2 Replace Sensor

CO2 15V Overrange

CO2 Init Error

CO2 Selftest Error

CO2 Temp Overrange

CO2 Overrange

CO2 Check Cal.

CO2 Zero Error

CO2 Sensor Error

CO2 No Sensor

AG Hardware Error

O2 Sensor Error

AG Selftest Error

AG Hardware Malfunction

AG Init Error

AG No Watertrap

AG Change Watertrap

AG Comm Stop

AG Airway Occluded

AG Comm Error

AG Data Limit Error

AG Zero Failed

AG Cal. Failed

AG Accuracy Error

O2 Accuracy Unspecified

N2O Accuracy Unspecified

CO2 Accuracy Unspecified

Enf Accuracy Unspecified

Iso Accuracy Unspecified

Sev Accuracy Unspecified

Hal Accuracy Unspecified

Des Accuracy Unspecified

Mixed anesthetic gas and MAC < 3

Mediate AG Module abnormal

Mixed anesthetic gas and MAC >= 3

26-13

BeneView Wato

Priority Label Label

EtCO2 Overrange

FiCO2 Overrange

EtN2O Overrange

FiN2O Overrange

EtHal Overrange

FiHal Overrange

EtEnf Overrange

FiEnf Overrange

EtIso Overrange

FiIso Overrange

EtSev Overrange

FiSev Overrange

EtDes Overrange

FiDes Overrange

BIS Init Error

BISx Disconnected

BIS Comm Error

BIS Overrange

SQI Overrange

SR Overrange

BIS High Imped.

BIS Sensor Off

BIS DSC Error

BIS DSC Malf

BIS No Cable

BIS No Sensor

BIS Wrong Sensor Type

SQI<50%

SQI<15%

BIS Sensor Expired

BIS Sensor Failure

BIS Sensor Too Many Uses

Disconnect/Reconnect BIS

Mediate BIS Module abnormal

BIS Selftest Error

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26-14

26.8.2 Maquet Flow-i 26.8.2.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

VT Tidal volume ml No

VTi Inspired tidal volume ml Yes

MV Minute volume L/min Yes

MVe Expiratory minute volume L/min Yes

MVi Inspiratory mimute volume L/min Yes

ftot Total respiratory rate bpm Yes

f Breath rate bpm No

I:E Inspiratory time:Expiratory time ratio / No

TIP:TI Percentage of inspiratory plateau time in

inspiratory time % No

Rise Time% rise time% % No

Tslope Time for the pressure to rise to target pressure s No

Tinsp Time of inspiration s or % No

Tapnea Apnea time s No

PC above PEEP PC above PEEP

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PS above PEEP PS above PEEP

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

P-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level(pressure trigger)

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

F-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (flow trigger) L/min No

Insp Flow Inspiratory flow L/min No

Exp Flow Expiratory flow L/min No

26-15

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

Compl Compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

FiCO2 Fraction of inspired carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

FiO2 Fractional concentration of O2 in inspired gas

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

EtO2 End-tidal O2

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

FiN2O Fraction of inspired nitrous oxide % Yes

EtN2O End-tidal N2O % Yes

FiAA Inspired anesthetic agent % Yes

EtAA End-tidal anesthetic agent % Yes

FiAA 2nd 2nd Insp. Agent % Yes

EtAA 2nd 2nd Exp. Agent % Yes

MAC Minimum alveolar concentration / Yes

PO2 Oxygen supply pressure kPa No

PN2O N2O supply pressure kPa No

Pair Air supply pressure kPa No

FG Fresh gas flow ml/min No

Ti/Ttot

Duty cycle or ratio of inspiration time

to total breathing cycle time (only during

spontaneous breathing)

/ No

26.8.2.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView SynoVent

Priority Label Label

High Apnea Apnea

High Paw Too High Paw High

High High Paw Sustained High continuous pressure

Mediate MV Too High MV too high

Mediate MV Too Low MV too Low

Mediate PEEP Too High PEEP High

Mediate PEEP Too Low PEEP Low

Mediate EtCO2 Too High EtCO2 High

26-16

BeneView SynoVent

Priority Label Label

Mediate EtCO2 Too Low EtCO2 Low

Mediate FiCO2 Too High FiCO2 High

Mediate FiN2O Too High FiN2O High

Mediate EtIso Too High EtISO High

Mediate FiIso Too High FiISO High

Mediate FiIso Too Low FiISO Low

Mediate EtSev Too High EtSEV High

Mediate EtSev Too Low EtSEV Low

Mediate FiSev Too High FiSEV High

Mediate EtDes Too High EtDES High

Mediate EtDes Too Low EtDES Low

Mediate EtO2 Too High EtO2 High

Mediate EtO2 Too Low EtO2 Low

Mediate FiO2 Too High FiO2 High

Mediate FiO2 Too Low FiO2 Low

Low RR Too High frequency high

Low RR Too Low frequency low

High Circuit Occluded Gas sampling tube Occlusion

Mixture of Anesthesia agents

Gas Supply

Cross contamination of anesthesic Agents

Vaporizer liquid level

battery alarm

patient Cassette remove

High High Technical Alarm

patient Cassette exchange

Gas Analyzer water trap

Gas Analyzer water trap missing Mediate Mediate Technical Alarm

internal communicaiton failture

Low Battery in Use Battery operation

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26-17

26.8.3 Draeger Fabius GS/Fabius Trio/Fabius Plus 26.8.3.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Paw Airway pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

VT Tidal volume ml No

VTe Expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

MV Minute volume L/min Yes

f Breath rate bpm No

fspn Spontaneous respiratory rate bpm Yes

I:E Inspiratory time:Expiratory time ratio / No

TIP:TI Percentage of inspiratory plateau time in

inspiratory time % No

Tinsp Time of inspiration s No

Pinsp Pressure control level of inspiration

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Psupp Pressure support level

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Pmax Maximal breathing pressure

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

F-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (flow trigger) L/min No

Insp Flow Inspiration flow L/min No

26-18

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

Exp Flow Expiratory flow L/min No

RRCO2 Respiratory rate of CO2 bpm Yes

EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

FiCO2 Fraction of inspired carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

FiO2 Fractional concentration of O2 in inspired gas

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

FiN2O Fraction of inspired nitrous oxide % Yes

EtN2O End-tidal N2O % Yes

FiDes % Yes

FiSev % Yes

FiEnf % Yes

FiIso % Yes

FiHal

Inspired anesthetic agent

% Yes

EtEnf % Yes

EtDes % Yes

EtIso % Yes

EtSev % Yes

EtHal

End-tidal anesthetic agent

% Yes

FiAA Inspired anesthetic agent % Yes

EtAA End-tidal anesthetic agent % Yes

FiAA 2nd 2nd Insp. Agent % Yes

EtAA 2nd 2nd Exp. Agent % Yes

Insp. MAC Inspired minimum alveolar concentration / No

Exp. MAC Expired minimum alveolar concentration / No

MAC Minimum alveolar concentration / Yes

ATMP Barometric pressure mmHg No

HALLev

ENFLev

ISOLev

DESLev

SEVLev

Anesthetic agent consupmtion ml No

VO2 Oxygen consumption ml/min Yes

VO2/m2 Oxygen consumption per body surface area ml/min/m2 No

26-19

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

VO2/kg Oxygen consumption per body weight ml/min/kg No

VCO2 CO2 production ml/min No

EE Energy expenditure kcal/day No

RQ Respiratory quotient / No

PO2 Oxygen supply pressure kPa No

PN2O N2O supply pressure kPa No

Pair Air supply pressure kPa No

O2 cyl. Oxygen cylinder pressure kPa No

O2 cyl.2nd Secondary oxygen cylinder pressure kPa No

N2O cyl. N2O cylinder pressure kPa No

air cyl. Air cylinder pressure kPa No

FG Fresh gas flow ml/min No

N2O Flow N2O flow L/min No

Air Flow Air flow L/min No

O2 Flow O2 flow L/min No

Des flow

Enf flow

Iso flow

Hal flow

Sev flow

Anesthetic agent flow ml/h No

IBW Ideal body weight kg No

BSA Body surface area m2 No

BIS Bispectral index / Yes

SQI Signal quality index / Yes

SR Suppression ratio / Yes

EMG Electromyograph dB Yes

SEF Spectral edge frequency Hz Yes

TP Total power dB Yes

BC Burst count /min Yes

SpO2 Arterial oxygen saturation from pulse

oximetry % Yes

PR Pulse rate bpm Yes

26-20

26.8.3.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView Fabius GS/Fabius Trio/Fabius Plus

Priority Label Label

High Apnea APNEA VENT

High Volume Apnea > 2 min APNEA VOL

High Pressure Apnea APNEA PRES

High Paw Too High PAW HIGH

High Paw Too Low PAW NEGATIVE

High FiO2 Too Low % O2 LOW

High CONT PRES CONT PRES

High O2 Supply Failure LO O2 SUPPLY

High Check APL Valve APL VALVE ?

High No Fresh Gas NO FRESHGAS

High High Technical Alarm VENT ERR

Mediate FiO2 Too High % O2 HIGH

Mediate MV Too High MIN VOL HIGH

Mediate MV Too Low MIN VOL LOW

Mediate PEEP Too High PEEP HIGH

Mediate PRESS EXP High PRESS EXP HI

Mediate Check Expiration-Valve EXP-VALVE ?

Mediate Check Fresh Gas Supply FRESH GAS ?

BATTERY LOW

PRESS ERR Mediate Mediate Technical Alarm

VOL ERR

Low PRESSURE LIM PRESSURE LIM

SPEAKER FAIL

POWER FAIL

CAL % O2 ?

% O2 ERR

TIME LIMITED

RS232COM ERR

PORT 1 ERROR

PORT 2 ERROR

Low Low Technical Alarm

THRESHOLD LO

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26-21

26.8.4 Draeger Primus 26.8.4.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

O2% Oxygen concentration % Yes

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Paw Airway pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

VT Tidal volume ml No

VTi Inspired tidal volume ml Yes

MV Minute volume L/min Yes

MVe Expiratory minute volume L/min Yes

MVLEAK Leakage minute volume L/min No

ftot Total respiratory rate bpm Yes

f Breath rate bpm No

fmand Mandatory breathing frequency bpm No

fspn Spontaneous respiratory rate bpm Yes

FreqMIN Minimum breath frequency bpm No

I:E Inspiratory time:Expiratory time ratio / No

TIP:TI Percentage of inspiratory plateau time in

inspiratory time % No

Tslope Time for the pressure to rise to target pressure s No

Tinsp Time of inspiration s No

Pinsp Pressure control level of inspiration

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

26-22

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

Psupp Pressure support level

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Pmax Maximal breathing pressure

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

F-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (flow trigger) L/min No

Compl Compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

RRCO2 Respiratory rate of CO2 bpm Yes

EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

FiCO2 Fraction of inspired carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

FiO2 Fractional concentration of O2 in inspired gas

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

EtO2 End-tidal O2

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

ΔO2 Difference between inspiratory and expiratory

O2

%

mmHg

kPa

No

Tapnea Apnea time s No

FiN2O % Yes

FiIso % Yes

FiDes % Yes

FiEnf % Yes

FiSev % Yes

FiHal

Inspired anesthetic agent

% Yes

EtN2O % Yes

EtEnf % Yes

EtDes % Yes

EtIso % Yes

EtSev

End-tidal anesthetic agent

% Yes

26-23

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

EtHal % Yes

FiAA Inspired anesthetic agent % Yes

EtAA End-tidal anesthetic agent % Yes

FiAA 2nd 2nd Insp. Agent % Yes

EtAA 2nd 2nd Exp. Agent % Yes

Insp. MAC Inspired minimum alveolar concentration / No

Exp. MAC Expired minimum alveolar concentration / No

MAC Minimum alveolar concentration / Yes

HALLev

ENFLev

ISOLev

DESLev

SEVLev

Anesthetic agent consupmtion ml No

VO2 Oxygen consumption ml/min Yes

FG Fresh gas flow ml/min No

N2O Flow N2O flow L/min No

Air Flow Air flow L/min No

O2 Flow O2 flow L/min No

SpO2 Arterial oxygen saturation from pulse

oximetry % Yes

PR Pulse rate bpm Yes

26.8.4.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView Draeger Primus

Priority Label Label

High Apnea APNEA/APNEA VENT

High Volume Apnea > 2 min APNEA VOL

High Pressure Apnea APNEA PRES

High Paw Too High PAW HIGH

High Paw Too Low PAW NEGATIVE

High FiO2 Too Low % O2 LOW

High CONT PRES CONT PRES

High CO2 Apnea APNEA CO2

High No Pulse NO SPO2 PULS

High PR Too Low SPO2 PULS LO

High SPO2 Too Low SPO2 LOW

26-24

BeneView Draeger Primus

Priority Label Label

High O2 Supply Failure O2 SUPPLY ?

High No Fresh Gas NO FRESHGAS

High Circuit Occluded CIRCLE OCCL

High VENT DISC VENT DISC

VENT ERR

INT.TMP.HIGH

O2CYL.DISCON

CHK N2O CYL

NO N2O DELIV

NO O2 DELIV.

NO AIR DELIV

FG X-OVER ?

VENT.UNLOCKD

AW-TEMP HIGH

High High Technical Alarm

NO N2O

Mediate FiO2 Too High FI O2 HIGH

Mediate VTe Too Low TIDAL VOL. ?

Mediate MV Too High MIN VOL HIGH

Mediate MV Too Low MIN VOL LOW

Mediate PEEP Too High PEEP HIGH

Mediate EtCO2 Too High ET CO2 HIGH

Mediate EtCO2 Too Low ET CO2 Low

Mediate FiCO2 Too High INSP CO2 HIGH

Mediate FiN2O Too High FI N2O HIGH

Mediate EtHal Too High EXP. HAL HIGH

Mediate FiHal Too High % HAL HIGH

Mediate FiHal Too Low % HAL LOW

Mediate EtEnf Too High EXP. ENF HIGH

Mediate FiEnf Too High % ENF HIGH

Mediate FiEnf Too Low % ENF LOW

Mediate EtIso Too High EXP. ISO HIGH

Mediate FiIso Too High % ISO HIGH

Mediate FiIso Too Low % ISO LOW

Mediate EtSev Too High EXP. SEV HIGH

Mediate FiSev Too High % SEV HIGH

Mediate FiSev Too Low % SEV LOW

Mediate EtDes Too High EXP. DES HIGH

26-25

BeneView Draeger Primus

Priority Label Label

Mediate FiDes Too High % DES HIGH

Mediate FiDes Too Low % DES LOW

Mediate MAC Too Low MAC LOW?

Mediate PR Too High SPO2 PULS HI

Mediate SPO2 Too High SPO2 HIGH

Mediate Patient Circuit Leak LEAKAGE

Mediate Check Fresh Gas Supply FRESH GAS ?

POWER FAIL

BATTERY LOW

N2O SUPPLY ?

PRESSURE LIM

MIXER INOP

P MAX?

SAFETY O2 ON

FG.FLOW LIM.

LOSS OF DATA

HOSES MIXED?

WRONG HOSES?

% O2 ERR

SET.CANCELED

FG TOO HIGH

FG ACTIVE

FG AIR SENS?

FG O2 SENS?

FG N2O SENS?

Mediate Mediate Technical Alarm

ABS. PRESENT?

WATERTR. OLD?

MIXED AGENT

CO2/AGT ERR

N2O ERR

AGT ERR

2nd AGENT

FICO2 OFF

CO2 LINE BLK

Mediate AG Module abnormal

CO2 ALRM OFF

Low NO AIR NO AIR

Low NO O2 SUPPLY NO O2 SUPPLY

26-26

BeneView Draeger Primus

Priority Label Label

FAN ERR

PWR SPLY ERR

PRESS ERR

VOL ERR

LO O2 SUPPLY

CHK O2 CYL

ID-FUNC-INOP

HOSE OLD?

HOSE MISSING

COM VENT ERR

APOLLO COM1?

APOLLO COM2?

O2 CYL OPEN

N2O CYL OPEN

AIR CYL OPEN

N2OCYL.SENS?

AIRCYL.SENS?

O2 CYL.SENS?

AIR CYL.?

PRESS RELIEF

ABSORB. OLD?

Low

Low Technical Alarm

INSP VOL ERR

SPO2SEN DISC

SPO2 ALRM OF Low SpO2 Module abnormal

SPO2 ERR

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26-27

26.8.5 GE Datex-Ohmeda Aestiva 7900/Aestiva 7100 26.8.5.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

VTe Expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

MVe Expiratory minute volume L/min Yes

O2% Oxygen concentration % Yes

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmin Minimum airway pressure

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

VT Tidal volume ml No

f Breath rate bpm No

I:E Percentage of inspiratory plateau time in

inspiratory time % No

TIP:TI Percentage of inspiratory plateau time in

inspiratory time % No

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Plimit Pressure limit level

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Pinsp Pressure control level of inspiration

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

26-28

26.8.5.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView Datex-Ohmeda Aestiva 7900/Aestiva 7100

Priority Label Label

High FiO2 Too Low Low O2

High Paw Too High High Paw

High Paw Too Low Low Paw

High High Paw Sustained Sustained Paw (shutdown)

High Volume Apnea > 2 min Volume Apnea > 2 min

High O2 Supply Failure No O2 Pressure

High No Fresh Gas No Fresh Gas Flow

Pinspired Not Achieved

Inspiration Stopped

+15V SIB Out-of-Range

+15V Manifold Out-of-Range

Display Voltage Out-of-Range

Vaux_ref Out-of-Range

Vext_ref Out-of-Range

A/D Converter Failure

CPU Failure

Memory (EEPROM) Failure

Memory (flash) Failure

Memory (RAM) Failure

Memory (video) Failure

Bootup Memory Failure

Software Watchdog Failure

Hardware Watchdog Failure

Internal Clock Too Fast

Internal Clock Too Slow

CPU Internal Error

High High Technical Alarm

Control Settings Input Has Failed

Mediate FiO2 Too High High O2

Mediate Sub-Atmospheric Paw Sub-Atmospheric Paw

Mediate MV Too Low Low VE

Mediate MV Too High High VE

Mediate VTe Too Low Low Vte

Mediate VTe Too High High Vte

Mediate Volume Apnea Volume Apnea

26-29

BeneView Datex-Ohmeda Aestiva 7900/Aestiva 7100

Priority Label Label

No Pressure Mode/PEEP

Inspiratory Overshoot

Manifold Pressure Sensor Failure

High Pressure Limit Reached (min

sys)

Inspiratory Reverse Flow

Expiratory Reverse Flow

Check Flow Sensors

Flow Valve Failure

Gas Inlet Valve Failure

Bootup Gas Inlet Valve Failure

Memory (redundant storage) Fail

No Battery

Low Battery Charge

Mediate Mediate Technical Alarm

Low VE Limit Set

Low Pressure Limiting Sustained Paw

Low Battery in Use On Battery

Check O2 Sensor

O2 Calibration Error

PEEP Not Achieved

Vt Not Achieved

No Inspiratory Flow Sensor

No Expiratory Flow Sensor

Insp Vt/Vte Mismatch

Vdel Mismatch

Bellows Empty

'+Vanalog Failure

'-Vanalog Failure

Flow Sensor Cal Data Corrupt

Low Battery

Low Battery (shutdown)

Battery Voltage Out Of Range

Battery Current Out Of Range

Circuit Auxiliary

Auxiliary Breathing Circuit

Low Low Technical Alarm

Service Calibrations Due

26-30

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26.8.6 GE Datex-Ohmeda Avance/Aisys 26.8.6.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

Vte Expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

MVe Expiratory minute volume L/min Yes

ftot Total respiratory rate bpm Yes

O2% Oxygen concentration % Yes

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmin Minimum airway pressure

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

MVspn Spontaneous breathed minute volume L/min Yes

fspn Spontaneous respiratory rate bpm Yes

PEEPi Intrinsic positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Compl Compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

RAW Airway resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

VTi Inspired tidal volume ml Yes

MVi Inspiratory mimute volume L/min Yes

Paux Peak Peak auxiliary pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

26-31

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

Paux Mean Mean auxiliary pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Paux Min Minimum auxiliary pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PEEPe Extrinsic positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PEEPtot Total PEEP

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PEEPi time Intrinsic PEEP age (elapsed time since last

maneuver) min No

P0.1 100 ms occlusion pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

P0.1 time P0.1 age (elapsed time since last maneuver) min No

ATMP Barometric pressure mmHg No

FiO2 Fractional concentration of O2 in inspired gas

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

EtO2 End-tidal O2

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

ΔO2 Difference between inspiratory and expiratory

O2

%

mmHg

kPa

No

FiCO2 Fraction of inspired carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

RRCO2 Respiratory rate of CO2 bpm Yes

FiAA Inspired anesthetic agent % Yes

EtAA End-tidal anesthetic agent % Yes

FiAA 2nd 2nd Insp. Agent % Yes

EtAA 2nd 2nd Exp. Agent % Yes

26-32

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

FiN2O Fraction of inspired nitrous oxide % Yes

EtN2O End-tidal N2O % Yes

MAC Minimum alveolar concentration / Yes

VO2 Oxygen consumption ml/min Yes

VO2/m2 Oxygen consumption per body surface area ml/min/m2 No

VO2/kg Oxygen consumption per body weight ml/min/kg No

VCO2 CO2 production ml/min No

EE Energy expenditure kcal/day No

RQ Respiratory quotient / No

PO2 oxygen supply pressure kPa No

PN2O N2O supply pressure kPa No

Pair air supply pressure kPa No

O2 cyl. Oxygen cylinder pressure kPa No

O2 cyl.2nd Secondary oxygen cylinder pressure kPa No

N2O cyl. N2O cylinder pressure kPa No

air cyl. Air cylinder pressure kPa No

Des flow

Enf flow

Iso flow

Hal flow

Sev flow

Anesthetic agent flow ml/h No

O2 Flow O2 flow L/min No

N2O Flow N2O flow L/min No

Air Flow Air flow L/min No

Tinsp Time of inspiration s No

Texp Expiratory time s No

I:E Inspiratory time:Expiratory time ratio / No

FRC Fractional residual capacity ml No

VT Tidal volume ml No

f Breath rate bpm No

TIP:TI Percentage of inspiratory plateau time in

inspiratory time % No

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Plimit Pressure limit level

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

26-33

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

Pinsp Pressure control level of inspiration

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Psupp Pressure support level

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Pmax Maximal breathing pressure

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

Tapnea Apnea time s No

IBW Ideal body weight Kg No

BSA Body surface area m2 No

Rise Time% rise time% % No

F-Trigger

Inspiratory trigger

level (flow trigger) L/min No

P-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level(pressure trigger)

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Tinsp Time of inspiration s or % No

Tpause Apnea Time s or % No

26.8.6.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView GE Datex-Ohmeda Avance/Aisys

Priority Label Label

High Paw Too High High Paw

High Paw Too Low Low Paw

High High Paw Sustained High Paw Sustained

High Circuit Occluded Circuit Occluded

High Volume Apnea > 2 min Volume Apnea > 2 min

High O2 Supply Failure No O2 Pressure

High No Fresh Gas No Fresh Gas Flow

High EtO2 Too Low Low etO2

High EtO2 Too High High etO2

High FiO2 Too Low Low FiO2

High FiO2 Too High High FiO2

High CO2 Apnea CO2 Apnea

High High Technical Alarm Pmax Reached

26-34

BeneView GE Datex-Ohmeda Avance/Aisys

Priority Label Label

Pinspired Not Achieved

Other Priority Alarms (for high

priority alarms not assigned a unique bit)

No VO2, High FiN2O

Low Drive Gas Pressure

Low Battery Charge

Low Battery (No AC)

Control Settings Failure

Standby ON (set when anesthesia system is

not in therapy mode or when respiratory care

ventilator is in standby)

Therapy Computer Failure

Monitoring Computer Failure

Display Computer Failure

System Error

Mixer Failure

Mixer Leak

Mixer Control Failure

Vent Failure

Mechanical Ventilation Disabled

Patient Detected (while in standby)

High O2 Supply Pressure

High Air Supply Pressure

Mediate Sub-Atmospheric Paw Sub-Atmospheric Paw

Mediate MV Too Low Low VE

Mediate MV Too High High VE

Mediate VTe Too Low Low Vte

Mediate VTe Too High High Vte

Mediate Volume Apnea Volume Apnea

Mediate Patient Circuit Leak Patient Circuit Leak

Mediate RR Too High Low RR

Mediate RR Too Low High RR

Mediate EtCO2 Too Low Low etCO2

Mediate EtCO2 Too High High etCO2

Mediate FiCO2 Too High High FiCO2

Mediate EtAA Too Low Low etAA

Mediate EtAA Too High High et AA

26-35

BeneView GE Datex-Ohmeda Avance/Aisys

Priority Label Label

Mediate FiAA Too Low Low FiAA

Mediate FiAA Too High High FiAA

MGAS ANE_WARMING_UP (5-

minute warming up)

MGAS WARMING_UP (2-minute

warming up)

No VO2, FiO2 > 85%

Alternate O2 ON

Air Only Mode

MGAS Failure

MGAS Outlet Occluded

MGAS Filter Blocked

MGAS Sample Line Blocked

MGAS No Sample Line

MGAS Replace Water Trap

Module Not Compatible

Vaporizer Cassette Failure

Vaporizer Cassette Agent Level Low

No Vaporizer Cassette

Vaporizer Failure

Vaporizer Leak

AA Control Failure

AA Delivery Disabled

Nebulizer Failure

Mediate AG Module abnormal

No Nebulizer

High Circuit O2

Low Circuit O2

No O2 Cell Sensor

No Pressure Cntrl/PEEP

Inspiration Stopped

Inspiratory Reverse Flow

Expiratory Reverse Flow

Check Flow Sensors

No Air Pressure

No VO2, Artifact

No VO2, High Bypass Flow

Mediate Mediate Technical Alarm

No Battery

26-36

BeneView GE Datex-Ohmeda Avance/Aisys

Priority Label Label

Battery Failure

Battery Charger Failure

Non Circle Circuit Selected

Expiratory Flow Sensed with Non Circle

Circuit

Verify Low VE Limit

Fan Failure

Heater Failure

Power Supply Failure

Display Failure

Breathing System Failure

Sensor Interface Board Failure

ACGO Failure

SCGO Failure

Primary Audio Failure

Backup Audio Failure

Low Pressure Limiting Sustained Paw

Low PRESSURE LIM Plimit Reached

Low Battery in Use Running On Battery (No AC)

ASR on

Replace O2 Cell

O2 Cell Calibration Error

PEEP Not Achieved

Vt Not Achieved

No Inspiratory Flow Sensor

No Expiratory Flow Sensor

Insp Vt/Vte Mismatch (VTE > Insp

VT)

Vdel Mismatch (System Leak)

Bellows Empty

No N2O Pressure

Memory (EEPROM) Failure

Flow Sensor Cal Data Corrupt

Low Low Technical Alarm

Service Calibrations Due

26-37

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26.9 Integrating Ventilator

26.9.1 Newport E360 26.9.1.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

VT Tidal volume ml No

VTe Expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

VTi Inspiratory tidal volume ml Yes

MVspn Spontaneous breathed minute volume L/min Yes

MVe Expiratory minute volume L/min Yes

MVi Inspiratory mimute volume L/min Yes

ftot Total respiratory rate bpm Yes

fspn Spontaneous respiratory rate bpm Yes

f Breath rate bpm No

I:E Inspiratory time: Expiratory time ratio / No

Leak Comp Leak compensation % No

FiO2 Fractional concentration of O2 in inspired gas

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

Rstat Static lung resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

Rdyn Dynamic lung resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

26-38

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

Cstat Static compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

Cdyn Dynamic compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

RSBI Rapid shallow breathing index 1/(min·L) Yes

WOBimp Imposed work of breathing J/min Yes

O2 Flow O2 flow L/min No

Air Flow Air flow L/min No

Insp.Flow Inspiration flow L/min No

Exp. Flow Expiratory flow L/min No

F-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (flow trigger) L/min No

P-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (pressure trigger)

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

Psupp Pressure support level

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

Plimit Pressure limit level

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Tinsp Time of inspiration s No

Pmax Maximal breathing pressure

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

PEEP/CPAP PEEP/CPAP

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

PEEPtot Total PEEP

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

26-39

26.9.1.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView Newport E360

Priority Label Label

High Paw Too High High Paw

High Paw Too Low Low Paw

High MV Too High High Exhale MV

High MV Too Low Low Exhale MV

High Apnea Apnea Alarm

High FiO2 Too High FiO2 High

High FiO2 Too Low FiO2 Low

High VT Not Achieved Volume Target Not Met

High Low Baseline Low Baseline

High High Baseline High Baseline

High Sustained Hbline Sustained Hbline

High Air Supply Pressure Low Air Supply Loss

High O2 Supply Pressure Low O2 Supply Loss

High Check Flow Sensors Flow Sensor Error

High Patient Disconnected Patient Disconnect

High Power Failure Power Failure

High Tinsp too Short Insp Time too Short

Mediate RR Too High Resp. Rate Alarm

Mediate O2 and air supply Air & O2 Supply Loss

Mediate O2 Sensor Unconnected FiO2 Sensor Disconnected

Low Battery in Use Battery in Use

Low Tinsp too Long Insp Time too Long

Device Alert

No O2 Power-Up

Control EEPROM Failure

Low Battery

Transducer Error

Control RAM Failed

Control ROM Failed

Control CPU Failed

Monitor RAM Failed

Monitor ROM Failed

Monitor CPU Failed

Dual RAM Failed

Monitor Tasks Failed

Control Processor Failed

Mon Internal System Failed

Control Tasks Failed

Monitor Processor Failed

High High Technical Alarm

Ctrol Internal System Failed

26-40

BeneView Newport E360

Priority Label Label

Fan Failure

Air Flow Sensor EEPROM Failure

O2 Flow Sensor EEPROM Failure

Air Servo Valve Leak

O2 Servo Valve Leak

Flow Sensor Cal Failed

FiO2 Sensor Bad

O2 Sensor Cal Failed

External Battery

Check Flow Sensor Board

Mediate Mediate Technical Alarm

NO TEST

I:E Ratio Inverse violation

Plimit<Pbase

Psupport+Pbase>60cmH2O

Pbase>Low Paw

Tidal Volume Out of Range

Flow Out of Range

Ti Out of Range

Rate Out of Range

Psupport Out of Range

Plimit Out of Range

PEEP/CPAP Out of Range

Flow Trigger Out of Range

CPM Blinking

EXH. VALVE CAL. Failed: Prox < 1

EXH. VALVE CAL. Failed: Prox > 0.5

EXH. VALVE CAL. Failed: Prox Low

EXH. VALVE CAL. Failed: Flow < 1

Low Low Technical Alarm

LEAK TEST Leak Test Failed

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26-41

26.9.2 Puritan Bennett 840 26.9.2.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

O2% Oxygen concentration % Yes

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Paw Airway pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

VT Tidal volume ml No

VTe Expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

VTi Inspiratory tidal volume ml Yes

VTe spn Spontaneous expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

VTapnea Apnea tidal volume ml No

MVspn Spontaneous breathed minute volume L/min Yes

MVe Expiratory minute volume L/min Yes

ftot Total respiratory rate bpm Yes

fapnea Breath rate for apnea ventilation bpm No

f Breath rate bpm No

I:E Inspiratory time: Expiratory time ratio / No

MVLEAK Leakage minute volume L/min No

Leak Comp Leak compensation % No

Rstat Static lung resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

Rdyn Dynamic lung resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

Cstat Static compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

26-42

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

Cdyn Dynamic compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

RSBI Rapid shallow breathing index 1/(min·L) Yes

WOB Work of breathing J/L Yes

Base Flow Base Flow L/min No

F-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (flow trigger) L/min No

P-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (pressure trigger)

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

Psupp Pressure support level

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

Tplat Plateau time s No

Rise Time% Rise time % No

PEEP/CPAP PEEP/CPAP

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

NIF Negative inspiratory force

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

P0.1 100 ms occlusion pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PEEPi Intrinsic positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PEEPtot Total PEEP

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Peak Flow Peak flow L/min No

Tapnea Apnea interval s No

IBW Ideal body weight kg No

Ti max Maximum inspiration time s No

Tube ID Tube ID mm No

26-43

26.9.2.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView Puritan Bennett 840

Priority Label Label

High Paw Too High High Inspiratory Pressure

High MV Too High High Exhaled minute Volume

High MV Too Low low exhaled minute volume

High Apnea Apnea

High FiO2 Too Low Low O2 %

High Ppeak Too Low Low Ppeak

High Air Supply Pressure Low No Air Supply

High O2 Supply Pressure Low No O2 Supply

High Airway Obstructed? Severe Occlusion

High Patient Disconnected Circuit Disconnect

High Power Failure Loss of Power

Mediate VTe Too High High Exhaled Tidal Volume

Mediate RR Too High High ftot

Mediate VTe Too Low Low Exhaled Mandatory Tidal Volume Alarm

Mediate EtO2 Too High High O2 Percent

Compressor Inoperative

Compliance Limited VT

Procedure Error

PAV Startup Too Long

PAV R&C Not Assessed

Volume Not Delivered

High High Technical Alarm

Volume Not Delivered

Inoperative Battery

AC Power Loss Low Low Technical Alarm

Low Battery

Low Tinsp too Long Inspiration Too Long

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26-44

26.9.3 Maquet Servo-i/Servo-s 26.9.3.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

O2% Oxygen concentration % Yes

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

VT Tidal volume ml No

VTe Expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

VTi Inspired tidal volume ml Yes

MV Minute volume L/min Yes

MVspn Spontaneous breathed minute volume L/min Yes

MVe Expiratory minute volume L/min Yes

MVi Inspiratory mimute volume L/min Yes

ftot Total respiratory rate bpm Yes

fspn Spontaneous respiratory rate bpm Yes

fCMV CMV frequency bpm No

fSIMV Frequency of SIMV bpm No

f Breath rate bpm No

I:E Inspiratory time:Expiratory time ratio / No

Leak Comp Leak compensation % No

Cstat Static compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

Cdyn Dynamic compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

RSBI Rapid shallow breathing index 1/(min·L) Yes

WOB Work of breathing J/L Yes

Exp. Flow Expiratory flow L/min No

F-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (flow trigger) L/min No

26-45

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

P-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (pressure trigger)

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

Tinsp Time of inspiration s No

Tpause Apnea Time s or % No

Rise Time% rise time% % No

Phigh Upper pressure level

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Plow Lower pressure level

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Thigh Time for the upper pressure level s No

TPEEP Time at PEEP level in Bi-Vent s No

Exp% Inspiration termination level % No

PC above PEEP PC above PEEP

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

PS above PEEP PS above PEEP

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

PEEP/CPAP PEEP/CPAP

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Ri Inspiratory resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

Re Expiratory resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

PO2 oxygen supply pressure kPa No

Pair air supply pressure kPa No

P0.1 100 ms occlusion pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PEEPtot Total PEEP

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

VCO2 CO2 production ml/min No

VTCO2 CO2 tidal elimination ml No

26-46

26.9.3.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView Puritan Bennett 840

Priority Label Label

High Paw Too High Airway pressure alarm Upper pressure limit exceeded

High MV Too High Exp.Minute volume too high

High MVToo Low Exp.Minute volume too low

High Apnea Apnea alarm

High FiO2 Too High O2 conc.too high

High FiO2 Too Low O2 conc.too low

High PEEPToo Low PEEP Low

High No Gas Supply Pressure Gas supply alarm

High O2 cell disconnect O2 cell disconnect

Mediate EtCO2 Too High EtCO2 conc.too high

Mediate EtCO2 Too Low EtCO2 conc.too low

Mediate RRToo Low Breath frequency Low

Mediate RR Too High Breath frequency High

Mediate PEEP Too High PEEP High

Low Check tubing Check tubing

Breathing system uP Module error

Inspiratory control uP Module error

Monitoring System uP Module error

Battery alarm

Power Failure

Mains Failure

O2 potentiometer error

CMV potentiometer error

Range Switch error

Mode Switch error

Barometer error

High continuous pressure

Overrange

Computer Interface Emulator hardware error

NIV,Leakage out of range

NIV,Time in waiting position exceeds 2 min

High High Technical Alarm

regulation pressure limited

Panel Interface uP Module error

Exp.flow &CO2 linearization uP Module error

Alarm buff

CI Battery Voltage

Pneumatic-Edi out of synch

Edi activity low

No Edi signal detected

Mediate Mediate Technical Alarm

Unsuccessful manual gas change alarm

26-47

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26.9.4 Draeger Evita 2 26.9.4.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

O2% Oxygen concentration % Yes

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

VT Tidal volume ml No

VTe Expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

MV Minute volume L/min Yes

MVspn Spontaneous breathed minute volume L/min Yes

ftot Total respiratory rate bpm Yes

fspn Spontaneous breathing frequency bpm Yes

fSIMV Frequency of SIMV bpm No

I:E Inspiratory time:Expiratory time ratio / No

△int.PEEP Intermittent PEEP

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

FiO2 Fractional concentration of O2 in inspired gas

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

Rdyn Dynamic lung resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

Cdyn Dynamic compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

26-48

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

F-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (flow trigger) L/min No

P-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (pressure trigger)

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

Phigh Upper pressure level

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Plow Lower pressure level

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Thigh Time for the upper pressure level s No

Tlow Time for the lower pressure level s No

Pmax Maximum airway rressure

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Pmin Minimum airway rressure

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

Vtrap Trapped volume ml No

T Inspiratory breathing gas temperature ℃

℉ No

P0.1 100 ms occlusion pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PEEPi Intrinsic positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide

%

kPa

mmHg

Yes

Flow Flow L/min No

Tapnea Apnea Time s No

ASB ramp ASB ramp s No

PASB Assisted spontaneous breathing

cmH2O

hPa

mbar No

Vds Dead space ml No

VCO2 CO2 production ml/min No

26-49

26.9.4.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView Puritan Bennett 840

Priority Label Label

High Paw Too High PAW HIGH

High Paw Too Low PAW LOW

High MV Too High MIN VOL HIGH

High MV Too Low MIN VOL LOW

High Apnea APNEA EVITA

High FiO2 Too High % O2 HIGH

High FiO2 Too Low % O2 LOW

High AW-TEMP HIGH AW-TEMP HIGH

High PEEP Too High PEEP HIGH

High ASB>4s ASB > 4 SEC

High Air Supply Pressure Low AIR SUPPLY ?

High Check Flow Sensors FLOW SENSOR?

High EXP-VALVE? EXP-VALVE ?

High CLEAN CO2 CLEAN CO2

Mediate EtCO2 Too High ET CO2 HIGH

Mediate EtCO2 Too Low ET CO2 LOW

Mediate VOL INCONST VOL INCONST

Mediate RR Too High RESP RATE HI

VOL ERR

PRESS ERR

AW-TEMP INOP

AW-TEMP SENS

CO2 NOT CAL

% O2 ERR

EVITA ERR

COOLING INOP

High High Technical Alarm

CYCLE FAILED

CO2 ERR

CO2 SENS?

MIXER INOP Low Low Technical Alarm

SYNCHRO INOP

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26-50

26.9.5 Draeger Evita 4/ Evita2 dura /Evita XL 26.9.5.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

O2% Oxygen concentration % Yes

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

VT Tidal volume ml No

Vte Expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

Vtapnea Apnea tidal volume ml No

MV Minute volume L/min Yes

MVspn Spontaneous breathed minute volume L/min Yes

Ftot Total respiratory rate bpm Yes

Fspn Spontaneous breathing frequency bpm Yes

Fapnea Breath rate for apnea ventilation bpm No

F Breath rate bpm No

I:E Inspiratory time: Expiratory time ratio / No

△int.PEEP Intermittent PEEP

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

FiO2 Fractional concentration of O2 in inspired gas

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

Rdyn Dynamic lung resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

Cdyn Dynamic compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

RSBI Rapid shallow breathing index 1/(min·L) Yes

F-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (flow trigger) L/min No

Tinsp Time of inspiration s No

26-51

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

Pinsp Pressure control level of inspiration

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Papnea Apnea pressure

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Phigh Upper pressure level

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Plow Lower pressure level

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Thigh Time for the upper pressure level s No

Tlow Time for the lower pressure level s No

Pmax Maximum airway pressure

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Pmin Minimum airway pressure

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Vtrap Trapped Volume ml No

T Inspiratory breathing gas temperature °C

°F No

NIF Negative inspiratory force

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

P0.1 100 ms occlusion pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PEEPi Intrinsic positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide

%

kPa

mmHg

Yes

Flow Flow L/min No

Ext.Flow External flow L/min No

Tapnea Apnea time s No

ASB ramp ASB ramp s No

PASB Assisted spontaneous breathing

cmH2O

hPa

mbar No

26-52

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

FlowAssist Flow assist

mbar.s/L

cmH2O.s/L

hPa.s/L

No

Vol.Assist Volume assist

mbar/L

cmH2O/L

hPa/L

No

Tdisconnect Delay time for "Airway pressure lower alarm

limit" s No

Vds Dead space ml No

VCO2 CO2 production ml/min No

ATC Automatic tube Compensation % No

Tube ID Tube ID mm No

PR Pulse rate bpm Yes

SpO2 Arterial oxygen saturation from pulse

oximetry % Yes

26.9.5.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView Puritan Bennett 840

Priority Label Label

High Paw Too High PAW HIGH

High Paw Too Low PAW LOW

High MV Too High MIN VOL HIGH

High MV Too Low MIN VOL LOW

High Apnea APNEA EVITA

High FiO2 Too High % O2 HIGH

High FiO2 Too Low % O2 LOW

High AW-TEMP HIGH AW-TEMP HI

High PEEP Too High PEEP HIGH

High ASB>4s ASB > 4 SEC

High No Pulse NO SPO2 PULS

High PR Too Low SPO2 PULS LO

High SpO2 Too Low SPO2 LOW

High PR Too High SPO2 PULS HI

High SpO2 Too High SPO2 HIGH

High Air Supply Pressure Low AIR SUPPLY ?

High O2 Supply Pressure Low LO O2 SUPPLY

High Airway Obstructed? TUBE OBSTRUC

High Check Flow Sensors FLOW SENSOR?

High EXP-VALVE? EXP-VALVE ?

High CLEAN CO2 CLEAN CO2

Mediate VTe Too High TIDVOL HI

26-53

BeneView Puritan Bennett 840

Priority Label Label

Mediate EtCO2 Too High ET CO2 HIGH

Mediate EtCO2 Too Low ET CO2 LOW

Mediate VOL INCONST VOL INCONST

Mediate RR Too High RESP RATE HI

Low ASB > 1.5s ASB > 1,5 SEC

Low PPS-TI > 1.5s PPS-TI > 1,5S

Low ASB > Tinsp ASB > TINSP

Low Battery in Use BATTERY ON

VOL ERR

PRESS ERR

AW-TEMP INOP

% O2 ERR

EVITA ERR

CYCLE FAILED

N-VOL ERR

NEO FLOW ?

CO2 ZERO CAL

SPO2 SEN DISC

SPO2 ERR

BATTERY ERR

FAN ERR

AIR PRESS HI

HI O2 SUPPLY

LOSS OF DATA

REM.PAD-ERR

High High Technical Alarm

PEEP V ERR

BATT. < 2MIN

CHECK EVITA

EVITA STDBY

AMB PRESS ?

NEBULIZ OFF

Mediate Mediate Technical Alarm

ERR MULTIPCB

CO2 ERR

CO2 SENSOR ?

MIXER INOP

SYNCHRO INOP

INSPHOLD END

Low Low Technical Alarm

EXSPHOLD END

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26-54

26.9.6 Hamilton G5 26.9.6.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

f Breath rate bpm No

VT Tidal volume ml No

TPause Apnea Time s or % No

P-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level(pressure trigger)

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PEEP/CPAP PEEP/CPAP

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Plow Lower pressure level

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Psupp Pressure support level

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

MV Minute volume L/min Yes

Plimit Pressure limit level

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Pinsp Pressure control level of inspiration

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Phigh Upper pressure level

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

F-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level (flow trigger) L/min No

I:E Inspiratory time:Expiratory time ratio / No

Peak Flow Peak flow L/min No

Exp% Inspiration termination level % No

Ramp Ramp ms No

IBW Ideal body weight kg No

%MinVol Percentage of minute volume to be delivered % No

Tlow Time for the lower pressure level s No

Thigh Time for the upper pressure level s No

26-55

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

Ti max Maximum inspiration time s No

Tip Inspiratory pause time s No

tube ID Tube ID mm No

TRC Tube resistance compensation / No

base flow Base Flow L/min No

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

PEEP Positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmin Minimum airway pressure

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

PEEPi Intrinsic positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

P0.1 100 ms occlusion pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PTP Pressure time product

cmH2O.s

mbar.s

hPa.s

No

Insp.Flow Inspiration flow L/min No

Exp. Flow Expiratory flow L/min No

Vti Inspired tidal volume ml Yes

Vte Expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

VTe spn Spontaneous expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

MVspn Spontaneous breathed minute volume L/min Yes

ftot Total respiratory rate bpm Yes

fspn Spontaneous respiratory rate bpm Yes

Texp Expiratory time s No

26-56

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

I:E Inspiratory time:Expiratory time ratio / No

Ri Inspiratory resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

Re Expiratory resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

Cstat Static compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

RCexp Expiratory time constant s No

RCinsp Inspiratory time constant s No

RSBI Rapid shallow breathing index 1/(min·L) Yes

O2％ Oxygen concentration % Yes

WOB Work of breathing J/L Yes

EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

VCO2 CO2 production ml/min No

PR Pulse rate bpm Yes

SpO2 Arterial oxygen saturation from pulse

oximetry % Yes

fCMV CMV frequency bpm No

fSIMV Frequency of SIMV bpm No

％Tinsp Time of inspiration ％ No

Tinsp Time of inspiration s No

26.9.6.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView Hamilton G5

Priority Label Label

High PawToo High High pressure

High PawToo Low Low pressure

High FiO2 Too High High oxygen

High FiO2 Too Low Low oxygen

High Apnea Apnea

High SpO2 Too Low SpO2 too low

26-57

BeneView Hamilton G5

Priority Label Label

High SpO2 Too High SpO2 too high

High Patient Disconnected Disconnection Patient or,

Disconnection on patient side

High Air Supply Pressure Low Air supply failed

High O2 Supply Pressure Low Oxygen supply failed

High O2 cell disconnect O2 cell missing

High O2 cell cal. Needed O2 cell calibration needed

High Power Failure Loss of mains power

High Check Flow Sensors Check Flow Sensor type

High No Gas Supply Pressure All gas supplies failed

High Disconnection ventilator side Disconnection Ventilator or,

Disconnection on ventilator side

High Loss of PEEP Loss of PEEP

High MV Too Low Low minute volume

High MV Too High High minute volume

Fail to Cycle

Wrong Flow Sensor type

O2 cell defective

Disconncetion

Low internal pressure

High pressure during sigh

Pressure not released

Exhalation obstructed

TF5514:Check loudspeaker

Internal battery empty

Ventilator unit connection lost

High High Technical Alarm

Check internal battery

Mediate RR Too High High frequency

Mediate RR Too Low Low frequency

Mediate EtCO2 Too High High PetCO2

Mediate EtCO2 Too Low Low PetCO2

Mediate O2 and air supply Oxygen + air supplies failed

Mediate O2 and heliox supply Oxygen + heliox supplies failed

Gas Supply

High leak

Low tidal volume

Mediate Mediate Technical Alarm

High tidal volume

26-58

BeneView Hamilton G5

Priority Label Label

Turn the Flow Sensor

APV init failed

Internal battery low

Panel connection lost

Heliox supply failed

SpO2: sensor error(left slot)

SpO2: sensor error(right slot)

SpO2: no sensor ((left slot)

SpO2: no sensor ((left slot)

SpO2: patient disconnected ((left slot)

SpO2: patient disconnected ((right slot)

SpO2: light interference ((left slot)

SpO2: light interference ((right slot)

SpO2: poor signal ((left slot)

SpO2: poor signal ((right slot)

Large change in FiO2

Recruitment maneuver in process

Brightness test alarm

AERONEB disconnected

Cuff disconnection

Air + heliox supplies failed

Oxygenation adjustment OFF (no SpO2)

Ventilation adjustment OFF (no PetCO2)

No hemodynamic status available

High HLI

MV oszillation

FiO2 oszillation

PEEP oszillation

Cuff high pressure

FiO2 set to 100% due to low saturation

Operator

General Alarm

Volume too low for nebulizer

ASV: Check high pressure limit

APV: Check high pressure limit

Pressure low limit reached

Low Low Technical Alarm

Check %MinVol

26-59

BeneView Hamilton G5

Priority Label Label

Check Body Wt

ASV: Cannot meet target

Check PEEP/high pressure limit

Check PEEP/Pcontrol

Check PEEP/Psupport

Check P-ramp

Check trigger

Check %TI

Check pause

Check I:E

Check Vt

Check rate

Check peak flow

Check TI

Check Flow Pattern

Flow sensor calibration needed

Expiratory valve calibration needed

Apnea ventilation ended

Maximum leak compensation

Low ExpMinVol alarm off

CO2 sensor calibration needed

Check CO2 airway adapter

CO2 sensor disconnected

CO2 sensor over temperature

CO2 sensor faulty

External battery empty

Sensor simulation active

IRV

Cuff leak

IntelliCuff not found

Check VThigh limit

AERONEB module disconnected

Oxygenation adjustment OFF (no SpO2)

Ventilation adjustment OFF (no PetCO2)

Check CO2 sampling line

Check INTELLiVENT PEEP limit setting

Set low limit of ExpMinVol alarm

26-60

BeneView Hamilton G5

Priority Label Label

Recruitment in Progress

Oxygenation Controller on Limit

Ventilation Controller on Limit

SBT conditions fulfilled

SBT in progress

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

26.9.7 Hamilton C2 /Galileo 26.9.7.1 Output Signals—Parameters

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

fCMV CMV frequency bpm No

fSIMV Frequency of SIMV bpm No

VT Tidal volume ml No

％Tinsp Time of inspiration ％ No

Tpause Apnea Time s or % No

P-Trigger Inspiratory trigger

level(pressure trigger)

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

PEEP/CPAP PEEP/CPAP

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Psupp Pressure support level

cmH2O

Mbar

hPa

No

O2% Oxygen concentration % Yes

MV Minute volume L/min Yes

I: E Inspiratory time:Expiratory time ratio / No

Peak Flow Peak flow L/min No

Exp% Inspiration termination level % No

Ramp Ramp ms No

IBW Ideal body weight kg No

%MinVol Percentage of minute volume to be delivered % No

26-61

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

EtCO2 End-tidal carbon dioxide

%

mmHg

kPa

Yes

SpO2 Arterial oxygen saturation from pulse

oximetry % Yes

PR Pulse rate bpm Yes

Vti Inspired tidal volume ml Yes

Vte Expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

ftot Total respiratory rate bpm Yes

fspn Spontaneous respiratory rate bpm Yes

Ppeak Peak pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pmean Mean pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Pplat Plateau pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

Yes

Texp Expiratory time s No

Ri Inspiratory resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

Re Expiratory resistance

cmH2O/L/s

hPa/L/s

mbar/L/s

Yes

Cstat Static compliance

ml/cmH2O

ml/hPa

ml/mbar

Yes

Insp.Flow Inspiration flow L/min No

VTe spn Spontaneous expiratory tidal volume ml Yes

PEEPi Intrinsic positive end-expiratory pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Pmin Minimum airway pressure

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

Tinsp Time of inspiration s No

26-62

BeneView

Label Description Unit

Is it saved in the trends?

P0.1 100 ms occlusion pressure

cmH2O

hPa

mbar

No

Exp. Flow Expiratory flow L/min No

RCexp Expiratory time constant s No

RCinsp Inspiratory time constant s No

WOB Work of breathing J/L Yes

PTP Pressure time product

cmH2O.s

mbar.s

hPa.s

No

Pinsp Pressure control level of inspiration

cmH2O

mbar

hPa

No

26.9.7.2 Output Signals—Alarms

BeneView Hamilton C2 /Galileo

Priority Label Label

High Paw Too High High Pressue

High Patient Disconnected Disconnection Patient

High Apnea Apnea

High Disconnection ventilator side Disconnection Ventilator

High Loss of PEEP Loss of PEEP

High MV Too Low Low Min Vol

High MV Too High High Min Vol

High High Technical Alarm Fail to Cycle

Mediate RR Too High High Rate

Mediate Mediate Technical Alarm Gas Supply

Operator Low Low Technical Alarm

General Alarm

NOTE

The above alarm messages are derived from the open protocol of corresponding external device. For more

information about these alarms, please see the Instructions for Use matching the device.

27-1

27 Freezing Waveforms

During patient monitoring, the freeze feature allows you to freeze the currently displayed waveforms on the screen so

that you can have a close examination of the patient’s status. Besides, you can select any frozen waveform for recording.

27.1 Freezing Waveforms

1. To freeze waveforms, select the hardkey on the monitor’s front.

2. The system closes the displayed menu (if any), and opens the [Freeze] menu.

3. All displayed waveforms are frozen, i.e. the waveforms stop being refreshed or scrolling.

The freeze feature exerts no effect on the split-screen view of minitrends, oxyCRG and other patients.

27.2 Viewing Frozen Waveforms

To view the frozen waveforms, you can either:

Select the [Scroll] button and then rotate the Knob clockwise or counter-clockwise, or

Directly select the or beside the [Scroll] button using a mouse or through the touchscreen.

The frozen waveforms will scroll left or right accordingly. And meanwhile, at the lower right corner of the bottommost

waveform, there is an upward arrow. The freeze time is displayed below the arrow and the initial frozen time is [0 s]. With

the waveforms scrolling, the freeze time changes at intervals of 1 second. This change will be applied for all waveforms

on the screen.

27-2

27.3 Unfreezing Waveforms

To unfreeze the frozen waveforms, you can either:

Select the button at the upper right corner of the [Freeze] menu,

Select the hardkey on the monitor’s front, or

Perform any other action that causes the screen to be readjusted or opens a menu, such as plugging in or out a

module, pressing the hardkey, etc.

27.4 Recording Frozen Waveforms

1. In the [Freeze] menu, select, in turn, [Wave 1], [Wave 2] and [Wave 3] and then select your desired

waveforms.

2. Select the [Record] button. The selected waveforms and all numerics at the frozen time are printed out by the

recorder.

28-1

28 Review

28.1 Accessing Respective Review Windows

1. Select the [Review] QuickKey, or [Main Menu]→[Review >>].

2. Select [Graphic Trends], [Tabular Trends], [Events], [Full Disclosure] or [12-lead ECG] to access their

respective review windows.

For details about reviewing interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG results, refer to the chapter 8 Monitoring ECG.

28.2 Reviewing Graphic Trends

In the [Review] menu, select [Graphic Trends] to access the following window.

1. Event mark area 2. Time axis 3. Graphic trends area

4. Parameter area 5. Cursor

Events are marked with colors in the event mark area. Red represents high level alarm event. Yellow represents

medium/low level alarm event. Green represents manual event.

In this review window:

Select [Trend Group] and you can select a trend group for viewing in the popup menu. If [Custom 1] or

[Custom 2] is selected, you can further select [Define Trend Group]. Then you can select the parameters for

viewing in the popup menu.

You can set the time length of the review window by selecting [Zoom].

You can set the number of waves displayed in one page by selecting [Waves].

1 2

3 4

5

28-2

To browse the graphic trends, you can either:

Select or beside [Scroll] to move the cursor one step to the left or right to navigate through the

graphic trends, or

Select or to move the cursor one page to the left or right to navigate through the graphic

trends.

A time indicating your current position is displayed above the parameter area. Numeric measurement values

corresponding to the cursor location change as the cursor is moved. The measurement value that triggered high

level alarm has red background. The one that triggered medium/low level alarm has yellow background.

By selecting or beside [Event], you can position the cursor to different event time.

By selecting the [Record] button, you can print out the currently displayed graphic trends by the recorder.

By selecting the [Print] button, you can set and print out the graphic trends report by the printer. For how to set

the graphic trends report, please refer to the Print chapter.

28.3 Reviewing Tabular Trends

In the [Review] menu, select [Tabular Trends] to access the following window.

Events are marked with colors in window’s top area. Red represents high level alarm event. Yellow represents

medium/low level alarm event. Green represents manual event.

In this review window:

Select [Trend Group] and you can select a trend group for viewing in the popup menu. If [Custom 1] or

[Custom 2] is selected, you can further select [Define Trend Group]. Then you can select the parameters for

viewing in the popup menu.

28-3

You can change the resolution of the trend data by selecting [Interval] and then selecting the appropriate

setting:

[5 s] or [30 s]: select to view up to 4 hours of tabular trends at 5- or 30-second resolution.

[1 min], [5 min], [10 min], [15 min], [30 min], [1 h], [2 h] or [3 h]: select to view up to 120 hours of

tabular trends at your selected resolution.

[NIBP]: select to view the tabular trends when NIBP measurements were acquired.

To browse the tabular trends, you can either:

Select or beside [Scroll] to drag the scrollbar left or right to navigate through the trend database,

or

Select or to scroll left or right to navigate through the trend database.

The measurement value that triggered high level alarm has red background. The one that triggered medium/low level

alarm has yellow background.

By selecting or beside [Event], you can position the cursor to different event time.

By selecting the [Record] button, you can access the [Record Setup] menu and set the start and end

time of the tabular trends you want to record. This feature is not available when reviewing a history patient. By

further selecting [Record], you can print out the currently displayed tabular trends by the recorder.

By selecting the [Print] button, you can set and print out the tabular trends report by the printer. For how to set

the tabular trends report, please refer to the Print chapter.

28.4 Reviewing Events

In the [Review] menu, select [Events] to access the following window.

The events that can be reviewed include parameter alarm events, arrhythmia alarm events and manual events. When an

event occurs, all the measurement numerics at the event trigger time and related waveforms 4 seconds respectively

before and after the event trigger time are stored.

28-4

In this window:

You can view the desired events by selecting [Event].

You can view the desired events according to the level by selecting [Level].

After selecting the desired event, you can select [Details] to access the following window. In this window, the

waveform area displays the waveforms related to the event, and the parameter area displays the parameter values

happened at the event trigger time.

1. Waveform area 2. Parameter area

In this window:

You can select or to navigate through the waveforms.

You can select or beside the [Event] button to switch between events.

You can set the desired [Gain] for ECG waveform.

You can set the desired [Sweep].

By selecting the [Record] button, you can print out the currently displayed alarm events by the recorder.

By selecting the [Print] button, you can print out the currently displayed alarm events by the printer.

By selecting the [Events List] button, you can view the events list.

1 2

28-5

28.5 Reviewing Waveforms

In the [Review] menu, select [Full Disclosure] to access the following window.

A. Waveform area B. Parameter area

In this review window:

To review full-disclosure waveforms, you need to save waveforms first. Select [Save Waves >>] and then select

the parameters whose waveforms you want to view. To save full-disclosure waveform, your monitor must be

equipped with a CF storage card.

To view the waveforms, you can either:

Select or beside the [Scroll] button to move the cursor one step left or right to navigate through

the waveforms, or

Select or to move the cursor one page left or right to navigate through the waveforms.

A time indicating your current position is displayed at the top of the waveform area. Numeric measurement values

corresponding to the cursor location are displayed in the parameter area, and change as the cursor is moved.

You can change the ECG wave gain by selecting [Gain] and then selecting the appropriate setting.

You can change the waveform sweep speed by selecting [Sweep] and then selecting the appropriate setting.

By selecting the [Record] button, you can print out the first three waveforms and measurement numerics by the

recorder.

By selecting or beside the [Event] button, you can position the cursor between events.

A B

28-6

FOR YOUR NOTES

29-1

29 Calculations

29.1 Introduction

The calculation feature is available with your patient monitor. The calculated values, which are not directly measured, are

computed based on the values you provide.

Your can perform the following calculations:

Dose calculations

Oxygenation calculations

Ventilation calculations

Hemodynamic calculations

Renal calculations

To perform a calculation, select [Main Menu] [→ Calc >>], or the [Calculations] QuickKey and then select the

calculation you want to perform.

NOTE

The calculation feature is independent of other monitoring functions and can be therefore used for

patients being monitored by other monitors. Any operation in a calculation window does not affect the

patient monitoring by the local patient monitor.

WARNING

After the calculation is finished, verify the entered values are correct and the calculated values are

appropriate. We assume no responsibility for any consequences caused by wrong entries and improper

operations.

29-2

29.2 Dose Calculations

29.2.1 Performing Calculations To perform a dose calculation:

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Calculations >>] [→ Dose >>], or select [Calculations] QuickKey [→ Dose >>].

2. Select, in turn, [Patient Cat.] and [Drug Name] and then select the appropriate settings. The dose calculation

program has a library of commonly used drugs, of which Drug A through Drug E are for those not specified in this

library.

Drug A, B, C, D, E

Aminophylline

Dobutamine

Dopamine

Epinephrine

Heparin

Isuprel

Lidocaine

Nipride

NItroglycerin

Pitocin

3. The system gives a set of default values when the above steps are finished. However, these values cannot be used

as the calculated values. The user must enter values following the doctor’s instructions, and then the calculated

values can only be used

4. Enter the patient’s weight.

5. Enter other values.

6. Verify if the calculated values are correct.

29.2.2 Selecting the Proper Drug Unit Each drug has its fixed unit or unit series. Among a unit series, one unit may change to another automatically depending

on the entered value.

The units for each drug are as follows:

Drug A, B, C, Aminophylline, Dobutamine, Dopamine, Epinephrine, Isuprel, Lidocaine, Nipride and NItroglycerin

use the unit series: g, mg and mcg.

Drug D, Heparin and Pitocin use the unit series: Unit, KU (kilo units) and MU (million units).

Drug E uses the unit: mEq (milli-equivalents).

You must select the proper drug name (A, B, C, D or E) according to the units when you define a drug not listed in this

library.

NOTE

For neonate patients, [Drip Rate] and [Drop Size] are disabled.

29-3

29.2.3 Titration Table To open the titration table, select [Titration Table >>] in the [Dose Calculation] window after the dose calculation

is finished.

In the titration table, when you change:

[Reference]

[Interval]

[Dose Type]

The titrated values change accordingly.

You can also:

Select or , or or beside the vertical scrollbar to view more values.

Select [Record] to print out the currently displayed titrated values by the recorder.

29.3 Oxygenation Calculations

29.3.1 Performing Calculations To perform an oxygenation calculation:

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Calculations >>] [→ Oxygenation >>], or select [Calculations]

QuickKey [→ Oxygenation >>].

2. Enter values for calculation.

3. Select the [Calculate] button. The system performs a calculation per the current settings and displays the

calculated values.

If a calculated value is outside the range, its background will highlight in yellow. You can select [Range] to

view its normal range in the unit field.

Invalid values are displayed as [---].

In the [Oxygenation Calculation] window, you can:

Change the pressure unit, Hb unit and oxygen content unit by selecting [Press. Unit], [Hb Unit] and

[OxyCont Unit] and then selecting the appropriate settings. The changes take effect automatically.

Trigger a recording by selecting the [Record] button. The currently displayed oxygenation calculations are

printed out by the recorder.

Review the previously performed calculations by selecting [Review].

29-4

29.3.2 Entered Parameters Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

C.O. L/min cardiac output

FiO2 % percentage fraction of inspired oxygen

PaO2 mmHg partial pressure of oxygen in the arteries

PaCO2 mmHg partial pressure of carbon dioxide in the arteries

SaO2 % arterial oxygen saturation

PvO2 mmHg partial pressure of oxygen in venous blood

SvO2 % venous oxygen saturation

Hb g/L hemoglobin

CaO2 ml/L arterial oxygen content

CvO2 ml/L venous oxygen content

VO2 ml/min oxygen consumption

RQ None respiratory quotient

ATMP mmHg atmospheric pressure

Height cm height

Weight kg weight

29.3.3 Calculated Parameters Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

BSA m2 body surface area

VO2 calc ml/min oxygen consumption

C(a-v)O2 ml/L arteriovenous oxygen content difference

O2ER % oxygen extraction ratio

DO2 ml/min oxygen transport

PAO2 mmHg partial pressure of oxygen in the alveoli

AaDO2 mmHg alveolar-arterial oxygen difference

CcO2 ml/L capillary oxygen content

Qs/Qt % venous admixture

C.O. calc L/min calculated cardiac output

29-5

29.4 Ventilation Calculations

29.4.1 Performing Calculations To perform a ventilation calculation:

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Calculations >>] [→ Ventilation >>], or select [Calculations]

QuickKey [→ Ventilation >>].

2. Enter values for calculation. If the patient monitor is connected to an anesthesia machine or a ventilator, the system

automatically loads the supported parameter values to the [Ventilation Calculation] window.

3. Select the [Calculate] button. The system performs a calculation per the current settings and displays the

calculated values.

If a calculated value is outside the range, its background will highlight in yellow. You can select [Range] to

view its normal range in the unit field.

Invalid values are displayed as [---].

In the [Ventilation Calculation] window, you can:

Change the pressure unit by selecting [Press. Unit] and then selecting the appropriate setting. Corresponding

pressure values shall convert and update automatically.

Trigger a recording by selecting the [Record] button. The currently displayed ventilation calculations are printed

out by the recorder.

Review the previously performed calculations by selecting [Review].

29.4.2 Entered Parameters Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

FiO2 % percentage fraction of inspired oxygen

RR rpm respiration rate

PeCO2 mmHg partial pressure of mixed expiratory CO2

PaCO2 mmHg partial pressure of carbon dioxide in the arteries

PaO2 mmHg partial pressure of oxygen in the arteries

TV ml tidal volume

RQ None respiratory quotient

ATMP mmHg atmospheric pressure

29.4.3 Calculated Parameters Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

PAO2 mmHg partial pressure of oxygen in the alveoli

AaDO2 mmHg alveolar-arterial oxygen difference

Pa/FiO2 mmHg oxygenation ratio

a/AO2 % arterial to alveolar oxygen ratio

MV L/min minute volume

Vd ml volume of physiological dead space

Vd/Vt % physiologic dead space in percent of tidal volume

VA L/min alveolar volume

29-6

29.5 Hemodynamic Calculations

29.5.1 Performing Calculations To perform a hemodynamic calculation:

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Calculations >>] [→ Hemodynamic >>], or select [Calculations]

QuickKey [→ Hemodynamic >>].

2. Enter values for calculation.

For a patient who is being monitored, [HR], [Art mean], [PA mean] and [CVP] are automatically taken

from the currently measured values. If you just have performed C.O. measurements, [C.O.] is the average of

multiple thermodilution measurements. [Height] and [Weight] are the patient’s height and weight you

have entered. If the monitor does not provide these values, their fields appear blank.

For a patient who is not being monitored, confirm the values you have entered.

3. Select the [Calculate] button. The system performs a calculation per the current settings and displays the

calculated values.

If a calculated value is outside the range, its background will highlight in yellow. You can select [Range] to

view its normal range in the unit field.

Invalid values are displayed as [---].

In the [Hemodynamic Calculation] window, you can:

Trigger a recording by selecting the [Record] button. The currently displayed renal calculations are printed out

by the recorder.

Review the previously performed calculations by selecting [Review].

29.5.2 Entered Parameters Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

C.O. L/min cardiac output

HR bpm heart rate

PAWP mmHg pulmonary artery wedge pressure

Art Mean mmHg artery mean pressure

PA Mean mmHg pulmonary artery mean pressure

CVP mmHg central venous pressure

EDV ml end-diastolic volume

Height cm height

Weight kg weight

29-7

29.5.3 Calculated Parameters Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

BSA m2 body surface area

C.I. L/min/m2 cardiac index

SV ml stroke volume

SI ml/m2 stroke index

SVR DS/cm5 systemic vascular resistance

SVRI DS·m2/cm5 systemic vascular resistance index

PVR DS/cm5 pulmonary vascular resistance

PVRI DS·m2/cm5 pulmonary vascular resistance index

LCW kg·m left cardiac work

LCWI kg·m/m2 left cardiac work index

LVSW g·m left ventricular stroke work

LVSWI g·m/m2 left ventricular stroke work index

RCW kg·m right cardiac work

RCWI kg·m/m2 right cardiac work index

RVSW g·m right ventricular stroke work

RVSWI g·m/m2 right ventricular stroke work index

EF % ejection fraction

29.6 Renal Calculations

29.6.1 Performing Calculations To perform a renal calculation:

1. Selecting [Main Menu] [→ Calculations >>] [→ Renal >>], or select [Calculations] QuickKey [→ Renal >>].

2. Enter values for calculation.

3. Select the [Calculate] button. The system performs a calculation per the current settings and displays the

calculated values.

If a calculated value is outside the range, its background will highlight in yellow. You can select [Range] to

view its normal range in the unit field.

Invalid values are displayed as [---].

In the [Renal Calculation] window, you can:

Trigger a recording by selecting the [Record] button. The currently displayed renal calculations are printed out

by the recorder.

Review the previously performed calculations by selecting [Review].

29-8

29.6.2 Entered Parameters Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

URK mmol/L urine pstassium

URNa mmol/L urinary sodium

Urine ml/24h urine

Posm mOsm/ kgH2O plasm osmolality

Uosm mOsm/ kgH2O urine osmolality

SerNa mmol/L serum sodium

Cr μmol/L creatinine

UCr μmol/L urine creatinine

BUN mmol/L blood urea nitrogen

Height cm height

Weight kg weight

29.6.3 Calculated Parameters Abbreviation Unit Full spelling

URNaEx mmol/24h urine sodium excretion

URKEx mmol/24h urine potassium excretion

Na/K % sodium potassium ratio

CNa ml/24h clearance of sodium

Clcr ml/min creatinine clearance rate

FENa % fractional excretion of sodium

Cosm ml/min osmolar clearance

CH2O ml/h free water clearance

U/P osm None urine to plasma osmolality ratio

BUN/Cr None* blood urea nitrogen creatinine ratio

U/Cr None urine-serum creatinine ratio

*: BUN/Cr is a ratio under the unit of mol.

29.7 Understanding the Review Window

With the review feature, you can review oxygenation, ventilation, hemodynamic and renal calculations. The review

window for each calculation is similar. Take the hemodynamic calculations review window for example, you can access it

by selecting [Review] in the [Hemodynamic Calculation] window.

In this review window:

You can select , or to view more values.

The values that exceed the range are displayed in yellow background. The [Unit] field displays parameter units. If

some parameter values are outside of their normal ranges, you can view their normal range in the [Unit] field by

selecting [Range].

You can review an individual calculation by selecting its corresponding column and then selecting [Original

Calc]. You can record the currently displayed calculations or perform another calculation is this window.

30-1

30 Recording

30.1 Using a Recorder

The thermal recorder records patient information, measurement numerics, up to three waveforms, etc.

1. Start/Stop key: press to start a recording or stop the current recording.

2. Indicator

On: when the recorder works correctly.

Off: when the monitor is switched off.

Flashes: if an error occurred to the recorder, e.g., the recorder runs out of paper.

3. Paper outlet

4. Recorder door

5. Latch

30.2 Overview of Recording Types

By the way recordings are triggered, the recordings can be classified into the following categories:

Manually-triggered realtime recordings.

Timed recordings.

Alarm recordings triggered by an alarm limit violation or an arrhythmia event.

Manually-triggered, task-related recordings.

3

4

2 1

5

30-2

The task-related recordings include:

Frozen wave recording

Graphic trends recording

Tabular trends recording

Events recording:parameter alarm recording, arrh. alarm recording, manual events recording

Wave review recording

Interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG result recording

Titration table recording

Hemodynamic calculations recording

Oxygenation calculations recording

Ventilation calculations recording

Renal calculations recording

oxyCRG recording

C.O. curve recording

PAWP recording

Respiratory loops recording

Monitor information recording

NOTE

For details about alarm recording, refer to the chapter 7 Alarms.

For details about task-related recordings, refer to respective sections of this manual.

30.3 Starting and Stopping Recordings

To manually start a recording, you can either:

Select the hardkey on the front of either the patient monitor or the recorder module, or

Select the [Record] button from the current menu or window.

Automatic recordings will be triggered in the following conditions:

Timed recordings will start automatically at preset intervals.

If both [Alarm] and [Alm Rec] for a measurement are set on, an alarm recording will be triggered automatically

as alarms occur.

To manually stop a recording, you can either:

Select the hardkey again, or

Select [Clear All Tasks] in the [Record Setup] menu.

30-3

Recordings stop automatically when:

The runtime is over.

The recorder runs out of paper.

When the recorder has an alarm condition.

When a recording is stopped, the following markers will be added:

Automatically stopped recording: print two columns of ‘*’ at the end of the report.

Manually or abnormally stopped recording: print one column of ‘*’ at the end of the report.

30.4 Setting up the Recorder

30.4.1 Accessing the Record Setup Menu By selecting [Main Menu] [→ Record Setup >>], you can access the [Record Setup] menu.

30.4.2 Selecting Waveforms for Recording The recorder can record up to 3 waveforms at a time. You can select, in turn, [Waveform 1], [Waveform 2] and

[Waveform 3] in the [Record Setup] menu, and then select the waveforms you want. You can also turn off a

waveform recording by selecting [Off]. These settings are intended for realtime and scheduled recordings.

30.4.3 Setting the Realtime Recording Length After starting a realtime recording, the recording time depends on your monitor’s settings. In the [Record Setup]

menu, select [Length] and toggle between [8 s] and [Continuous].

[8 s]: record 4-second waveforms respectively before and after current moment.

[Continuous]: record the waveforms from the current moment until stopped manually.

30.4.4 Setting the Interval between Timed Recordings Timed recordings start automatically at preset intervals. Each recording lasts 8 seconds. To set the interval between

timed recordings: in the [Record Setup] menu, select [Interval] and then select the appropriate setting.

30.4.5 Changing the Recording Speed In the [Record Setup] menu, select [Paper Speed] and toggle between [25 mm/s] and [50 mm/s]. This setting is

for all recordings containing waveforms.

30.4.6 Clearing Recording Tasks In the [Record Setup] menu, select [Clear All Tasks]. All queued recording tasks are cleared and the current

recording is stopped.

30-4

30.5 Loading Paper

1. Use the latch at the upper right of the recorder door to pull the door open.

2. Insert a new roll into the compartment as shown below.

3. Close the recorder door.

4. Check if paper is loaded correctly and the paper end is feeding from the top.

CAUTION

Use only specified thermal paper. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the recorder’s printhead, the

recorder may be unable to print, or poor print quality may result.

Never pull the recorder paper with force when a recording is in process. Otherwise, it may cause damage to

the recorder.

Do not leave the recorder door open unless you reload paper or remove troubles.

30.6 Removing Paper Jam

If the recorder works incorrectly or produces unusual sounds, check if there is a paper jam first. If a paper jam is detected,

follow this procedure to remove it:

1. Open the recorder door.

2. Take out the paper and tear off the draped part.

3. Reload the paper and close the recorder door.

Paper roll

30-5

30.7 Cleaning the Recorder Printhead

If the recorder has been used for a long time, deposits of paper debris may collect on the printhead compromising the

print quality and shortening the lifetime of the roller. Follow this procedure to clean the printhead:

1. Take measures against the static electricity such as Disposable Wrist Strap for the work.

2. Open the recorder door and take out the paper.

3. Gently wipe around the printhead using cotton swabs dampened with alcohol.

4. After the alcohol has completely been dried, reload the paper and close the recorder door.

CAUTION

Do not use anything that may destroy the thermal element.

Do not add unnecessary force to the thermal head.

30-6

FOR YOUR NOTES

31-1

31 Printing

31.1 Printer

The monitor can output patient reports via a connected printer. So far, the monitor supports the following printer:

HP LaserJet 1505n

HP LaserJet P2035n

HP LaserJet P4015n

The specifications of the reports the monitor prints are:

Paper: A4, Letter

Resolution: 300 dpi

For more details about the printer, see the document accompanying the printer. With the upgrading of products, the

monitor will support more printers and no prior notice will be given. If you have any doubt about the printer you have

purchased, contact our company.

31.2 Connecting a printer

To print the reports or the trend data of a patient, you can choose either:

the local printer

Connect the printer and the patient monitor directly with a network cable, and then start printing what you want,

or

the Central Monitoring System

If your monitor is connected to a central monitoring system, it is recommended to use the central monitoring

system for printing.

31-2

31.3 Setting Up the Printer

To set the printer’s properties, select [Main Menu] [→ Print Setup >>] [→ Printer Setup >>]. In the [Printer

Setup] menu, you can:

Select a connected printer

Select [Printer] and then select a connected printer as the monitor’s printer.

Search for a printer

If your selected printer is not in the list or a new printer is added into the network, you can select the [Search

Printer] to re-search for all printers in the network.

Set up the paper

Select [Paper Size] and toggle between [A4] and [Letter].

31.4 Starting Report Printouts

Reports Contents Procedures

ECG reports ECG waveforms and relevant

parameter values

Select [Main Menu] [→ Print Setup >>] [→ ECG Reports

>>] [→ Print]

Tabular trends Depend on the selected parameter

group, resolution and time period

Select [Main Menu] [→ Print Setup >>] [→ Tabular

Trends Reports >>] [→ Print], or select [Main

Menu] [→ Review >>] [→ Tabular

Trends] [→ Print] [→ Print]

Graphic trends Depend on the selected parameter

group, resolution and time period

Select [Main Menu] [→ Print Setup >>] [→ Graphic

Trends Reports >>] [→ Print], or select [Main

Menu] [→ Review >>] [→ Graphic

Trends] [→ Print] [→ Print]

Arrh. alarm

review

ECG waveforms and relevant

parameter values Select [Print] in [Arrh. Events]

Parameter alarm

review Depend on the selected alarms Select [Main Menu] [→ Review >>] [→ Alarms] [→ Print]

Interpretation of

resting 12-lead

ECG

12-lead ECG waveforms and analysis

results

Select [12-lead Analysis] [→ Print] when a interpretation of

resting 12-lead ECG is completed, or select [Main

Menu] [→ Review >>] [→ 12-lead Analysis] [→ Print]

Realtime waves Depend on the selected waveforms Select [Main Menu] [→ Print Setup >>] [→ Realtime

Reports >>] [→ Print]

31.5 Stopping Reports Printouts

To stop report printouts, select [Main Menu] [→ Print Setup >>] [→ Stop All Reports].

31-3

31.6 Setting Up Reports

31.6.1 Setting Up ECG Reports You can print out ECG reports only under full-screen, half-screen or 12-lead monitoring screen. To set up ECG reports,

select [Main Menu] [→ Print Setup >>] [→ ECG Reports >>].

[Amplitude]: set the amplitude of the ECG waveforms.

[Sweep]: set the wave print speed.

[Auto Interval]: If [Auto Interval] is set to [On], the system will automatically adjust the space between

waveforms to avoid overlapping.

[Gridlines]: choose whether to show gridlines.

[12-Lead Format]: If you select [12×1], 12 waveforms will be printed on a paper from top to bottom. If you

select [6×2], 12 waveforms will be printed from left to right with 6 waveforms on each half part and a rhythm

waveform will be printed at the bottommost. If you select [3×4], 12 waveforms will be printed from left to right

with 3 waveforms on each of the 4 columns and a rhythm waveform will be printed at the bottommost.

31.6.2 Setting Up Tabular Trends Reports To set up tabular trends reports, select [Main Menu] [→ Print Setup >>] [→ Tabular Trends Reports >>].

Start time: You can set a time period whose trend data will be printed out by setting [From] and [Back]. For

example, if you set [From] as 2007-4-2 10:00:00 and [Back] as [2 h], the outputted data will be from 2007-4-2

08:00:00 to 2007-4-2 10:00:00. In addition, the [Back] can be set to either:

[Auto]: If [Report Layout] is set to [Time Oriented], the report will be printed by time. If [Report

Layout] is set to [Parameter Oriented], the report will be printed by parameters.

[All]: If you select [All], all trend data will be printed out. In this case, it is no need to set [From].

[Interval]: choose the resolution of the tabular trends printed on the report.

[Report Layout]: If you select [Time Oriented], the report will be printed by time. If you select [Parameter

Oriented], the report will be printed by parameters.

[Select Parameter >>]: from the popup menu, you can:

[Currently Displayed Trended Parameters]: print the parameter trend data selected from the

[Tabular Trends].

[Standard Parameter Group]: select the standard parameter group for printing.

[Custom]: You can define a parameter group for printing from the parameters displayed in the low part of

the menu.

31.6.3 Setting Up Graphic Trends Reports To set up graphic trends reports, select [Main Menu] [→ Print Setup >>] [→ Graphic Trends Reports >>]. As

setting up graphic trends reports is similar with tabular trends reports, you can refer to the Setting Up Tabular Trend

Reports section for details.

31-4

31.6.4 Setting Up Realtime Reports To set up realtime reports, select [Main Menu] [→ Print Setup >>] [→ Realtime Reports >>].

[Sweep]: set the wave print speed.

[Select Wave >>]: from the popup menu, you can:

[Current]: select the currently displayed waves for printing.

[Select Wave]: select the desired waves for printing.

31.7 End Case Reports

ECG reports, tabular trends reports, graphic trends reports, NIBP review reports and realtime reports can be set as end

case reports. When you discharge a patient, the system will automatically print out all contents that are set as end case

reports.

For example, to set ECG report as end case report:

1. select [Main Menu] [→ Print Setup >>] [→ ECG Report >>].

2. select [End Case Report] [→ Set as End Case Report] and then select [Ok] from the popup dialog box.

3. set as described in the 31.6.1 Setting Up ECG Reports.

31.8 Printer Statuses

31.8.1 Printer Out of Paper When the printer runs out of paper, the print request will not be responded. If there are too many print jobs that are not

responded, a printer error may occur. In these cases, you need to install paper and then re-send the print request. Restart

the printer if necessary.

Therefore, you’d better ensure that there is enough paper in the printer before sending a print request.

31.8.2 Printer Status Messages Printer Status Message Possible causes and suggested action

Printer unavailable The selected printer is not available. Check if the printer is switched on or correctly

connected or installed with paper.

32-1

32 Other Functions

32.1 Marking Events

During patient monitoring, some events may exert effects on the patient and as a result change the waveforms or

numerics displayed on the monitor. To help analysing the waveforms or numerics at that time, you can mark these

events.

Select [Main Menu] [→ Mark Event >>]. In the popup menu, you can select the waves to be stored when a manual

event is triggered. You can select [Trigger Manual Event] from the [Mark Event] menu or the [Manual Event]

QuickKey to trigger a manual event and store it at the same time.

When you are reviewing graphic trends, tabular trends or full-disclosure waveforms, the manual event symbol is

displayed at the time the event is triggered.

32.2 Privacy Mode

Privacy mode is only available when a patient who is admitted at a patient monitor is also monitored by the central

station.

To activate the privacy mode:

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Screen Setup >>].

2. Select [Privacy Mode] to activate the privacy mode.

The patient monitor behaves as follows as soon as the privacy mode is activated:

The screen turns blank and [Under monitoring. Press any key to exit the privacy mode.] is displayed.

Monitoring and data storing continue but patient data is only visible at the central station.

Alarms can still be triggered. But all audible alarms are suppressed and the alarm light is deactivated at the

patient monitor.

All system sounds are suppressed, including heart beat tone, pulse tone, all prompt tones, etc.

WARNING

During privacy mode, all audible alarms are suppressed and the alarm light is deactivated at the patient

monitor. Alarms sound only at the central station.

32-2

To cancel the privacy mode, proceed as follows:

Press any key.

The patient monitor exits the privacy mode automatically in one of the following situations:

The patient monitor disconnects from central station.

The alarm of [Battery Too Low] and [The monitor will quit soon. Please use AC power.] message

appear.

32.3 Night Mode

To avoid disturbing the patient, night mode may be used.

To activate the night mode:

1. Select the [Night Mode] QuickKey or [Main Menu] [→ Screen Setup >>]→[Night Mode >>].

2. In the pop-up menu, set the desired brightness, alarm volume, QRS volume, key volume, NIBP end tone, or whether

to stop NIBP measurement or not. When [Stop NIBP] is selected, all the NIBP measurements terminate after

entering the night mode.

3. Select the [Enter Night Mode] button.

To cancel the night mode:

1. Select the [Night Mode] QuickKey or [Main Menu] [→ Screen Setup >>]→[Night Mode >>].

2. Select [Ok] in the popup.

WARNING

Before entering night mode, confirm the settings of brightness, alarm volume, QRS volume, and key

volume. Pay attention to the potential risk when the setting value is a bit low.

32.4 Analog Output

The patient monitor provides analog output signals to accessory equipment via the Micro-D connector on the rear of

the monitor. To obtain analog output signals, connect the accessory equipment such as an oscillograph, etc. to the

monitor and then follow this procedure:

1. Select [Main Menu] then [Analog Output Setup>>].

2. Select [Analog Out.] and then select [On].

NOTE

The analog output feature is seldom applied in clinical applications. You can contact your service

personnel for more details.

32-3

32.5 Transferring Data

You can transfer the patient data saved in the monitor to a PC via a crossover network cable or CF storage card, or within

a LAN for data management, review or print.

32.5.1 Data Export System You must install the data export system on the intended PC before performing the data transfer operation. Refer to the

document accompanying the installation CD-ROM for installation instructions.

The data transfer feature supports patient management, data review, data format conversion, print, etc. in addition to

data transfer. Refer to the help file of the system software for more details.

32.5.2 Transferring Data by Different Means

NOTE

Never enter the data transfer mode when the patient monitor is in normal operation or performs

monitoring. You must re-start the patient monitor to exit the data transfer mode.

Transfer data via a crossover network cable

Before transferring data using a crossover network cable, do as follows:

1. Connect one end of the crossover network cable to the patient monitor and the other end to the PC.

2. Set the IP address of the PC. This IP address must be in the same network segment with that of the patient monitor.

3. Make sure that the data export system is active on the PC.

Then, follow this procedure to transfer data:

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Patient Data >>] [→ Transfer Data].

2. Select [Yes] from the popup message box.

3. Input the IP address already set on the PC.

4. Select [Start] to start transferring data.

Transfer data within a LAN

Before transferring data within a LAN, do as follows:

1. Connect the patient monitor and the intended PC into the same LAN and acquire the PC’s IP address.

2. Make sure that the data export system is active on the PC.

Follow the same procedure as via a crossover network cable to transfer data.

32-4

Transfer data via a CF storage card

1. Power off the patient monitor and remove the CF storage card from it. Refer to the Basic Operations section for

details.

2. Run the data export system on the PC.

3. Insert the CF storage card into the card reader that connects the PC.

4. Perform the data transfer operation following the help file of the system software.

32.6 Nurse Call

The patient monitor also provides nurse call signals to a nurse call system connected to the monitor via the Nurse Call

connector. To obtain nurse call signals, connect a nurse call system to the monitor and then follow this procedure:

1. Select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance >>] [→ User Maintenance >>] enter the required password.→

2. Select [Others >>] to access the [Others] menu.

3. Select [Nurse Call Setup >>] to change the nurse call settings as follows:

Select [Signal Type] and toggle between [Pulse] and [Continuous].

[Pulse]: the nurse call signals are pulse signals and each pulse lasts 1 second. When multiple alarms occur

simultaneously, only one pulse signal is outputted. If an alarm occurs but the previous one is not cleared yet,

a new pulse signal will also be outputted.

[Continuous]: the nurse call signal lasts until the alarm ends, i.e. the duration of a nurse call signal equals

to that of the alarm condition.

Select [Contact Type] and toggle between [Normally Open] and [Normally Closed].

[Normally Open]: select if your hospital’s nurse call relay contact is normally open.

[Normally Closed]: select if your hospital’s nurse call relay contact is normally closed.

Select [Alm Lev] and set the alarm level for nurse call-triggering alarms.

Select [Alarm Cat.] and then select the category to which the nurse call-triggering alarms belong.

Alarm conditions are indicated to nurses only when:

The nurse call system is enabled,

An alarm that meets your preset requirements occurs, and

The monitor is not in the alarm paused or silence status.

NOTE

If no setting is selected from [Alm Lev] or [Alarm Cat.], no nurse call signal will be triggered whatever

alarms occur.

WARNING

Do not rely exclusively on the nurse call system for alarm notification. Remember that the most reliable

alarm notification combines audible and visual alarm indications with the patient’s clinical condition.

32-5

32.7 Remote Display

This monitor enables remote display. It allows remote displays to be connected to the bedside monitor through network.

The information coming from the monitor will be displayed on the remote display through the remote display driver so

that clinical professionals can conveniently observe the patient’s conditions from distance.

For details about remote display features, refer to the instructions for use accompanying the remote display driver.

NOTE

The contents displayed on the remote display are for convenient observance only and cannot be used for

diagnostic interpretation.

The user cannot operate the monitor through the remote display driver, namely, any operations

performed through the remote display driver will not affect the monitor you observe.

32.8 Built-in PC (only applicable to BeneView T8 patient monitor)

This monitor can be configured with Windows operating system. You can install and use the required PC application

program on the monitor through Windows operating system.

32.8.1 Configuring Application Program ShortCuts Select [CIS View] and PC ShortCuts area is displayed. Up to five PC application program ShortCuts can be displayed in

this area. You can select from these ShortCuts to use the necessary software. To configure the ShortCuts,

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance]→[User Maintenance]→enter the required password→[CIS

Maintenance].

2. To start the configuration tool, click “Config” on the desk or select [Start]→[My Computer]in the lower left

corner of the desk. Run “Config.exe” under the path “C:\Program Files\Mindray”.

32-6

Note

The task bar is hidden automatically and is displayed when the mouse is placed at the bottom of the

screen.

3. Select [Add] and select the application program to be added from the accessed dialog box. Then select [Open]to

complete adding the application program.

You can select whether to display ShortCuts. [Show ShortCut] is ticked by default. If not ticked, the application

program ShortCuts will not be displayed in the CIS ShortCuts area. Not selecting the checkbox usually occurs when

application program is started up indirectly. In this case, add both startup program and started program into [T8 CIS

shortcut configuration tool] and do not tick the started program. For example, if you want to start “iexplore.exe”

application program to access“www.mindray.com” through “IE.bat” batch file, write parameters into the batch file. Then

add “IE.bat” and “iexplore.exe” application programs into [T8 CIS shortcut configuration tool] and set

“iexplore.exe” to unticked status. Finally, save the setting and exit.

4. Select [Up] or [Down] to change the display order of ShortCuts.

5. Select the cell under [ShortCut Name] to change the name of application program.

6. For the application program that can be started up together with parameter, select the cell under [Command] to

configure a parameter of the application program. For example, if you add application program “iexplore.exe” into

[T8 CIS shortcut configuration tool], set [Command] to “www.mindray.com”. Then in the PC ShortCuts

area, select the ShortCut of “iexplore.exe” and the system enters the website “www.mindray.com”.

7. Select [Save&Exit] to finish ShortCut configuration.

Push [Main Menu] key on the monitor front panel to return to the main screen.

PC ShortCuts Area

32-7

32.8.2 Using PC Software

1. Select [Main Menu] and select [CIS View]. Or, select [CIS View] on the main screen directly. The ShortCuts of

the PC software with which your monitor is configured will be displayed.

2. Select the ShortCut corresponding to the PC software you want to use to access the corresponding software screen.

Only one PC software screen can be accessed at a time.

PC ShortCut area is automatically hidden while the PC software is running. It is automatically displayed when PC

software display is minimized or turned off. You can adjust the size or display position of the window of application

program via mouse.

WARNING

All the waveforms and parameters on the monitor are hidden when PC software display is maximized. Pay

attention to the risk arising from this operation.

Exit PC software or minimize PC software display when PC software is not in use.

To hide PC software screen,

Click button in the upper right corner of the software screen.

Click other area on the monitor screen.

Push [Main Menu] key or [Freeze] key on the monitor front panel.

32.8.3 Switching over Users The built-in PC supports two users. You can switch over between the two users through logout. The system default user

is “CIS” and the login password is “MINDRAY”. You can switch over the user to “Administrator” if necessary and the login

password is “cisadmin”.

32.8.4 Remote Login If the monitor is networked via CIS connector, you can remotely log in to the monitor’s built-in Windows system through

the PC within the LAN to view the program running on the monitor and to carry out remote maintenance. Before exiting

remote login, you need to restart the monitor’s Windows system. To restart the monitor’s Windows system, select [Start]

→[Run] on the remote PC and then enter “Shutdown –f –r –t 0”.

32-8

32.8.5 Using McAfee Solidifier McAfee Solidifier is the default installation software of the built-in PC Windows system. McAfee Solidifier solidifies the

executable files of the system, dynamic link library and batch files by way of dynamic white list. Executable files not

included in the white list are held back so as to protect the system. You can update the application program or monitor

Windows system via McAfee Solidifier.

Follow these steps to update an application program.

1. Enter update status

Before adding, updating or deleting an application program of the built-in PC, let McAfee Solidifier enter update status

first. In this case, select “McAfee Solidifier” on the desk to enter command line dialog box and then enter command

“sadmin bu”.

Note

Before updating an application program, pay attention to anti-virus measures such as network anti-virus

strategy and USB device virus scanning.

2. Enter monitor status

After adding, updating or deleting an application program of the built-in PC, let McAfee Solidifier enter monitor status.

In this case, select “McAfee Solidifier” on the desk to enter command line dialog box and then enter command “sadmin

eu”.

Other commonly used commands of McAfee Solidifier include:

sadmin help: used to view the commonly used commands;

sadmin status: used to view the status of McAfee.

32.9 Wireless Network

The patient monitors, each equipped with a wireless network card, constitute a wireless network via AP (access point).

The designated service engineer or personnel shall be responsible for installing and configuring the wireless network for

you and perform relative performance tests as well.

The radio device used in the monitor is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of

Directive 1999/5/EC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive).

NOTE

The design, installation, restruction and maintenance of the wireless network’s distribution shall be

performed by authorized service personnel of our company.

The existence of obstacles (such as wall) will exert impact on data transferring or even cause network

interruption.

The Central Monitoring System is capable of connecting up to 16 bedside monitors via the wireless

network.

32-9

32.10 Using DVI-VGA Adapter Box

The patient monitor can be connected with a VGA device via a DVI-VGA adapter box.

1. Connect the patient monitor’s DVI output with DVI-VGA adapter box’s DVI input.

2. Connect the DVI-VGA adapter box’s VGA output with VGA device.

32-10

FOR YOUR NOTES

33-1

33 Batteries

33.1 Overview

The monitor is designed to operate on one or two Mindray LI23S002A rechargeable Lithium-ion battery whenever AC

power supply is interrupted. The battery is charged whenever the patient monitor is connected to an AC power source

regardless of whether or not the patient monitor is currently on. Since no external battery charger is supplied, the

battery can only be charged inside the monitor so far. Whenever the AC power is interrupted during patient monitoring,

the patient monitor will automatically run power from the internal batteries.

On-screen battery symbols indicate the battery status as follows:

Indicates that batteries work correctly. The solid portion represents the current charge level of the batteries

in proportion to its maximum charge level.

Indicates that the batteries have low charge level and need to be charged.

Indicates that the batteries are almost depleted and need to be charged immediately.

Indicates that no batteries are installed or only one battery is installed to the BeneView T8 monitor.

The capacity of the internal battery is limited. If the battery capacity is too low, a technical alarm will be triggered and

the [Battery Too Low] message displayed. At this moment, apply AC power to the patient monitor. Otherwise, the

patient monitor will power off automatically before the battery is completely depleted.

NOTE

Take out the battery before the monitor is transported or will not be used for a long time.

Use AC power supply when CIS is in use.

WARNING

Keep the battery out of children’s reach.

Use only specified batteries.

33-2

33.2 Installing or Replacing a Battery

BeneView T5

When the patient monitor uses two battery packs, one battery pack can be easily exchanged while the patient monitor

operates from the other. If the patient monitor uses one battery pack, you should insert a new battery pack before the

old one depletes.

To install or replace a battery, follow this procedure:

1. Push down the button on the battery door and then slide backward as indicated to open the battery door.

2. Push aside the latch latch fixing the battery and then remove the battery.

3. Place the new battery into the slot with its face up and its contact point inward.

4. If necessary, replace the other battery following the steps above.

5. Restore the latch to the original position and close the battery door.

NOTE

Using two batteries are recommended when SMR is connected.

33-3

BeneView T8

The patient monitor uses two battery packs. If the two batteries have very different charge capacity, the message [Diff.

Battery Voltages] is displayed. In this case, apply AC power to the patient monitor until the two batteries have

approximately equal charge capacity or are both fully charged. You cannot use them before they have approximately

equal charge capacity or are fully charged. In situations where no patient monitoring is performed or interrupting the

patient monitoring is permitted, you can replace the batteries.

The patient monitor uses two batteries. You can install the batteries by following this procedure:

1. Turn off the patient monitor and disconnect the power cord and other cables.

2. Place the patient monitor with its face up.

3. Open the battery compartment door.

4. Place the batteries into the slots per the “+” and “-” indications.

5. Close the battery door and place the patient monitor upright.

33.3 Conditioning a Battery

A battery needs at least two conditioning cycles when it is put into use for the first time. A battery conditioning cycle is

one complete, uninterrupted charge of the battery, followed by an uninterrupted discharge of the battery. Batteries

should be conditioned regularly to maintain their useful life. Condition the batteries once when they are used or stored

for two months, or when their run time becomes noticeably shorter.

To condition a battery, follow this procedure:

1. Disconnect the patient monitor from the patient and stop all monitoring and measuring procedures.

2. Insert the battery in need of conditioning into the battery slots of the patient monitor.

3. Apply AC power to the patient monitor and allow the battery to charge uninterruptedly for above 6 hours.

4. Remove AC power and allow the patient monitor to run from the battery until it shuts off.

5. Apply AC power again to the patient monitor and allow the battery to charge uninterruptedly for above 6 hours.

6. This battery is now conditioned and the patient monitor can be returned to service.

33-4

33.4 Checking a Battery

The performance of a rechargeable battery may deteriorate over time. To check the performance of a battery, follow this

procedure:

1. Disconnect the patient monitor from the patient and stop all monitoring and measuring procedures.

2. Apply AC power to the patient monitor and allow the battery to charge uninterruptedly for above 6 hours.

3. Remove AC power and allow the patient monitor to run from the battery until it shuts off.

4. The operating time of the battery reflects its performance directly.

If the operating time of a battery is noticeably shorter than that stated in the specifications, replace the battery or

contact your service personnel.

NOTE

Life expectancy of a battery depends on how frequent and how long it is used. For a properly maintained

and stored lithium-ion battery, its life expectancy is about 3 years. For more aggressive use models, life

expectancy can be less. We recommend replacing lithium-ion batteries every 3 years.

The operating time depends on the configuration and operation. For example, monitoring NIBP repeatedly

will also shorten the operating time of the batteries.

33.5 Recycling a Battery

When a battery has visual signs of damage, or no longer holds a charge, it should be replaced. Remove the old battery

from the patient monitor and recycle it properly. To dispose of a battery, follow local laws for proper disposal.

WARNING

Do not disassemble batteries, or put them into fire, or cause them to short circuit. They may ignite,

explode, or leak, causing personal injury.

34-1

34 Care and Cleaning

Use only the substances approved by us and methods listed in this chapter to clean or disinfect your equipment.

Warranty does not cover damage caused by unapproved substances or methods.

We make no claims regarding the efficacy of the listed chemicals or methods as a means for controlling infection. For the

method to control infection, consult your hospital’s Infection Control Officer or Epidemiologist.

In this chapter we only describe cleaning and disinfection of the main unit. For the cleaning and disinfection of other

reusable accessories, refer to instructions for use of corresponding accessories.

34.1 General Points

Keep you equipment and accessories free of dust and dirt. To avoid damage to the equipment, follow these rules:

Always dilute according the manufacturer’s instructions or use lowest possible concentration.

Do not immerse part of the equipment into liquid.

Do not pour liquid onto the equipment or accessories.

Do not allow liquid to enter the case.

Never use abrasive materials (such as steel wool or silver polish), or erosive cleaners (such as acetone or

acetone-based cleaners).

WARNING

Be sure to shut down the system and disconnect all power cables from the outlets before cleaning the

equipment.

CAUTION

If you spill liquid on the equipment or accessories, contact us or your service personnel.

NOTE

To clean or disinfect reusable accessories, refer to the instructions delivered with the accessories.

34-2

34.2 Cleaning

Your equipment should be cleaned on a regular basis. If there is heavy pollution or lots of dust and sand in your place,

the equipment should be cleaned more frequently. Before cleaning the equipment, consult your hospital’s regulations

for cleaning the equipment.

Recommended cleaning agents are:

sodium hypochlorite bleach (diluted)

Hydrogen peroxide (3%)

Ethanol (70%)

Isopropanol (70%)

To clean your equipment, follow these rules:

1. Shut down the patient monitor and disconnect it from the power line.

2. Clean the display screen using a soft, clean cloth dampened with a glass cleaner.

3. Clean the exterior surface of the equipment using a soft cloth dampened with the cleaner.

4. Wipe off all the cleaning solution with a dry cloth after cleaning if necessary.

5. Dry your equipment in a ventilated, cool place.

34.3 Disinfecting

Disinfection may cause damage to the equipment and is therefore not recommended for this patient monitor unless

otherwise indicated in your hospital’s servicing schedule. Cleaning equipment before disinfecting is recommended.

The recommended disinfectants include: ethanol 70%, isopropanol 70%, Perform® classic concentrate OXY (KHSO4

solution).

CAUTION

Never use EtO or formaldehyde for disinfection.

35-1

35 Maintenance

WARNING

Failure on the part of the responsible individual hospital or institution employing the use of this

equipment to implement a satisfactory maintenance schedule may cause undue equipment failure and

possible health hazards.

The safety checks or maintenance involving any disassembly of the equipment should be performed by

professional servicing personnel. Otherwise, undue equipment failure and possible health hazards could

result.

If you discover a problem with any of the equipment, contact your service personnel or us.

35.1 Safety Checks

Before every use, after your patient monitor has been used for 6 to 12 months, or whenever your patient monitor is

repaired or upgraded, a thorough inspection should be performed by qualified service personnel to ensure the

reliability.

Follow these guidelines when inspecting the equipment:

Make sure that the environment and power supply meet the requirements.

Inspect the equipment and its accessories for mechanical damage.

Inspect all power cords for damage, and make sure that their insulation is in good condition.

Make sure that only specified accessories are applied.

Inspect if the alarm system functions correctly.

Make sure that the recorder functions correctly and the recorder paper meets the requirements.

Make sure that the batteries meet the performance requirements.

Make sure that the patient monitor is in good working condition.

Make sure that the grounding resistance and leakage current meet the requirement.

In case of any damage or abnormity, do not use the patient monitor. Contact the hospital’s biomedical engineers or your

service personnel immediately.

35-2

35.2 Maintenance and Testing Schedule

The following maintenance and tests, except for visual inspection, power on test, touchscreen calibration, and battery

check, shall be carried out by the service personnel only. Contact your service personnel if any maintenance is required.

Make sure to clean and disinfect the equipment before any test and maintenance.

Check/Maintenance Item Recommanded Frequency

Preventative Maintenance Tests

Visual inspection 1. When first installed or reinstalled.

Pressure check

Leakage test NIBP test

Calibration

Leakage test

Performance test Sidestream and

Microstream CO2 tests Calibration

Leakage test

Performance test AG tests

Calibration

1. If the user suspects that the measurement is incorrect.

2. Following any repairs or replacement of relevant module.

3. At least once a year.

Performance Tests

Performance test ECG test and

calibration Calibration

Resp performance test

SpO2 test

Pressure check

Leakage test NIBP test and

calibration

Calibration

Temp test

Performance test IBP test and

calibration Pressure calibration

C.O. test

Mainstream CO2 test and calibration

Leakage test

Performance test

Sidestream and

Microstream CO2 tests

and calibration Calibration

AG test Leakage test

1. If the user suspects that the measurement is incorrect.

2. Following any repairs or replacement of relevant module.

3. At least once every two years.

Note: At least once a year is recommended for NIBP, CO2 and AG.

35-3

Check/Maintenance Item Recommanded Frequency

Performance test

Calibration

ICG test

BIS test

RM test

Interconnecting function CCO/SvO2 test

Output calibration

PiCCO test

ScvO2 test

Nurse call relay performance test

Analog output performance test

If the user suspects that the analog output does not work well.

Electrical Safety Tests

Electrical safety tests At least once every two years.

Other Tests

Power on test

1. When first installed or reinstalled.

2. Following any maintenance or the replacement of any main unit

parts.

Touchscreen calibration 1. When the touchscreen appears abnormal.

2. After the touchscreen is replaced.

Recorder check Following any repair or replacement of the recorder.

Network print test 1. When first installed.

2. Whenever the printer is serviced or replaced.

Device integration check 1. When first installed.

2. Following any repair or replacement of the external device.

Functionality test 1. When first installed.

2. Whenever a battery is replaced. Battery check

Performance test Once a year or if the battery run time reduced significantly.

35-4

35.3 Checking Monitor and Module Information

To view the information about system start time, selftest, etc., select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance

>>] [→ Monitor Information >>]. You can print out the information for the convenience of troubleshooting. The

information will not be saved during shut down.

You can also view the information about the monitor configuration and system software version by selecting [Main

Menu] [→ Maintenance >>] [→ Software Version >>].

35.4 Calibrating ECG

The ECG signal may be inaccurate due to hardware or software problems. As a result, the ECG wave amplitude becomes

greater or smaller. In that case, you need to calibrate the ECG module.

1. Select the ECG parameter window or waveform area→[Filter]→[Diagnostic].

2. Select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance >>] [→ Calibrate ECG]. A square wave appears on the screen and the

message [ECG Calibrating] is displayed.

3. Compare the amplitude of the square wave with the wave scale. The difference should be within 5%.

4. After the calibration is completed, select [Stop Calibrating ECG]

You can print out the square wave and wave scale and then measure the difference between them if necessary. If the

difference exceeds 5%, contact your service personnel.

35.5 NIBP Leakage Test

The NIBP leakage test checks the integrity of the system and of the valve. It is required at least once every two years or

when you doubt the measured NIBP. If the test failed, corresponding prompt messages will be given. If no message is

displayed, it means no leakage is detected.

Tools required:

An adult cuff

An air tubing

A correct sized cylinder

Follow this procedure to perform the leakage test:

1. Set the patient category to [Adu].

2. Connect the cuff to the NIBP connector on the monitor.

3. Wrap the cuff around the cylinder as shown below.

35-5

4. Select [Main Menu] [→ Maintenance >>] [→ NIBP Leakage Test]. The NIBP display shows [Leakage

Testing…].

5. After about 20 seconds, the monitor will automatically deflate. This means the test is completed.

6. If the message [NIBP Pneumatic Leak] is displayed, it indicates that the NIBP airway may have leakages. Check

the tubing and connections for leakages. If you ensure that the tubing and connections are all correct, perform a

leakage test again.

If the problem persists, contact your service personnel.

NOTE

The leakage test is intended for use to simply determine whether there are leakages in the NIBP airway. It

is not the same as that specified in the EN 1060-3 standard.

35.6 NIBP Accuracy Test

The NIBP accuracy test is required at least once every two years or when you doubt the measured NIBP.

Tools required:

T-piece connector

Approprating tubing

Balloon pump

Metal Vessel (volume 500±25 ml)

Reference manometer (calibrated with accuracy higher than 1 mmHg)

Monitor

Connector for

NIBP cuff

Air tubing

Cylinder

Cuff

35-6

Follow this procedure to perform the accuracy test:

1. Connect the equipment as shown.

2. Before inflation, the reading of the manometer should be 0. If not, disconnect the airway and reconnect it until the

readings is 0.

3. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[NIBP Accuracy Test].

4. Compare the manometer values with the displayed values. The difference between the manometer and displayed

values should be no greater than 3 mmHg.

5. Raise the pressure in the metal vessel to 50 mmHg with the balloon pump. Repeat step 3 and 4.

6. Raise the pressure in the metal vessel to 200 mmHg with the balloon pump. Repeat step 3 and 4.

If the difference between the manometer and displayed values is greater than 3 mmHg, contact your service personnel.

35.7 Calibrating NIBP

NIBP is not user-calibrated. Cuff-pressure transducers must be verified and calibrated once every two years by a qualified

service professional. Contact your service personnel when a calibration is necessary.

35.8 Calibrating CO2

For sidestream and microstream CO2 modules, a calibration is needed every year or when the measured values have a

great deviation. For maintream CO2 module, no calibration is needed. Calibration for sidestream CO2 module can be

performed only when the sidestream module enters the full accuracy mode.

Tools required:

A steel gas cylinder with 6±0.05% CO2 and balance gas N2

T-shape connector

Tubing

Monitor

Connector for

NIBP cuff

Manometer Tubing

Balloon pump Metal vessel

35-7

Follow this procedure to perform a calibration:

1. Make sure that the sidestream or microstream CO2 module has been warmed up or started up.

2. Check the airway for leakage and perform a leakage test as well to make sure the airway has no leakage.

3. Select [Main Menu]→ [Maintenance >>]→ [User Maintenance >>]→ enter the required password→

[Maintain CO2 >>]→ [Calibrate CO2 >>].

4. In the [Calibrate CO2] menu, select [Zero].

5. After the zero calibration is finished successfully, connect the equipment as follows:

6. Turn on and adjust the relief valve to make the flowmeter reads within 10-50mL/min and keeps stable as well.

7. In the [Calibrate CO2] menu, enter the vented CO2 concentration in the [CO2] field.

8. In the [Calibrate CO2] menu, the measured CO2 concentration is displayed. After the measured CO2

concentration becomes stable, select [Calibrate CO2] to calibrate the CO2 module.

9. If the calibration is finished successfully, the message [Calibration Completed!] is displayed in the [Calibrate

CO2] menu. If the calibration failed, the message [Calibration Failed!] is displayed. In this case, perform another

calibration.

Flowmeter

Tubing

T-shape connector Monitor

Relief valve

Gas cylinder

35-8

35.9 Calibrating AG

Calibrate the AG module every year or when the measured value has a great deviation.

Tools required:

Gas bottle, with a certain standard gas or mixture gas. Gas concentration should meet the following requirements:

AA>1.5%, CO2>1.5%, N2O>40%, O2>40%, of which AA represents an anesthetic agent. a/c≤0.01 (a is the gas

absolute concentration accuracy; c is the gas concentration)

T-shape connector

Tubing

Follow this procedure to perform a calibration:

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required

password→[Calibrate AG >>].

2. Check the airway and make sure that there are no occlusions or leaks.

Vent the tubing to the air and check if the [Current FlowRate] and [Set FlowRate] are approximately

the same. If the deviation is great, it indicates that there is an occlusion in the tubing. Check the tubing for

an occlusion.

Perform a leakage test to make sure that the airway has no leakage.

3. Connect the test system as follows:

4. Open the relief valve and vent a certain standard gas or gas mixture. Adjust the relief valve to make the flowmeter

reads within 10-50mL/min and keeps stable as well.

5. In the [Calibrate AG] menu, the concentration and flowrate of each measured gas are displayed

If the difference between the measured gas concentration and the actual one is very small, a calibration is

not needed.

If the difference is great, you should perform a calibration. Select [Calibrate >>] to enter the calibrate

menu.

6. Enter the vented gas concentration. If you use only one gas for calibration, set other gases’ concentration to 0.

7. Select [Calibrate] to start calibration.

Flowmeter

Tubing

T-shape connector Monitor Relief valve

Gas cylinder

35-9

8. If the calibration is finished successfully, the message [Calibration Completed!] is displayed. If the calibration

failed, the message [Calibration Failed!] is displayed. Perform another calibration.

CAUTION

If the O2 module has been transported for long distance, calibrate it when installing the monitor.

35.10 Calibrating the Touchscreen

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>] enter the required password→ →[Cal.

Touchscreen].

2. will, in turn, appear at different positions of the screen.

3. Select each as it appears on the screen.

4. After the calibration is completed, the message [Screen Calibration Completed!] is displayed. Select [Ok] to

confirm the completion of the calibration.

35.11 Electrical Safty Tests

Refer to E Electrical Safty Inspection.

35.12 Setting up IP Address

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>]→[User Maintenance >>]→enter the required password and

then select [Network Setup >>] from the popup menu.

2. If your monitor is equipped with a wireless AP, you can set [Network Type] to [WLAN] in the network setup

menu. Otherwise, the default setting is [LAN].

3. Set [IP Address].

If the patient monitor is connected to a CMS, its IP address should be set up. The user should not change the patient

monitor’s IP address randomly. If you want to know details about IP address setup, contact the technical personnel in

charge of the CMS.

35-10

35.13 Entering/Exiting Demo Mode

To enter the Demo mode:

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>].

2. Select [Demo >>]. Enter the required password and then select [Ok].

To exit the Demo mode:

1. Select [Main Menu]→[Maintenance >>].

2. Select [Exit Demo] and then select [Ok].

3. The patient monitor exits the Demo mode.

WARNING

The Demo mode is for demonstration purpose only. To avoid that the simulated data are mistaken for the

monitored patient’s data, you must not change into Demo mode during monitoring. Otherwise, improper

patient monitoring and delayed treatment could result.

36-1

36 Accessories

WARNING

Use accessories specified in this chapter. Using other accessories may cause damage to the patient monitor

or not meet the claimed specifications.

Single-use accessories are not designed to be reused. Reuse may cause a risk of contamination and affect

the measurement accuracy.

Check the accessories and their packages for any sign of damage. Do not use them if any damage is

detected.

36.1 ECG Accessories

ECG Electrodes

Model Quantity Patient Category Part No.

210 10 pieces Adult 0010-10-12304

2245 50 pieces Pediatric 9000-10-07469

2258-3 3 pieces Neonate 900E-10-04880

12-Pin Trunk Cables

Leadwire

supported Compatible with Type Patient Category Part No.

3-leadwire AHA, IEC Defibrillator-proof 0010-30-42720

3-leadwire AHA, IEC ESU-proof Pediatric, neonate

0010-30-42724

3/5-leadwire AHA, IEC Defibrillator-proof 0010-30-42719

3/5-leadwire AHA, IEC ESU-proof 0010-30-42723

10-leadwire AHA Defibrillator-proof 0010-30-42721

10-leadwire IEC Defibrillator-proof

Adult, pediatric

0010-30-42722

36-2

Cable Sets

3-Electrode Cable Sets

Type Compatible with Model Patient Category Part No. Length Remark

EL6304A Adult, pediatric 0010-30-42732 1m Long IEC

EL6306A Neonate 0010-30-42897 1m Long

EL6303A Adult, pediatric 0010-30-42731 1m Long Clip

AHA EL6305A Neonate 0010-30-42896 1m Long

IEC EL6302B Adult, pediatric 0010-30-42733 1m Long Snap

AHA EL6301B Adult, pediatric 0010-30-42734 1m Long

5-Electrode Cable Sets

Type Compatible with Model Patient

Category Part No. Length Remark

EL6502A 0010-30-42728 0.6m / IEC

EL6504A 0010-30-42730 1m to 1.4m Long

EL6501A 0010-30-42727 0.6m / Clip

AHA EL6503A 0010-30-42729 1m to 1.4m Long

IEC

EL6502B

0010-30-42736

1.4m for F

and N; 1m for

others

Long

Snap

AHA

EL6501B

Adult,

pediatric

0010-30-42735

1.4m for RL

and LL; 1m

for others

Long

10-Electrode Cable Sets

Type Compatible

with Model

Patient

Category Part No. Length Remark

EL6802A 0010-30-42903 0.8m Limb IEC

EL6804A 0010-30-42905 0.6m Chest

EL6801A 0010-30-42902 0.8m Limb Clip

AHA EL6803A

Adult,

pediatric

0010-30-42904 0.6m Chest

EL6802B 0010-30-42907 0.8m Limb IEC

EL6804B 0010-30-42909 0.6m Chest

EL6801B 0010-30-42906 0.8m Limb Snap

AHA EL6803B

Adult,

pediatric

0010-30-42908 0.6m Chest

36-3

36.2 SpO2 Accessories

Extension Cable

Module type Remarks Part No.

Mindray SpO2 Module / 0010-20-42710

8 pins, purple connector 040-000332-00 Masimo SpO2 Module

7 pins, white connector 0010-30-42738

Nellcor SpO2 Module 0010-20-42712

SpO2 Sensors

The SpO2 sensor material that patients or other staff will come into contact with have undertaken the bio-compatibility

test and is verified to be in compliance with ISO 10993-1.

Mindray SpO2 Module

Type Model Patient Category Part No.

MAX-A Adult (>30Kg) 0010-10-12202

MAX-P Pediatric (10 to 50Kg) 0010-10-12203

MAX-I Infant (3 to 20Kg) 0010-10-12204 Disposable

MAX-N Neonate (<3Kg), Adult (>40Kg) 0010-10-12205

520A Adult 520A-30-64101

520P Pediatric 520P-30-64201

520I Infant 520I-30-64301

Single patient

use

520N Neonate 520N-30-64401

DS-100A Adult 9000-10-05161

OXI-P/I Pediatric, infant 9000-10-07308

OXI-A/N Adult, neonate 9000-10-07336

518B Adult, pediatric, neonate (Multi-sites) 518B-30-72107

512E 512E-30-90390

512F Adult (Finger type)

512F-30-28263

512G 512G-30-90607

Reusable

512H Pediatric (Finger type)

512H-30-79061

Masimo SpO2 Module

Type Model Patient Category Part No.

LNCS-NeoPt-L Pediatric, neonate 0010-10-42626

LNCS-Neo-L Neonate 0010-10-42627

LNCS-Inf-L Infant 0010-10-42628

LNCS-Pdt Pediatric 0010-10-42629

Disposable

LNCS-Adt Adult 0010-10-42630

LNCS DC-I Adult 0010-10-42600

LNCS-DCIP Pediatric 0010-10-42634 Reusable

LNCS YI Adult, pediatric, neonate 0010-10-43016

36-4

Nellcor SpO2 Module

Type Model Patient Category Part No.

MAX-A Adult (>30Kg) 0010-10-12202

MAX-P Pediatric (10 to 50Kg) 0010-10-12203

MAX-I Infant (3 to 20Kg) 0010-10-12204 Disposable

MAX-N Neonate (<3Kg), Adult (>40Kg) 0010-10-12205

DS-100A Adult 9000-10-05161

OXI-P/I Pediatric, infant 9000-10-07308 Reusable

OXI-A/N Adult, neonate 9000-10-07336

Wavelength emiited by the sensors intended for Mindray SpO2 module: 512D: red right: 660 nm, infrared light:

940 nm; other SpO2 sensors: red right: 660 nm, infrared light: 905 nm.

Wavelength emitted by the sensors intended for Masimo SpO2 module: red light: 660 nm, infrared light: 940 nm.

Wavelength emitted by the sensors intended for Nellcor SpO2 module: red light: 660 nm, infrared light: 890 nm.

The maximum photic output consumption of the sensor is less than 18 mW.

The information about the wavelength range and maximum photic output consumption can be especially useful to

clinicians, for example, clinicians performing photodynamic therapy.

36.3 NIBP Accessories

Tubing

Type Patient Category Part No.

Adult, pediatric 6200-30-09688 Reusable

Neonate 6200-30-11560

Reusable Cuff

Model Patient

Category

Measurement

Site Limb Circumference (cm)

Bladder Width

(cm) Part No.

CM1201 Infant 10 to 19 9.2 0010-30-12157

CM1202 Pediatric 18 to 26 12.2 0010-30-12158

CM1203 Adult 24 to 35 15.1 0010-30-12159

CM1204 Large adult

Arm

33 to 47 18.3 0010-30-12160

CM1205 Thigh Thigh 46 to 66 22.5 0010-30-12161

CM1300 Small infant 7 to 13 5.8 040-000968-00

CM1301 Infant 10 to 19 9.2 040-000973-00

CM1302 Pediatric 18 to 26 12.2 040-000978-00

CM1303 Adult 24 to 35 15.1 040-000983-00

CM1304 Large adult

Arm

33 to 47 18.3 040-000988-00

CM1305 Adult Thigh 46 to 66 22.5 040-000993-00

36-5

Single-Patient Cuff

Model Patient

Category

Measurement

Site Limb Circumference (cm)

Bladder Width

(cm) Part No.

CM1500A 3.1 to 5.7 2.2 001B-30-70692

CM1500B 4.3 to 8.0 2.9 001B-30-70693

CM1500C 5.8 to 10.9 3.8 001B-30-70694

CM1500D

Neonate

7.1 to 13.1 4.8 001B-30-70695

CM1501 Infant 10 to 19 7.2 001B-30-70697

CM1502 Pediatric 18 to 26 9.8 001B-30-70698

CM1503 Adult 25 to 35 13.1 001B-30-70699

CM1504 Large adult

Arm

33 to 47 16.5 001B-30-70700

CM1505 Adult Thigh 46 to 66 20.5 001B-30-70701

Disposable Cuff

Model Patient

Category

Measurement

Site Limb Circumference (cm)

Bladder Width

(cm) Part No.

M1872A 7.1 to 13.1 5.1 900E-10-04873

M1870A 5.8 to 10.9 4.3 900E-10-04874

M1868A 4.3 to 8.0 3.2 900E-10-04875

M1866A

Neonate Arm

3.1 to 5.7 2.5 900E-10-04876

36.4 Temp Accessories

Extension Cable

Type Model Temp probe Part No.

Reusable MR420B MR411, MR412 0011-30-37391

Temp Probes

Type Model Patient Category Measurement Site Part No.

MR401B Esophageal/Rectal 0011-30-37392

MR403B Adult

Skin 0011-30-37393

MR402B Esophageal/Rectal 0011-30-37394 Reusable

MR404B Pediatric, neonate

Skin 0011-30-37395

MR411 Esophageal/Rectal 0011-30-37398 Disposable

MR412 Adult, pediatric, neonate

Skin 0011-30-37397

36-6

36.5 IBP/ICP Accessories

Accessories Kit No. Components Part No.

IM2201 12Pin IBP Cable 001C-30-70759

Disposable Transducer 0010-10-42638

Steady Rest for IBP Transducer and Clamp M90-000133---

6800-30-50876

(Hospira)

Steady Rest for IBP Transducer and Clamp M90-000134---

IM2202 12Pin IBP Cable 001C-30-70757

Disposable Pressure Transducer 6000-10-02107

6800-30-50877

(BD)

Transducer/Manifold Mount 0010-10-12156

ICP

Model Material Part No.

Gaeltec TYPE.S13 12Pin ICP cable 0010-30-42742

Gaeltec ICT/B Intracranial Pressure Transducer 0010-10-12151

It is proved through tests that the following accessories are compatible with the patient monitor. Only the accessories

proceeded by “*” are available from our company. If you want to purchase other accessories, contact respective

manufacturers and make sure if these accessories are approved for sale in local.

Manufacturer Accessories

Smith Medical

(Medex)

MX961Z14 Logical Cable, to be used in connection with the Adapter Cable (0010-20-42795)

MX960 Reusable Transducer Kit

MX9605A Logical 84in(213cm) Single Monitoring Kit

MX960 Logical Tranducer Mounting Plate

MX261 Logical Clamp For Transducer Bracket

MX262 Logical Clamp For 2 Transducer Mount Plates

(More Logical Clamps are available from Medex. For detailed information, contact Medex.)

Braun

IBP Reusable Cable (REF: 5203511), to be used in connection with the Adapter Cable

(0010-20-42795)

Combitrans Monitoring Set (contact Braun for detailed information)

Combitrans Attachment Plate Holder (REF:5215800)

Combitrans Attachment Plate (contact Braun for detailed information)

Memscap

*Truck cable (0010-21-43082)

SP844 Physiological Pressure Transducer

844-26 Monitoring Line Set

84X-49 Mounting Bracket

Utah

Reusable Blood Pressure Monitor Interface Cable (REF: 650-206)

Deltran Disposable Pressure Transducer System

(More Deltran sensors are available from Utah. For detailed information, contact Utah.)

Pole Mount Unit (ERF: 650-150)

Deltran Three Slot Organizer, Attaches to I.V. Pole Mount (REF: 650-100)

Deltran Four Slot Organizer, Attaches to I.V. Pole Mount (REF: 650-105)

36-7

Edwards

* IBP Truwave Reusable Cable (0010-21-12179)

Pressure Monitoring Kit With Truwave Disposable Pressure Transducer.

(More Truwave sensors are available from Edwards. For detailed information, contact Edwards.)

DTSC IV Pole Clamp for Model DTH4 Backplate Holder

DTH4 Disposable Holder for DPT

36.6 C.O. Accessories

Model Material Part No.

COC-001-SL 12Pin C.O. cable. 0010-30-42743

SP4042 TI Sensor 6000-10-02079

SP5045 TI Sensor Housing 6000-10-02080

MX387 12CC Control Syringe W/1CC Stop W/Rotator 6000-10-02081

131HF7 Dilution Hose 6000-10-02183

9850A Cable kit with TI Sensor 0012-00-1519

36.7 CCO/SvO2 Accessories

Material PN

CCO/SvO2 cable 009-000259-00

36.8 CO2 Accessories

Sidestream CO2 module

Material Patient Category Remark Part No.

DRYLINE Watertrap Adult, pediatric 9200-10-10530

DRYLINE Watertrap Neonate Reusable

9200-10-10574

Sampling Line, Adult 2.5m Adult, pediatric 9200-10-10533

Sampling Line, Neonate, 2.5m Neonate 9200-10-10555

Adult Nasal CO2 Sample Cannula Adult M02A-10-25937

Pediatric Nasal CO2 Sample Cannula Pediatric M02A-10-25938

Infant Nasal CO2 Sample Cannula Infant

Disposable

M02B-10-64509

DRYLINE Airway Adapter Adult, pediatric Straight 9000-10-07486

Microstream CO2 Module

Disposable Airway Sampling Line

Model Patient Category Remark Part No.

XS04620 / 0010-10-42560

XS04624 Humidified 0010-10-42561

007768 Long 0010-10-42563

007737

Adult, pediatric

Long, humidified 0010-10-42564

006324 Humidified 0010-10-42562

007738 Infant, Neonate

Long, humidified 0010-10-42565

36-8

Disposable Nasal Sampling Line

Model Patient Category Remark Part No.

009818 / 0010-10-42566

009822 Plus O2 0010-10-42568

009826

Adult, intermediate

Long, plus O2 0010-10-42570

008174 / 0010-10-42577

008177 Humidified 0010-10-42572

008180

Adult

Humidified, plus O2 0010-10-42575

007266 / 0010-10-42567

008175 / 0010-10-42578

008178 Humidified 0010-10-42573

008181 Humidified, plus O2 0010-10-42576

007269 Plus O2 0010-10-42569

007743

Pediatric

Long, plus O2 0010-10-42571

008179 Infant, Neonate Humidified 0010-10-42574

Mainstream CO2 Module

Material Model Patient Category Remark Part No.

6063 Disposable 0010-10-42662

6421 Adult Disposable, with

mouthpiece 0010-10-42663 Airway adapter

6312 Neonate Disposable 0010-10-42664

9960STD / 0010-10-42670

9960LGE Adult

Adult large 0010-10-42671 Mask

9960PED Pediatric / 0010-10-42669

Cable management straps / / / 0010-10-42667

Sensor holding clips / / / 0010-10-42668

Sensor / Adult, pediatric,

neonate Reusable 6800-30-50760

36.9 AG Accessories

Material Patient Category Remark Part No.

Adult, pediatric 9200-10-10530 Watertrap

Neonate Reusable

9200-10-10574

Adult, pediatric 9200-10-10533 Sampling line

Neonate Disposable

9200-10-10555

Adult, pediatric, neonate Disposable, straight 9000-10-07486 Airway adapter

Adult, pediatric, neonate Disposable, elbow 9000-10-07487

36-9

36.10 ICG Accessories

Material Model Part No.

BioZ tect ICG sensor BZ-1550-50 0010-10-43258

BioZ Dx Patient Cable 5550 0010-10-42676

BioZ Dx Lead Wire Array 5561 0010-10-43259

BioZ Dx Patient Cable 5551 040-000543-00

BioZ Dx Lead Wire Array 5562 040-000544-00

36.11 BIS Accessories

Material Patient Category Part No.

BIS Cable Adult, pediatric 6800-30-50761

BISx4 Cable Adult, pediatric 115-005707-00

*If you need to purchase BIS Quatro, Pediatric, SRS, and CLICKsensors, please contact Covidien.

36.12 RM Accessories

Material Patient Category Remark Part No.

Adult, pediatric Reusable 0010-30-42678

Adult, pediatric Disposable 0010-30-42679 Flow sensor

Infant Disposable 0010-30-42680

RM connector / / 6800-20-50328

36.13 PiCCO Accessories

Material Model Part No. Remark

12Pin IBP Y Cable IM2203 040-000815-00 /

12Pin PiCCO Cable CO7701 040-000816-00 /

2Pin Injectate Temperature Sensor Cable 040-000436-00 040-000817-00 / PV2015L20 / Contact, germfree

Arterial Thermodilution Catheter PV2013L07 / Contact, germfree

PiCCO Monitoring Kits PV8115 / Contact, germfree

36.14 ScvO2 Accessories

Material Part No. Remark

8Pin ScvO2 Module and Cable 115-008191-00 /

/ Contact, germfree CeVOX Probe

/ Contact, germfree

36-10

36.15 BeneLink Accessories

Material Part No.

ID Adapter 115-008545-00

Serial port adapting cable, type A 009-001767-00

Serial port adapting cable, type B 009-001768-00

Serial port adapting cable, type C 009-001769-00

Serial port adapting cable, type D 009-002943-00

RJ45 connecting cable 009-001770-00

36.16 Others

Material Part No.

M05-010002-06 Lithium battery

022-000008-00

Power cord (India) 0000-10-10903

Domestic power cord (America) DA8K-10-14452

Three-wire power cord (Britain) DA8K-10-14453

Three-wire power cord (Europe) DA8K-10-14454

Grounding cable 1000-21-00122

Defibrillator synchronization cable 6800-20-50781

Nurse call cable 8000-21-10361

Satellite module rack wall mount bracket 0010-30-42867

Keyboard wall mount bracket 0010-30-42868

Main unit wall mount bracket 0010-30-42955

Display wall mount bracket 0010-30-42956

Roll stand 0010-30-42943

Trolley-Mount Bracket 0010-30-42944

DVI-VGA adapter box 115-004861-00

A-1

A Product Specifications

NOTE

For the specifications of BeneView T1, refer to BeneView T1 Operating Manual.

A.1 Monitor Safety Specifications

A.1.1 Classifications The patient monitor is classified, according to IEC60601-1:

Co

mp

on

ents

Typ

e o

f pro

tect

ion

agai

nst

ele

ctri

cal s

ho

ck

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

agai

nst

ele

ctri

cal s

ho

ck

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

agai

nst

har

mfu

l in

gre

ss

of w

ater

Deg

ree

of p

rote

ctio

n

agai

nst

haz

ard

s o

f

exp

losi

on

Mo

de

of o

per

atio

n

Main unit Not marked

Secondary display I

Not marked

MPM

IBP module

SpO2 module

C.O. module

PiCCO module

CF(*)

BIS module

AG module

CO2 module

ICG module

RM module

ScvO2 module

BF(*)

BeneLink module Not marked

SMR Not marked

CCO/SvO2 module

NA

Not marked

Ordinary Not suitable Continuous

I: Class I equipment

BF: Type BF applied part. (*Defibrillator-proof protection against electric shock.)

CF: Type CF applied part. (*Defibrillator-proof protection against electric shock.)

NA: Not applicable

Ordinary: Ordinary equipment (enclosed equipment without protection against ingress of water)

Not suitable: Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air with

oxygen or nitrous oxide.

A-2

A.1.2 Environmental Specifications Main unit, MPM, SpO2 module, IBP module, C.O. module, Recorder, CCO/SvO2 module, BIS module, BeneLink module

Item Operating conditions Storage conditions

Temperature (ºC) 0 to 40 -20 to 60

Relative humidity (noncondensing) 15% to 95% 10% to 95%

Barometric (mmHg) 427.5 to 805.5 120 to 805.5

Microstream CO2 module

Item Operating conditions Storage conditions

Temperature (ºC) 0 to 40 -20 to 60

Relative humidity (noncondensing) 15% to 95% 10% to 95%

Barometric (mmHg) 430 to 790 430 to 790

Sidestream CO2 module

Item Operating conditions Storage conditions

Temperature (ºC) 5 to 40 -20 to 60

Relative humidity (noncondensing) 15% to 95% 10% to 95%

Barometric (mmHg) 430 to 790 430 to 790

Mainstream CO2 module

Item Operating conditions Storage conditions

Temperature (ºC) 0 to 40 -20 to 60

Relative humidity (noncondensing) 10% to 90% 10% to 90%

Barometric (mmHg) 427.5 to 805.5 400 to 805.5

AG module

Item Operating conditions Storage conditions

Temperature (ºC) 10 to 40 -20 to 60

Relative humidity (noncondensing) 15% to 95% 10% to 95%

Barometric (mmHg) 525 to 805.5 525 to 805.5

RM module

Item Operating conditions Storage conditions

Temperature (ºC) 5 to 40 -20 to 60

Relative humidity (noncondensing) 15% to 95% 10% to 95%

Barometric (mmHg) 427.5 to 805.5 120 to 805.5

ICG module

Item Operating conditions Storage conditions

Temperature (ºC) 10 to 40 0 to 50

Relative humidity (noncondensing) 15% to 95% 15% to 95%

Barometric (mmHg) 427.5 to 805.5 120 to 805.5

A-3

PiCCO module

Item Operating conditions Storage conditions

Temperature (ºC) 10 to 40 -20 to 60

Relative humidity (noncondensing) 15% to 75% 10% to 90%

Barometric (mmHg) 427.5 to 805.5 120 to 805.5

ScvO2 module

Item Operating conditions Storage conditions

Temperature (ºC) 10 to 40 -20 to 60

Relative humidity (noncondensing) 15% to 75% 10% to 90%

Barometric (mmHg) 427.5 to 805.5 120 to 805.5

A.1.3 Power requirements Line voltage 100 to 240 VAC

Current BeneView T5: 2.5 to 1.4 A

BeneView T8: 2.8 to 1.6 A

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Fuse BeneView T5: Time-lag 250V T3.15A

BeneView T8: Time-lag 250V T4A

A.2 Physical Specifications

Components Weight Size Equipment type

Main unit (BeneView T5) <6.6 kg 297×336×187 mm Without modules, batteries, and

recorder

Main unit (BeneView T8) <9.9 kg 400×370×193 mm Without modules, batteries, and

recorder

SMR <1.8 kg 142×402×151 mm With no module inserted

MPM <0.63 kg 136.5×80.5×102 mm

SpO2 module <0.26 kg 136.5×80.5×102 mm

IBP module <0.25 kg 136.5×40×102 mm

C.O. module <0.25 kg 136.5×40×102 mm

Sidestream CO2 module <0.48 kg 136.5×80.5×102 mm

Microstream CO2 module <0.37 kg 136.5×40×102 mm

Mainstream CO2 module <0.50 kg 136.5×40×102 mm

M-type AG module <1.75 kg 136.5×121×102 mm With O2 and BIS modules

A-type AG module <1.75 kg 136.5×121×102 mm With O2 and BIS modules

ICG module <0.35 kg 136.5×40×102 mm

BIS module <0.25 kg 136.5×40×102 mm

RM module <0.27 kg 136.5×40×102 mm

CCO/SvO2 module <0.25 kg 136.5×40×102 mm

PiCCO Module <0.28 kg 136.5×40×102 mm

ScvO2 Module <0.26 kg 136.5×40×102 mm

BeneLink Module <0.35kg 136.5×40×102 mm

A-4

A.3 Hardware Specifications

A.3.1 Display Host display

Screen type Color TFT LCD

Screen Size (diagonal) 12.1"( BeneView T5); 17"( BeneView T8)

Resolution 800×600 pixels(BeneView T5); 1280×1024 pixels(BeneView T8)

External display

Screen type Medical-grade TFT LCD

Screen Size 15", 17" or above

Resolution 800×600 pixels or above (BeneView T5);

1024×768 pixels or above (BeneView T8)

EMC MPR II, CISPR 11B

Third certificate UL, C-UL, TUV, CE, FCC

A.3.2 Recorder Method Thermal dot array

Horizontal resolution 16 dots/mm (25 mm/s paper speed)

Vertical resolution 8 dots/mm

Paper width 50 mm

Paper length 20 m

Paper speed 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s

Number of waveform channels Maximum 3

A.3.3 Battery Size 147.5×60.4×23.8 mm

Weight 350 g

Number of batteries 1 or 2 (BeneView T5); 2 (BeneView T8)

Battery Type Chargeable Lithium-Ion

Voltage 11.1 VDC

Capacity 4500 mAh

Run time

BeneView T5: 330 minutes when powered by two new fully-charged batteries

(25 , ECG, SpO℃ 2, Auto NIBP measurements at intervals of 15 minutes)

BeneView T8: 120 minutes when powered by two new fully-charged batteries

(25 , ECG, SpO℃ 2, Auto NIBP measurements at intervals of 15 minutes)

Charge time nearly 5.5 h to 90%

nearly 6 h to 100%

Shutdown delay at least 5 min (after a low battery alarm first occurs)

A-5

A.3.4 LEDs Alarm lamp 1 (two color coded: yellow and red)

Technical alarm lamp 1 (blue)

Power on LED 1 (green)

AC power LED 1 (green)

Battery LED 1 (green)

A.3.5 Audio Indicator

Speaker Give alarm tones (45 to 85 dB), key tones, QRS tones; support PITCH TONE and

multi-level tone modulation; alarm tones comply with IEC60601-1-8.

A.3.6 Monitor Interface Specifications Power 1 AC power input connector

Wired network BeneView T5: 1 RJ45 connector, 100 Base-TX, IEEE 802.3

BeneView T8: 2 RJ45 connector, 100 Base-TX, IEEE 802.3

USB BeneView T5: 4 connectors, USB 1.1;

BeneView T8: up to 10 connectors, USB 1.1

SMR connector 1 connector, not standard USB

CF 50-pin CF revision 2.0 connector

Video interface 1 connector, standard DVI-D

Nurse call 1 connector, standard BNC

Equipotential Grounding Terminal 1

Micro-D connector 1 connector, It outputs ECG, IBP and defibrillator synchronization signals

simultaneously

CIS connector (BeneView T5) 1 connector, for connecting the CIS box.

A-6

A.3.7 Outputs Auxiliary Output

Standard Meets the requirements of IEC60601-1 for short-circuit protection and leakage

current

ECG Analog Output

Bandwidth

(-3dB; reference frequency: 10Hz)

Diagnostic mode:

Monitor mode:

Surgical mode:

ST mode:

0.05 to 150 Hz

0.5 to 40 Hz

1 to 20 Hz

0.05 to 40 Hz

QRS delay ≤25 ms (in diagnostic mode, and with Paced off )

Sensitivity 1V/mV ±5%

PACE rejection/enhancement

Pace enhancement

Signal amplitude: Voh≥2.5V

Pulse width: 10ms±5%

Signal rising and falling time: ≤100μs

IBP Analog Output

Bandwidth (-3dB; reference

frequency:1Hz) DC to 50 Hz

Max transmission delay 30 ms (with Notch off )

Sensitivity 1 V/100 mmHg ±5%

Nurse Call Signal

Output mode Relay

Electrical requirements ≤60W, ≤2A, ≤36VDC, ≤25VAC

Isolation voltage 1500 VAC

Contact type Normally open or normally contact (optional)

Defib Sync Pulse

Output impedance ≤100Ω

Max time delay 35 ms (R-wave peak to leading edge of pulse)

Amplitude High level: 3.5 to 5 V, providing a maximum of 10 mA output current;

Low level: < 0.5 V, receiving a maximum of 5 mA input current.

Pulse width 100 ms ±10%

Rising and falling time ≤1 ms

Digital video output (DVI-D connector)

Video signals Single Link TMDS

DDC signals Signals 12C compliant

Alarm output (Network connector)

Alarm delay time from BeneView

patient monitor to remote equipment

The alarm delay time form the patient monitor to remote equipment is ≤2

seconds, measured at the BeneView signal output connector.

A-7

A.4 Data Storage

Trends

Trends: 120 hours, at 1 min resolution

Mid-length trends: 8 hours, at 5 s resolution

Minitrends: 1 hour, at 1 s resolution

Parameter alarms 100 alarms and manual events and related parameter waveforms. The waveform

recording length can be 8s.

Arrh. events 100 arrhythmia events and relate waveforms and parameters. The waveform

recording length can be 8s.

NIBP measurements 1000 sets

Interpretation of resting 12-lead ECG

results 20 sets

Full-disclosure waveforms 48 hours at maximum. The specific storage time depends on the waveforms stored

and the number of stored waveforms.

A.5 Wireless Network

Standards IEEE 802.11g, Wi-Fi compatible

Frequency range 2.412 to 2.462GHz

China America Canada Europe Spain France Japan

1 to 11 10, 11 2 Operating channel

For other country, please refer to your local law.

Safe distance a circle centering AP with the radius of 10 m

A-8

A.6 Measurement Specifications

The adjustable range of alarm limits is the same with the measurement range of signals unless otherwise specified.

A.6.1 ECG ECG

Standards Meet standards of EC11, EC13, EN60601-2-27/IEC60601-2-27 and IEC60601-2-25

Lead set

3-lead: I, II, III

5-lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V

12-lead: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to V6

ECG standard AHA, IEC

Display sensitivity 1.25 mm/mV (X0.125), 2.5 mm/mV (X0.25), 5 mm/mV (X0.5), 10 mm/mV (X1), 20

mm/mV (X2), 40 mm/mV (X4), Auto

Sweep speed 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s

Bandwidth (-3dB)

Diagnostic mode:

Monitor mode:

Surgical mode:

ST mode:

0.05 to 150 Hz

0.5 to 40 Hz

1 to 20 Hz

0.05 to 40 Hz

Common mode rejection ratio

(with Notch off )

Diagnostic mode:

Monitor mode:

Surgical mode:

ST mode:

>90 dB

>105 dB

>105 dB

>105 dB(with Notch on)

Notch

50/60 Hz

Monitor and surgical mode: Notch turns on automatically. Diagnostic mode: Notch

is turned on/off manually

Differential input impedance ≥5 MΩ

Input signal range ±8 mV (peak-to-peak value)

Accuracy of reappearing input signal Use A and D methods based on EC11 to determine system total error and

frequency response.

Electrode offset potential tolerance ±500 mV

Lead-off detection current Measuring electrode: <0.1 μA

Drive electrode: <1 μA

Input offset current ≤0.1 μA

Baseline recovery time <5 s (after defibrillation)

Patient leakage current <10 uA

Calibration signal 1mV (peak-to-peak value)

ESU protection

Cut mode: 300 W

Coagulate mode: 100 W

Recovery time: ≤10 s

In compliance with the requirements in clause 4.2.9.14 of ANSI/AAMI EC 13:2002

ESU noise suppression

Based on the test method in clause 5.2.9.14 of EC 13, use ECG lead wires which are

in compliance with AAMI. Compared with ECG baseline, the noise of peak to peak

value ≤2 mV.

Pace Pulse

A-9

Pace pulses meeting the following conditions are labelled with a PACE marker:

Pace pulse markers Amplitude:

Width:

Rise time:

±2 to ±700 mV

0.1 to 2 ms

10 to 100 μs

When tested in accordance with the ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002: Sections 4.1.4.1 and

4.1.4.3, the heart rate meter rejects all pulses meeting the following conditions.

Pace pulse rejection Amplitude:

Width:

Rise time:

±2 to ±700 mV

0.1 to 2 ms

10 to 100 μs

Pacer pulse detector rejection of fast

ECG signals

20V/s RTI when measured in accordance with ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section

4.1.4.3.

Mindray algorithm

HR

Measurement range 3-, 5-, and 12-lead ECG

Neonate:

Pediatric:

Adult:

15 to 350 bpm

15 to 350 bpm

15 to 300 bpm

Resolution 1 bpm

Accuracy 3-, 5-, and 12-lead ECG: ±1 bpm or ±1%, whichever is greater.

Sensitivity 200μV (lead II)

HR averaging method

In compliance with the requirements in Clause 4.1.2.1 d)of ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002,

the following method is used:

If the last 3 consecutive RR intervals are greater than 1200 ms, the 4 most recent RR

intervals are averaged to compute the HR. Otherwise, heart rate is computed by

subtracting the maximum and minimum ones from the most recent 12 RR intervals

and then averaging them.

The HR value displayed on the monitor screen is updated every second.

Response to irregular rhythm

In compliance with the requirements in Clause 4.1.2.1 e)of ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002,

the heart rate after 20 seconds of stabilization is displayed as follows:

Ventricular bigeminy (3a): -80±1 bpm

Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy (3b): -60±1 bpm

Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy (3c): -120±1 bpm

Bidirectional systoles (3d): -90±2 bpm

Response time to heart rate change

Meets the requirements of ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002: Section 4.1.2.1 f ).

From 80 to 120 bpm: less than 11 s

From 80 to 40 bpm: less than 11 s

Meets the requirements of ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002: section 4.1.2.1 g).

Time to alarm for tachycardia

(not available in USA)

Waveform

4ah - range:

4a - range:

4ad - range:

Waveform 4bh - range:

4b - range:

4bd - range:

11 s

11 s

11 s

11 s

11 s

11 s

A-10

Tall T-wave rejection capability

When the test is performed based on part 4.1.2.1 c)of ANSI/AAMI EC 13-2002, the

heart rate meter will reject all 100 ms QRS complexes with less than 1.2 mV of

amplitude, and T waves with T-wave interval of 180 ms and those with Q-T interval

of 350 ms.

Arrhythmia Analysis Classifications

(Not available in USA)

Asystole, VFib/VTac, Vtac, Vent. Brady, Extreme Tachy, Extreme Brady, PVC, Couplet,

Bigeminy, Trigeminy, R on T, VT>2, PVCs, Tachy, Brady, Missed Beats, Vent. Rhythm,

PNP, PNC, Multif. PVC, Nonsus. Vtac, Pause, Irr. Rhythm

ST Segment Analysis (Not available in USA)

Measurement range -2.0 to 2.0 mV

Accuracy -0.8 to 0.8 mV:

Beyond this range:

±0.02 mV or ±10%, whichever is greater.

Not specified.

Refreshing rate 10 s

Mortara algorithm

Only the differences from the Mindray algorithm are listed.

HR

HR averaging method

In compliance with the requirements in Clause 4.1.2.1 d)of ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002,

the following method is used:

Heart rate is computed by averaging the most recent 16 RR intervals, unless the HR

by averaging the most recent 4 heart beats is less than or equals to 48.

The HR value displayed on the monitor screen is updated every second.

Meets the requirements of ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002: section 4.1.2.1 g).

Time to alarm for tachycardia

Waveform

4ah – range:

4a – range:

4ad – range:

4bh – range:

4b – range:

4bd – range:

11 s

11 s

11 s

11 s

11 s

11 s

Arrhythmia Analysis Classifications Asystole, Vfib, Vtac, Vent. Rhythm, Couplet, VT>2, Bigeminy, Trigeminy, R on T,

Multif. PVC, Irr. Rhythm, Tachy, Brady, Missed Beats, PNP, PNC

ST Segment Analysis

Refreshing rate per 16 heartbeats

A-11

A.6.2 Resp Technique Trans-thoracic impedance

Lead Options are lead I and II. The default is lead II.

Respiration excitation waveform <300 μA RMS, ,62.8 kHz (±10%)

Respiration impedance range 0.3 to 5Ω

Baseline impedance range 200 to 2500Ω (using an ECG cable with 1kΩ resistance)

Differential input impedance >2.5 MΩ

Bandwidth 0.2 to 2 Hz (-3 dB)

Sweep speed 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s or 25 mm/s

Respiration Rate

Measurement range Adult:

Pediatric, neonate:

0 to 120 rpm

0 to 150 rpm

Resolution 1 rpm

Accuracy 7 to 150 rpm:

0 to 6 rpm:

±2 rpm or ±2%, whichever is greater

Not specified.

Apnea alarm time 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s

Alarm limit Range (rpm) Step (rpm)

RR High Adult, pediatric:

Neonate:

(low limit + 2) to 100

(low limit + 2) to 150

RR Low 0 to (high limit – 2)

1

A.6.3 SpO2 Alarm limit Range (%) Step (%)

SpO2 High (low limit + 2) to 100

SpO2 Low Desat to (high limit – 2)

Desat Mindray, Masimo:

Nellcor:

0 to (high limit – 2)

20 to (high limit – 2)

1

Mindray SpO2 Module

Standards Meet standards of ISO9919

*Measurement accuracy verification: The SpO2 accuracy has been verified in human experiments by comparing with arterial

blood sample reference measured with a CO-oximeter. Pulse oximeter measurement are statistically distributed and about

two-thirds of the measurements are expected to come within the specified accuracy range compared to CO-oximeter

measurements.

Measurement range 0 to 100%

Resolution 1%

Accuracy

70 to 100%: ±2% (measured without motion in adult/pediatric mode)

70 to 100%: ±3% (measured without motion in neonate mode)

70 to 100%: ±3% (measured with motion)

0% to 69%: Not specified.

A-12

*Studies were performed to validate the accuracy of Pulse Oximeter with neonatal SpO2 sensors by contrast with a

CO-Oximeter. Some neonates aged from 1 day to 30 days with a gestation age of 22 weeks to full term were involved in this

study. The statistical analysis of data of this study shows the accuracy (Arms) is within the stated accuracy specification. Please

see the following table.

Sensor type Totally neonates Data Arms

518B 97 (51 male & 46 female) 200 pairs 2.38%

520N 122 (65 male & 57 female) 200 pairs 2.88%

The Pulse Oximeter with neonatal SpO2 sensors was also validated on adult subjects.

Refreshing rate 1 s

SpO2 averaging time

7 s (When the sensitivity is set to High)

9 s (When the sensitivity is set to Medium)

11 s (When the sensitivity is set to Low)

Masimo SpO2 Module

SpO2

Measurement range 1 to 100%

Resolution 1%

Accuracy

70 to 100%: ±2% (measured without motion in adult/pediatric mode)

70 to 100%: ±3% (measured without motion in neonate mode)

70 to 100%: ±3% (measured with motion)

0% to 69%: Not specified.

Refreshing rate 1 s

SpO2 averaging time 2-4 s, 4-6 s, 8 s, 10 s, 12 s, 14 s, 16 s

Low perfusion conditions Pulse amplitude: >0.02%

Light penetration: >5%

Low perfusion SpO2 accuracy ±2%

Nellcor SpO2 Module

Measurement range 0 to 100%

Resolution 1%

Accuracy

70 to 100%: ±2% (adult/pediatric)

70 to 100%: ±3% (neonate)

0% to 69%: Not specified.

*: When the SpO2 sensor is applied for neonatal patients as indicated, the specified accuracy range is increased by ±1%, to

compensate for the theoretical effect on oximeter measurements of fetal hemoglobin in neonatal blood.

A-13

A.6.4 PR Alarm limit Range (bpm) Step (bpm)

PR High (low limit +2) to 300

PR Low 15 to (high limit-2) 1

PR from Mindray SpO2 Module

Measurement range 20 to 254 bpm

Resolution 1 bpm

Accuracy ±3 bpm (measured without motion)

±5 bpm (measured with motion)

Refreshing rate 1 s

SPO2 averaging time

7 s (when sensitivity is set to High)

9 s (when sensitivity is set to Medium)

11 s (when sensitivity is set to Low)

PR from Masimo SpO2 Module

Measurement range 25 to 240 bpm

Resolution 1 bpm

Accuracy ±3 bpm (measured without motion)

±5 bpm (measured with motion)

Refreshing rate 1 s

SPO2 averaging time 2-4 s, 4-6 s, 8 s, 10 s, 12 s, 14 s, 16 s

Low perfusion conditions Pulse amplitude: >0.02%

Light penetration: >5%

Low perfusion PR accuracy ±3 bpm

PR from Nellcor SpO2 Module

Measurement range 20 to 300 bpm

Resolution 1 bpm

Accuracy 20 to 250 bpm: ±3 bpm

251 to 300 bpm, not specified

Refreshing rate 1 s

PR from IBP Module

Measurement range 25 to 350 bpm

Resolution 1 bpm

Accuracy ±1 bpm or ±1%, whichever is greater

Refreshing rate 1 s

A-14

A.6.5 NIBP

Standards Meet standards of EN60601-2-30/IEC60601-2-30, EN1060-1, EN1060-3,EN1060-4

and SP10

Technique Oscillometry

Mode of operation Manual, Auto and STAT

Auto mode repetition intervals 1, 2, 2.5, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60, 90, 120, 180, 240 or 480 min

STAT mode cycle time 5 min

Adult, pediatric: 180 s Max measurement time

Neonate: 90 s

Heart rate range 40 to 240 bpm

Adult Pediatric Neonate

Systolic: 40 to 270 40 to 200 40 to 135

Diastolic: 10 to 210 10 to 150 10 to 100

Measurement ranges

(mmHg)

Mean: 20 to 230 20 to 165 20 to 110

Accuracy Max mean error: ±5 mmHg

Max standard deviation: 8 mmHg

Resolution 1mmHg

Initial cuff inflation pressure range

(mmHg)

Adult:

Pediatric:

Neonate:

80 to 280

80 to 210

60 to 140

Default initial cuff inflation pressure

(mmHg)

Adult:

Pediatric:

Neonate:

160

140

90

Software overpressure protection

Adult:

Pediatric:

Neonate:

297±3 mmHg

240±3 mmHg

147±3 mmHg

PR

Measurement range 40 to 240 bpm

Resolution 1 bpm

Accuracy ±3bpm or ±3%, whichever is greater

Alarm limit Range (mmHg) Step (mmHg)

Sys High

Adult: (low limit+5) to 270

Pediatric: (low limit+5) to 200

Neonate: (low limit+5) to 135

Sys Low 40 to (high limit-5)

Mean High

Adult: (low limit+5) to 230

Pediatric: (low limit+5) to 165

Neonate: (low limit+5) to 110

Mean Low 20 to (high limit-5)

Dia High

Adult: (low limit+5) to 210

Pediatric: (low limit+5) to 150

Neonate: (low limit+5) to 100

Dia Low 10 to (high limit-5)

5

A-15

*Measurement accuracy verification: In adult and pediatric modes, the blood pressure measurements measured with this

device are in compliance with the American National Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphymomanometers (ANSI/AAMI

SP10-1992) in terms of mean error and stardard deviation by comparing with intra-arterial or auscultatory measurements

(depending on the configuration) in a typical patient population. For auscultatory reference, the 5th Korotkoff sound was

used to determine the diastolic pressure.

In neonatal mode, the blood pressure measurements measured with this device are in compliance with the American

National Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphymomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10-1992 and AAMI/ANSI SP10A-1996) in

terms of mean error and stardard deviation by comparing with intra-arterial measurements (depending on the configuration)

in a typical patient population.

A.6.6 Temp Standards Meet standard of EN12470-4

Technique Thermal resistance

Measurement range 0 to 50 ℃ (32 to 122 ℉)

Resolution 0.1 ℃

Accuracy ±0.1 ℃ or ±0.2 ℉ (without probe)

Refreshing rate 1 s

Minimum time for accurate

measurement

Body surface: <100 s

Body cavity: <80 s

Alarm limit Range Step

T1/T2 High (low limit +1) to 50 ℃

(low limit +1.8) to 122 ℉

T1/T2 Low 0 to (high limit -1) ℃

32 to (high limit -1.8) ℉

TD High 0 to 50 ℃

0 to 90 ℉

0.1 ℃

0.1 ℉

A.6.7 IBP Standards Meet standard of EN60601-2-34/IEC60601-2-34.

Technique Direct invasive measurement

IBP

Measurement range -50 to 300 mmHg

Resolution 1 mmHg

Accuracy ±2% or ±1 mmHg, whichever is greater (without sensor)

Refreshing rate 1 s

Pressure transducer

Excitement voltage 5 VDC, ±2%

Sensitivity 5 μV/V/mmHg

Impedance range 300 to 3000Ω

Volume displacement (ABBOTT) <0.04 mm3 /100 mmHg

A-16

Alarm limit Range (mmHg) Step (mmHg)

Sys High

Mean High

Dia High

(low limit + 2) to 300

Sys Low

Mean Low

Dia Low

-50 to (high limit – 2)

1

A.6.8 C.O. Measurement method Thermodilution method

C.O.: 0.1 to 20 L/min

TB: 23 to 43 ℃ Measurement range

TI: 0 to 27 ℃

Resolution C.O.:

TB, TI:

0.1 L/min

0.1 ℃

Accuracy C.O.:

TB, TI:

±5% or ±0.1 L /min, whichever is greater

±0.1 ℃ (without sensor)

Repeatability C.O.: ±2% or ±0.1 L/min, whichever is greater

Alarm range TB: 23 to 43 ℃

Alarm limit Range Step

TB High (low limit + 1) to 43 ℃

(low limit + 1.8) to 109.4℉

TB Low 23 to (high limit - 1) ℃

73.4 to (high limit - 1.8) ℉

0.1 ℃

0.1 ℉

A.6.9 CCO Operating mode Interfaces with Edwards Vigilance II® or VigileoTM monitor

Measured parameter Consistent with CCO-related parameters outputted by Vigilance II® or VigileoTM

monitor

Vigilance II®: CCO/CCI,EDV/EDVI,SVR/SVRI,SV/SVI,RVEF Parameter alarm

VigileoTM: CCO/CCI, SV/SVI, SVV

Signal Outputs

Standard Meets the requirements of EN 60601-1 for short-circuit protection and leakage

current

Output impedance 1000Ω

Isolation voltage 1500 VAC

ECG Analog Output

Bandwidth (-3dB; reference frequency:

10Hz)

ST mode: 0.05~40Hz

Diagnostic mode: 0.05~150Hz Monitor mode: 0.5~40Hz

Surgical mode: 1~20Hz

A-17

Sensitivity 2V/mV ±5%

MAP Analog Signal Output

Output voltage 0 to 5V (0 to 500mmHg)

Output voltage error ±5%

CVP Analog Signal Output

Output voltage 0 to 5V (0 to 100mmHg)

Output voltage error ±5%

CCO-related Parameters Outputted by Vigilance II® Monitor

Name Range Resolution

CCO 1 to 20 L/min 0.1

CCI 0 to 20 L/min/m2 0.1

CO 1 to 20 L/min 0.1

CI 0 to 20 L/min/m2 0.1

EDV 40 to 800 ml 1

EDVI 20 to 400 ml/m2 1

SVR 0 to 3000 DS/cm5 1

SVRI 0 to 6000 DS·m2/cm5 1

SV 0 to 300 ml/beat 1

SVI 0 to 200 ml/beat/m2 1

BT 25 to 45 ℃ 0.1

RVEF 10 to 60% 1

ESV 10 to 700 ml 1

ESVI 5 to 400 ml/m2 1

HRavg 30 to 250 bpm 1

CVP 0 to 100 mmHg 1

MAP 0 to 500 mmHg 1

CCO-related Parameters Outputted by VigileoTM Monitor

Name Range Resolution

CCO 1 to 20 L/min 0.1

CCI 0 to 20 L/min/m2 0.1

SVR 0 to 3000 DS/cm5 1

SVRI 0 to 6000 DS·m2/cm5 1

SV 0 to 300 ml/beat 1

SVI 0 to 200 ml/beat/m2 1

SVV 0 to 99% 0.1

CVP 0 to 100 mmHg 1

Alarm Limit Range Step

CCO High (Low limit+0.1) to 20 L/min

CCO Low 0 to(high limit-0.1)L/min 0.1 L/min

CCI High (Low limit+0.1) to 20 L/min/m2

CCI Low 0 to(high limit-0.1)L/min/m2 0.1 L/min/m2

A-18

Alarm Limit Range Step

EDV High (Low limit+10)to 800 ml

EDV Low 0 to (high limit-10)ml 10 ml

EDVI High (Low limit+10) to 400 ml/m2

EDVI Low 0 to (high limit-10)ml/m2 10 ml/m2

SVR High (Low limit+20) to 5000 DS/cm5

or (low limit+2) to 500 kPa-s/l

SVR Low 0 to (high limit-20)DS/cm5

or 0 to (high limit-2)kPa-s/l

20 DS/cm5

or2 kPa-s/l

SVRI High (Low limit+50) to 9950 DS·m2/cm5

or(low limit+5) to 995 kPa-s-m2/l

SVRI Low 0 to(high limit-50)DS·m2/cm5

or 0 to(high limit-5)kPa-s-m2/l

50 DS·m2/cm5

or 5 kPa-s-m2/l

SV High (Low limit+5) to 300 ml/b

SV Low 0 to (high limit-5)ml/b 5 ml/b

SVI High (Low limit+5) to 200 ml/b/m2

SVI Low 0 to(high limit-5)ml/b/m2 5 ml/b/m2

RVEF High (Low limit+5) to 100 %

RVEF Low 0 to(High limit-5)% 5 %

A.6.10 SvO2 Operating mode Interfaces with Edwards Vigilance II® or VigileoTM monitor

Measured parameter Consistent with CCO-related parameters outputted by Vigilance II® or VigileoTM

monitor

Parameter alarm SvO2, ScvO2

Signal Output

Standard Meets the requirements of EN 60601-1 for short-circuit protection and leakage

current

Output impedance 1000Ω

Isolation voltage 1500 VAC

SpO2 Analog Signal Output

Output voltage 0 to 10V (0 to 100%)

Output voltage error ±5%

SvO2-related Parameters Outputted by Vigilance II® Monitor

Name Measurement Range Resolution

SaO2 40 to 100% 1

VO2 0 to 999 ml/min 1

O2EI 0.0 to 99.9% 0.1

SNR -10 to +20 dB 0.1

DO2 0 to 2000 ml/min 1

A-19

SvO2 0 to 99% 1

ScvO2 0 to 99% 1

SQI 1 to 4 1

A.6.11 PiCCO Measured parameters Measurement range Coefficient of variation

CCO 0.25 l/min to 25.0 l/min ≤2%

C.O. 0.25 l/min to 25.0 l/min ≤2%

GEDV 40ml to 4800 ml ≤3%

SV 1ml to 250 ml ≤2%

EVLW 10ml to 5000 ml ≤6%

ITBV 50ml to 6000 ml ≤3%

* Coefficient of variation is measured using synthetic and/or database wave forms (laboratory testing). Coefficient of

variation= SD/mean error.

A.6.12 ScvO2 Measured parameters Measurement range Measurement accuracy

ScvO2 0 to 99% 50% to 80%：±3%

Other ranges：Not specified.

A.6.13 CO2 Measurement mode Sidestream, microstream, mainstream

Technique Infrared absorption

Apnea time 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s

Alarm limit Range Step

EtCO2 High (low limit + 2) to 99 mmHg

EtCO2 Low 1 to (high limit - 2)mmHg

FiCO2 High 1 to 99 mmHg

1 mmHg

awRR High Adult, pediatric:

Neonate:

(low limit + 2) to 100 rpm

(low limit + 2) to 150 rpm

awRR Low 0 to (high limit - 2) rpm

1 rpm

Sidestream CO2 Module

Standard Meet standard of ISO 21647

CO2 Measurement range 0 to 99 mmHg

Accuracy*

0 to 40 mmHg:

41 to 76 mmHg:

77 to 99 mmHg:

±2 mmHg

±5% of the reading

±10% of the reading

Accuracy drift Meet the requirement for measurement accuracy within 6 hours

Resolution 1 mmHg

A-20

Sample flowrate Adult: 70 ml/min, 100 ml/min, 120 ml/min, 150 ml/min

Pediatric, neonate: 70 ml/min, 100 ml/min

Sample flowrate tolerance 15% or 15 ml/min, whichever is greater.

Warm-up time <1 min, enter the iso accuracy mode

After 1 min, enters the full accuracy mode,

Response time

Measured with a neonatal watertrap and a 2.5-meter neonatal sampling line:

<3.5 s @ 100 ml/min

<4 s @ 70 ml/min

Measured with a adult watertrap and a 2.5-meter adult sampling line:

<4.5 s @ 150 ml/min

<5.5 s @ 120 ml/min

<5.5 s @ 100 ml/min

<7 s @ 70 ml/min

Gas sampling delay time

Measured with a neonatal watertrap and a 2.5-meter neonatal sampling line:

<3 s @ 100 ml/min

<3.5 s @ 70 ml/min

Measured with a adult watertrap and a 2.5-meter adult sampling line:

<4 s @ 150 ml/min

<5 s @ 120 ml/min

<5 s @ 100 ml/min

<6.5 s @ 70 ml/min

awRR measurement range 0 to 120 rpm

awRR measurement precision ±2 rpm

Effect of interference gases on CO2 measurements

Gas Concentration (%) Quantitive effect*

N2O ≤60

Hal ≤4

Sev ≤5

Iso ≤5

Enf ≤5

±1 mmHg

Des ≤15 ±2 mmHg

*: means an extra error should be added in case of gas interference when CO2 measurements are performed between

0-40mmHg.

A-21

Microstream CO2 Module

Standard Meet standard of ISO 21647

CO2 Measurement range 0 to 99 mmHg

Accuracy*

0 to 38 mmHg:

39 to 99 mmHg:

±2 mmHg

±5% of the reading+0.08% of (the reading-38)

Accuracy drift Meet the requirement for measurement accuracy within 6 hours

* Accuracy applies for respiration rate up to 80 rpm. For respiration rate above 80 rpm, the accuracy is 4 mmHg or ±12% of

the reading, whichever is greater. for EtCO2 exceeding 18 mmHg. For respiration rate above 60 rpm, the above accuracy can

be achieved by using the CapnoLine H Set for Infant/Neonatal. In the presence of interfering gases, the above accuracy is

maintained to within 4%.

Resolution 1 mmHg

Sample flow rate 7.51550−

+ ml/min

Initialization time 30 s (typical)

Response time

2.9 s (typical)

(The response time is the sum of the rise time and the delay time when using a

FilterLine of standard length)

Rise time: <190 ms (10% to 90%)

Delay time: 2.7 s (typical)

awRR measurement range 0 to 150 rpm

awRR measurement accuracy

0 to 70 rpm:

71 to 120 rpm:

121 to 150 rpm:

±1 rpm

±2 rpm

±3 rpm

Mainstream CO2 Module

Standard Meet standard of ISO 21647

CO2 Measurement range 0 to 150 mmHg

Accuracy

0 to 40 mmHg:

41 to 70 mmHg:

71 to 100 mmHg:

101 to 150 mmHg:

±2 mmHg

±5% of the reading

±8% of the reading

±10% of the reading

Accuracy drift Meet the requirement for measurement accuracy within 6 hours

Resolution 1 mmHg

Response time <60 ms

awRR measurement range 0 to 150 rpm

awRR measurement accuracy 1 rpm

A-22

A.6.14 tcGas

Operating mode Interfaces with TCM CombiM or TCM TOSCA monitor

Parameters Measurement range Measurement accuracy

tcpCO2 5 to 200 mmHg (0.7 to 26.7 kPa)

TOSCA Sensor 92, tc Sensor 54:

1 % CO2: better than 1 mmHg (0.13 kPa)

10 % CO2: better than 1 mmHg (0.13 kPa)

33 % CO2: better than 3 mmHg (0.4 kPa)

tc Sensor 84:

1 % CO2: better than 1 mmHg (0.13 kPa)

10 % CO2: better than 1 mmHg (0.13 kPa)

33 % CO2: better than 5 mmHg (0.67 kPa)

tcpO2 0 to 800 mmHg (0.0 to 99.9 kPa)

tc Sensor 84:

0 % O2: better than 1 mmHg (0.13 kPa)

21 % O2: better than 3 mmHg (0.4 kPa)

50 % O2: better than 5 mmHg (0.67 kPa)

90 % O2: better than 25 mmHg (3.33 kPa)

SpO2 0 to 100 % 70 % to 100 %: ±3 %

PR 25 bpm to 240 bpm ±3 bpm

Power 0 to 1000 mW ±20 % of reading

A.6.15 AG Standards Meet standard of ISO 21647

Technique Infrared absorption

Warm-up time Iso accuracy mode:

Full accuracy mode:

45 s

10 min

Sample flow rate

Adult, pediatric:

Neonate:

Accuracy:

120, 150, 200 ml/min

70, 90, 120 ml/min

±10 ml/min or ±10%, whichever is greater

Measurement range

CO2:

O2:

N2O:

Des:

Sev:

Enf:

Iso:

Hal:

awRR:

0 to 30%

0 to 100%

0 to 100%

0 to 30%

0 to 30%

0 to 30%

0 to 30%

0 to 30%

2 to 100 rpm

Resolution CO2:

awRR:

1 mmHg

1 rpm

A-23

Iso accuracy

CO2:

N2O:

Other anesthetic gases:

±0.3%ABS

±(8%REL+2%ABS)

8%REL

Gases Range (%REL) Accuracy (%ABS)

CO2

0 to 1

1 to 5

5 to 7

7 to 10

>10

±0.1

±0.2

±0.3

±0.5

Not specified

N2O 0 to 20

20 to 100

±2

±3

O2

0 to 25

25 to 80

80 to 100

±1

±2

±3

Des

0 to 1

1 to 5

5 to 10

10 to 15

15 to 18

>18

±0.15

±0.2

±0.4

±0.6

±1

Not specified

Sev

0 to 1

1 to 5

5 to 8

>8

±0.15

±0.2

±0.4

Not specified

Enf, Iso, Hal

0 to 1

1 to 5

>5

±0.15

±0.2

Not specified

Full accuracy

awRR 2 to 60 rpm

>60 rpm

±1 rpm

Not specified

Accuracy drift Meet the requirement for measurement accuracy within 6 hours

Apnea alarm time 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 25 s, 30 s, 35 s, 40 s

Refreshing rate 1 s

gas sample flow rate 120ml/min, using the DRYLINE™ watertrap and neonatal DRYLINE™

sampling line (2.5m):

CO2 ≤250 ms (fall time: 200ms)

N2O ≤250 ms

O2 ≤600 ms

Hal, Iso, Sev, Des ≤300 ms

Enf ≤350 ms

gas sample flow rate 200ml/min, using the DRYLINE™ water trap and adult DRYLINE™

sampling line (2.5m):

CO2 ≤250 ms (fall time: 200 ms)

N2O ≤250 ms

O2 ≤500 ms

Rise time

(10 % ~ 90%)

Hal, Iso, Sev, Des ≤300 ms

A-24

Enf ≤350 ms

Delay time <4 s

Primary anesthetic agent

In full accuracy mode: 0.15%,

In ISO accuracy mode: 0.4%

Anesthetic agent limit Second anesthetic agent:

In full accuracy mode: 0.3% or 5% REL (10% in ISO accuracy mode) of primary agent if

primary agent is greater than 10%

In ISO accuracy mode: 0.5%

Effect of interference gases on AG measurements

Quantitive effect(%ABS)3) Gas Concentration(%)

CO2 N2O Agent 1) O2

CO2 / / 0.1 0 0.2

N2O / 0.1 / 0.1 0.2

Agent 1) 2) / 0.1 0.1 0.1 1

Xenon <100% 0.1 0 0 0.5

Helium <50% 0.1 0 0 0.5

Ethanol <0.1% 0 0 0 0.5

Acetone <1% 0.1 0.1 0 0.5

Methane <1% 0.1 0.1 0 0.5

Saturated Isopropanol vapour / 0.1 0 0 0.5

Metered dose inhaler propellants, / Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified 0.5

1) Agent represents one of Des, Iso, Enf, Sev, and Hal.

2) Multiple agent interference on CO2, N2O and O2 is typically the same as single agent interference.

3) For CO2, N2O and Agents, maximum interference from each gas at concentrations within specified accuracy ranges for each

gas. The total interference of all gases is never larger than 5%REL.

Alarm limit Range Step

EtCO2 High (low limit + 2) to 228 mmHg

EtCO2 Low 0 to (high limit - 2)mmHg

FiCO2 High 0 to 228 mmHg

FiCO2 Low 0 to (high limit - 2)mmHg

1 mmHg

awRR High Adult, pediatric:

Neonate:

(low limit + 2) to 100 rpm

(low limit + 2) to 150 rpm

awRR Low 0 to (high limit - 2)rpm

1 rpm

EtO2 High (low limit + 0.3) to 100 %

EtO2 Low 18 to (high limit - 0.3)%

FiO2 High (low limit + 0.3) to 100 %

FiO2 Low 18 to (high limit - 0.3)%

0.1%

EtN2O High (low limit + 2) to 100 %

EtN2O Low 0 to (high limit - 2)%

FiN2O High (low limit + 2) to 100 %

1%

A-25

FiN2O Low 0 to (high limit - 2)%

EtHal/Enf/Iso High (low limit + 0.2) to 5.0 %

EtHal/Enf/Iso Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%

FiHal/Enf/Iso High (low limit + 0.2) to 5.0 %

FiHal/Enf/Iso Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%

0.1%

EtSev High (low limit + 0.2) to 8.0 %

EtSev Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%

FiSev High (low limit + 0.2) to 8.0 %

FiSev Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%

0.1%

EtDes High (low limit + 0.2) to 18.0 %

EtDes Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%

FiDes High (low limit + 0.2) to 18.0 %

FiDes Low 0 to (high limit - 0.2)%

0.1%

A.6.16 ICG

Technique Thoracic electrical bioimpedance (TEB);

Z MARC® algorithm( used for C.O. calculation)

Measurement range

SV:

HR:

C.O.:

5 to 250 ml/beat

44 to 185 bpm

1.4 to 15 L/min

Accuracy

SV:

HR:

C.O.:

Not specified.

±2 bpm

Not specified.

Alarm limit Range Step

C.I. High (low limit + 1.0) to 15.0 L/min/m2

C.I. Low 0.0 to (high limit - 1.0)L/min/m2 0.1 L/min/m2

TFC High (low limit + 1) to 150 /kΩ

TFC Low 10 to (high limit - 1)/kΩ 1 /kΩ

A-26

A.6.17 BIS Standards Meet standard of IEC 60601-2-26

Technique Bispectral index

Measured parameters EEG

BIS, BIS L, BIS R：0 to 100

Calculated parameters

SQI, SQI L, SQI R:0 to 100％

EMG, EMG L, EMG R:0 to 100 dB

SR, SR L, SR R:0 to 100%

SEF, SEF L, SEF R:0.5 to 30.0 Hz

TP, TP L, TP R:40 to 100 dB

BC, BC L, BC R:0 to 30

sBIS L, sBIS R:0 to 10.0

sEMG L, sEMG R:0 to 10.0

ASYM:0 to 100%

Impedance range 0 to 999 kΩ

Sweep speed 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s or 50 mm/s

Input impedance >5 MΩ

Noise (RTI) <0.3 μV (0.25 to 50 Hz)

Input signal range ±1 mV

EEG bandwidth 0.25 to 100 Hz

Patient leakage current <10 μA

Alarm limit Range Step

BIS High (low limit + 2) to 100

BIS Low 0 to (high limit – 2) 1

A.6.18 NMT Operating mode Interfaces with TOF-Watch® SX monitor

Parameters Measurement range

TOF-Ratio 1%～160%

TOF-Count 0～4

Single 0%～160%

PTC 0～15

Tskin 20.0℃～41.5℃

A-27

A.6.19 RM Technique Flow sensor

Frequency response ≥30 Hz

Dead space ≤11 ml

Flow

Measurement range Adult/pediatric*:

Infant:

± (2 to 120) L/min

± (0.5 to 30) L/min

Accuracy Adult/pediatric*:

Infant:

1.5 L/min or ±10% of the reading, whichever is greater

0.5 L/min or ±10% of the reading, whichever is greater

Resolution 0.1 L/min

Paw

Measurement range -20 to 120 cmH2O

Accuracy ±3%

Resolution 0.1 cmH2O

MVe/MVi

Measurement range Adult/Pediatric*:

Infant:

2 to 60 L/min

0.5 to 15 L/min

Accuracy ±10%×reading

TVe/TVi

Measurement range Adult/Pediatric*:

Infant:

100 to 1500 ml

20 to 500 ml

Resolution 1 ml

Accuracy Adult/pediatric*:

Infant:

±10% or 15 ml, whichever is greater

±10% or 6 ml, whichever is greater

RR (RM)

Measurement range 4 to 120 rpm

Accuracy 4 to 99 rpm

100 to 120 rpm

±1 rpm

±2 rpm

*Pediatric in this form does not include neonate and infant.

Calculated Parameters

Measurement range Measurement accuracy

I:E 4:1 to 1:8 Not specified.

FEV1.0% 0 to 100% Not specified.

Pmean 0 to 120 cmH2O ±10%×reading

TV 20 to 1500 ml Adult/pediatric:

Infant:

±10% or ±25 ml, whichever

is greater.

±10% or ±6 ml, whichever is

greater.

MV 2 to 60 L ±10%×reading

PEEP 0 to 120 cmH2O Not specified.

PEF 2 to 120 L/min ±2L/min or ±10% of reading, whichever is greater.

PIF 2 to 120 L/min ±2L/min or ±10% of reading, whichever is greater.

PIP 0 to 120 cmH2O 1cmH2O or ±10% of reading, whichever is greater.

A-28

Pplat 0 to 120 cmH2O

Compl 0 to 200 ml/cmH2O

RSBI 0 to 4095 rpm/L

Not specified.

Alarm limit Range Step

RR High Adult, pediatric:

Neonate:

(low limit + 2) to 100 rpm

(low limit + 2) to 150 rpm

RR Low 0 to (high limit -2) rpm

1 rpm

PEEP High (low limit +1) to 120 cmH2O

PEEP Low 0 to (high limit -1) cmH2O 1 cmH2O

PIP High (low limit +1) to 120 cmH2O

PIP Low 0 to (high limit -1) cmH2O 1 cmH2O

MVe High Adult and pediatric: (low limit +1.0) to 60.0 L/min

Infant:(low limit +1.0) to 15.0

MVe Low Adult and pediatric: 2.0 to (high limit -1.0)

Infant:0.5 to (high limit -1.0)

0.5 L/min

SvO2-related Parameters Outputted by VigileoTM Monitor

Name Measurement Range Resolution

SvO2 0 to 99% 1

ScvO2 0 to 99% 1

SQI 1 to 4 1

Alarm Limit Range (%) Step (%)

SvO2 / ScvO2 High (Low limit+1)to 99

SvO2 / ScvO2 Low 0 to(high limit-1) 1

B-1

B EMC

The product is in radio-interference protection class A in accordance with EN55011. The product complies with the

requirement of standard EN60601-1-2 “Electromagnetic Compatibility – Medical Electrical Equipment”.

Note

Using accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified may result in increased

electromagnetic emission or decreased electromagnetic immunity of the patient monitoring equipment.

The device or its components should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment. If adjacent

or stacked use is necessary, the device or its components should be observed to verify normal operation in

the configuration in which it will be used.

The device needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and put into service

according to the EMC information provided below.

Other devices may affect this monitor even though they meet the requirements of CISPR.

When the inputted signal is below the minimum amplitude provided in technical specifications, erroneous

measurements could result.

Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Emissions

The device is suitable for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the device

should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Emission tests Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance

Radio frequency (RF) emissions

CISPR 11 Group 1

The device uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, its

RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference

in nearby electronic equipment.

RF emissions CISPR 11 Class A

Harmonic emissions

IEC61000-3-2 Class A

Voltage Fluctuations/Flicker

Emissions IEC 61000-3-3 Complies

The device is suitable for use in all establishments other than

domestic and those indirectly connected to the public low-voltage

power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic

purposes.

B-2

Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity

The device is suitable for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the device

should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Immunity test IEC60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment -

guidance

Electrostatic discharge

(ESD) IEC 61000-4-2

±6 kV contact

±8 kV air

±6 kV contact

±8 kV air (±6kV air for CF

card)

Floors should be wood, concrete or

ceramic tile. If floors are covered

with synthetic material, the relative

humidity should be at least 30%.

Electrical fast

transient/burst IEC

61000-4-4

±2 kV for power supply lines

±1 kV I/O for input/output

lines

(>3 m)

±2 kV for power supply lines

±1 kV I/O for input/output

lines

(>3 m)

Surge IEC 61000-4-5 ±1 kV differential mode

±2 kV common mode

±1 kV differential mode

±2 kV common mode

Mains power quality should be that

of a typical commercial or hospital

environment.

Voltage dips, short

interruptions and

voltage variations on

power supply input

lines IEC 61000-4-11

<5 % UT (>95 % dip in UT) for

0.5 cycle

40 % UT (60 % dip in UT) for 5

cycles

70 % UT (30 % dip in UT) for

25 cycles

<5 % UT (>95 % dip in UT) for

5 s

<5 % UT (>95 % dip in UT) for

0.5 cycle

40 % UT (60 % dip in UT) for 5

cycles

70 % UT (30 % dip in UT) for

25 cycles

<5 % UT (>95 % dip in UT) for

5 s

Mains power quality should be that

of a typical commercial or hospital

environment. If the user of our

product requires continued

operation during power mains

interruptions, it is recommended

that our product be powered from

an uninterruptible power supply or

a battery.

Power frequency

(50/60 HZ) magnetic

field IEC 61000-4-8

3 A/m 3 A/m

Power frequency magnetic fields

should be at levels characteristic of

a typical location in a typical

commercial or hospital

environment.

Note: UT is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

B-3

Guidance and Declaration - Electromagnetic Immunity

The device is suitable for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the device

should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Immunity test IEC 60601 Test level Compliance level

Conduced RF IEC61000-4-6 3 Vrms

150k to 80M Hz

3 Vrms

(BIS, ICG: 1Vrms)

Radiated RF IEC61000-4-3 3V/m

80M to 2.5G Hz

3V/m

(Resp: 1V/m)

Electromagnetic environment - guidance

Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the device, including cables,

than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter.

Recommended Separation Distance:

Pd 2.1= (BIS, ICG: Pd 5.3= )

Pd 2.1= (Resp: Pd 5.3= ) 80 to 800 MHz

Pd 3.2= 800M to 2.5GHz

where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer and d

is the recommended separation distance in meters (m).

Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, a should be less than the

compliance level in each frequency range b Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following

symbol: .

Note 1: From 80 MHz to 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.

Note 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection

from structures, objects and people.

a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios,

amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the

electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the

measured field strength in the location in which the device is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the

device should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be

necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the device.

b Over the frequency ranges 150kHz to 80MHz, field strengths should be less than 3V/m. For BIS and ICG monitoring, the field

strength should be less than 1V/m

B-4

Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF

Communications Equipment and The device

The device is suitable for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbance are controlled. The

customer or the user of the device can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance

between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the device as recommended below,

according to the maximum output power of the communication equipment.

Separation Distance Meters (m) Corresponding to Frequency of Transmitter

Rated Maximum Output power

of Transmitter Watts (W)

150k to 80MHz

Pd 5.3=

80M to 800MHz

Pd 5.3=

800M to 2.5GHz

Pd ⎥⎦⎤

⎢⎣⎡=37

0.01 0.35 0.35 0.23

0.1 1.11 1.11 0.74

1 3.5 3.5 2.34

10 11.07 11.07 7.38

100 35 35 23.34

For transmitters at a maximum output power not listed above, the separation distance can be estimated using the equation

in the corresponding column, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the

transmitter manufacturer.

Note 1: From 80 MHz to 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.

Note 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection

from structures, objects and people.

C-1

C Default Configurations

This chapter lists some of the most important factory default settings for each department in configuration

management. You cannot change the factory default configuration itself. However, you can make changes to the

settings from the factory default configuration and then save the changed configuration as a user configuration. The last

column of the following tables is for your notes and review.

Note: In this chapter, O.M means the monitor’s operating mode. Column C refers to the settings that can be changed in

configuration management. Column M refers to the settings that can be changed in monitoring mode.

C.1 Parameters Configuration

C.1.1 ECG ECG Setup

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Lead Set * Auto (if auto lead detection is available); 5-lead (if auto lead

detection is not available)

Alm Source * * HR

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

Adu 120

Ped 160 HR/PR High

Neo

* *

200

Adu 50

Ped 75 HR/PR Low

Neo

* *

100

Sweep * * 25 mm/s

Beat Vol * * 2 1

Paced * No

Notch Filter * * Weak

Gain * * X1

Filter * * Monitor Surgery Monitor Diagnostic

ECG Display * * Normal

Pacemaker Rate * 60

C-2

ST Analysis

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

ST Analysis * * Off On

Alarm * * Off

Alm Lev * * Med

ST-X High * * when ST Unit is mV:

when ST Unit is mm:

0.20

2.0

ST-X Low * * when ST Unit is mV:

when ST Unit is mm:

-0.20

-2.0

ISO -80 ms

J 48 ms

ST

* *

J + 60 ms

X represents I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5 or V6.

Arrh. Analysis

O.M Item Name Algorithm

C M Genral OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Arrhythmia Threshold Settings

PVCs High * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

10

N/A

Tachy * *

Adu:

Ped:

Neo:

120

160

N/A

Brady * *

Adu:

Ped:

Neo:

50

75

N/A

Asys. Delay * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

5

N/A

Vtac Rate * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

130

N/A

Vtac PVCs * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

6

N/A

Multif. PVC’s

Window * *

Adu, Ped:

Neo:

15

N/A

Extreme Tachy * *

Adu:

Ped:

Neo:

160

180

N/A

Extreme Brady * *

Adu:

Ped:

Neo:

35

50

N/A

Vbrd Rate

Mindray

* * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

40

N/A

C-3

O.M Item Name Algorithm

C M Genral OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Vbrd PVCs * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

5

N/A

Pause Time * * Ad, Ped:

Neo:

2

N/A

PVCs High * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

10

N/A

Asys. Delay * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

4

N/A

Vtac Rate * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

130

N/A

Vtac PVCs * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

6

N/A

Multif. PVC’s

Window * *

Adu, Ped:

Neo:

15

N/A

Tachy * *

Adu:

Ped:

Neo:

120

160

N/A

Brady

Mortara

* *

Adu:

Ped:

Neo:

50

75

N/A

Arrhythmia Alarm Settings

PVCs/min

Alarm * * Off On

R on T Alarm * * Off On

Nonsus. Vtac Alarm * * Off On

Vent. Rhythm Alarm * * Off On

Bigeminy Alarm * * Off On

Trigeminy Alarm * * Off On

Asystole Alarm * * On

VFib/VTac

Alarm * * On

Vtac Alarm * * On

Vent. Brady Alarm * * On

Extreme Tachy

Alarm * * On

Extreme Brady

Alarm * * On

X Alarm * * Off

Asystole Alm Lev * * High

VFib/VTac

Alm Lev * * High

Vtac Alm Lev * * High

Vent. Brady Alm Lev

Mindray

* * High

C-4

O.M Item Name Algorithm

C M Genral OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Extreme Tachy Alm

Lev * * High

Extreme Brady Alm

Lev * * High

VT>2 Alm Lev * * Low

Pause Alm Lev * * Low

Couplet Alm Lev * * Prompt

PVC Alm Lev * * Prompt

Irr. Rhythm Alm Lev * * Prompt

PNP Alm Lev * * Prompt

PNC Alm Lev * * Prompt

Missed Beats Alm

Lev * * Prompt

X Alm Lev * * Med

X Alm Rec * * Off

PVCs/min

Alarm * * Off On

R on T Alarm * * Off On

Vent. Rhythm Alarm * * Off On

Bigeminy Alarm * * Off On

Trigeminy Alarm * * Off On

Asystole Alarm On

VFib Alarm On

VTac Alarm On

X Alarm * * On

Asystole Alm Lev * * High

VFib Alm Lev * * High

VTac Alm Lev * * High

VT>2 Alm Lev * * Low

Couplet Alm Lev * * Prompt

PVC Alm Lev * * Prompt

Irr. Rhythm Alm Lev * * Prompt

PNP Alm Lev * * Prompt

PNC Alm Lev * * Prompt

Missed Beats Alm

Lev * * Prompt

X Alm Lev * * Med

X Alm Rec

Mortara

* * Off

X represents a certain arrhythmia event. Refer to the Specifications chapter for details. The X in “X Alm Lev” refers to all

arrhythmia events except for those specially marked ones.

C-5

C.1.2 RESP O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

Sweep * * 6.25 mm/s

Lead * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

Auto

II

Gain * * X2

RR High * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

30

100

RR Low * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

8

30

Apnea Delay * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

20

15

Detection Mode * * Auto

RR Source * Auto

C.1.3 PR O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

Adu 120

Ped 160 HR/PR High

Neo

* *

200

Adu 50

Ped 75 HR/PR Low

Neo

* *

100

PR Source * * SpO2

Beat Vol * * 2 1

C-6

C.1.4 SpO2 O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

SpO2 High * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

100

95

SpO2 Low * * 90

Desat Limit * * 80

Sweep * * 25 mm/s

NIBP Simul * Off

Sensivity（Mindray） * * Med

Sensivity（Masimo） * * Normal

Averaging（Masimo） * * 8 s

Sat-Seconds（Nellcor） * * 0 s

C.1.5 ΔSpO2

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * Off

Alm Lev * * Mediate

ΔSpO2 High * * 10 %

C.1.6 Temp O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

T1/T2 High（ºC） * * 38.0

T1/T2 Low（ºC） * * 35.0

TD High（ºC） * * 2.0

C-7

C.1.7 NIBP O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

Interval * * 15 min 5 min 15 min 30 min 15 min

NIBP End Tone * Off

Adu 80

Ped 60 Cuff Press.

（mmHg） Neo

* *

40

Adu 160

Ped 140 Initial Pressure

（mmHg） Neo

* *

90

Alarm Limits

Adu 160

Ped 120 NIBP-S High

（mmHg） Neo

* *

90

Adu 90

Ped 70 NIBP-S Low

（mmHg） Neo

* *

40

Adu 110

Ped 90 NIBP-M High

（mmHg） Neo

* *

70

Adu 60

Ped 50 NIBP-M Low

（mmHg） Neo

* *

25

Adu 90

Ped 70 NIBP-D High

（mmHg） Neo

* *

60

Adu 50

Ped 40 NIBP-D Low

（mmHg） Neo

* *

20

C.1.8 IBP O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

P1 Measure * * All

P2 Measure * * All

P3 Measure * * Mean

P4 Measure * * Mean

Sensitivity * * Med

C-8

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Sweep * * 25 mm/s

Filter * 12.5 Hz

Art, Ao, UAP, BAP, FAP, LV, P1-P2 Arterial Pressure Alarm Limits

Adu 160

Ped 120 IBP-S High

（mmHg） Neo

* *

90

Adu 90

Ped 70 IBP-S Low

（mmHg） Neo

* *

55

Adu 110

Ped 90 IBP-M High

（mmHg） Neo

* *

70

Adu 70

Ped 50 IBP-M Low

（mmHg） Neo

* *

35

Adu 90

Ped 70 IBP-D High

（mmHg） Neo

* *

60

Adu 50

Ped 40 IBP-D Low

（mmHg） Neo

* *

20

PA Alarm Limits

Adu 35

Ped 60 PA-S High

（mmHg） Neo

* *

60

Adu 10

Ped 24 PA-S Low（mmHg）

Neo

* *

24

Adu 20

Ped 26 PA-M High

（mmHg） Neo

* *

26

Adu 0

Ped 12 PA-M Low

（mmHg） Neo

* *

12

Adu 16

Ped 4 PA-D High

（mmHg） Neo

* *

4

Adu 0

Ped -4 PA-D Low

（mmHg） Neo

* *

-4

CVP, LAP, RAP, ICP, UVP, P3-P4 Venous Pressure Alarm Limits

Adu 10 IBP-M High

（mmHg） Ped

* *

4

C-9

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Neo 4

Adu 0

Ped 0 IBP-M Low

（mmHg） Neo

* *

0

Art, Ao, BAP, FAP, LV, P1-P2 Arterial Pressure Scale

Scale（mmHg） * * 0-160

PA Scale

Scale（mmHg） * * 0-30

CVP, LAP, RAP, ICP, UVP Scale

Scale（mmHg） * * 0-20

UAP, P3-P4 Venous Pressure Scale

Scale（mmHg） * * 0-80

C.1.9 C.O. O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

TB High（ºC） * * 39.0

TB Low（ºC） * * 36.0

Comp. Const * * 0.542

Auto TI * * Auto

Manual TI（ºC） * * 2.0

Measuring mode * * Manual

C.1.10 CCO/SvO2 Setup (Vigilance II) O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

Primary Parameter * * C.O./CCO

Secondary Parameters * * SVR, EDV, SV

CCO High * * 14

CCO Low * * 2

CCI High * * 7

CCI Low * * 1

EDV High * * 300

EDV Low * * 80

EDVI High * * 150

EDVI Low * * 60

SVR High * * 1500 DS/cm5

C-10

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

SVR Low * * 500 DS/cm5

SVRI High * * 3000 DS·m2/ cm5

SVRI Low * * 1000 DS·m2/ cm5

RVEF High * * 50

RVEF Low * * 0

SV High * * 120

SV Low * * 20

SVI High * * 60

SVI Low * * 10

SvO2 High * * 99

SvO2 Low * * 10

ScvO2 High * * 99

ScvO2 Low * * 10

C.1.11 CCO/SvO2 Setup (Vigileo) O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

Primary Parameter * * CCO

Secondary Parameters * * SV, SVR, SVV

CCO High * * 14

CCO Low * * 2

CCI High * * 7

CCI Low * * 1

SV High * * 120

SV Low * * 20

SVI High * * 60

SVI Low * * 10

SVV High * * 30

SVV Low * * 0

SVR High * * 1500 DS/cm5

SVR Low * * 500 DS/cm5

SVRI High * * 3000 DS·m2/ cm5

SVRI Low * * 1000 DS·m2/ cm5

SvO2 High * * 99

SvO2 Low * * 10

ScvO2 High * * 99

ScvO2 Low * * 10

C-11

C.1.12 PiCCO O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Inj. Volume * Adu: 15ml

Ped: 10ml

Manual Input pCVP * Unselected

pCVP Value * Empty

Auto C.O. * On

PiCCO Parameters

Main Parameter * * CCI、CCO

Secondary Parameter * * GEDI、ELWI、SVRI

Spider * * CCI，ScvO2，pArt-M，SVRI，SVV

pArt/pCVP Setup

Scale（mmHg） * * pArt：0～160mmHg

pCVP：0～20mmHg

Sweep * * 25 mm/s

C.1.13 CO2 O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

Operating Mode * * Measure

Sweep * * 6.25 mm/s

Scale（mmHg） * * 50

Apnea Delay * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

20

15

RR Source * Auto

Sidestream CO2 Setup

* * Adu: 120 ml/min

,Ped: 100 ml/min Flow Rate

Neo: 70 ml/min

BTPS Compen * * Off

N2O Compen * * 0

O2 Compen * * 21 100 21

Des Compen * * 0

Microstream CO2 Setup

BTPS Compen * Off

Max Hold * * 20 s

Auto Standby (min) * * 0

Mainstream CO2 Setup

Max Hold * * 10 s

O2 Compen * * Off

C-12

Balance Gas * * Room Air

AG Compen * * 0

Alarm Limits

EtCO2 High（mmHg） * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

50

45

EtCO2 Low（mmHg） * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

25

30

FiCO2 High（mmHg） * * Adu, Ped, Neo: 4

RR High * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

30

100

RR Low * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

8

30

C.1.14 tcGas

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm Sound * * Off

Change Secondary Parameters * * SpO2, PR, Power

C.1.15 AG O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

Sweep * * 6.25 mm/s

O2 Compen * * Off On Off

Operating Mode * * Measure

Flow Rate * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

120 ml/min

70 ml/min

Auto Standby * * Off

Apnea Time * * 20 s

RR Source * Auto

CO2 Setup

Wave Type * * Draw

Scale * * when unit is mmHg:

when unit is % or KPa:

50

7.0

EtCO2 High（mmHg） * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

50

45

EtCO2 Low（mmHg） * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

25

30

FiCO2 High（mmHg） * * 4

C-13

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

RR High * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

30

100

RR Low * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

8

30

Gas Setup

Agent * * AA

N2O Scale * * 50

O2 Scale * * when unit is mmHg:

when unit is % or KPa:

400

50

AA Scale * * 9.0

Hal/Enf/Iso Scale * * 2.5

Des Scale * * 9.0

Sev Scale * * 4.0

EtO2 High * * 88

EtO2 Low * * 18

FiO2 High * * Adu, Ped:

Neo:

100

90

FiO2 Low * * 18

EtN2O High * * 55

EtN2O Low * * 0

FiN2O High * * 53

FiN2O Low * * 0

EtHal/Enf/Iso High * * 3.0

EtHal/Enf/Iso Low * * 0.0

FiHal/Enf/Iso High * * 2.0

FiHal/Enf/Iso Low * * 0.0

EtSev High * * 6.0

EtSev Low * * 0.0

FiSev High * * 5.0

FiSev Low * * 0.0

EtDes High * * 8.0

EtDes Low * * 0.0

FiDes High * * 6.0

FiDes Low * * 0.0

C-14

C.1.16 ICG O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

Averaging * * 30

Update Rate * * 10

Sweep * * 12.5 mm/s

Secondary Parameters * * C.O., SVR, TFC

C.I. High * * 5.0

C.I. Low * * 1.5

TFC High * * 60

TFC Low * * 10

C.1.17 BIS O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

Smoothing Rate * * 15 s

Adu: 15s

Ped: 15s

Neo: N/A

15 s

Display * * EEG

Adu: EEG

Ped: EEG

Neo: N/A

EEG

Filters * * On

Adu: On

Ped: On

Neo: N/A

On

Scale * * 100μV

Adu: 100μV

Ped: 100μV

Neo: N/A

100μV

Sweep * * 25mm/s

Adu: 25mm/s

Ped: 25mm/s

Neo: N/A

25mm/s

Trend Length * * 60 min

Adu: 60 min

Ped: 60 min

Neo: N/A

60 min

Secondary

Parameters * * SR, SEF

Adu, Ped: SR, SEF

Neo: N/A SR,SEF

C-15

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Display * * BIS Trend

Adu:BIS Trend

Ped:BIS Trend

Neo:N/A

BIS Trend

EEG Waveforms * * All

Adu: All

Ped: All

Neo: N/A

All

Parameter 1 * * BIS L

Adu: BIS L

Ped: BIS L

Neo: N/A

BIS L

Parameter 2 * * EMG

Adu: EMG

Ped: EMG

Neo: N/A

EMG

BIS High * * 70

BIS Low * * 70

C.1.18 NMT

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm Sound * * Off

C.1.19 RM O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alarm * * On

Alm Lev * * Med

Apnea Delay * * Adu, Ped: 20 s

Neo: 15 s

Sensor Type * Disposable

TV/MV * * TV

Flow/Vol * * Flow

Sweep * * 6.25 mm/s

RR Source * Auto

Paw Scale * * Adu, Ped: 40

Neo: N/A

Flow Scale * * Adu, Ped: 60

Neo: N/A

Vol Scale * * Adu, Ped: 1200

Neo: N/A

C-16

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Display Loop * PV Loop

Reference Loop * On

RR High * ** Adu, Ped: 30

Neo: 100

RR Low * * Adu, Ped: 8

Neo: 30

PEEP High * * 10

PEEP Low * * 0

PIP High * * 40

PIP Low * * 1

MVe High * * 30.0

MVe Low * * 2.0

C.2 Routine Configuration

C.2.1 Alarm O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Alm Volume * * 2 1 2

Reminder Vol * * Low

Recording Length * * 16 s

Apnea Delay * * Adu, Ped: 20 s

Neo: 15 s

Alarm Delay * * 6 s

ST Alarm Delay * * 30 s

C.2.2 Screens O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User

Defaults

Choose Screen * * Normal Screen

Display the ST segments on ECG screen * * Unselected

1 ECG1

2 ECG2

3 SpO2+PR

4 Any IBP

5 Any IBP

Select Wave Sequence

for Normal Screen

6

* *

CO2

C-17

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU

User

Defaults

7 Paw

8 Flow/Vol

9 ICG

10 BIS

11 Resp

Parameter 1 ECG

Parameter 2 SpO2+PR

Parameter 3 Resp

Select Parameters for

Big Numerics Screen

Parameter 4

* *

NIBP

Item Name Select QuickKeys (BeneView T5)

C * O.M

M

General

OR

ICU

NIBP Measure→Stop All→Zero IBP→Review→Standby→Screens→Patient Setup→Manual Event→

Realtime Print→Volume Setup

NICU NIBP Measure→Stop All→oxyCRG→Review→Standby→Screens→Patient Setup→Manual Event→

Realtime Print→Volume Setup

CCU NIBP Measure→Stop All→Zero IBP→Review→Standby→Screens→Patient Setup→Manual Event→

Realtime Print→Volume Setup

User Defaults

Item Name Select QuickKeys (BeneView T8)

C * O.M

M

General NIBP Measure Stop All Zero IBP→ → →Screens→Patient Setup Manual Event Realtime Print Print → → →

Setup Mi→ nitrends Volume Setup Load Configuration Privacy Mode→ → →

OR NIBP Measure Stop All Zero IBP→ → →Screens→Patient Setup Manual Event Realtime Print Print → → →

Setup Minitrends Volume Setup Load Configuration PAWP→ → → →

ICU NIBP Measure Stop All Zero IBP→ → →Screens→Patient Setup Manual Event Realtime Print Print → → →

Setup Minitrends Volume Setup Load Configuration Privacy Mode→ → → →

NICU NIBP Measure Stop All oxyCRG→ → →Screens→Patient Setup Manual Event Realtime → →

Print Minitrends Zero IBP Volume Setup Load Configuration Privacy Mode→ → → → →

CCU NIBP Measure Stop All Zero IBP→ → →Screens→Patient Setup Manual Event Realtime Print Print → → →

Setup Minitrends Volume Setup Load Configuration Privacy Mode→ → → →

User Defaults

C-18

C.2.3 Waveform O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

ECG Green

NIBP White

SpO2 Cyan

SpO2b Purple

ΔSpO2 Yellow

PR Cyan

TEMP White

Art/Ao/UAP/FAP

/BAP/LV/P1~P4

(arterial pressure)

Red

PA Yellow

CVP/ICP/P1~P4

(venous pressure) Blue

LAP Purple

RAP Orange

UVP Cyan

CO2 /tcpCO2 Yellow

RESP Yellow

AA Yellow

N2O Blue

O2 /tcpO2 Green

Hal Red

Enf Orange

Iso Purple

Des Cyan

Sev Yellow

C.O. White

Paw

Flow/Vol Blue

EEG L/BIS L Trend Yellow

EEG R/BIS R Trend Blue

ICG Purple

SvO2 Cyan

ScvO2 Purple

CCO Yellow

Parameter/

Wave Colour

NMT

*

White

X represents a waveform label, such as ECG, RESP, CO2 and so forth. The ECG waveform cannot be set off.

C-19

C.2.4 Review O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Interval * * 30 min 5min 30 min Tabular Trends

Trend Group * * Standard

Graphic Trends Trend Group * * Standard

Minitrend Length * 2 h

Full Disclosure Save Waves * * Save ECG1 by default.

C.2.5 Event O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Waveform 1 * II

Waveform 2 * I Pleth I

Waveform 3 * Pleth Resp Pleth

C.2.6 Record O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Length * 8 s

Interval * Off

Paper Speed * 25 mm/s

Alm Rec X * Off

X represents a parameter label.

C.2.7 Print O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Paper Size * A4

Amplitude * 10 mm/mV

Sweep * 25 mm/s

Auto Interval * Off ECG Reports

12-Lead Format * 12X1

Set as End Case Report * Unselected

Back * Auto

Spacing * Auto

Report Layout * Parameter Oriented

Currently Displayed Trended

Parameters * Selected

Standard Parameter Group * Unselected

Tabular Trends

Reports

Custom * Unselected

Set as End Case Report * Unselected Graphic Trends

Reports Back * Auto

C-20

Zoom * Auto

Set as End Case Report * Unselected

Sweep * Auto Realtime Report

Select Wave * Current

C.2.8 Others O.M

Item Name C M

General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Brightness * 5

Key Volume * 2

C.3 User Maintenance Items

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

Changing Bed No. * Protected

Atmospheric Pressure * 760 mmHg

Height Unit * cm

Weight Unit * kg

ST Unit * mV

Press. Unit * mmHg

CVP Unit * cmH2O

CO2 Unit * mmHg

O2 Unit * %

Temp Unit * ℃

Network Type * LAN

Latching Alarms * * No

Alarm Pause Time * * 2 min

Minimum Alarm Volume * * 2 1 2

Alarm Sound * ISO

Reminder Tone * Off

Reminder Interval * 1 min

ECGLeadOff Lev. * Low

SpO2SensorOff Lev. * Low

Alarm Tone Interval * High Level Alarm:

Med/Low Level Alarm:

10 s

20 s

Lethal Arrh. OFF * Disable

Extended Arrh. * Enable

Silence Other Bed * On

Wave Line * Mediate

Sweep Mode * * Refresh

Auxiliary Output * Analog Out.

Primary Button * Left

C-21

O.M Item Name

C M General OR ICU NICU CCU User Defaults

ECG Standard * AHA

Notch Freq. * 50 Hz

Data Transfer Method * Off

Transferred Data Length * 4 h

Apply Module Settings * On

SpO2 Tone * Mode 1

Signal Type * Continuous

Contact Type * Normally Closed

Signal Type ** Continuous

Contact Type * Normally Closed

Alm Lev * * High, Med, Low Nurse Call

Alarm Cat. * * Phys., Tech.

C-22

FOR YOUR NOTES

D-1

D Alarm Messages

This chapter lists only the most important physiological and technical alarm messages. Some messages appearing on

your monitor may not be included.

In this chapter:

The “I” field indicates how alarm indications are cleared: “A” means all alarm indications are cleared after the hardkey

is pressed, “B” indicates alarm lamp flashing and alarm tones are cleared and the alarm messages change to prompt

messages after the hardkey is pressed, and “C” indicates alarm lamp flashing and alarm tones are cleared and √

appears before the alarm message after the hardkey is pressed.

The “L” field indicates the alarm level: H means high, M means medium and L means low. “*” means the alarm level is

user-adjustable.

XX represents a measurement or parameter label, such as ECG, NIBP, HR, ST-I, PVCs, RR, SpO2, PR, etc.

In the “Cause and Solution” column, corresponding solutions are given instructing you to troubleshoot problems. If the

problem persists, contact your service personnel.

D.1 Physiological Alarm Messages

Measurement Alarm messages L Cause and solution

XX Too High M*

XX XX Too Low M*

XX value has risen above the high alarm limit or fallen below the low

alarm limit. Check the patient’s condition and check if the patient

category and alarm limit settings are correct.

ECG Weak Signal H The ECG signal is so weak that the monitor can’t perform ECG

analysis. Check the patient’s condition and the ECG connections.

Asystole H

VFib/VTac H

Vtac H

Vent. Brady H

Extreme Tachy H

Extreme Brady H

R on T M*

VT>2 M*

Couplet M*

PVCs/min M*

Bigeminy M*

Trigeminy M*

ECG

Tachy M*

Arrhythmia has occurred to the patient. Check the patient’s condition

and the ECG connections.

D-2

Measurement Alarm messages L Cause and solution

Brady M*

Missed Beats M*

Irr. Rhythm M*

Vent. Rhythm M*

Multif. PVC M*

Nonsus. Vtac M*

Pause M*

PNP M*

PNC M* The pacer appears abnormal. Check the pacer.

Resp Apnea H

The respiration signal was so weak that the monitor cannot perform

respiration analysis. Check the patient’s condition and the Resp

connections. Resp

Resp Artifact H The patient’s heartbeat has interfered with his respiration. Check the

patient’s condition and the Resp connections.

SpO2 Desat

SpO2b Desat

H

The SpO2 or SpO2b value has fallen below the desaturation alarm

limit. Check the patient’s condition and check if the alarm limit

settings are correct. SpO2

No Pulse H

The pulse signal was so weak that the monitor cannot perform pulse

analysis. Check the patient’s condition, SpO2 sensor and

measurement site.

CO2 CO2 Apnea H

AG AG Apnea H

RM RM Apnea H

The patient stops breathing, or the respiration signal was so weak

that the monitor cannot perform respiration analysis. Check the

patient’s condition and the RM connections.

AG FiO2 Too Low H Check the patient’s condition, the ventilated O2 content and the AG

connections.

+tcpCO2 Alarm M*

+tcpO2 Alarm M*

+SpO2 Alarm M* tcGas

+PR Alarm M*

Parameter value has risen above the high alarm limit or fallen below

the low alarm limit. Check the patient’s condition and check if the

patient category and alarm limit settings are correct.

NMT TOF Alarm M*

TOF value has risen above the high alarm limit or fallen below the low

alarm limit. Check the patient’s condition and check if the patient

category and alarm limit settings are correct.

D.2 Technical Alarm Messages

Measurement Alarm message L I Cause and solution

XX SelfTest Err H C

XX Init Err H A

XX Init Err N(N is between 1 to

8) H A

XX Comm Err H A

XX

XX Comm Stop H C

An error occurred to the XX module, or there is a problem

with the communications between the module and the

monitor. Re-plug the module and restart the monitor, or

plug the module into another monitor.

D-3

Measurement Alarm message L I Cause and solution

XX Limit Err L C XX parameter limit is accidentally changed. Contact your

service personnel.

XX Overrange L C The measured XX value is not within the specified range

for XX measurement. Contact your service personnel.

MPM 12V Err H C MPM

MPM 5V Err H C

An error occurred to the power supply part of the MPM

module. Contact your service personnel.

ECG Lead Off L* B

ECG YY Lead Off L* B

Note: YY represents the leadwires, V (V1, V2,

V3, V4, V5, V6,), LL, LA, RA, as per AHA

standard, or C (C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6), F, L and

R as per IEC standard.

The electrode has become detached from the patient or

the lead wire has become disconnected from the adapter

cable. Check the connections of the electrodes and

leadwires.

ECG Noisy L A

The ECG signal is noisy. Check for any possible sources of

signal noise around the cable and electrode, and check the

patient for great motion.

ECG Artifact L A

Artifacts are detected on the ECG analysis lead and as a

result heart rate cannot be calculated and Asystole, Vfib

and Vtac cannot be analyzed. Check the connections of the

electrodes and leadwires and check for any possible source

of interference around the cable and electrode. Check the

patient’s condition and check the patient for great motion.

ECG High Freq. Noise L A

High frequency signals are detected on the ECG analysis

lead. Check for any possible source of interference around

the cable and electrode.

ECG Low Freq. Noise L A

Low frequency signals are detected on the ECG analysis

lead. Check for any possible source of interference around

the cable and electrode.

ECG Amplitude Too Small L C

The ECG amplitude didn’t reach the detected threshold.

Check for any possible source of interference around the

cable and electrode.

ECG

ECG Config. Err L C

ECG configuration is wrongly downloaded. Check the

downloaded configuration and re-download the correct

configuration.

Resp Resp Disturbed L A The respiration circuit is disturbed. Restart the monitor.

Temp Cal. Err H C A calibration failed. Restart the monitor.

T1 Sensor Off L A Temp

T2 Sensor Off L A

The Temp sensor has become detached from the patient or

the module. Check the sensor connections.

SpO2 Sensor Off

SpO2b Sensor Off L* B

SpO2 Sensor Fault

SpO2b Sensor Fault L C

SpO2 No Sensor

SpO2b No Sensor L B

SpO2

SpO2 Unknown Sensor L C

The SpO2 sensor has become detached from the patient or

the module, or there is a fault with the SpO2 sensor, or an

unspecified SpO2 sensor has been used. Check the sensor

application site and the sensor type, and make sure if the

sensor is damaged. Reconnect the sensor or use a new

sensor.

D-4

Measurement Alarm message L I Cause and solution

SpO2b Unknown Sensor

SpO2 Sensor Incompatible

SpO2b Sensor Incompatible L C

SpO2 Too Much Light

SpO2b Too Much Light L C

There is too much light on the SpO2 sensor. Move the

sensor to a place with lower level of ambient light or cover

the sensor to minimize the ambient light.

SpO2 Low Signal

SpO2 b Low Signal

SpO2 Weak Signal

L C

The SpO2 signal is too low or too weak. Check the patient’s

condition and change the sensor application site. If the

error persists, replace the sensor.

SpO2 No Pulse

SpO2b No Pulse L C

The SpO2 sensor failed to obtain pulse signal. Check the

patient’s condition and change the sensor application site.

If the error persists, replace the sensor.

SpO2 Interference

SpO2b Interference

L C

The SpO2 signal has been interfered. Check for any possible

sources of signal noise around the sensor and check the

patient for great motion.

SpO2 Comm abnormal

SpO2b Comm abnormal

H A

An error occurred to the SpO2 measurement module, or

there is a problem with the communications between the

module and the monitor. Re-plug the module and restart

the monitor, or plug the module into another monitor.

SpO2 Board Fault

SpO2b Board Fault L C

There is a problem with the SpO2 measurement board. Do

not use the module and contact your service personnel.

SpO2b has been closed H C Different types of SpO2 measurement modules are applied.

Use the same type of SpO2 measurement modules.

NIBP Loose Cuff L A

NIBP Air Leak L A

The NIBP cuff is not properly connected, or there is a leak

in the airway.

NIBP Pneumatic Leak L A Check the NIBP cuff and pump for leakages.

NIBP Cuff Type Wrong L A The cuff type applied mismatches the patient category.

Verify the patient category and replace the cuff.

NIBP Air Pressure Err L A

An error occurred to the air pressure. Verify that the

monitor application site meets the environmental

requirements and check if there is any source that affects

the air pressure.

NIBP Weak Signal L A

The patient’s pulse is weak or the cuff is loose. Check the

patient’s condition and change the cuff application site. If

the error persists, replace the cuff.

NIBP Signal Saturated L A The NIBP signal is saturated due to excess motion or other

sources.

NIBP Overrange L A The measured NIBP value is not within the specified range.

NIBP Excessive Motion L A Check the patient’s condition and reduce the patient

motion.

NIBP Cuff Overpress. L A The NIBP airway may be occluded. Check the airway and

measure again.

NIBP

NIBP Equip Err H A An error occurred during NIBP measurement and therefore

D-5

Measurement Alarm message L I Cause and solution

NIBP Timeout L A

NIBP Measure Failed L A

the monitor cannot perform analysis correctly. Check the

patient’s condition and NIBP connections, or replace the

cuff.

NIBP Illegally Reset L A An illegal reset occurred during NIBP measurement. Check

if the airway is occluded.

YY Sensor Off Check the sensor connection and reconnect the sensor.

YY No Pulse L A IBP

YY represents an IBP label. The catheter may be occluded. Please flush the catheter.

C.O. TB Sensor Off L A Check the sensor connection and reconnect the sensor.

Invalid/Faulty PiCCO catheter L C Erroneous or invalid catheter is used. Please use the proper

catheter.

TB Sensor Off L A Check the sensor connections.

PiCCO Comm Abnormal H A

Abnormal communication occurred between the PiCCO

module and the system. Remove/connect the module

again or restart the machine. If the problem remains,

contact the Customer Services Dept. for help.

PiCCO Comm Err H A

Erroneous communication occurred between the PiCCO

module and the system. Remove/connect the module

again or restart the machine. If the problem remains,

contact the Customer Services Dept. for help.

PiCCO Init Err H A

An error occurred to the module during the power-on

self-test. Remove/connect the module again or restart the

machine. If the problem remains, contact the Customer

Services Dept. for help.

Inject Temp. Sensor Err L C

An error occurred to the injectate temperature sensor or

the sensor cable. Check/replace the sensor or the sensor

cable.

PiCCO

PiCCO Comm Stop H A

Remove/connect the module again or restart the machine.

If the problem remains, contact the Customer Services

Dept. for help.

Optical Module Err L C Check the module connection. Change a module if

necessary.

ScvO2 Signal Too High L C

ScvO2 Signal Too Low L C

Check the sensor and reposition the catheter, then

recalibrate the sensor.

ScvO2 Too Much Light L C Check and reposition the catheter, then recalibrate the

sensor. Avoid the backlight which is excessively strong.

Optical Module Disconnected L A Connect the optical module.

ScvO2 Comm Abnormal H A

ScvO2

ScvO2 Comm Err H A

Remove/connect the module again or restart the machine.

If the problem remains, contact the Customer Services

Dept. for help.

D-6

Measurement Alarm message L I Cause and solution

ScvO2 Init Err H A Remove/connect the module again. If the problem

remains, contact the Customer Services Dept. for help.

Unsupported CeVOX version H A The module version is not compatible with the system.

Please contact the Customer Services Dept. for help.

ScvO2 Comm Stop H A

Remove/connect the module again or restart the machine.

If the problem remains, contact the Customer Services

Dept. for help.

CO2 Sensor High Temp L C Check, stop using or replace the sensor.

CO2 Sensor Low Temp L C Check, stop using or replace the sensor.

CO2 Temp Overrange L C

The operating temperature of the CO2 module goes

beyond the specified range. After it restores within the

specified range, the module will restart automatically.

CO2 Airway High Press. L C

CO2 Airway Low Press. L C

An error occurred in the airway pressure. Check the patient

connection and patient circuit, and then restart the

monitor.

CO2 High Barometric Press. L C

CO2 Low Barometric Press. L C

Check the CO2 connections, make sure that the monitor

application site meets the requirements, and check for

special sources that affect the ambient pressure. Restart

the monitor.

CO2 FilterLine Occluded

L

C

The airway or watertrap was occluded. Check the airway

and remove the occlusion.

CO2 No Watertrap L B Check the watertrap connections.

CO2 Check Adapter L A There is a problem with the airway adapter. Check, clean or

replace the adapter.

CO2 FilterLine Err L C Check if there is a leak in the CO2 sample line or the CO2

sample line has been occluded.

CO2 Zero Failed L A Check the CO2 connections. After the sensor’s temperature

becomes stabilized, perform a zero calibration again.

CO2 System Err L A Re-plug the module or restart the monitor.

CO2 Check Cal. L C Perform a calibration.

CO2 Check Airway L C An error occurred to the airway.

CO2 No Filterline L A Make sure that the filterline is connected.

CO2 No Sensor L A Make sure that the sensor is connected.

CO2 Main Board Err H C

CO2 Checking Sensor L C

CO2 Replace Scrubber&Pump L C

CO2 15V Overrange H C

CO2

CO2 Hardware Err H C

There is a problem with the CO2 module. Re-plug the

module or restart the monitor.

TCM Low Battery M C Connect the TCM monitor with AC mains. tcGas

TCM Battery Depleted H C

TCM monitor has less than 5 minutes running time on

battery. Connect the TCM monitor with AC mains

immediately.

D-7

Measurement Alarm message L I Cause and solution

TCM Temperature Too High H C The temperature in TCM CPU is too high. Please shut down

TCM monitor immediately.

TCM Alert L C A TCM technical alarm is presented. Please check the TCM

monitor to identify the cause of alarm.

AG No Watertrap L B Check the connections of the watertrap and re-connect it.

AG Change Watertrap L A Wait until the change is completed.

AG Watertrap Type Wrong L A Make sure that a correct watertrap has been used.

O2 Accuracy Unspecified L A

N2O Accuracy Unspecified L A

CO2 Accuracy Unspecified L A

Enf Accuracy Unspecified L A

Iso Accuracy Unspecified L A

Sev Accuracy Unspecified L A

Hal Accuracy Unspecified L A

Des Accuracy Unspecified L A

awRR Accuracy Unspecified L A

The measured value has exceeded the specified accuracy

range.

AG Hardware Err H A Remove the AG module. Stop using the module and

contact your service personnel.

AG Airway Occluded L A Check the airway and remove the occlusion.

AG

AG Zero Failed L A Re-plug the module or restart the monitor, and then

perform a zero calibration again.

RM No Sensor L A

RM Sensor Reversed L C Check and reconnect the sensor.

RM Zero Failed L C Perform a zero calibration again. RM

RM Power Err L A There is a problem with the power supply. Re-plug the

module or restart the monitor.

BIS High Imped. L A

BIS Sensor Off L A Check and reconnect the BIS sensor.

BIS DSC Err L C An error occurred to the DSC during receiving signals.

Check the DSC.

BIS DSC Malf L C The DSC automatically shuts down as a result of

malfunction. Check the DSC.

BIS No Cable L A Check the BIS cables.

BISx Disconnected L A Check the BISx module.

BIS No Sensor L A Check the BIS sensor.

BIS Wrong Sensor Type L A Check or replace the sensor.

BIS Sensor Too Many Uses L A Replace the sensor.

SQI<50% L A

SQI<15% L A

The SQI value is too low. Check the patient’s condition and

the sensor connections.

BIS Sensor Expired L A Replace the sensor.

BIS Sensor Fault L C Re-attach or Replace BIS Sensor

BIS

Disconnect/Reconnect BIS L C Re-plug the BIS Module

ICG Low Quality Signal L A ICG

ICG Left Neck Sensor Off L A

Check and reconnect the sensor.

D-8

Measurement Alarm message L I Cause and solution

ICG Right Neck Sensor Off L A

ICG L. Thorax Sensor Off L A

ICG R. Thorax Sensor Off L A

ICG Sensor Off L A

TWSX Low Battery M C Replace the battery.

TWSX Battery Depleted H C Replace the battery.

TWSX No Acceleration Sensor L B Connect the acceleration sensor.

TWSX No Temp Sensor L B Connect the temperature sensor.

TWSX No Stimulation Cable L B Connect the stimulation cable.

TWSX Bad Electrode

Connection L B Reattach the electrode.

NMT

TWSX Technical Alarm L C An NMT technical alarm is presented. Please check the

TOF-Watch® SX monitor to identify the cause of alarm.

12V Too High H C

12V Too Low H C

5V Too High H C

5V Too Low H C

3.3V Too High H C

3.3V Too Low H C

There is a problem with the system power supply. Restart

the monitor.

Battery Too Low H C Connect the monitor to an AC power source and allow the

batteries to charge.

Different Battery Voltages M C

The two batteries have different charge capacity, or the

batteries unspecified have been used, or there is a problem

with the batteries. Make sure that correct batteries are

used and the batteries are not damaged, or replace the

batteries.

Battery Power Overload H C The power consumption of the equipment is too high.

Power the monitor using an AC power source.

Power

RT Clock Not Exist H C Contact your service personnel.

Recorder Init Err N L A

N is within 1 to 8. Restart the monitor.

Recorder SelfTest Err L A

Recorder Comm Err L A

Recorder S. Comm Err L A

Recorder Unavailable L A

Stop the recording and restart the monitor.

Recorder Vlt High L C

Recorder Vlt Low L C

An error occurred to the system power supply. Restart the

monitor.

Recorder Head Hot L C

The recorder has been working for too long time. Stop the

recording and resume the recording till the recorder’s

printhead cools down.

Recorder

Rec Paper Wrong Pos. L A Re-load the recorder paper.

System Watchdog Err H C System

System Software Err H C

An error occurred to the system. Restart the monitor.

D-9

Measurement Alarm message L I Cause and solution

System CMOS Full H C

System CMOS Err H C

System FPGA Err H C

System Err N H C

N is within 2 to 12.

D-10

FOR YOUR NOTES

E-1

E Electrical Safety Inspection

The following electrical safety tests are recommended as part of a comprehensive preventive maintenance program.

They are a proven means of detecting abnormalities that, if undetected, could prove dangerous to either the patient or

the operator. Additional tests may be required according to local regulations.

All tests can be performed using commercially available safety analyzer test equipment. These procedures assume the

use of a 601PROXL International Safety Analyzer or equivalent safety analyzer. Other popular testers complying with IEC

60601-1 used in Europe, such as Fluke, Metron, or Gerb, may require modifications to the procedure. Please follow the

instructions of the analyzer manufacturer.

The electrical safety inspection should be periodically performed every two years .The safety analyzer also proves to be

an excellent troubleshooting tool to detect abnormalities of line voltage and grounding, as well as total current loads.

E.1 Power Cord Plug

Test Item Acceptance Criteria

The power plug

pins No broken or bent pin. No discolored pins.

The plug body No physical damage to the plug body.

The strain relief No physical damage to the strain relief. No plug warmth for device in use.

The power

plug

The power plug No loose connections.

No physical damage to the cord. No deterioration to the cord.

For devices with detachable power cords, inspect the connection at the device. The power cord

For devices with non-detachable power cords, inspect the strain relief at the

device.

E-2

E.2 Device Enclosure and Accessories

E.2.1 Visual Inspection Test Item Acceptance Criteria

No physical damage to the enclosure and accessories.

No physical damage to meters, switches, connectors, etc.

No residue of fluid spillage (e.g., water, coffee, chemicals, etc.). The enclosure and accessories

No loose or missing parts (e.g., knobs, dials, terminals, etc.).

E.2.2 Contextual Inspection Test Item Acceptance Criteria

No unusual noises (e.g., a rattle inside the case).

No unusual smells (e.g., burning or smoky smells, particularly from ventilation

holes).

The enclosure and accessories

No taped notes that may suggest device deficiencies or operator concerns.

E.3 Device Labelling

Check the labels provided by the manufacturer or the healthcare facilities are present and legible.

Main unit label

Integrated warning labels

E.4 Protective Earth Resistance

1. Plug the probes of the analyzer into the device’s protective earth terminal and protective earth terminal of the AC

power cord.

2. Test the earth resistance with a current of 25 A.

3. Verify the resistance is less than limits.

LIMITS For all countries, R = 0.2 Ω Maximum

E-3

E.5 Earth Leakage Test

Run an Earth Leakage test on the device being tested before performing any other leakage tests.

The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Earth Leakage test:

normal polarity( Normal Condition),

reverse polarity( Normal Condition),

normal polarity with open neutral(Single Fault Condition),

reverse polarity with open neutral(Single Fault Condition)

LIMITS

For UL60601-1,

300 μA in Normal Condition

1000 μA in Single Fault Condition

For IEC60601-1,

500 μA in Normal Condition

1000 μA in Single Fault Condition

E.6 Patient Leakage Current

Patient leakage currents are measured between a selected applied part and mains earth. All measurements have a true

RMS only

The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Patient Leakage Current test.

normal polarity( Normal Condition);

reverse polarity( Normal Condition),

normal polarity with open neutral(Single Fault Condition);

reverse polarity with open neutral(Single Fault Condition).

normal polarity with open earth(Single Fault Condition);

reverse polarity with open earth(Single Fault Condition).

LIMITS

For CF applied parts

10μA in Normal Condition

50μA in Single Fault Condition

For BF applied parts

100μA in Normal Condition

500μA in Single Fault Condition

E-4

E.7 Mains on Applied Part Leakage

The Mains on Applied Part test applies a test voltage, which is 110% of the mains voltage, through a limiting resistance,

to selected applied part terminals. Current measurements are then taken between the selected applied part and earth.

Measurements are taken with the test voltage (110% of mains) to applied parts in the normal and reverse polarity

conditions

The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Mains on Applied Part test.

Normal Polarity;

Reversed Polarity

LIMITS

For CF applied parts: 50 μA

For BF applied parts: 5000 μA

E.8 Patient Auxiliary Current

Patient Auxiliary currents are measured between any selected Applied Part connector and the remaining Applied Part

connector s. All measurements may have a true RMS only response.

The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Patient Auxiliary Current test.

normal polarity( Normal Condition);

reverse polarity( Normal Condition),

normal polarity with open neutral(Single Fault Condition);

reverse polarity with open neutral(Single Fault Condition).

normal polarity with open earth(Single Fault Condition);

reverse polarity with open earth(Single Fault Condition).

LIMITS

For CF applied parts,

10μA in Normal Condition

50μA in Single Fault Condition

For BF applied parts,

100μA in Normal Condition

500μA in Single Fault Condition

NOTE

Make sure the safety analyzer is authorized comply with requirement of IEC61010-1.

Follow the instructions of the analyzer manufacturer.

F-1

F Symbols and Abbreviations

F.1 Symbols

μA microampere

μV microvolt

μs Microsecond

A ampere

Ah ampere hour

bpm beat per minute

bps bit per second

ºC centigrade

cc cubic centimeter

cm centimeter

dB decibel

DS dyne second

ºF fahrenheit

g gram

GHz gigahertz

GTT gutta

h hour

Hz hertz

in inch

kg kilogram

kPa kilopascal

L litre

lb pound

m meter

mAh milliampere hour

Mb mega byte

mcg microgram

mEq milli-equivalents

mg milligram

min minute

ml milliliter

mm millimeter

mmHg millimeters of mercury

cmH2O

ms

centimeters of water

millisecond

mV millivolt

mW milliwatt

F-2

MΩ megaohm

nm nanometer

rpm breath per minute

s second

V volt

VA volt ampere

Ω ohm

W watt

– minus, negative

% percent

/ per; divide; or

+ plus

= equal to

< less than

> greater than

≤ less than or equal to

≥ greater than or equal to

± plus or minus

× multiply

F.2 Abbreviations

AaDO2 alveolar-arterial oxygen gradient

AAMI Association for Advancement of Medical Instrumentation

AC alternating current

ACI acceleration index

Adu adult

AG anaesthesia gas

AHA American Heart Association

air cyl. Air cylinder pressure

Air Flow air flow

ANSI American National Standard Institute

Ao aortic pressure

Art arterial

ATMP Barometric pressure

aVF left foot augmented lead

aVL left arm augmented lead

aVR right arm augmented lead

awRR airway respiratory rate

BAP brachial arterial pressure

Base Flow base flow

BC burst count

BIS bispectral index

F-3

BP blood pressure

BPSK binary phase shift keying

BSA body surface area

BT blood temperature

BTPS body temperature and pressure, saturated

C.I. cardiac index

CCI Continuous Cardiac Index

Cdyn dynamic compliance

CCO Continuous Cardiac Output

CaO2 arterial oxygen content

CCO continuous cardiac output

CCU cardiac (coronary) care unit

CE Conformité Européenne

CFI cardiac function index

CIS Clinical Information System

CISPR International Special Committee on Radio Interference

CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor

CMS central monitoring system

C.O. cardiac output

CO2 carbon dioxide

COHb carboxyhemoglobin

Compl compliance

CP cardiopulmonary

CPI cardiac power index

CPO Cardiac Power Output

Cstat static compliance

CVP central venous pressure

DC direct current

Des desflurane

Dia diastolic

DPI dot per inch

dPmx left ventricular contractility

DVI digital video interface

DO2 oxygen delivery

DO2I oxygen delivery index

ECG electrocardiograph

EDV end-diastolic volume

EE Energy expenditure

EEC European Economic Community

EEG electroencephalogram

EMC electromagnetic compatibility

EMG electromyography

EMI electromagnetic interference

Enf enflurane

ESU electrosurgical unit

Et end-tidal

F-4

EtAA End-tidal anesthetic agent

EtAA 2nd 2nd Exp. Agent

EtDes

EtEnf

EtHal

EtIso

EtSev

end-tidal anesthetic agent

EtCO2 end-tidal carbon dioxide

EtN2O end-tidal nitrous oxide

EtO ethylene oxide

EtO2 end-tidal oxygen

ELWI extravascular lung water index

EVLW extravascular lung water

Exp% inspiration termination level

Exp. Flow expiratory flow

Exp. MAC Expired minimum alveolar concentration

f breath rate

FAP femoral arterial pressure

fapnea breath rate for apnea ventilation

FCC Federal Communication Commission

fCMV CMV frequency

FDA Food and Drug Administration

FEV1.0% first second forced expiratory volume ratio

FG Fresh gas flow

Fi fraction of inspired

FiAA Inspired anesthetic agent

FiAA 2nd 2nd Insp. Agent

FiDes

FiEnf

FiHal

FiIso

FiSev

inspired anesthetic agent

FiCO2 fraction of inspired carbon dioxide

FiN2O fraction of inspired nitrous oxide

FiO2 fraction of inspired oxygen

Flow flow

fmand mandatory breathing frequency

FPGA field programmable gate array

FRC Fractional residual capacity

FreqMIN minimum breath frequency

fsigh sigh rate

fSIMV frequency of SIMV

fspn spontaneous breathing frequency

ftot total breath rate

F-Trigger inspiratory trigger level (flow trigger)

FV flow-volume

F-5

GEDV global end diastolic volume

GEDI global end diastolic volume index

GEF global ejection fraction

Hal halothane

Hct haematocrit

Hb hemoglobin

Hb-CO carbon mono-oxide hemoglobin

HbO2 oxyhemoglobin

HR heart rate

I:E inspiratory-expiratory ratio

IBP invasive brood pressure

IBW ideal body weight

ICG impedance cardiography

ICP intracranial pressure

ICT/B intracranial catheter tip pressure transducer

ICU intensive care unit

ID identification

I:E inspiratory time: Expiratory time ratio

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

Ins inspired minimum

Insp.Flow inspiration flow

Insp. MAC Inspired minimum alveolar concentration

△int.PEEP intermittent PEEP

IP internet protocol

Iso isoflurane

IT injectate temperature

ITBI Intrathoracic Blood Volume Index

ITBV Intrathoracic Blood Volume

LA left arm

LAP left atrial pressure

Lat lateral

LCD liquid crystal display

LCW left cardiac work

LCWI left cardiac work index

Leak Comp leak compensation

LED light emitting diode

LL left leg

LVD low voltage directive

LVDS low voltage differential signal

LVET left ventricular ejection time

LVSW left ventricular stroke work

LVSWI left ventricular stroke work index

MAC minimum alveolar concentration

Art mean mean arterial pressure

MDD Medical Device Directive

F-6

MetHb methemoglobin

%MinVol Percentage of minute volume to be delivered

MRI magnetic resonance imaging

MV minute volume

MVe expiratory minute volume

MVi inspiratory minute volume

MVLEAK leakage minute volume

MVspn spontaneous breathed minute volume

N/A not applied

N2 nitrogen

N2O nitrous oxide

N2O cyl. N2O cylinder pressure

N2O Flow N2O flow

Neo neonate

NIBP noninvasive blood pressure

NIF negative inspiratory force

NMT neuromuscular transmission

O2 oxygen

ΔO2 Difference between inspiratory and expiratory O2

O2% oxygen concentration

O2CI oxygen consumption index

O2 cyl. Oxygen cylinder pressure

O2 cyl.2nd Secondary oxygen cylinder pressure

O2 Flow O2 flow

O2R oxygen extraction ratio

OR operating room

oxyCRG oxygen cardio-respirogram

PA pulmonary artery

Pair Air supply pressure

Papnea apnea pressure

pArt-D diastolic artery pressure

pArt-M mean artery pressure

pArt-S systolic artery pressure

Paux Mean Mean auxiliary pressure

Paux Min Minimum auxiliary pressure

Paux Peak Peak auxiliary pressure

Paw airway pressure

PAWP pulmonary artery wedge pressure

PD photodetector

Peak Flow peak flow

Ped pediatric

PEEP positive end expiratory pressure

PEEP/CPAP PEEP/CPAP

PEEPe Extrinsic positive end-expiratory pressure

PEEPi intrinsic positive end-expiratory pressure

PEEPi time Intrinsic PEEP age (elapsed time since last maneuver)

F-7

PEEPtot total PEEP

PEF peak expiratory flow

PEP pre-ejection period

Phigh upper pressure level

PIF peak inspiratory flow

Pinsp pressure control level of inspiration

PIP peak inspiratory pressure

Pleth plethysmogram

Plimit pressure limit level

Plow lower pressure level

Pmax maximum airway rressure

Pmean mean pressure

PN2O N2O supply pressure

PO2 Oxygen supply pressure

Ppeak peak pressure

Pplat plateau pressure

PPV Pulse Pressure Variation

PR pulse rate

Psupp pressure support level

PTC post tetanic count

PTP Pressure time product

P-Trigger inspiratory trigger level (pressure trigger)

PVC premature ventricular contraction

PVR pulmonary vascular resistance

PVRI pulmonary vascular resistance index

PVPI pulmonary vascular permeability index

PPV pulse pressure variation

pArt artery pressure

pCVP central venous pressure

P0.1 100 ms occlusion pressure

P0.1 time P0.1 age (elapsed time since last maneuver)

R right

RA right arm

RAM random access memory

Ramp Ramp

RAP right atrial pressure

RAW airway resistance

RCexp Expiratory time constant

RCinsp Inspiratory time constant

Rdyn dynamic lung resistance

Re expiratory resistance

Rec record, recording

Resp respiration

RHb reduced hemoglobin

Ri inspiratory resistance

Rise Time% rise time

F-8

RL right leg

RM respiratory mechanics

RQ Respiratory quotient

RR respiration rate

RSBI rapid shallow breathing index

Rstat static lung resistance

SaO2 arterial oxygen saturation

SEF spectral edge frequency

Sev sevoflurane

SFM self-maintenance

SI stroke index

SMR satellite module rack

SpO2 arterial oxygen saturation from pulse oximetry

SQI signal quality index

SR suppression ratio

STR systolic time ratio

SV stroke volume

SVI Stroke Volume Index

SVR systemic vascular resistance

SVRI systemic vascular resistance index

SVV stroke volume variation

SvO2 mixed venous oxygen saturation

ScvO2 central venous oxygen saturation

Sync synchronization

Sys systolic pressure

Tapnea apnea interval

Taxil axillary temperature

TB Blood Temperature

TD temperature difference

Temp temperature

Texp Expiratory time

TFC thoracic fluid content

TFI thoracic fluid index

TFT thin-film technology

Thigh time for the upper pressure level

Ti max maximum inspiration time

Tinsp time of inspiration

Tip Inspiratory pause time

TIP:TI percentage of inspiratory plateau time in inspiratory time

Tlow time for the lower pressure level

TOF train of four

Toral oral temperature

TP total power

Tplat plateau time

TRC Tube resistance compensation

Trect rectal temperature

F-9

Trigger trigger sensitivity

Trig Window trigger window

Trise rise time

Tslope time for the pressure to rise to target pressure

Tube ID tube ID

UAP umbilical arterial pressure

UPS uninterruptible power supply

USB universal serial bus

UVP umbilical venous pressure

VAC volts alternating current

VCO2 CO2 production

VEPT volume of electrically participating tissue

VI velocity index

VO2 oxygen consumption

VO2/kg Oxygen consumption per body weight

VO2/m2 Oxygen consumption per body surface area

VO2I oxygen consumption index

VTe/TVe expiratory tidal volume

VTi/TVi inspiratory tidal volume

VT tidal volume

VTapnea apnea tidal volume

VTe spn spontaneous expiratory tidal volume

VTsigh sigh tidal volume

WLAN wireless local area network

WOB work of breathing

WOBimp imposed work of breathing

F-10

FOR YOUR NOTE

P/N: 6800-20-50657 (24.0)